B229

SERVICE MANUAL
002733MIU
 B229
SERVICE MANUAL
 B229
SERVICE MANUAL

002733MIU
It is the reader's responsibility when discussing the information contained
within this document to maintain a level of confidentiality that is in the best
interest of Ricoh Corporation and its member companies.

NO PART OF THIS DOCUMENT MAY BE REPRODUCED IN ANY

FASHION AND DISTRIBUTED WITHOUT THE PRIOR
PERMISSION OF RICOH CORPORATION.

All product names, domain names or product illustrations, including

desktop images, used in this document are trademarks, registered
trademarks or the property of their respective companies.
They are used throughout this book in an informational or editorial fashion
only and for the benefit of such companies. No such use, or the use of
any trade name, or web site is intended to convey endorsement or other
affiliation with Ricoh products.

© 2006 RICOH Corporation. All rights reserved.

 WARNING
The Service Manual contains information
regarding service techniques, procedures,
processes and spare parts of office equipment
distributed by Ricoh Corporation. Users of this
manual should be either service trained or
certified by successfully completing a Ricoh
Technical Training Program.

Untrained and uncertified users utilizing

information contained in this service manual to
repair or modify Ricoh equipment risk personal
injury, damage to property or loss of warranty
protection.

Ricoh Corporation
 LEGEND
PRODUCT CODE COMPANY
GESTETNER LANIER RICOH SAVIN
B229 GS 106 LD215c Aficio 615C SGC 1506

DOCUMENTATION HISTORY
REV. NO. DATE COMMENTS
* 07/2006 Original Printing
 B229
TABLE OF CONTENTS
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ....................................................1-1
1.1 BEFOREHAND...........................................................................................1-1
1.2 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS ............................................................1-2
1.2.1 ENVIRONMENT ................................................................................1-2
1.2.2 MACHINE LEVEL..............................................................................1-3
1.2.3 MINIMUM SPACE REQUIREMENTS ...............................................1-3
1.2.4 POWER REQUIREMENTS ...............................................................1-4
1.3 COPIER INSTALLATION ...........................................................................1-5
1.3.1 POWER SOCKETS FOR PERIPHERALS ........................................1-5
1.3.2 ACCESSORY CHECK ......................................................................1-6
1.3.3 BEFORE INSTALLING A COPIER....................................................1-6
1.3.4 INITIAL SETTING............................................................................1-11
1.3.5 CHECKING THE NOZZLE PATTERN.............................................1-11
1.3.6 HEAD GAP ADJUSTMENT.............................................................1-12
1.3.7 SUB SCAN: SEND ADJUSTMENT .................................................1-13
1.3.8 MOVING THE MACHINE ................................................................1-15
1.3.9 TRANSPORTING THE MACHINE ..................................................1-16
1.4 PLATEN COVER INSTALLATION ...........................................................1-18
1.4.1 ACCESSORY CHECK ....................................................................1-18
1.4.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE .......................................................1-18
1.5 ARDF INSTALLATION .............................................................................1-19
1.5.1 ACCESSORY CHECK ....................................................................1-19
1.5.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE .......................................................1-19
1.6 ADF INSTALLATION ................................................................................1-23
1.6.1 ACCESSORY CHECK ....................................................................1-23
1.6.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE .......................................................1-23
1.7 ONE-TRAY PAPER TRAY UNIT ..............................................................1-27
1.7.1 ACCESSORY CHECK ....................................................................1-27
1.7.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE .......................................................1-27
1.7.3 OPTIONAL PAPER TRAY GRIP HANDLE – OPTIONAL PAPER
TRAY UNIT...............................................................................................1-32
1.8 TWO-TRAY PAPER TRAY UNIT INSTALLATION ...................................1-34
1.8.1 ACCESSORY CHECK ....................................................................1-34
1.8.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE .......................................................1-34
1.8.3 OPTIONAL PAPER TRAY GRIP HANDLE – OPTIONAL PAPER
TRAY UNIT...............................................................................................1-39
1.9 DUPLEX UNIT INSTALLATION ...............................................................1-40
1.9.1 ACCESSORY CHECK ....................................................................1-40
1.9.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE .......................................................1-40

SM i B229
 1.10 HEATER KIT INSTALLATION ............................................................1-51
1.10.1 COMPONENT CHECK ..............................................................1-51
1.10.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE..................................................1-52
1.10.3 OPTIONAL TRAY HEATER.......................................................1-57
1.11 FUNCTION UPGRADE OPTION INSTALLATION..............................1-62
1.11.1 COMPONENT CHECK ..............................................................1-62
1.11.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE..................................................1-62
1.12 COPY DATA SECURITY UNIT INSTALLATION ................................1-66
1.12.1 COMPONENT CHECK ..............................................................1-66
1.12.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE..................................................1-67
1.13 OPTIONAL COUNTER INTERFACE UNIT ........................................1-68
1.13.1 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE..................................................1-68
1.14 CONTROLLER OPTIONS ..................................................................1-71
1.14.1 OVERVIEW ...............................................................................1-71
1.14.2 POSTSCRIPT3 INSTALLATION................................................1-72
1.14.3 PICTBRIDGE INSTALLTION .....................................................1-72
1.14.4 JAVA VM OPTION INSTALLATION ..........................................1-73
1.14.5 WIRELESS LAN (IEEE 802.11B) INSTALLATION ....................1-74
1.14.6 IEEE 1284 INSTALLATION .......................................................1-74
1.14.7 IEEE 1394 INSTALLATION .......................................................1-75
1.14.8 BLUETOOTH INSTALLATION...................................................1-75
1.14.9 USB HOST INSTALLATION ......................................................1-76
1.14.10 DATA OVERWRITE SECURITY UNIT TYPE D (B735) .........1-76
1.14.11 REMOTE COMMUNICATION GATE INSTALLATION...........1-80

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
2. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE ....................................................2-1
2.1 PM TABLES ...............................................................................................2-1
2.2 PM COUNTER ...........................................................................................2-3
2.2.1 HOW TO RESET THE PM COUNTER..............................................2-3
2.2.2 PM COUNTER RESET LIST.............................................................2-4
2.3 CLEANING PROCEDURES .......................................................................2-5
2.3.1 MAINTENANCE UNIT .......................................................................2-5
2.3.2 PRINT HEADS ..................................................................................2-6
2.3.3 TRANSPORT BELT ..........................................................................2-8

REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT

3. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT.........................................3-1
3.1 GENERAL CAUTIONS ...............................................................................3-1
3.1.1 SCANNER UNIT................................................................................3-1
3.1.2 PAPER FEED....................................................................................3-1
3.1.3 IMPORTANT .....................................................................................3-1
3.2 SPECIAL TOOLS AND LUBRICANTS .......................................................3-2

B229 ii SM
 3.3 EXTERIOR COVERS AND OPERATION PANEL......................................3-3
3.3.1 REAR COVER...................................................................................3-3
3.3.2 REAR ENGINE UNIT COVER...........................................................3-3
3.3.3 TOP LEFT FRONT, LEFT FRONT AND INTERFACE COVER ........3-4
3.3.4 RIGHT DOOR ...................................................................................3-4
3.3.5 BY-PASS TRAY ................................................................................3-5
3.3.6 FRONT COVER ................................................................................3-5
3.4 OPERATION PANEL..................................................................................3-6
3.5 SCANNER UNIT.........................................................................................3-7
3.5.1 EXPOSURE GLASS..........................................................................3-7
3.5.2 LENS BLOCK ....................................................................................3-7
3.5.3 EXPOSURE LAMP............................................................................3-8
3.5.4 ORIGINAL WIDTH/LENGTH SENSOR ...........................................3-10
3.5.5 SCANNER MOTOR.........................................................................3-10
3.5.6 LAMP STABILIZER .........................................................................3-11
3.6 ENGINE....................................................................................................3-12
3.6.1 ENGINE UNIT .................................................................................3-12
3.6.2 CONIJ (CONNECT INK JET MODULE) ..........................................3-15
3.6.3 MAINTENANCE UNIT .....................................................................3-15
3.6.4 INK COLLECTION TANK ................................................................3-16
3.6.5 SUB SCAN ENCODER AND ENCODER SENSOR........................3-17
3.6.6 MAIN SCAN DRIVE MOTOR ..........................................................3-19
3.6.7 SUB SCAN DRIVE MOTOR ............................................................3-19
3.6.8 FLUSHING GATE UNIT ..................................................................3-20
3.6.9 TRANSPORT BELT UNIT ...............................................................3-20
3.6.10 CHARGE ROLLER ....................................................................3-22
3.7 PAPER FEED...........................................................................................3-23
3.7.1 PAPER FEED MOTOR ...................................................................3-23
3.7.2 REGISTRATION CLUTCH ..............................................................3-24
3.7.3 REGISTRATION ROLLER ..............................................................3-24
3.7.4 PAPER FEED, PAPER TRANSPORT AND DUPLEX CLUTCH .....3-26
3.7.5 PAPER FEED ROLLER AND FRICTION PAD................................3-26
3.7.6 PAPER END SENSOR....................................................................3-27
3.7.7 BY-PASS PAPER SIZE SWITCH....................................................3-28
3.7.8 BY-PASS FEED ROLLER AND PAPER END SENDOR.................3-29
3.7.9 REGISTRATION SENSOR .............................................................3-30
3.7.10 ONE-SHEET BY-PASS PAPER END SENSOR........................3-31
3.7.11 PAPER SIZE SWITCH...............................................................3-31
3.8 PAPER EXIT ............................................................................................3-32
3.8.1 PAPER EXIT TRAY.........................................................................3-32
3.8.2 PAPER EXIT UNIT ..........................................................................3-32
3.8.3 PAPER EXIT SENSOR ...................................................................3-33
3.8.4 JUNCTION GATE SENSOR ...........................................................3-33
3.8.5 PAPER EXIT MOTOR .....................................................................3-34
3.9 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS.................................................................3-35
3.9.1 CONTROLLER BOX .......................................................................3-35

SM iii B229
 3.9.2 CONTROLLER BOARD ..................................................................3-35
3.9.3 NVRAM AND DIMM RAM ...............................................................3-36
3.9.4 IO BOARD.......................................................................................3-37
3.9.5 PSU BOARD ...................................................................................3-37
3.9.6 IPU BOARD.....................................................................................3-38
3.9.7 BCU BOARD ...................................................................................3-39
3.10 IMAGE ADJUSTMENT .......................................................................3-40
3.10.1 PREPARING FOR TEST PRINTING .........................................3-40
3.10.2 ADJUST PAPER FEED .............................................................3-40
3.10.3 NOZZLE BLOCKAGE CHECK ..................................................3-41
3.10.4 ADJUST PRINT HEAD POSITION ............................................3-42
3.10.5 REGISTRATION ........................................................................3-44
3.11 COPY ADJUSTMENTS: PRINTING/SCANNING ...............................3-45
3.11.1 PRINTING..................................................................................3-45
3.11.2 SCANNING ................................................................................3-48
3.11.3 ADF IMAGE ADJUSTMENT ......................................................3-49

TROUBLESHOOTING
4. TROUBLESHOOTING..................................................................4-1
4.1 SERVICE CALL..........................................................................................4-1
4.1.1 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS .........................................................4-1
4.1.2 SC TABLE .........................................................................................4-2
4.2 SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE .....................................................................4-31
4.2.1 OVERVIEW .....................................................................................4-31
4.2.2 DETAILED SELF-DIAGNOSTICS ...................................................4-31
4.3 GENERAL TROUBLESHOOTING ...........................................................4-32
4.3.1 TROUBLESHOOTING FOR EXPECTED PROBLEMS IN THE
FIELD .......................................................................................................4-32
4.3.2 POOR QUALITY IMAGE .................................................................4-33
4.3.3 POOR PRINTER PERFORMANCE (MISCELLANEOUS)...............4-36
4.3.4 UNUSUAL NOISES.........................................................................4-38
4.3.5 MAINTAINING THE PRINTER HEAD CONDITION ........................4-39
4.4 IMAGE TEST MODE ................................................................................4-41
4.4.1 OVERVIEW .....................................................................................4-41
4.4.2 IPU TEST ........................................................................................4-41
4.5 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DEFECTS..................................................4-42
4.5.1 SENSORS.......................................................................................4-42
4.5.2 SWITCHES .....................................................................................4-44
4.5.3 BLOWN FUSE CONDITIONS .........................................................4-46

B229 iv SM
SERVICE TABLES
5. SERVICE TABLES .......................................................................5-1
5.1 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE.....................................................................5-1
5.1.1 HOW TO ENTER THE SP MODE .....................................................5-1
5.2 SP MODE TABLES ....................................................................................5-3
5.2.1 SP1-XXX (FEED) ..............................................................................5-3
5.2.2 SP2-XXX (DRUM) .............................................................................5-8
5.2.3 SP3-XXX (PROCESS) ....................................................................5-11
5.2.4 SP4-XXX (SCANNER) ....................................................................5-14
5.2.5 SP5-XXX (MODE) ...........................................................................5-30
5.2.6 SP6-XXX (PERIPHERALS).............................................................5-72
5.2.7 SP7-XXX (DATA LOG)....................................................................5-73
5.2.8 SP8-XXX (HISTORY) ......................................................................5-90
5.3 PRINTER SERVICE MODE ...................................................................5-132
5.4 SCANNER SP MODE ............................................................................5-138
5.5 USING SP MODES ................................................................................5-139
5.5.1 ADJUSTING REGISTRATION AND MAGNIFICATION ................5-139
5.5.2 DISPLAY APS DATA (SP 4301 1).................................................5-139
5.5.3 MEMORY CLEAR .........................................................................5-139
5.5.4 INPUT CHECK (SP 5803) .............................................................5-141
5.5.5 OUTPUT CHECK (SP 5804) .........................................................5-146
5.5.6 SERIAL NUMBER INPUT (SP 5811) ............................................5-148
5.5.7 NVRAM DATA UPLOAD/DOWNLOAD (SP 5824/5825) ...............5-148
5.5.8 FIRMWARE UPDATE PROCEDURE............................................5-150
5.5.9 SD CARD APPLI MOVE................................................................5-151
5.5.10 SMC PRINT (SP 5990) ............................................................5-153
5.5.11 ADF APS SENSOR OUTPUT DISPLAY (SP 6901).................5-153

DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS
6. DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS........................................6-1
6.1 OVERVIEW ................................................................................................6-1
6.1.1 COMPONENT LAYOUT....................................................................6-1
6.1.2 PAPER PATH....................................................................................6-2
6.1.3 DRIVE LAYOUT ................................................................................6-3
6.2 BOARD STRUCTURE................................................................................6-4
6.2.1 BLOCK DIAGRAM.............................................................................6-4
6.3 COPY PROCESS OVERVIEW...................................................................6-7
6.3.1 EXPOSURE ......................................................................................6-7
6.3.2 IMAGE CREATION ...........................................................................6-7
6.3.3 NO FUSING ......................................................................................6-7
6.4 SCANNING.................................................................................................6-8
6.4.1 OVERVIEW .......................................................................................6-8
6.4.2 LAMP STABILIZER FUSE.................................................................6-8
6.4.3 SCANNER DRIVE .............................................................................6-9

SM v B229
 6.4.4 ORIGINAL SIZE DETECTION IN PLATEN MODE..........................6-10
6.5 IMAGE PROCESSING .............................................................................6-12
6.5.1 SBU (SENSOR BOARD UNIT) .......................................................6-12
6.5.2 IPU (IMAGE PROCESSING UNIT) .................................................6-13
6.6 CARRIAGE UNIT .....................................................................................6-14
6.6.1 OVERVIEW .....................................................................................6-14
6.6.2 PRINT HEAD...................................................................................6-15
6.6.3 PRINT HEAD TANK ........................................................................6-17
6.6.4 INK EJECTION DEVICE .................................................................6-18
6.6.5 INK NEAR END ...............................................................................6-19
6.6.6 INK OUT..........................................................................................6-20
6.6.7 PAPER REGISTRATION AND SIZE DETECTION SENSOR .........6-21
6.7 INK SUPPLY UNIT ...................................................................................6-22
6.7.1 OVERVIEW .....................................................................................6-22
6.7.2 PRINT CARTRIDGES .....................................................................6-23
6.7.3 PRINT CARTRIDGE SET SENSOR................................................6-24
6.7.4 INK SUPPLY PUMP ........................................................................6-25
6.8 MAINTENANCE UNIT ..............................................................................6-26
6.8.1 OVERVIEW .....................................................................................6-26
6.8.2 MAINTENANCE UNIT .....................................................................6-26
6.8.3 INK COLLECTION TANK ................................................................6-30
6.8.4 INK COLLECTION TANK FULL DETECTION.................................6-31
6.8.5 FLUSHING UNIT .............................................................................6-32
6.9 CARRIAGE DRIVE...................................................................................6-34
6.9.1 OVERVIEW .....................................................................................6-34
6.9.2 CARRIAGE DRIVE..........................................................................6-34
6.9.3 ENVELOPE SELECTOR.................................................................6-35
6.10 PAPER FEED, TRANSPORT, OUTPUT ............................................6-36
6.10.1 OVERVIEW ...............................................................................6-36
6.10.2 LEADING EDGE AND PAGE WIDTH DETECTION ..................6-37
6.10.3 TRAILING EDGE DETECTION..................................................6-38
6.10.4 PAPER TRANSPORT DRIVE....................................................6-38
6.10.5 PAPER PATH ............................................................................6-39
6.10.6 TRANSPORT BELT...................................................................6-40
6.10.7 CHARGE LEAK DETECTION....................................................6-41
6.11 PAPER FEED .....................................................................................6-42
6.11.1 OVERVIEW ...............................................................................6-42
6.11.2 PAPER FEED DRIVE MECHANISM .........................................6-43
6.11.3 PAPER FEED AND SEPARATION MECHANISM.....................6-44
6.11.4 PAPER LIFT MECHANISM .......................................................6-45
6.11.5 PAPER END DETECTION ........................................................6-45
6.11.6 PAPER SIZE DETECTION ........................................................6-46
6.11.7 SIDE FENCES ...........................................................................6-48
6.11.8 PAPER REGISTRATION...........................................................6-48
6.12 PAPER EXIT.......................................................................................6-50
6.12.1 OVERVIEW ...............................................................................6-50

B229 vi SM
 6.12.2 PAPER EXIT PATH ...................................................................6-52
6.12.3 PAPER STOP FUNCTION ........................................................6-53
6.12.4 ENERGY SAVER MODES OF BASIC MACHINES ...................6-55

SPECIFICATIONS
7. SPECIFICATIONS ........................................................................7-1
7.1 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS....................................................................7-1
7.2 SUPPORTED PAPER SIZES.....................................................................7-5
7.2.1 ORIGINAL SIZE DETECTION...........................................................7-5
7.2.2 PAPER FEED AND EXIT ..................................................................7-6
7.3 MACHINE CONFIGURATION ..................................................................7-10
7.4 OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT .........................................................................7-12
7.4.1 ARDF...............................................................................................7-12
7.4.2 ADF .................................................................................................7-12
7.4.3 ONE-TRAY PAPER TRAY UNIT .....................................................7-13
7.4.4 TWO-TRAY PAPER TRAY UNIT ....................................................7-14
7.4.5 DUPLEX UNIT.................................................................................7-14

B267 FAX OPTION

SEE SECTION B267 FOR DETAILED TABLE OF CONTENTS

B806 DUPLEX UNIT

SEE SECTION B806 FOR DETAILED TABLE OF CONTENTS

B813 DOCUMENT FEEDER

SEE SECTION B813 FOR DETAILED TABLE OF CONTENTS

B814 DOCUMENT FEEDER

SEE SECTION B814 FOR DETAILED TABLE OF CONTENTS

B384 PAPER TRAY UNIT

SEE SECTION B385 FOR DETAILED TABLE OF CONTENTS

B385 PAPER TRAY UNIT

SEE SECTION B385 FOR DETAILED TABLE OF CONTENTS

SM vii B229
Read This First
Important Safety Notices
Prevention of Physical Injury
1. Make sure that the power cord is unplugged before you disassemble or assemble
parts of the copier and peripherals.
2. The wall outlet should be near the machine and easily accessible.
3. If any adjustment or operation check has to be made with exterior covers off or open
while the main switch is turned on, keep hands away from electrified or mechanically
driven components.
4. If a job has started before the copier completes the warm-up or initializing period, keep
hands away from the mechanical and electrical components.
Health Safety Conditions
Ink is non-toxic, but if you get it in your eyes by accident, it may cause temporary eye
discomfort. Try to remove with eye drops or flush with water as first aid. If unsuccessful, get
medical attention.
Safety and Ecological Notes for Disposal
1. Dispose of ink cartridge and ink tank in accordance with local regulations. (These are
non-toxic supplies.)
2. Dispose of replaced parts in accordance with local regulations.
Observance of Electrical Safety Standards
1. The copier and its peripherals must be installed and maintained by a customer service
representative who has completed the training course on those models.
2. The Controller board on this machine contains a lithium battery. The danger of
explosion exists if a battery of this type is incorrectly replaced. Replace only with the
same or an equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer. Discard batteries in
accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and local regulations.

ƒ Keep the machine away from flammable liquids, gases, and aerosols. A fire or
an explosion might occur.
Symbols, Abbreviations, and Trademarks
Symbols and Abbreviations
This manual uses the symbols and abbreviations shown below.

Symbol Meaning
Refer to section number
Clip ring
Screw
Connector
Clamp
SEF Short Edge Feed
LEF Long Edge Feed

Trademarks
Microsoft®, Windows®, and MS-DOS® are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation
in the United States and /or other countries.
PostScript® is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems, Incorporated.
PCL® is a registered trademark of Hewlett-Packard Company.
Ethernet® is a registered trademark of Xerox Corporation.
PowerPC® is a registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation.
Other product names used herein are for identification purposes only and may be
trademarks of their respective companies. We disclaim any and all rights involved with
those marks.
INSTALLATION

POSITION 1
TAB
B813 DOCUMENT FEEDER
B814 AUTO REVERSE DOCUMENT FEEDER
B267 FAX OPTION

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE

POSITION 2
B384 PAPER TRAY UNIT

TAB
B385 PAPER TRAY UNIT

REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT

POSITION 3
TAB
TROUBLESHOOTING

POSITION 4
TAB
SERVICE TABLES

POSITION 5
B806 DUPLEX UNIT

TAB
DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS
POSITION 6
TAB

SPECIFICATIONS
POSITION 7
TAB
POSITION 8
TAB
INSTALLATION
 Beforehand

Installation
1. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

1.1 BEFOREHAND

Before installing options, please do the following:

1. If there is a fax unit in the machine, print out all messages stored in the memory, the
lists of user-programmed items, and the system parameter list.
2. If there are printer jobs in the machine, print out all jobs in the printer buffer.
3. Turn off the main switch and disconnect the power cord, the telephone line, and the
network cable.

SM 1-1 B229
Installation Requirements

1.2 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

Before installing options, please do the following:

1. If there is a fax unit in the machine, print out all messages stored in the memory, the
lists of user-programmed items, and the system parameter list.
2. If there are printer jobs in the machine, print out all jobs in the printer buffer.
3. Turn off the main switch and disconnect the power cord, the telephone line, and the
network cable.

1.2.1 ENVIRONMENT
For this machine, it may take two hours or more to get normal operation if there is
condensation inside the contact glass at the scanner unit. In that case, leave the copier
turned on the main power switch for two hours or more.
–Temperature and Humidity Chart–

Temperature Range: 10C to 32C (50F to 89.6F)

ƒ Humidity Range: 15% to 80% RH
ƒ Ambient Illumination: Less than 2,000 lux (do not expose to direct sunlight)
ƒ Ventilation: 3 times/hr/person or more

B229 1-2 SM
 Installation Requirements

Installation
ƒ Ambient Dust: Less than 0.1 mg/m3 (2.7 x 10-6 oz/yd3)
ƒ Avoid areas exposed to sudden temperature changes:
1) Areas directly exposed to cool air from an air conditioner.
2) Areas directly exposed to heat from a heater.
ƒ Do not place the machine where it is exposed to corrosive gases.
ƒ Do not install the machine at any location over 2,000 m (6,500 ft.) above sea level.
ƒ Place the copier on a strong and level base. (Inclination on any side should be no
more than 5 mm.)
ƒ Do not place the machine where it is subjected to strong vibrations.

1.2.2 MACHINE LEVEL

Front to back: Within 5 mm (0.2") of level
Right to left: Within 5 mm (0.2") of level

1.2.3 MINIMUM SPACE REQUIREMENTS

Place the copier near the power source, providing clearance as shown:

A (front): 440 mm (17.3")

B (left): 520 mm (20.5")
C (rear): 50 mm (2.0")
D (right): 530 mm (20.9")

SM 1-3 B229
Installation Requirements

ƒ The recommended 440 mm front space is sufficient to allow the paper tray to
be pulled out. Additional front space is required to allow operators to stand at
the front of the machine.

1.2.4 POWER REQUIREMENTS

1. Make sure that the wall outlet is near the machine and easily accessible. After
completing installation, make sure the plug fits firmly into the outlet.
2. Avoid multi-wiring.
3. Be sure to ground the machine.

Input Voltage:
North and South America, Taiwan:110 – 120 V, 60 Hz, 3.6 A
Europe, Asia: 220 – 240 V, 50/60 Hz, 2 A

B229 1-4 SM
 Copier Installation

Installation
1.3 COPIER INSTALLATION

1.3.1 POWER SOCKETS FOR PERIPHERALS

ƒ Rated voltage for peripherals

ƒ Make sure to plug the cables into the correct sockets.

SM 1-5 B229
Copier Installation

1.3.2 ACCESSORY CHECK

Check that you have the accessories indicated below.

No. Description Q’ty

1 CD-ROM - Drivers/ Utilities 1
2 EU Safety Sheet 1
3 Emblem 1
4 Emblem Cover 1
5 Operation Instructions 1 set
6 Paper Tray Decal 1
7 Decal - Contact Glass 1
8 Clamp (for ARDF) 1
9 Decal - Operation Panel 1
10 Hexagonal Wrench 1
11 Handle Cover 3
12 Mylar to cover handle slot 1

ƒ The above accessories provided with a main unit differ depending on the
destination.

1.3.3 BEFORE INSTALLING A COPIER

ƒ When moving or lifting a copier to install, please do the following:

1. Pull out and grasp the four handles at the each side (two handles each) of this
copier to lift the copier.
2. Two persons must be required to lift the copier at least. The copier is highly
unstable when lifted by one person, and may cause human injury or property
damage.

B229 1-6 SM
 Copier Installation

Installation
Using the Handles

1. Pull out the four handles [A] from the copier.

2. Grasp the handles with two persons at least to lift the copier.
3. After installation, insert the all handles fully inside the handle slots of the copier.
4. Loosen the screw at the each handle slot first, and then secure the screw with
the hexagonal wrench provided in the copier to prevent the handles from
coming out from the handle slots of the copier.

Installation Procedure

ƒ Unplug the machine power cord before starting the following procedure.

(Color Photo)
Remove filament tape and other padding.

SM 1-7 B229
Copier Installation

(Color Photo)

1. Slide the cartridge stopper [A] in the arrow direction, and then remove it for each
color.

(Color Photo)
2. Open the front door [B] and install ink cartridge (4 cartridges) [C].
3. Close the front door.

4. Attach the correct emblem [D] to the front cover if the emblem is not attached to
the front cover.
5. Install the optional ARDF, ADF, or platen cover.

B229 1-8 SM
 Copier Installation

Installation
(Color Photo)
6. Plug in the main power cord and turn on the main switch (Rear side) [E].
7. Activate the User Tools and select the menu "Language."
8. Specify a language. This language is used for the operation panel.
9. Pull the paper tray out. Then turn the paper size dial to select the appropriate
size. Adjust the side guides and end guide to match the paper size.

10. Attach the appropriate paper tray decal [F] to each paper tray.

ƒ Paper tray decal is also used for the optional paper tray. Keep the decal
for use with the optional paper tray unit.
11. Insert the all handles fully inside the handle slots of the copier.
12. Loosen the screw at the each handle slot first, and then secure the screw with
the hexagonal wrench provided in the copier to prevent the handles from
coming out from the handle slots of the copier.

SM 1-9 B229
Copier Installation

(Color Photo)
13. Keep the hexagonal wrench inside the front cover [G] of the copier.

14. Install the three handle covers [H] and attach the mylar to the handle slot [I].

Ink Loading
Ink loading is performed after power on, and takes roughly 15 minutes.

ƒ Do not open covers during ink loading

ƒ Do not open any covers until the "Ready" message appears on the control
panel. If you do, the ink loading procedure is interrupted, and the power must
be switched off and then back on.
If the main power switch is turned back on to complete an interrupted ink
loading, additional ink might be used and a further 15 minutes might be
required.

B229 1-10 SM
 Copier Installation

Installation
1.3.4 INITIAL SETTING

ƒ The following settings require some knowledge about the print head
adjustment.
ƒ Refer to the "Adjust Print Head Position" in the section "Replace and
Adjustment" and "Print Head" in the section "Detailed Section Descriptions"
for details.
Do the following initial settings after installing the copier.
1. Copy C4 chart in full color mode and B/W mode.
2. Do the "Nozzle Check Pattern".
3. Do the "Head Position Adjust".
4. Copy C4 chart in B/W text mode again.
5. Check the gray scale line on the printout copied in B/W mode.
6. If an image problem occurs, adjust the "Head Gap Adjustment" for the K1 and K2 with
SP3-002-017 or -018 (see the "Head Gap Adjustment" for details as following this
procedure).
7. Print out the test pattern "15" with SP4-417-001.
8. Check the printout. If white line or black line occurs in main scan direction, adjust the
"SubScan:Send Adj" with SP1-922-001 (see the "Sub Scan: Send Adjustment" for
details as following this procedure).
9. Do the "Registration" with UP or SP:

1.3.5 CHECKING THE NOZZLE PATTERN

1. Do the "Nozzle Check Pattern" ("User Tools" > "Maintenance").
2. Check if the nozzle check pattern on a printed paper is satisfactory.
3. Do the "Clean Print-heads" if a printed nozzle check pattern is not satisfactory.
For details, refer to the "Replacement and Adjustment" or "Operation
Instructions" about details

ƒ You must load A4/Letter papers in SEF direction.

Adjustment
1. Do the "Head Position Adjust", "Registration" and "Adjust Paper Feed" ("User
Tools" > "Adjustment"). For details, refer to the "Replacement and Adjustment"
or "Operation Instructions" about details.

SM 1-11 B229
Copier Installation

ƒ You must load A4/Letter papers in SEF direction.

1.3.6 HEAD GAP ADJUSTMENT
In the 600dpi B/W copy mode, an image problem, which is difficult to be adjusted with
"Head Position Adjust" in the UP mode, may occur sometimes. This adjustment
compensates for "Head Position Adjust" in the UP mode.
1. Copy C4 chart in B/W text mode.

2. Check the gray scale line [A] on the printout.

3. Adjust the gap between K1 and K2 print heads if a texture image appears.
This machine has following formula for adjusting the print head alignment.
I-A=H
ƒ "A" (K1 forward head position)
ƒ "I" (K2 forward head position)
ƒ "H" (K2 reverse head position)
"I - A" means the shift value between K1 print head and K2 print head in forward scanning.
"H - K1 reverse head position (standard value for alignment: 0)" means the shift value
between K1 print head and K2 print head in reverse scanning.
"H - K1 reverse head position (0)" should be equal to "I -A" to prevent a texture image.
In case of the image problem in the left side picture:

B229 1-12 SM
 Copier Installation

Installation
1. Enter the SP mode.
2. Check the value of SP3-002-010 [1200:A], -017 [1200:H] and -018 [1200:I].
3. Calculates the value "I" using above formula.
For example, A = +5, H = +1 I = +6
4. Enter the result from the formula with SP3-002-018.
5. Exit the SP mode, and then copy C4 chart in B/W text printing mode again.

6. Try and see until the gray scale line becomes an ideal image [B].
7. Exit the SP mode.

In case of the image problem in the right side picture:

1. Enter the SP mode.
2. Check the value of SP3-002-010 [1200:A], -017 [1200:H] and -018 [1200:I].
3. Calculates the value "H" using above formula.
For example, A = +5, I = +4 H = -1
4. Enter the result from the formula with SP3-002-017.
5. Exit the SP mode, and then copy C4 chart in B/W text printing mode again.
6. Try and see until the gray scale line becomes an ideal image [B].
7. Exit the SP mode.

ƒ You must load A4/Letter papers in SEF direction.

1.3.7 SUB SCAN: SEND ADJUSTMENT

1. Enter the SP mode.
2. Print out the scanner test pattern "15" (Gray Pat 1) with SP4-417-001.

SM 1-13 B229
Copier Installation

3. If black line or white line in main scan direction occurs on the test pattern,
adjust the paper feed timing with SP1-922-001 ("SubScan:Send Adj").
In case of black line problem:
1. Select SP1-922-001, and decrease the value one by one.

ƒ The value of 1 indicates 1 line.

2. Try and see until the gray scale becomes an ideal image [A].
3. Exit the SP mode.

In case of white line problem:

1. Select SP1-922-001, and increase the value one by one.

The value of 1 in the SP setting indicates 1 line.

2. Try and see until the gray scale becomes an ideal image [A].
3. Exit the SP mode.

ƒ You must load A4/Letter papers in SEF direction.

B229 1-14 SM
 Copier Installation

Installation
1.3.8 MOVING THE MACHINE

ƒ Make sure that the carriage unit is properly engaged with the maintenance
unit before turn off the power (see "Maintenance Unit" in the Replacement and
Adjustment), otherwise the print head may be damaged while moving the
machine.
ƒ If too much waste ink is filled in the ink correction tank, remove the tank before
moving the machine (see "Ink Collection Tank" in the Replacement and
Adjustment).
This section shows you how to manually move the machine from one floor to another floor.
See ”TRANSPORTING MACHINE" if you will use some transport equipment.

The machine stands make it difficult to move the copier with an optional paper tray or
duplex unit installed. You can remove them as necessary.
1. Check that the machine is in standby status.
2. Turn off the main power and unplug the power cable.
3. Remove all trays from the optional paper feed unit or LCT.

4. Loosen the adjuster [A] to release the machine from the place.

SM 1-15 B229
Copier Installation

5. Remove the four brackets and covers [B]. ( x 8).

ƒ Do not tilt the machine more than 45 degrees.

ƒ Reinstall the adjuster and brackets after you move the machine. The machine
can fall over when you pull out a paper tray or when you work on the machine
if you do not do this.

1.3.9 TRANSPORTING THE MACHINE

ƒ Make sure that the carriage unit is properly engaged with the maintenance
unit before turn off the power (see "Maintenance Unit" in the Replacement and
Adjustment), otherwise the print head may be damaged while moving the
machine.
ƒ If too much waste ink is filled in the ink correction tank, remove the tank before
moving the machine (see "Ink Collection Tank" in the Replacement and
Adjustment).
This section shows you how to manually transport the machine by a truck or plane.
The machine stands make it difficult to move the copier with an optional paper tray or
duplex unit installed. You can remove them as necessary.
1. Perform ink purge with SP2100-001.
2. Turn off the main power and unplug the power cable.
3. Remove the ink cartridges.
4. Loosen the adjuster to release the machine from the place. (see "Moving
Machine")
5. Remove the four brackets and covers (see "Moving Machine").
6. Make sure there is no paper left in the paper trays. Then fix down the bottom
plates with a sheet of paper and tape.

B229 1-16 SM
 Copier Installation

Installation
7. Remove the ink correction tank (see "Ink Collection Tank" in the Replacement
and Adjustment)
8. Do one of the following:
9. Attach shipping tape to the covers and doors.
10. Shrink-wrap the machine tightly.

ƒ Make sure you reinstall the ink correction tank.

ƒ Make sure you check the nozzle pattern (User Tools) and each adjustment
(see “Initial setting”) after you move the machine.

SM 1-17 B229
Platen Cover Installation

1.4 PLATEN COVER INSTALLATION

1.4.1 ACCESSORY CHECK

Check that you have the accessories indicated below.
No. Description Q’ty
1 Stepped Screw 2

1.4.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

ƒ Unplug the machine power cord before starting the following procedure.
1. Install the platen cover [A] ( x 2).

B229 1-18 SM
 ARDF Installation

Installation
1.5 ARDF INSTALLATION

1.5.1 ACCESSORY CHECK

Check the quantity and condition of the accessories against the following list.
No. Description Q’ty
1 Scale Guide 1
2 DF Exposure Glass 1
3 Stud Screw 2
4 Knob Screw 2
5 Original Size Decal 2
6 Screwdriver Tool 1
7 Attention Decal – Top Cover 1
8 Stamp Cartridge 1
9 Installation Procedure 1

1.5.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

ƒ Unplug the copier power cord before starting the following procedure.

1. Remove the strips of tape.

SM 1-19 B229
ARDF Installation

2. Remove the left scale [A] (2 screws).

3. Place the DF exposure glass [B] on the glass holder.

ƒ When installing the DF exposure glass, make sure that the white point [C]
is on the lower front side of the glass, as shown.
4. Peel off the backing [D] of the double-sided tape attached to the rear side of the
scale guide [E], then install it (2 screws removed in step 2).
5. Install the two stud screws [F].

6. Mount the DF on the copier, and then slide the DF to the front as shown.
7. Secure the DF unit with two screws [G].
8. Connect the cable [H] to the copier.

B229 1-20 SM
 ARDF Installation

Installation
9. Attach the appropriate scale decal [I] as shown.

10. Attach the decal [J] to the top cover as shown, choosing the language most
suitable for the machine installed.

11. Open the ARDF [K].

12. Install the stamp cartridge [L] to the ARDF.

SM 1-21 B229
ARDF Installation

(Color Photo)
13. Attach the clamp [M] on the right side of copier and clamp the I/F cable as
shown.

ƒ The clamp [M] is provided with a main frame (B229).

14. Turn the main power switch on. Then check if the document feeder works
properly.
15. Make a full size copy. Then check to make sure the side-to-side and leading edge
registrations are correct. If they are not, adjust the side-to-side and leading edge
registrations (refer to the service manual).

B229 1-22 SM
 ADF Installation

Installation
1.6 ADF INSTALLATION

1.6.1 ACCESSORY CHECK

Check the quantity and condition of the accessories against the following list.
No. Description Q’ty
1 Scale Guide 1
2 DF Exposure Glass 1
3 Stud Screw 2
4 Fixing Screw 2
5 Original Size Decal 2
6 Screwdriver Tool 1
7 Attention Decal – Top Cover 1
8 Stamp Cartridge 1
9 Installation Procedure 1

1.6.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

ƒ Unplug the copier power cord before starting the following procedure.

1. Remove the strips of tape.

SM 1-23 B229
ADF Installation

2. Remove the left scale [A] ( x 2).

3. Place the DF exposure glass [B] on the glass holder.

ƒ When installing the DF exposure glass, make sure that the white point [C]
is on the lower front side of the glass, as shown
4. Peel off the backing [D] of the double-sided tape attached to the rear side of the
scale guide [E], then install it ( x 2 removed in step 2).
5. Install the two stud screws [F].

6. Mount the DF on the copier, then slide the DF to the front as shown.
7. Secure the DF unit with two screws [G].
8. Connect the cable [H] to the copier.

B229 1-24 SM
 ADF Installation

Installation
9. Attach the appropriate scale decal [I] as shown.

10. Attach the decal [J] to the top cover as shown, choosing the language most
suitable for the machine installed.

11. Open the ADF [K].

12. Install the stamp cartridge [L] to the ADF.

SM 1-25 B229
ADF Installation

(Color Photo)
13. Attach the clamp [M] on the right side of copier and clamp the I/F cable as
shown.

ƒ The clamp [M] is provided with a main frame (B229).

14. Turn the main power switch on. Then check if the document feeder works
properly.
15. Make a full size copy. Then check to make sure the side-to-side and leading edge
registrations are correct. If they are not, adjust the side-to-side and leading edge
registrations (refer to the service manual).

B229 1-26 SM
 Rev.10/2006 One-Tray Paper Tray Unit

⇒ IMPORTANT: A warning note has been issued and will include information in

Installation
the installation instructions, warning not to exceed 45” in height.
Below is a table showing which units can be configured for these
machines, cabinets, duplex unit, and paper trays.

Cabinet Compatibility with B229 and the FAC31 & FAC32 cabinets:
Config 1 Config 2 Config 3 Config 4 Config 5 Config 6 Config 7
Cabinet Large Small Small Small Small Small Small
Cabinet Cabinet Cabinet Cabinet Cabinet Cabinet Cabinet
(FAC32) (FAC31) (FAC31) (FAC31) (FAC31) (FAC31) (FAC31)
Main Frame X X X X X X X
Duplex Unit X X
1x500 Paper Tray X X X
1x500 Paper Tray X
2x500 Paper Tray X

1.7 ONE-TRAY PAPER TRAY UNIT

1.7.1 ACCESSORY CHECK

No. Description Q’ty
1 Screw M4 x 10 2
2 Stepped Screw 2
3 Bracket 2

1.7.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

ƒ Before installing this option, do the following:

ƒ If there is a fax unit in the machine, print out all messages stored in the
memory, the lists of user-programmed items, and the system parameter list.
ƒ If there is a printer option in the machine, print out all data in the printer buffer.
ƒ Turn off the main switch and disconnect the power cord, the telephone line,
and the network cable.

SM 1-27 B229
One-Tray Paper Tray Unit Rev.10/2006

1. Remove the strips of tape.

ƒ After removing the tape that secures the peripheral components and
cardboard to the paper tray, make sure that there is no tape and/or tape
reside remaining on the tray.

2. Remove the cover [A] ( x 4).

(Color Photo)
3. Remove the bracket [C] ( x 2).

B229 1-28 SM
 One-Tray Paper Tray Unit

Installation
4. Set the copier [D] on the paper tray unit [E].

ƒ When installing the copier, be careful not to pinch the connecting harness.
For model B229 "with the duplex unit" (B806)

ƒ Set the duplex unit on the paper tray unit first, and then set the copier on the
duplex unit mounted on the paper tray unit.
ƒ Remove the rear cover of the duplex unit ( x 2).
ƒ Remove the lower cover of the duplex unit ( x 1).
ƒ Line the harness [F] in the duplex unit as shown ( x 2).
ƒ Re-install the rear cover of the duplex unit ( x 2).
ƒ Secure the duplex unit to the paper tray unit.

ƒ For details, refer to the DUPLEX UNIT (B806) INSTALLATION

SM 1-29 B229
One-Tray Paper Tray Unit

PROCEDURE. For the model of B229 "without the duplex unit"

(B806):

(Color Photo)

ƒ Remove the rear cover of the paper tray unit ( x 3).

ƒ Line the harness [G] of the paper tray, and loop it between the two clamps [H].
ƒ Re-install the rear cover of the paper tray unit ( x 2).

5. Remove the 1st tray [I].

B229 1-30 SM
 One-Tray Paper Tray Unit

Installation
6. Install the two stepped screws [J].
7. Re-install the 1st tray.

8. Install the two brackets [K] ( x 1 each).

(Color Photo)

9. Connect the harness [L] from the paper tray unit to the Copier.
10. Re-install the bracket removed in step 3 ( x 2).

SM 1-31 B229
One-Tray Paper Tray Unit

11. Re-install the rear cover removed in step2 ( x 4).

12. Plug in and turn on the main power switch of the copier.
13. Load paper and make full size copies. If the side and leading edge registrations
are not correct, adjust them.

1.7.3 OPTIONAL PAPER TRAY GRIP HANDLE – OPTIONAL

PAPER TRAY UNIT
The following procedure is for the 1-tray or 2-tray optional paper feed unit only.

1. Remove the paper tray units [A] from the machine.

(Color Photo)
2. Lower the paper tray grip handle [B] into the paper tray slot as shown with the
arrow in the above illustration.

B229 1-32 SM
 One-Tray Paper Tray Unit

Installation
(Color Photo)

3. Attach the grip handle to the paper tray (2 x ) as shown above.

4. Put the paper tray back into the machine.

SM 1-33 B229
Two-Tray Paper Tray unit Installation

1.8 TWO-TRAY PAPER TRAY UNIT INSTALLATION

1.8.1 ACCESSORY CHECK

No. Description Q’ty
1 Screw M4 x 10 10
2 Bracket with long support 4
3 Bracket 2
4 Adjuster 1
5 Cover 4

1.8.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

ƒ Before installing this option, do the following:

1. If there is a fax unit in the machine, print out all messages stored in the memory,
the lists of user-programmed items, and the system parameter list.
2. If there is a printer option in the machine, print out all data in the printer buffer.
3. Turn off the main switch and disconnect the power cord, the telephone line, and the
network cable.

1. Remove the strips of tape.

ƒ After removing the tape that secures the peripheral components and
cardboard to the paper tray, make sure that there is no tape and/or tape
reside remaining on the tray.

B229 1-34 SM
 Two-Tray Paper Tray unit Installation

Installation
2. Attach the adjuster [A] onto the base plate, as shown.

ƒ When a table is installed, this procedure is unnecessary.

3. Remove the rear cover [B] ( x 4).

(Color Photo)

4. Remove the lower bracket [C] ( x 2).

SM 1-35 B229
Two-Tray Paper Tray unit Installation

5. Set the copier [D] on the paper tray unit [E].

ƒ When installing the copier, be careful not to pinch the connecting harness.

For installing "without the duplex unit" (B806)

Pull out the I/F harness from the paper tray unit.

ƒ If it is difficult to pull out the I/F harness, remove the rear cover of the
paper tray unit ( x 3), and then pull out the I/F harness from the paper
tray unit.

For installing with the duplex unit" (B806)

1. Set the duplex unit on the paper tray unit first, and then set the copier on the
duplex unit mounted on the paper tray unit.

B229 1-36 SM
 Two-Tray Paper Tray unit Installation

Installation
2. Remove the rear cover of the duplex unit ( x 2).
3. Remove the lower bracket in the duplex unit ( x 1).
4. Line the harness [1] in the duplex unit as shown ( x 2).
5. Re-install the rear cover of the duplex unit ( x 2).
6. Secure the duplex unit to the paper tray unit.

ƒ For details, refer to the DUPLEX UNIT (B806) INSTALLATION.

6. Remove the 1st tray [F].

7. Install the two screws [G].
8. Re-install the paper tray 1.

9. Install the two brackets [H]. ( x 1 each).

(Color Photo)

SM 1-37 B229
Two-Tray Paper Tray unit Installation

10. Connect the harness [I] from the paper tray unit to the Copier.
11. Re-install the bracket removed in step3 ( x 2).
12. Re-install the rear cover removed in step3 ( x 4).

13. Install the four brackets with long supports [J] and four covers [K] ( x 2 each).

ƒ These long supports prevent the unit from tipping over.

14. Rotate the adjuster [L] to fix the machine in place.

15. Plug in and turn on the main power switch of the copier.
16. Load paper and make full size copies from each tray. If the side and leading edge
registrations are not correct, adjust them. (Refer to the Service Manual.)

B229 1-38 SM
 Two-Tray Paper Tray unit Installation

Installation
1.8.3 OPTIONAL PAPER TRAY GRIP HANDLE – OPTIONAL
PAPER TRAY UNIT
This procedure is same as the one for the One-Tray Paper Tray Unit. See "Optional Paper
Tray Grip Handle – Optional Paper Tray Unit" in the installation procedure for One-Tray
Paper Tray Unit.

SM 1-39 B229
Duplex Unit Installtion

1.9 DUPLEX UNIT INSTALLTION

1.9.1 ACCESSORY CHECK

No. Description Q’ty
1 Screw M4 x 10 3
2 Stepped Screw 1
3 Bracket 2
4 Installation Procedure 1

1.9.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

ƒ Before installing this option, do the following:

1. If there is a fax unit in the machine, print out all messages stored in the memory,
the lists of user-programmed items, and the system parameter list.
2. If there is a printer option in the machine, print out all data in the printer buffer.
3. Turn off the main switch and disconnect the power cord, the telephone line, and the
network cable.

1. Unpack the duplex unit and remove the tapes.

There are two installation procedures, the duplex unit only/ the duplex unit and optional
paper tray unit. Follow the installation procedure that you need.

B229 1-40 SM
 Duplex Unit Installtion

Installation
For Installing the duplex unit only

1. Set the copier on the duplex unit.

ƒ When installing the duplex unit, be careful not to pinch the connecting
harness.

2. Remove the rear cover [A] of the copier ( x 4).

3. Remove the standard tray of the copier.

SM 1-41 B229
Duplex Unit Installtion

4. Secure the duplex unit to the copier with two brackets [B] and two knob screws
[C] ( x 2).
5. Re-install the standard tray of the copier.

6. Remove the lower bracket [D] of the copier ( x 2).

7. Set and connect the I/F harness [E] of duplex unit with clamps [F] as shown.

ƒ The above left side drawing shows the state in which the controller box is
already removed. Removing the controller box [G] ( x 7: one for the slot
cover [H]) makes you easy to access the connectors.

B229 1-42 SM
 Duplex Unit Installtion

Installation
(Color Photo)
8. Re-install the lower bracket [I] to the copier ( x 2).

ƒ When re-installing the lower bracket, slide the bracket to the left and fix it
as shown.
9. Skip to the "For Installing the Duplex Unit only/ Installing the Duplex Unit and
Paper Tray Unit".

For Installing the Duplex Unit and Paper Tray Unit (B384 or B385)

(Color Photo)
1. Set the duplex unit [A] on the paper tray unit [B] grabbing the stays at the top of
the duplex unit as shown.

SM 1-43 B229
Duplex Unit Installtion

(Color Photo)
2. Remove the duplex unit rear cover [C] ( x 2, [D]: M3 x 6 screw, [E]: stepped
screw).

(Color Photo)

3. Remove the lower bracket [F] of the duplex unit ( x 1).

4. Set the copier on the duplex unit.

ƒ When installing the duplex unit, be careful not to pinch the connecting
harness.

B229 1-44 SM
 Duplex Unit Installtion

Installation
5. Remove the rear cover [G] of the copier ( x 4).
6. Remove the standard tray of the copier.

7. Line the I/F harnesses [H] of the optional paper tray unit in the duplex unit as
shown ( x 2).

ƒ For details, refer to the installation procedure for the optional paper tray
unit (B384 or B385).
8. Re-install the duplex unit rear cover to the duplex unit ( x 2, the rear left side
screw is a stepped screw.).

SM 1-45 B229
Duplex Unit Installtion

(Color Photo)
9. Pull the duplex tray cassette halfway.
10. Remove the two stopper brackets [I] of the duplex unit ( x 1 each).
11. Remove the duplex tray cassette

12. Secure the optional paper tray unit to the duplex unit with two brackets and two
knob screws same as step 13's manner ( x 2).
13. Secure the duplex unit to the copier with two brackets [J] and two knob screws
[K] ( x 2)
14. Re-install the duplex tray cassette halfway.
15. Re-install the two stopper brackets to the duplex unit ( x 1 each).
16. Close the duplex tray cassette.
17. Reinstall the standard tray of the copier.

B229 1-46 SM
 Duplex Unit Installtion

Installation
18. Remove the lower bracket [L] of the copier ( x 2).
19. Set and connect the I/F harness [M] of duplex unit with clamps [N] as shown.

ƒ The above left side drawing shows the state in which the controller box is
already removed. Removing the controller box [O] ( x 7) makes you
easy to access the connectors.
20. Set and connect the I/F harness of the paper tray unit to the copier.

ƒ For details, refer to the PAPER TRAY UNIT (B384 or B385)

INSTALLATION.

(Color Photo)
21. Re-install the lower bracket [P] to the copier (s x 2).

ƒ When re-installing the lower bracket, slide the bracket to the left and fix it
as shown.
22. Continue to the "For installing the duplex unit only/ installing the duplex unit and
paper tray unit".

SM 1-47 B229
Duplex Unit Installtion

For Installing the Duplex Unit Only/ Installing the Duplex Unit and
Paper Tray Unit

1. Remove the top left front cover [A] ( x 1), the left front cover [B] ( x 1) and the
interface cover [C] ( x 2).

2. Remove the left cover [D] ( x 2).

3. Remove the two brackets [E] from the left cover ( x 1 each).
4. Remove the handle cover [F].

B229 1-48 SM
 Duplex Unit Installtion

Installation
(Color Photo)

5. Re-install the left cover and open it as shown.

(Color Photo)
6. Set and connect the harness of the inverter unit [G] as shown ( x 3).

(Color Photo)
7. Install the inverter unit ( x 2, [H]).

SM 1-49 B229
Duplex Unit Installtion

8. Re-install the left front cover ( x 1), top left front cover ( x 1) and interface
cover ( x 2).
9. Re-install the rear cover ( x 4)
10. Plug in and turn on the main power switch, and then check if the duplex unit
works properly. If the side and leading edge registrations are not correct, adjust
them. (Refer to the Service Manual.)

B229 1-50 SM
 Heater Kit Installation

Installation
1.10 HEATER KIT INSTALLATION

1.10.1 COMPONENT CHECK

No. Description Q’ty
Relay Harness for Main Frame 1
1
Relay Harness for Optional Paper Tray Unit １
Tray Heater for Main Frame 1
2
Tray Heater for Optional Paper Tray Unit １
3 Anti-condensation Heater 1
4 Clamp 13
5 Screw 3

SM 1-51 B229
Heater Kit Installation

1.10.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

For Installing the Anti-Condensation Heater and Tray Heater

1. Remove the rear cover [A] ( x 4) and the interface cover [B] ( x 2).

2. Pull out the paper tray 1.

3. Install the tray heater [C] in the top of the paper tray 1 opening ( x 1).

B229 1-52 SM
 Heater Kit Installation

Installation
4. Open the ADF/ARDF or platen cover if it has been installed.
5. Remove the rear [D] scale ( x 3) and left scale [E] with exposure glass ( x 2).

6. Move the scanner carriage to the right side by rotating the wheel [F]
counterclockwise.
7. Install the anti-condensation [G] in the scanner unit ( x 1).
8. Pass the connector [H] of the anti-condensation heater through the cutout.

SM 1-53 B229
Heater Kit Installation

9. Remove the bracket [I] ( x 1) and shutter bracket [J] ( x 1).

ƒ When reinstalling this bracket, make sure that the shutter bracket pushes
the switch [K] of the shutter.

10. Remove the Ink collection tank [L] ( x 1).

B229 1-54 SM
 Heater Kit Installation

Installation
11. Remove the controller box [M] ( x 5, x 1) and PSU [N] ( x 1, x All).

12. Attach the five small clamps [O], three large clamps [P] and one black clamp [Q]
to the each position as shown.

SM 1-55 B229
Heater Kit Installation

13. Line the PSU harness [R] and anti-condensation heater harness [S], and then
connect them ( x 5).
14. Line the PSU harness [R], and then connect it to the tray heater harness [T]
( x 1).

15. Connect the PSU harness [U] to the connector (CN220) on the PSU ( x 1).
16. Reinstall the PSU [V] ( x 1).
17. Reassemble the copier.
18. Plug in and turn on the main power switch.
19. Check the machine operation.

B229 1-56 SM
 Heater Kit Installation

Installation
1.10.3 OPTIONAL TRAY HEATER
Optional Tray Heater Installation

For One-tray Paper Tray Unit

1. Remove the rear cover of the copier ( x 4).

2. Remove the rear cover of the optional paper tray unit [A] ( x 5, bracket x 2).
3. Remove the rear cover [B] of the duplex unit if it has been installed ( x 4,
bracket x 2).

4. Pull out the paper tray 2.

5. Install the tray heater [C] ( x 1).

SM 1-57 B229
Heater Kit Installation

6. Attach the three clamps [D] to the optional paper tray unit.
7. Line the tray heater harness [E] as shown ( x 1).
8. Line the relay harness [F] and connect it to the tray heater harness ( x 3).
If the duplex unit has been installed, do step 9. If not, skip the step 9.

9. Line the relay harness [G] as shown ( x 2).

10. Remove the bracket [H] ( x 2).

B229 1-58 SM
 Heater Kit Installation

Installation
11. Line the relay harness [I] and connect it to the PSU harness as shown ( x 1).
12. Reassemble the copier.
13. Plug in and turn on the main power switch.
14. Check the machine operation.

For Two-tray Paper Tray Unit

1. Remove the rear cover of the copier ( x 4).

2. Remove the rear cover of the optional paper tray unit [A] ( x 5, bracket x 2).
3. Remove the rear cover [B] of the duplex unit if it has been installed.

4. Pull out the paper tray 2 and tray 3.

5. Install the tray heater [C] ( x 1).

SM 1-59 B229
Heater Kit Installation

6. Attach the two clamps [D] to the optional paper tray unit.
7. Line the tray heater harness [E] as shown ( x 1).
8. Line the relay harness [F] and connect it to the tray heater harness ( x 3).
If the duplex unit has been installed, do step 9. If not, skip the step 9.

9. Line the relay harness [G] as shown ( x 2).

B229 1-60 SM
 Heater Kit Installation

Installation
10. Remove the bracket [H] ( x 2).
11. Line the relay harness [I] and connect it to the PSU harness as shown ( x 1).
12. Reassemble the copier.
13. Plug in and turn on the main power switch.
14. Check the machine operation.

SM 1-61 B229
Function Upgrade Option Installation

1.11 FUNCTION UPGRADE OPTION INSTALLATION

1.11.1 COMPONENT CHECK

No. Description Q’ty
1 HDD Unit 1
2 RAM DIMM 1
3 Knob Screw 4
4 Screw M3 x 6 1
5 Harness 1
6 I/F Cable 1
7 Ferrite Core 1
8 Nylon Clamp 3

1.11.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

ƒ Unplug the machine power cord before starting the following procedure.

1. Rear cover [A] ( x 4)

2. Interface cover [B] ( x 2)

B229 1-62 SM
 Function Upgrade Option Installation

Installation
3. FCU bracket or FCU [C] ( x 3)
4. Controller box cover [D] ( x 13)

(Color Photo)
5. Install the DIMM RAM [E] to the optional RAM slot [F] on the controller board.

SM 1-63 B229
Function Upgrade Option Installation

(Color Photo)

6. Attach the I/F harness [G] and cable [H] ( x 2)

7. Reinstall the controller box cover ( x 13).

(Color Photo)

8. Line the harness [I], and then attach the ferrite core [J] ( x 2, ferrite core x 1).
9. Line the I/F harness [K] ( x 1) with the nylon clamp [L].

B229 1-64 SM
 Function Upgrade Option Installation
Rev. 11/2006

Installation
(Color Photo)

10. Install the HDD unit [M] as shown ( x 4).

11. Attach the two harnesses to the HDD unit ( x 2).
12. Reassemble the FCU bracket or FCU, interface cover and rear cover.
13. Plug in and turn on the main power switch.
⇒ 14. Run SP5-846-40 to move the address book from the Printer/Scanner SD Card to
the HDD.
⇒ 15. Run SP5-990-005 (Self-Diagnosis) and verify HDD existence.
16. Check the HDD operation.
⇒ Note: Please note that the following may occur if, the B229 has already been installed or
the B229 has not been installed yet, but the main power was already turned ON at
least once:
ƒ The machine may create the Address Book and Destination List in the SD card
because it did not detect the HDD. To use some features, the Address Book and
Destination List must be moved to the HDD. If it is not, the following errors can occur:
- ScanRouter: “Specified destination is not programmed” error occurs, because the
Destination List cannot be found.
- Web Image Monitor, operation panel: “LDAP Server” is not displayed.
- Only basic and user admin are available.

SM 1-65 B229
Copy Data Security Unit Installation

1.12 COPY DATA SECURITY UNIT INSTALLATION

1.12.1 COMPONENT CHECK

No. Description Q’ty
1 Copy data security board 1
2 Flat cable (long) 1
3 Screw 4
4 Harness (long) 1
5 Harness (short): Not used in this model. 1
6 Flat cable (short): Not used in this model. 1
7 Bracket: Not used in this model. 1
8 Clamp: Not used in this model. 1

B229 1-66 SM
 Copy Data Security Unit Installation

Installation
1.12.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

1. Remove the rear cover [A] ( x 4).

(Color Photo)

2. Attach the copy data security unit [B] on the controller box cover ( x 4).
3. Connect the harness [C] to the CN142 on the BCU and I/F flat cable [D] to the
CN150 on the BCU.
4. Reinstall the rear cover ( x 4).
5. Plug in and turns on the main power switch.
6. Go into the User Tools mode, and select System Settings > Administrator Tools
> Copy Data Security Option > On.
7. Exit the User Tools.

SM 1-67 B229
Optional Counter Interface Unit

1.13 OPTIONAL COUNTER INTERFACE UNIT

1.13.1 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

1. Remove the rear cover [A] ( x 4).

2. Remove the Scanner stay right cover [B] ( x 1)

3. Scanner stay left cover [C] ( x 1)
4. Punch out the small hole [D] using a screwdriver.
5. Remove the cap [E] with nippers.

B229 1-68 SM
 Optional Counter Interface Unit

Installation
6. Hold the key counter plate nuts [F] on the inside of the key counter bracket [G]
and insert the key counter holder [H].
7. Secure the key counter holder to the bracket ( x 2).
8. Install the key counter cover [I] ( x 2).

(Color Photo)
9. Line the relay harness [J] and connect it to the CN124 on the BCU ( x 2).

ƒ The relay harness is a little bit long for this machine. Loop it between two
clamps.

SM 1-69 B229
Optional Counter Interface Unit

10. Pass the relay harness through the opening and reinstall the scanner stay right
cover ( x 1) and scanner stay left cover ( x 1).
11. Install the stepped screw [L].
12. Connect the key counter harness [M] to the relay harness.
13. Pass the joined connectors through the opening of the key counter holder
assembly [N], and put the connectors inside the assembly.
14. Hook the key counter holder assembly onto the stepped screw [L]. Check that
the cable is not caught between the left cover and the key counter holder
assembly.
15. Secure the key counter holder assembly with the screw [O].
16. Reassemble the machine.
17. Plug in and turn on the main power switch.
18. Check the operation.

B229 1-70 SM
 Controller Options

Installation
1.14 CONTROLLER OPTIONS

1.14.1 OVERVIEW
This machine has I/F card slots and SD card slots for optional I/F connections and
applications.

I/F Card Slot

ƒ Slot [A] is used for one of the optional I/F connections: (IEEE1394, IEEE1284,
IEEE802.11 (Wireless LAN) or Bluetooth).
ƒ Slot [B] is used for the USB 2.0 Host.

SD Card Slot
ƒ Slot [1] is used for standard printer/scanner application only.
ƒ Slot [2] is used for one of the optional applications such as PostScript3, data
overwrite security or PictBridge.
ƒ Slot [3] is used for the Java VM Option or service use.

SM 1-71 B229
Controller Options

1.14.2 POSTSCRIPT3 INSTALLATION

Installation Procedure

1. Remove the SD card slot cover ( x 1).

2. Install the PostScript3 SD card into the slot 2.
3. Reinstall the SD card slot cover [A] ( x 1).
4. Turn on the main power switch.
5. Print out the configuration page (User Tools/ Counter > Printer Features > List/
Test Print), and then check that this device is detected.
6. Attach the "Adobe PostScript3" decal to the front cover of the machine.

1.14.3 PICTBRIDGE INSTALLTION

When you use the PictBride, you must install the USB Host (B825).

Installation Procedure
1. Remove the SD card slot cover [A] ( x 1).
2. Install the PictBridge SD card into the slot 2.
3. Reinstall the SD card slot cover.
4. Turn on the main power switch.
5. Print out the configuration page (User Tools/ Counter > Printer Features > List/
Test Print), and then check that this device is detected.

B229 1-72 SM
 Controller Options

Installation
1.14.4 JAVA VM OPTION INSTALLATION
Installation Procedure
SD card slot 3 is basically used only for service maintenance. Do not leave an SD card in
slot 3 after installing an application.

1. Remove the slot cover [A] from SD card slot 3 ( x 1).

2. Turn the SD-card [B] label face to the rear of the machine. Then push it slowly
into slot 3 until you hear a click.
3. Plug in and turn on the main power switch.
4. Push the "User Tools" key.
5. Push the "Login/ Logout" key.
6. Login with the administrator user name and password.
7. Touch "Extended Feature Settings" on the LCD.
8. Touch "Install" on the LCD.
9. Touch "SD Card slot 3".
10. Touch the "Java TM Platform" line.
11. Touch the "SD card ON".
12. Touch the "Setting".
13. Press one of the hard keys, which you want to use for the Java option unit.
14. Touch the "Execute".
15. Touch the "OK" after confirming that the installation is correctly done.
16. Touch "Exit" twice to go back to the copy screen.
17. Turn off the main power switch.
18. Remove the SD card from slot 3.
19. Attach the slot cover [A] ( x 1).

SM 1-73 B229
Controller Options

1.14.5 WIRELESS LAN (IEEE 802.11B) INSTALLATION

Component Check
No. Description Q’ty
1 Wireless LAN Adapter 1
2 Wireless LAN Card 1
3 LAN Card Cover 1
4 Caution Sheet 1
5 Label 1

Installation Procedure
1. Remove the interface cover A ( x 2).
2. Install the Wireless adaptor ( x 2).
3. Install the Wireless LAN card to the wireless adaptor.
4. Attach the antenna cap to the wireless LAN card.
5. Turn on the main power switch.
6. Print out the configuration page (User Tools/ Counter > Printer Features > List/
Test Print), and then check that this device is detected.

1.14.6 IEEE 1284 INSTALLATION

Component Check
No. Description Q’ty
1 IEEE1284 Interface Ass’y 1
2 UL Sheet 1
3 Caution Sheet 1

Installation Procedure
1. Remove the interface cover B ( x 2).
2. Install the IEEE 1284 board to the interface slot B ( x 2).
3. Turn on the main power switch.
4. Print out the configuration page (User Tools/ Counter > Printer Features > List/
Test Print), and then check that this device is detected.

B229 1-74 SM
 Controller Options

Installation
1.14.7 IEEE 1394 INSTALLATION
Component Check
No. Description Q’ty
1 IEEE1394 Interface Ass’y 1
2 UL/FCC Sheet 1
3 Caution Sheet 1
4 I/F Cable – 4 pin 1
5 I/F Cable – 6 pin 1

Installation Procedure
1. Remove the interface cover A ( x 2).
2. Install the IEEE 1394 board to the interface slot A ( x 2).
3. Turn on the main power switch.
4. Print out the configuration page (User Tools/ Counter > Printer Features > List/
Test Print), and then check that this device is detected.

1.14.8 BLUETOOTH INSTALLATION

Component Check
No. Description Q’ty
1 Bluetooth Interface Ass’y １
2 Bluetooth Card 1
3 Bluetooth Card Adapter 1
4 Bluetooth Card Cover 1
5 UL/FCC Sheet 1
6 Caution Sheet 1

Installation Procedure
1. Remove the interface cover A ( x 2).
2. Install the Wireless adaptor to the interface slot A ( x 2).
3. Install the Bluetooth card to the wireless adaptor.
4. Attach the antenna cap to the Bluetooth card.
5. Turn on the main power switch.
6. Print out the configuration page (User Tools/ Counter > Printer Features > List/
Test Print), and then check that this device is detected.

SM 1-75 B229
Controller Options

1.14.9 USB HOST INSTALLATION

Component Check
No. Description Q’ty
1 USB Host Interface Ass’y １
2 USB Cable 1
3 Ferrite Core 1
4 Clamp 1
5 UL Sheet 1

Installation Procedure
1. Remove the interface cover B ( x 2).
2. Install the USB host board to the interface slot B ( x 2).
3. Turn on the main power switch.
4. Print out the configuration page (User Tools/ Counter > Printer Features > List/
Test Print), and then check that this device is detected.

1.14.10 DATA OVERWRITE SECURITY UNIT TYPE D (B735)

Before You Begin the Procedure
1. Make sure that the following settings are not at their factory default values:
ƒ Supervisor login password
ƒ Administrator login name
ƒ Administrator login password

ƒ If any of these settings is at a factory default value, tell the customer these
settings must be changed before you do the installation procedure.
2. Make sure that “Admin. Authentication” is ON.
[System Settings] – [Administrator Tools] – [Administrator Authentication
Management] - [Admin. Authentication]

ƒ If this setting is OFF, tell the customer this setting must be ON before you
do the installation procedure.
3. Make sure that “Administrator Tools” is enabled (selected).
[System Settings] – [Administrator Tools] – [Administrator Authentication
Management] - [Available Settings]

B229 1-76 SM
 Controller Options

Installation
ƒ If this setting is disabled (not selected), tell the customer this setting must
be enabled (selected) before you do the installation procedure.

ACCESSORY CHECK
Check the quantity and condition of these accessories.
No. Description Q’ty
1 SD Card 1
2 Operating Instructions (CD-ROM) 1
3 Caution Sheet 1

Seal Check and Removal

ƒ You must check the box seals to make sure that they were not removed after
the items were sealed in the box at the factory before you do the installation.
1. Check the box seals [A] on each corner of the box.
ƒ Make sure that a tape is attached to each corner.
ƒ The surfaces of the tapes must be blank. If you see “VOID” on the tapes, do
not install the components in the box.
2. If the surfaces of the tapes do not show “VOID”, remove them from the
corners of the box.
3. You can see the “VOID” marks [B] when you remove each seal. In this
condition, they cannot be attached to the box again.

SM 1-77 B229
Controller Options

Installation Procedure

ƒ The machine must always be turned off and its power cord disconnected
before you do this procedure.

ƒ You must install the data overwrite protection unit in SD Card slot 2. However,
the PostScript option for this machine is also installed in SD Card slot 2. You
must do the SD Card Appli move procedure first if you have the PostScript
option installed and you want to install the Data Overwrite Security unit. Move
the Data Overwriting Security application (slot 3) to the SD Card that contains
the Printer/ Scanner application (slot 1). (* 5.7).

1. Turn off the main power switch if the machine is turned on.
2. Disconnect the network cable if the NIB is installed.
3. Turn on the main power switch.
4. Turn off the operation switch and main power switch.
5. Remove the slot cover [A] of SD card slot 2 ( x 1).
6. Turn the SD-card [B] label face to the rear of the machine. Then push it slowly
into slot 2 until you hear a click.
7. Connect the network cable if the NIB option is installed.
8. Turn on the main power switch.
9. Go into the SP mode and push “EXECUTE” with SP5-878.
10. Exit the SP mode and turn off the operation switch. Then turn off the main power
switch.
11. Turn on the machine power.

B229 1-78 SM
 Controller Options

Installation
12. Do SP5990-005 (SP print mode Diagnostic Report).
13. Make sure the ROM number and firmware version in area [a] of the diagnostic
report are the same as those in area [b].
ƒ [a]: “ROM Number/Firmware Version” – “HDD Format Option”
ƒ [b]: “Loading Program” – “GW2a_zoffy”

“ROM No. / Firmware

Diagnostic Report: “Loading Program” [a]
Version” [b]
HDD Format Option: GW2a_zoffy:
Data Overwrite Security Unit
B7355060 / 0.03 B7355060 / 0.03

ƒ The ROM number and firmware version number change when the
firmware is upgraded. However, the important thing is to make sure the
numbers in [a] are the same as the numbers in [b].

If the ROM numbers are not the same, or the version numbers are not the same, this
means the unit was not installed correctly.
If this happens:
ƒ Make sure the unit type (Type D).
ƒ If they do not match:
4. Replace the NV-RAM
5. Replace the “Data Overwrite Security Unit” (SD card) with the correct type
6. Do the installation procedure in this procedure again, from Step 1.
14. Go into the User Tools mode, and select System Settings> Administrator Tools>
Auto Erase Memory Setting> On.
15. Exit the User Tools mode.

SM 1-79 B229
Controller Options

1.14.11 REMOTE COMMUNICATION GATE INSTALLATION

Component Check
No. Description Q’ty
1 Remote Comm. Gate Interface Ass’y １
2 Cover 1
3 Screw 3

Installation Procedure

(Color Photo)
1. Remove one cover bracket [A] from the application cover. ( x 2)
2. Install the modem board into the card slot for the device ( x 2).
3. Confirm the following SP settings before starting installation flow
ƒ SP5-816-150 (To Select the country)
ƒ SP5-816-154 (To set out side connection telephone number)
ƒ SP5-816-161 (To set telephone number)
4. Follow the Installation flow as shown below with SP mode.

B229 1-80 SM
 Controller Options

Installation

SM 1-81 B229
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
 PM Tables

2. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE

2.1 PM TABLES

Maintenance
Preventive
ƒ After preventive maintenance work, reset the PM counter corresponding with
each PM part.
ƒ PM intervals (75k and 150k) indicate the number of prints.
Keys: AN: As necessary, C: Clean, R: Replace, L: Lubricate, I: Inspect
Optics
75k 150k AN NOTE
Exposure glass C C C Blower brush or Dry cloth

Engine
75k 150k AN NOTE
Print heads C C Dry cloth
Paper transport belt C R C
Charge roller R
Paper-dust Mylar C C
Discharge brush C C
Sub scan encoder R

Paper Feed
75k 150k AN NOTE
Paper feed roller (each tray) C R C Clean with water or alcohol.
Friction pad (each tray) C R C Clean with water or alcohol.
Bottom-plate pad (each tray) C C Clean with water or alcohol.
Paper feed roller (bypass tray) C C Clean with water or alcohol.
Friction pad (bypass tray) C C Clean with water or alcohol.
Bottom-plate pad (by-pass tray) C C Clean with water or alcohol.
Registration roller C C Clean with water or alcohol.
Relay rollers C C Clean with water or alcohol.
Paper feed guides C C Clean with water or alcohol.
Paper-dust Mylar C C Clean with water or alcohol.

SM 2-1 B229
PM Tables

Paper Exit
75k 150k AN NOTE
Exit transport rollers C

Maintenance
75k 150k AN NOTE
Maintenance unit R
First cap C C Remove the ink or Dry cloth.
Wiper C C Remove the ink or Dry cloth.
Ink collection bottle R

ADF/ARDF
80k AN NOTE
Feed belt R C Clean with water or alcohol.
Separation roller R C Clean with water or alcohol.
Pick-up roller R C Clean with water or alcohol.
Stamp R Replace when necessary.
White plate C Clean with water or alcohol.
DF exposure glass C Clean with water or alcohol.
Platen cover C Clean with water or alcohol.

Paper Tray Unit

60k 120k AN NOTE
Paper feed rollers R C Dry or damp cloth
Bottom-plate pads C C Dry cloth
Paper-feed guides C C Clean with water or alcohol.
Friction pads R C Dry or damp cloth
Relay clutch (B384 only) I
Feed clutches (B384 only) I
Relay roller (B384 only) C C Dry cloth

Duplex Unit
60k 120k AN NOTE
All rollers C Dry cloth

B229 2-2 SM
 PM Counter

2.2 PM COUNTER

2.2.1 HOW TO RESET THE PM COUNTERS

After preventive maintenance work, reset the PM counters (SP7-804-002 ~ 009) as follows.

Maintenance
Preventive
1. Activate the SP mode (see section 5.1).
2. Select SP 7-804 ("PM Count. Reset").
3. Select the PM counter of what you have replaced.
4. Press the OK key [A]. The message "EXECUTE" is displayed.

5. Press the button [B] below the message "EXECUTE." The messages
"EXECUTE?" followed by "CANCEL" and "EXECUTE" are displayed.

6. Wait until the message "Completed" is displayed.

7. Quit the SP mode.

SM 2-3 B229
PM Counter

2.2.2 PM COUNTER RESET LIST

PM counter reset must be required after replacing the PM parts. The following list shows
SP numbers that need to be reset.
PM Parts SP Number Remark
This SP clears all SP numbers related
GJ engine SP7959-001 with GJ engine. For details, refer to "SP
Mode Tables in Service Program Mode".
This SP clears the counter of
SP7223-001 to -005 (cleaning total),
SP7224-001 to -005 (refreshing total)
Maintenance unit SP7804-002
SP7225-001 to -005 (air releasing and
ink filling total).
SP 7803-002 (total pages)
This SP clears the counter of
Charge roller SP7804-003
SP7803-003 (page total).
This SP clears the counter of
Transport belt unit SP7804-004
SP7803-004 (page total).
This SP clears the counter of
SP7221-001 (total amount), SP7803-005
Ink collection tank SP7804-005
(total amount) and SP7941-001 (total
amount).
This SP clears the counter of
Flushing gate unit SP2505-001
SP7221-002 (page total).

B229 2-4 SM
 Cleaning Procedures

2.3 CLEANING PROCEDURES

2.3.1 MAINTENANCE UNIT

Maintenance
Preventive
(Color Photos)

Suction Cap
1. Remove the maintenance unit. ( "Maintenance Unit" in the section of
Replacement and Adjustment)
2. Turn the adjuster [A] of the maintenance unit clockwise to raise the suction cap.
3. Wrap the tip of screwdriver or similar tool [B] with a damp cloth.
4. Use the wrapped tip of the screwdriver to clean these:
5. Inside the cap
6. Around the cap to remove the hardened ink

ƒ Always wrap the tip of the tool with a damp cloth. This will not let the suction
cup get scratched. A scratched suction cap could cause poor print jobs.

Air Vent

1. Use a screwdriver or similar tool to remove hardened ink from inside the air
vent [A].

SM 2-5 B229
Cleaning Procedures

2. Use a dry cloth to remove ink splatter from inside the air vent.

Wiper

1. Turn the adjuster clockwise to raise the caps [A] and hold it open. ("Suction
Cap" in this Section)
2. Turn the adjuster again until the wiper [B] is open.
3. Use a dry cloth to remove ink splatter from the wiper and the area around it.

2.3.2 PRINT HEADS

Nozzle Cover, Nozzle Plate
Before doing this procedure:
ƒ Provide a delicate material cloth like one used for optical things.
ƒ Put on gloves to avoid any injury due to a metal edge.
ƒ Make sure of heads position (see the below picture) and clean the only defective
print head. Do not clean other print heads.

(Color Photos)

B229 2-6 SM
 Cleaning Procedures

Maintenance
Preventive
1. Remove the maintenance unit. ( "Maintenance Unit" in the section of
Replacement and Adjustment)
2. Push the carriage to the home position (completely to the rear).
3. Insert your hand into the opening [A] on the rear side of the copier.
4. Use a damp cloth to clean the nozzle cover [B] of the print heads.
5. Use part of the cloth that is clean to wipe the print head nozzle plate on the face
of the print head [C].

ƒ Important: Gently wipe the plate once or twice in the same direction (left or
right). This will not let the plate get damaged. Never clean the plate with
strong right-and-left motion. A damaged plate could cause poor print jobs.

After Cleaning the Maintenance Unit

(Color Photo)

Do these before you reinstall the maintenance unit:

1. Turn the adjuster [A] clockwise.
2. Lower the suction cap and the wiper blade. Make sure they are secure in the down
position.

SM 2-7 B229
Cleaning Procedures

3. Make sure the triangle marks [B] on the sides of the maintenance unit match. Do
this if the tips of the white and black triangle marks are not aligned:
ƒ Insert the tip of a flat head screwdriver into the adjuster. Then slowly
rotate it clockwise until the marks are aligned.

After you reassemble the copier:

1. Plug in and turn on the main power switch of the machine.
2. Clean all the print heads with SP2010-001 or "Clean Print-heads" <
"Maintenance" < "User Tools".
3. Print a Nozzle Check Pattern with SP3109-003 or "Nozzle Check Pattern" <
"Maintenance" < "User Tools" to confirm that the printer is operates correctly.
4. Check the test pattern. Do the procedure again if you see any bare patches in the
pattern.

ƒ Do this until the pattern is perfect. For more, see section "Troubleshooting".

2.3.3 TRANSPORT BELT

(Color Photo)

1. Remove the front cover. (see "Front Cover" in the Replacement Adjustment)
2. Open the inner right cover (Front door > Inner left cover > Inner right cover).
3. Use a damp cloth to wipe clean the surface of the transport belt [A. Then clean
the belt with a dry cloth.
4. Use the timing belt [B] to rotate the transport belt as you clean. This procedure
lets you clean the entire surface of the belt.
5. Make sure the surface of the belt is completely dry.

ƒ Water on the surface of the transport belt could interfere with the operation of the
printer.

B229 2-8 SM
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
 General Cautions

3. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT

3.1 GENERAL CAUTIONS

Do not turn off the main switch while any of the electrical components are active. Doing so
may result in damage to units as they are pulled out or replaced.
3.1.1 SCANNER UNIT
ƒ Use alcohol or glass cleaner to clean the exposure and scanning glass. This will

Replacement
Adjustment
reduce the static charge on the glass.
ƒ Use a blower brush or a water-moistened cotton pad to clean the mirrors and lenses.
ƒ Take care not to bend or crease the exposure lamp’s ribbon cable.
ƒ Do not disassemble the lens unit. Doing so will throw the lens and copy image out of
focus.
ƒ Do not turn any of the CCD positioning screws. Doing so will throw the CCD out of
position.
3.1.2 PAPER FEED
ƒ Do not touch the surface of the paper feed rollers.
ƒ To avoid misfeeds, the side and end fences in each paper tray must be positioned
correctly so as to align with the actual paper size.
3.1.3 IMPORTANT
ƒ If the optional tray heater or optics anti-condensation heater is installed, keep the
copier's power cord plugged in even while the main switch is off, so that the heater(s)
remain energized.

SM 3-1 B229
Special Tools and Lubricants

3.2 SPECIAL TOOLS AND LUBRICANTS

Part Number Description Q’ty

B6455010 SD Card 1
B6456705 PCMCIA Card Adapter 1
B6456810 USB Reader/Writer 1
VSSM9000 Digital Multimeter – FLUKE87 1
C4019503 20X Magnification Scope 1
A2579300 Grease Barrierta – S552R 1
52039501 Silicon Grease G-501 1
A0929503 C4 Color Test Chart (3 pcs/set) 1
A2929500 Test Chart – S5S (10 pcs/set) 1

B229 3-2 SM
 Exterior Covers and Operation Panel

3.3 EXTERIOR COVERS AND OPERATION PANEL

3.3.1 REAR COVER

Replacement
Adjustment
1. Rear cover [A] ( x 4)

3.3.2 REAR ENGINE UNIT COVER

1. Rear engine unit cover [A] (locking screw x 2)

SM 3-3 B229
Exterior Covers and Operation Panel

3.3.3 TOP LEFT FRONT, LEFT FRONT AND INTERFACE

COVER

1. Top left cover [A] ( x 1)

2. Left front cover [B] ( x 1)
3. Rear cover ( "Rear Cover")
4. Interface cover [C] ( x 2)

3.3.4 RIGHT DOOR

1. Rear cover ( "Rear Cover")

2. Open the right door [A].
3. Disconnect three harnesses [B] ( x 3).
4. Right door belt [C]

B229 3-4 SM
 Exterior Covers and Operation Panel

3.3.5 BY-PASS TRAY

Replacement
Adjustment
[B]

1. Right door ( "Right Door")

2. Open the by-pass tray [A].
3. By-pass tray [A] ( x 2, pin x 2)
4. Disconnect harness [B].

3.3.6 FRONT COVER

1. Pull out the paper tray 1.

2. Open the right door [A].
3. Open the front door [B].
4. Front cover [C] ( x 4)

SM 3-5 B229
Operation Panel

3.4 OPERATION PANEL

1. Press the "PUSH" bottom [A], and then tilt the operation panel.
2. Scanner stay right cover [B] ( x 1)
3. Scanner stay left cover [C] ( x 1)
4. Left front cover [D] ( x 1)
5. Push bottom [A]

6. Disconnect the I/F harness [E] ( x 1).

7. Left and right bushing [F] ( x 2 each)
8. Remove the operation panel [G] pressing the lever [H].

B229 3-6 SM
 Scanner Unit

3.5 SCANNER UNIT

3.5.1 EXPOSURE GLASS

Replacement
Adjustment
1. Open the ARDF/ADF or platen cover (if it is installed).
2. Rear scale [A] ( x 3)
3. Left scale [B] with exposure glass [C] ( x 2)

ƒ If the platen cover is installed, the left scale [B] is not attached the
exposure glass [C]. Remove them separately.
4. DF exposure glass [D] (if ARDF or ADF is installed.)

Reassembling the exposure glass

When reinstalling, make sure that the mark is at the rear left corner, and that the left edge is
aligned to the support on the frame.

3.5.2 LENS BLOCK

• Do not touch the paint-locked screws on the lens block. The position of the lens
assembly (black part) is adjusted before shipment.
• Do not grasp the PCB or the lens assembly when handling the lens block. The
lens assembly may slide out of position.

SM 3-7 B229
Scanner Unit

1. Exposure glass ( "Exposure Glass")

2. Lens cover [A] ( x 9)
3. Original length sensor bracket [B] ( x 1, x 1)
4. Ground cable [C] ( x 1)
5. Lens block [D] ( x 4, x 2, x 2)

ƒ After installing a new lens block, adjust the image quality ( "Printing"
in the Replace and Adjustment).

3.5.3 EXPOSURE LAMP

1. Remove the ARDF, ADF or platen cover (if it is installed).

2. Exposure glass ( "Exposure Glass")
3. Scanner stay right cover
4. Top right cover [A] ( x 2)

B229 3-8 SM
 Scanner Unit

5. Top front left cover

6. Interface cover
7. Top left cover [B] ( x 2)
8. Rear cover
9. Top rear cover [C] ( x 1)
10. Scanner top left frame [D] ( x 2)

Replacement
Adjustment
11. Scanner top rear frame [E] ( x 9, x 2, x 2)

12. Slide the first scanner [F] to the cutout of the scanner rear frame with moving the
timing belt.
13. Disconnect the scanner harness [G] from the lamp stabilizer ( x 4).
14. Tension clamp [H] ( x 1)
15. Cable holder [I] (hook x 1)
16. Press the plastic latch [J] and push the rear end of the lamp toward the front.
17. Exposure lamp [J] (with the cable, x 2, x 1)

SM 3-9 B229
Scanner Unit

Reassembling the Exposure Lamp

When you reassemble the exposure lamp, run the cable not to be slack. Slide the clamp [L]
to adjust the cable slack.

3.5.4 ORIGINAL WIDTH/LENGTH SENSOR

1. Exposure glass ( "Exposure Glass")

2. Two original width sensors [A] ( x 1 each)
3. Two original length sensors [B] ( x 1 each)

3.5.5 SCANNER MOTOR

1. Rear cover ( "Rear Cover")

2. Scanner motor with bracket [A] ( x 2, x 2, x 1, spring x 1)
3. Scanner motor ( x 2)

B229 3-10 SM
 Scanner Unit

ƒ When reassembling, install the belt first, and set the spring next.
After installing the motor, adjust the image quality ( Copy Adjustments:
Printing/Scanning).

3.5.6 LAMP STABILIZER

Replacement
Adjustment
1. Rear cover ( "Rear Cover")
2. Lamp stabilizer [A] ( x 2, locking support x 3)

SM 3-11 B229
Engine

3.6 ENGINE

3.6.1 ENGINE UNIT

ƒ When you install the new engine unit, remove the remaining ink with
SP2100-001 before replacing the old engine unit.
[B]
[C]
[A]

[D]

1. Remove the paper tray 1.

2. Open the right door.
3. Release the belt [A].
4. Connector cover bracket [B] ( x 2)
5. Open the front door [C].
6. Front cover [D] ( x 4)

ƒ When reassembling the connector cover bracket [B], make sure that the
bracket does not pinch any harnesses.

B229 3-12 SM
 Engine

7. Disconnect the six harnesses [E].

ƒ For details, refer to “Picture 1” on the following page.

8. Pull the two levers [F] out from the machine (cover x 1).
9. Remove the six screws ( x 6): two screws for ink cartridge housing, 4 screws
for engine unit.

ƒ For details, refer to “Picture 2” on the following page.

10. Pull the engine unit [G] slowly on the way.

Replacement
Adjustment
ƒ Make sure that any harness is not attached to the machine before pulling
the engine unit.

11. Hold the engine unit as shown, and then remove it from the machine.

12. Pull out the engine unit stay [H] before putting it on the flat place. Otherwise, the
ink-supply unit [I] may be damaged.

SM 3-13 B229
Engine

(Color Photo)

(Color Photos)

When installing the new engine unit

After installing the new engine unit, do the following procedure.
1. Install the ink cartridges provided with the new engine unit into the machine.
2. Plug in and turn on the main power switch.
3. The copier automatically starts to execute the releasing air mode.
4. Do SP2-100-001. This takes about 5 minutes.
5. Do the refreshing using either UP or SP2010-002.
6. Print out the nozzle check pattern using either UP or SP3109-003 and check it
out.
7. If the printout is not satisfactory, do the cleaning with UP or SP2010-001
8. Do the "GJ Eng Count, Reset" with SP7959-001.

B229 3-14 SM
 Engine

ƒ Take the ink cartridges used in this procedure back to your service office.
(Most of the ink in these cartridges is consumed by this procedure.)

You need to do following procedure before transporting the replaced engine unit:
ƒ Lock the carriage unit using the adjuster of the maintenance unit. Make sure
the two tops of the squares do not face each other. (See "Maintenance Unit"
below.)
ƒ Pack the replaced engine unit into the original carton box, which was used for

Replacement
the new engine unit. This prevents the unit from being damaged.

Adjustment
3.6.2 CONIJ (CONNECT INK JET MODULE)

(Color Photo)
1. Open the right door.
2. Connector cover bracket ( "Engine Unit")
3. CONIJ [A] ( x 2, all 's)

3.6.3 MAINTENANCE UNIT

The maintenance unit is engaged to the carriage unit when the machine is in stand-by
status. Lowering the maintenance unit [D] releases the engagement with the carriage unit.
So, do this step before removing the maintenance unit.

ƒ Put a sheet of paper on the floor during servicing. Ink may fall on the floor.

SM 3-15 B229
Engine

1. Rear engine unit cover ( "Rear Engine Unit Cover")

2. Turn the adjuster [A] clockwise by a screwdriver until the tops of the two
triangles [B] face each other.

ƒ Never turn the adjuster counterclockwise.

3. Maintenance unit [C] ( x 2, x 2)

3.6.4 INK COLLECTION TANK

1. Rear engine unit cover ( "Rear Engine Unit Cover")

2. Ink collection tank bracket [A] ( x 1)
3. Shutter bracket [B] ( x 1)

ƒ When reinstalling this bracket, make sure that the shutter bracket pushes
the switch [C] of the shutter.

B229 3-16 SM
 Engine

Replacement
Adjustment
4. Pull out the handle from the machine.
5. Ink collection tank [D] ( x 1)

3.6.5 SUB SCAN ENCODER AND ENCODER SENSOR

ƒ Never touch the rim of the sub scan encoder with bare hands.

1. Front cover ( "Front Cover")

2. Encoder cover [A] ( x 3)

SM 3-17 B229
Engine

(Color Photo)
3. Remove the screw [B] of the encoder sensor bracket, and then slide down the
bracket as shown [C].

ƒ Carefully slide down the bracket not to damage the encoder.

4. Remove the spring [D] and screw [E] of the sub scan encoder motor, and then
slide up the bracket as shown [F].

5. Release the timing belt [G].

6. Remove the sub scan encoder [H] (slider clip [I] x 1).
7. Remove the encoder sensor bracket [J] ( x 1).
8. Encoder sensor ( x 2)

B229 3-18 SM
 Engine

3.6.6 MAIN SCAN DRIVE MOTOR

Replacement
Adjustment
(Color Photo)
1. Engine unit ( "Engine Unit")
2. Main scan drive motor [A] at front right side of the engine ( x 2, x 1)

ƒ Do not touch the main scan encoder during this procedure.

3.6.7 SUB SCAN DRIVE MOTOR

(Color Photo)
1. Engine unit ( "Engine Unit")
2. Encoder cover ( "Sub Scan Encoder and Encoder Sensor")
3. Sub scan drive motor with the bracket [A] ( x 2, x 1, x 2, spring x 1)

SM 3-19 B229
Engine

3.6.8 FLUSHING GATE UNIT

1. Engine unit ( "Engine Unit")

2. Flushing gate unit [A] ( x 2)

3.6.9 TRANSPORT BELT UNIT

ƒ During this procedure, do not touch the main scan encoder with your hands.

1. Engine unit ( "Engine Unit")

2. Engine top cover [A] ( x 2)
3. Belt cleaning unit [B] ( x 2)
4. Flushing unit [C] ( x 2)
5. Encoder cover [D] ( x 3)

B229 3-20 SM
 Engine

Replacement
Adjustment
6. Paper guide plate [E] ( x 2)
7. Paper guide bracket [F] ( x 3, x 1)
8. Sub scan encoder ( "Sub Scan Encoder and Encoder Sensor")
9. Encoder sensor bracket ( "Sub Scan Encoder and Encoder Sensor")
10. Timing belt ( "Sub Scan Encoder and Encoder Sensor")

11. Turn the lock lever [G] clockwise from the view of front side, and then put it
inside the frame through cutout.
12. Slide the transport belt unit [H] to the front side, and then remove it as shown (
x 2, x 1, x 1, x 2, bushing x 1).

SM 3-21 B229
Engine

3.6.10 CHARGE ROLLER

ƒ During this procedure, do not touch the main scan encoder with your hands.

1. Transport belt unit ( "Flushing Gate Unit")

2. Charge roller unit [A] ( x 2)
3. Charge roller [B]

B229 3-22 SM
 Paper Feed

3.7 PAPER FEED

3.7.1 PAPER FEED MOTOR

Replacement
Adjustment
1. Rear cover ( "Rear Cover")
2. Ink collection tank ( " Ink Collection Tank")
3. Ink collection tank bracket [A] ( x 3, x 2)

4. Feed motor bracket [B] ( x 3, x 1)

5. Feed motor ( x 2)

SM 3-23 B229
Paper Feed

3.7.2 REGISTRATION CLUTCH

1. Rear cover ( "Rear Cover")

2. Registration clutch [A] ( x 1, x 1)

3.7.3 REGISTRATION ROLLER

(Color Photo)
1. Open the right door and release the belt ( "Right Door").
2. Front cover ( "Front Cover")
3. Registration roller gear [A] ( x 1)
4. Registration clutch ( "Registration Clutch")

B229 3-24 SM
 Paper Feed

Replacement
Adjustment
5. Remove the screw [B] and slide the registration guide plate [C] to the rear side.
6. Lift up the registration guide plate, and then remove it.

(Color Photo)
7. Remove the bushing [D] at rear side.

(Color Photo)
8. Slide the registration roller [E] to the rear side, and then remove it.

SM 3-25 B229
Paper Feed

3.7.4 PAPER FEED, PAPER TRANSPORT AND DUPLEX

CLUTCH

1. Rear cover ( "Right Door")

2. Disconnect three harnesses and release six clamps. ( x 3, x 6)
3. Clutch cover bracket [A] ( x 2, x 2, bushing x 2)
4. Paper feed clutch [B] ( x 1)
5. Paper transport clutch [C] ( x 1)
6. Duplex clutch [D] ( x 1)

3.7.5 PAPER FEED ROLLER AND FRICTION PAD

1. Remove the paper tray 1.

2. Clip [A]

B229 3-26 SM
 Paper Feed

3. Push the shaft back through the opening, and tilt it up.

ƒ If the black plastic bushing [B] comes off, be sure to remount it when
reinstalling the shaft.
4. Paper feed roller [C]
5. Friction pad [D] (spring x 1)

3.7.6 PAPER END SENSOR

Replacement
Adjustment
1. Engine unit ( "Engine Unit")
2. Remove the paper tray 1.
3. Paper end sensor bracket [A] ( x 1, x 1)
4. Paper end sensor [B]

SM 3-27 B229
Paper Feed

3.7.7 BY-PASS PAPER SIZE SWITCH

1. By-pass tray ( "By-pass Tray")

2. Tray lever [A] ( x 1, pin x 1)
3. Turn over the inner tray [B].

4. By-pass paper size switch [C] x 1, x 1)

ƒ When reassembling the by-pass paper size switch, the two mark face
each other as shown.

B229 3-28 SM
 Paper Feed

3.7.8 BY-PASS FEED ROLLER AND PAPER END SENDOR

Replacement
Adjustment
1. Open the right door and release the belt ( "Right Door")
2. Paper guide [A] ( x 2)
3. Friction pad unit [B] ( x 3)
4. By-pass feed roller unit [C] ( x 3, x 1, x 1, x 4, bushing x 1)

5. By-pass feed roller [D]

6. By-pass paper end sensor [E]

SM 3-29 B229
Paper Feed

3.7.9 REGISTRATION SENSOR

1. Open the right door and release the belt ( "Right Door").
2. Slide the registration guide plate [A] to the rear side, and then remove the
registration sensor unit holding it up ( x 1).
3. Sensor cover [B]
4. Registration sensor [C] ( x 1)

ƒ When reassembling, make sure that the spacer [D] is installed to the
registration guide plate.

B229 3-30 SM
 Paper Feed

3.7.10 ONE-SHEET BY-PASS PAPER END SENSOR

Replacement
Adjustment
1. Open the right door.
2. Open the multi by-pass tray.
3. Open the one-sheet by-pass tray [A].
4. Sensor cover [B] (hook x 2)
5. One-sheet by-pass paper end sensor [C] ( x 1)

3.7.11 PAPER SIZE SWITCH

1. Remove the paper tray 1.

2. Paper size switch bracket [A] ( x 1, x 1)
3. Paper size switch [B]

SM 3-31 B229
Paper Exit

3.8 PAPER EXIT

3.8.1 PAPER EXIT TRAY

1. Open the paper exit tray [A].

2. Open the front door [B].
3. Paper exit tray (pin x 2)

3.8.2 PAPER EXIT UNIT

1. Paper exit tray ( "Paper Exit Tray")

2. Top left front cover, left front cover and interface cover ( "Top Left Front, Left
Front and Interface Cover")
3. Paper exit unit [A] ( x 4, x 3)

B229 3-32 SM
 Paper Exit

3.8.3 PAPER EXIT SENSOR

Replacement
Adjustment
1. Paper exit unit ( "Paper Exit Unit")
2. Guide plate [A] ( x 4)
3. Paper exit sensor bracket [B] ( x 1, x 1)
4. Paper exit sensor [C]

3.8.4 JUNCTION GATE SENSOR

1. Paper exit unit ( "Paper Exit Unit")

2. Junction gate sensor bracket [A] at the bottom of the paper exit tray ( x 1,
x 1)
3. Junction gate sensor [B]

SM 3-33 B229
Paper Exit

3.8.5 PAPER EXIT MOTOR

1. Paper exit unit ( "Paper Exit Unit")

2. Paper exit motor [A] at the bottom of the paper exit tray ( x 2, x 2, x 1)

B229 3-34 SM
 Electrical Components

3.9 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS

3.9.1 CONTROLLER BOX

Replacement
Adjustment
1. Rear cover ( "Rear Cover")
2. Interface cover ( "Top Left Front, Left Front and Interface Cover")
3. Controller box [A] ( x 5, x 1)

ƒ When reassembling the controller box, maker sure that the connector of
the controller box is firmly connected to the IPU board.

3.9.2 CONTROLLER BOARD

1. Rear cover ( "Rear Cover")

SM 3-35 B229
Electrical Components

2. Interface cover ( "Top Left Front, Left Front and Interface Cover")
3. FCU cover [A] ( x 3)
4. Controller box cover [B] ( x 13)

5. I/F covers [C] (knob screw x 2 each)

6. Slot cover ( "Controller Box")
7. Remove the all slot cards.
8. Remove the clamp [D]
9. Controller board [E] ( x 5)

When replacing the controller board

Remove the two NVRAMs (FRAM) from the old controller board and install them in the
same place on the new controller board.

3.9.3 NVRAM AND DIMM RAM

1. Rear cover ( "Rear Cover")

2. Interface cover ( "Top Left Front, Left Front and Interface Cover")

B229 3-36 SM
 Electrical Components

3. Controller box cover ( "Controller Board")

4. RAM DIMM [A]
5. NVRAM [B]

ƒ When you install the new NVRAM, install the two NVRAMs at the same
time even one NVRAM is not defective.

3.9.4 IO BOARD

Replacement
Adjustment
1. Rear cover ( "Rear Cover")
2. IO board bracket [A] (All , x 2, x 2)
3. IO board [B] ( x 5)

3.9.5 PSU BOARD

[D]
[C]
BLACK
WHITE

SM 3-37 B229
Electrical Components

1. Rear cover ( "Rear Cover")

2. Ground cable [A] ( x 1)
3. PSU board [B] (All , x 2)

ƒ When reassembling the PSU board, make sure that black or brown wire is
connected to the terminal [C] and white or blue wire is connected to the
terminal [D]. The combination of the wire colors differs depending on the
model destination.

3.9.6 IPU BOARD

1. Controller box ( "Controller Board")

2. IPU board bracket [A] ( x 2, x 2, ground cable x 1)
3. IPU board [B] ( x 2, locking support x 1)

B229 3-38 SM
 Electrical Components

3.9.7 BCU BOARD

Replacement
Adjustment
1. Controller box ( "Controller Board")
2. IPU board bracket ( "IPU Board")
3. BCU board [A] (All , x 4, flat cable x 1)

SM 3-39 B229
Image Adjustment

3.10 IMAGE ADJUSTMENT

You can do four image adjustment functions as shown below with "Maintenance" in the
"User Tools".
ƒ Adjust Paper Feed
ƒ Nozzle Blockage Check
ƒ Adjust Print Head Position
ƒ Registration (Print Start Position)

3.10.1 PREPARING FOR TEST PRINTING

Make sure A4 or LTR size paper/SEF is loaded in the paper tray 1.
Make sure the copier is ready to print.

3.10.2 ADJUST PAPER FEED

Print the ‘Adjust Paper Feed Test Pattern’ and do this adjustment if you see broken
horizontal lines or uneven colors in the printouts:
1. Enter the UP or SP.
2. Do the "Adjust Paper Feed" (User Tools > Maintenance > Adjustment > Adjust
Paper Feed) or SP3109-004 to print the test pattern.

3. Examine the test print. Then enter the number of the pattern that shows the best
appearance (the horizontal lines should be perfectly flat).
4. Do the instructions on screen to complete the adjustment.

B229 3-40 SM
 Image Adjustment

3.10.3 NOZZLE BLOCKAGE CHECK

One or more of the nozzles is blocked if you see these:
ƒ Broken lines
ƒ Uneven patches of white in the printouts.
At this time, do this procedure:
1. Enter the UP or SP.
2. Do the "Nozzle Check Pattern" (User Tools > Maintenance > Nozzle Check
Pattern) or SP3109-003 to print the test pattern.

Replacement
Adjustment
ƒ [A]: Normal Pattern Lines are crisp and unbroken.
ƒ [B]: Abnormal Pattern Lines are broken; patches of white spoil the
appearance of the pattern.
3. Examine the pattern. Then check which color does not show. This information
lets you know which nozzle is blocked.
4. Do the instructions on the screen to select the color you want to correct. Then
clean the print heads.

ƒ Do “Clean Print Heads (Normal)” up to 3 times to correct the problem. Do

“Clean Print Heads (Full)” once if the problem stays.
ƒ The “Full” cleaning uses a lot of ink. Do not do the “Full” cleaning until you
have done the “Normal” cleaning at least 3 times.
ƒ For more, please refer to Section “4. Troubleshooting”.

SM 3-41 B229
Image Adjustment

3.10.4 ADJUST PRINT HEAD POSITION

The print head is out of position if you see these:
ƒ Broken vertical lines
ƒ Smeared or streaked colors
At this time, do this procedure:
1. Enter the UP or SP.
2. Do the "Head Position Adjust" (User Tools > Maintenance > Adjustment > Head
Position Adjust) with UP or the “Head Gap Adjustment 300dpi or 1200dpi” with
or SP3109-001 or -002 to print the test pattern.

3. Examine the test print. Then, for each row (Letters A to I) enter the numbers of
the column that show the best print alignment.. For example “+2” in the sample
above.

B229 3-42 SM
 Image Adjustment

Keys:
K1 = Black print head 1
K2 = Black print head 2
C = Cyan print head
M = Magenta print head
Y = Yellow print head
Forward = Scanning direction from rear to front
Reverse = Scanning direction from front to rear

Replacement
This test grid is made as follows. K1 reverse is the standard for alignment.

Adjustment
ƒ Line A: K1 prints forward, then K1 prints reverse.
ƒ Line B: C prints reverse, then K1 prints reverse.
ƒ Line C: C prints forward, then K1 prints reverse.
ƒ Line D: M prints reverse, then K1 prints reverse.
ƒ Line E: M prints forward, then K1 prints reverse.
ƒ Line F: Y prints reverse, then K1 prints reverse.
ƒ Line G: Y prints forward, then K1 prints reverse.
ƒ Line H: K2 prints reverse, then K1 prints reverse.
ƒ Line I: K2 prints forward, then K1 prints reverse.

4. Do the instructions on screen to complete the adjustment.

SM 3-43 B229
Image Adjustment

3.10.5 REGISTRATION
1. Enter the UP or SP.
2. Do the "Registration" (User Tools > Maintenance > Adjustment > Registration) or
SP3109-005 to print the test pattern.

3. Examine the test print. Then enter the numbers of the patterns that show the
best appearance for the:
ƒ Print direction (Main Scan)
ƒ Paper feed direction. (Sub Scan)
4. Do the instructions on screen to complete the adjustment.

B229 3-44 SM
 Copy Adjustments: Printing/Scanning

3.11 COPY ADJUSTMENTS: PRINTING/SCANNING

ƒ You need to perform the adjustment after executing a Memory All Clear, and
after replacing or adjusting any of the following parts.
ƒ First or second scanner
ƒ Lens Block
ƒ Scanner Motor
ƒ Paper Tray

Replacement
Adjustment
ƒ Paper Side Fence
ƒ For detailed explanations about how to access and use the SP modes, see
Section "Service Program Mode".

3.11.1 PRINTING

ƒ Make sure the paper is installed correctly in each paper tray before you start
these adjustments.
ƒ Use the Trimming Area Pattern (SP5-902, No.10) to print the test pattern for
the printing adjustments below.
ƒ Set SP 5-902 to 0 again after completing these printing adjustments.

SM 3-45 B229
Copy Adjustments: Printing/Scanning

Registration - Leading Edge/Side-to-Side

1. Check the leading edge registration for each paper feed station, and adjust each
of these registrations using SP1-001.
2. Check the side-to-side registration for each paper feed station, and adjust these
registrations using SP1-002. (Adjust the trays in order: the 1st tray first, then the
2nd tray, etc.)

A: Leading Edge Registration, B: Trailing Edge Registration

Tray SP mode Specification

Any paper tray SP1-001-1
By-pass feed SP1-001-2 2 ±1.5 mm
Duplex SP1-001-3
1st tray SP1-002-1
2nd tray
SP1-002-2
(Optional PFU tray 1)
3rd tray
SP1-002-3
(Optional PFU tray 2) 2 ±1.5 mm
By-pass tray SP1-002-4
One-sheet by-pass
SP1-002-5
feed
Duplex SP1-002-6

B229 3-46 SM
 Copy Adjustments: Printing/Scanning

Blank Margin

ƒ If the leading edge or side-to-side registration cannot be adjusted to within the

specification, then adjust the leading-edge blank margin or the left-side blank
margin.
1. Check the trailing edge and right side edge blank margins, and adjust them
using the following SP modes.

A: Trailing Edge Blank Margin, B: Right Edge Blank Margin

Replacement
Adjustment
C: Leading Edge Blank Margin, D: Right Edge Blank Margin

SP mode Specification
Trailing edge SP2-103-2 2 +2.0/ -1.5 mm
Right edge SP2-103-4 2 ± 2.0 mm
Leading edge SP2-103-1 3.3 +2.7/ -1.3 mm
Left edge SP2-103-3 2 ± 2.0 mm

SM 3-47 B229
Copy Adjustments: Printing/Scanning

3.11.2 SCANNING

ƒ Before doing the following scanner adjustments, check and adjust the printing
leading-edge and side-to-side registrations and the printing blank margins (as
described above).
ƒ Use an A3 test chart to perform the following adjustments.

Registration: Platen Mode

1. Place the test chart on the exposure glass and make a copy from one of the feed
stations.
2. Check the leading edge and side-to-side registration, and adjust as necessary
using the following SP modes.

A: Leading Edge Registration, B: Side-to-Side Registration

SP mode Specification
Leading edge SP4-010 0 ± 2.0 mm
Side-to-side SP4-011 0 ± 2.5 mm

Sub-scan Magnification
1. Place the OS-A3 test chart on the exposure glass and make a copy from one of
the feed stations.
2. Check the magnification ratio. If necessary, adjust the magnification using the
following SP mode.
SP mode Specification
Sub-scan magnification SP4-008 ± 1.0%

B229 3-48 SM
 Copy Adjustments: Printing/Scanning

3.11.3 ADF IMAGE ADJUSTMENT

Registration and Blank Margin

Replacement
Adjustment
A: Leading Edge Registration, B: Side-to-Side Registration

ƒ Make a temporary test chart as shown above, using A3/11" x 17" paper.
1. Place the temporary test chart on the ADF and make a copy from one of the feed
stations.
2. Check the registrations, and adjust as necessary using the appropriate SP
modes, as follows.

SP mode
Side-to-side registration 1st side SP6-006-1
Leading edge registration SP6-006-2
Blank margin for the trailing edge SP6-006-3
Side-to-side registration 2nd side SP6-006-4

SM 3-49 B229
Copy Adjustments: Printing/Scanning

Sub-scan Magnification

ƒ Make a temporary test chart as shown above, using A3/11" x 17" paper.
1. Place the temporary test chart on the ADF and make a copy from one of the feed
stations.
2. Check the registration, and if necessary adjust it using SP6-006-005. The
specification is ± 1.0%.

B229 3-50 SM
TROUBLESHOOTING
 Service Call

4. TROUBLESHOOTING

4.1 SERVICE CALL

4.1.1 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS

There are 4 levels of service call conditions.
Level Definition Reset Procedure
Fusing unit SC’s displayed on the operation
This level is not used for this
A panel. The machine is disabled. The user
machine (B229).
cannot reset the SC.
SC’s to disable only the features that use the
defective item. Although these SC’s are not
Turn the main power switch off and
B shown to the user under normal conditions,

shooting
Trouble-
on.
they are displayed on the operation panel only
when the defective feature is selected.
SC’s that are not shown on the operation
C Logging only
panel. They are internally logged.
The SC is displayed on the operation panel.
Turning the operation switch or main power
Turn the main power switch off and
D switch off then on resets the SC. The SC is
on.
redisplayed if it occurs after the main power
switch is turned on again.

ƒ If the problem concerns electrical circuit boards, first disconnect then

reconnect the connectors before you replace the PCBs.
ƒ If the problem concerns a motor lock, first check the mechanical load before
you replace motors or sensors.
ƒ When a Level “B” SC occurs while in an SP mode, the machine cannot display
the SC number. If this occurs, check the SC number after leaving the SP
mode.
ƒ The machine reboots automatically when the machine issues a Level “D” SC
code. This is done for Level “D” SC codes only.
When a Level “D” SC code occurs
A screen opens on the operation panel to tell the user that 1) an error occurred, 2) the job

SM 4-1 B229
Service Call

that the machine does at that time will be erased, and 3) the machine will reboot
automatically after approximately 30 seconds.
The user can: 1) stop until the machine reboots automatically after a short time, or 2) touch
“Reset” on the screen to reset the machine immediately, and go back to the copy screen.
If the operator does not touch “Reset”, the next message tells the user that 1) the machine
reset automatically and 2) the previous job was lost and must be done again. After the user
reads the message, the user touches “Confirm” on the screen. The next screen shows the
number and title of the SC code, and stops until the user turns the machine off and on.
If the operator touches “Reset” to bypass the 30-second interval for the machine to reboot,
the machine reboots immediately and the operation panel displays the copy screen.

ƒ Do not try to use the operation panel during an automatic reboot.

ƒ If the Remote Service System is used, the SC code is sent immediately to the
Service Center

ƒ Never turn off the main power switch when the power LED is lit or flashing. To
avoid damaging the hard disk or memory, press the operation switch to switch
the power off, wait for the power LED to go off, and then switch the main
power switch off.
4.1.2 SC TABLE
Engine SC
SC1xx
No.
Symptom Possible Cause/Countermeasure
Definition
101 Exposure lamp error
Shading at AGC
ƒ Defective exposure lamp
ƒ Defective lamp stabilizer
The shading data peak does not ƒ Defective exposure lamp
-001 D reach the specified threshold (64/255 harness
digit) when the machine executes the 1. Replace the exposure lamp.
shading at initialization. 2. Replace the lamp stabilizer.
3. Replace the exposure lamp
harness.

B229 4-2 SM
 Service Call

Shading at scanning
The shading data peak does not
-002 D reach the specified threshold (64/255
Same as SC101-001
digit) when the machine executes the
shading at scanning.
Scanner home position error 1
ƒ Defective scanner motor drive
board
ƒ Defective scanner motor
ƒ Defective home position sensor
The scanner home position sensor
120 D ƒ Defective harness
does not detect the “OFF” condition
1. Replace the scanner motor drive
during operation.
board.

shooting
2. Replace the scanner motor.

Trouble-
3. Replace the scanner HP sensor.
4. Replace the harness.
Scanner home position error 2
The scanner home position sensor
121 D
does not detect the “ON” condition Same as SC120
during operation.
Black level detection error
ƒ Defective SBU
ƒ Defective harness
The black level cannot be adjusted
141 D 1. Replace the harness.
within the target value during the
2. Replace the SBU.
zero clamp after the AGC.
3. Replace the IPU.
4. Replace the BCU.
White level detection error
ƒ Defective SBU
ƒ Defective harness
The white level cannot be adjusted
142 D ƒ Defective optics components
within the target value during the
1. Replace the exposure lamp.
zero clamp after the AGC.
2. Replace the lamp stabilizer.
3. Replace the harness.

SM 4-3 B229
Service Call

4. Replace the SBU.

5. Replace the IPU.

6. Replace the BCU.
144 SBU communication error
SBU connection error
ƒ Insufficient power supply for
SBU
ƒ Defective SBU
ƒ Defective harness
The SBU connection cannot be
-001 D ƒ Defective detection port on the
detected at power on or recovery
BCU
from the energy save mode.
1. Replace the harness.
2. Replace the SBU.
3. Replace the IPU.
4. Replace the BCU.
SBU serial communication error
The unusual register value from the
-002 D SBU is detected more than three
Same as SC144-001
times at power on or recovery from
the energy save mode.
GBSBU reset error
The GBSBU cannot be reset at
-003 D
power on or recovery from the Same as SC144-001
energy save mode
Cannot finish the SBU communication.
-004 D The communication between BCU
Same as SC144-001
and SBU has not completed.
IPU error
ƒ Defective IPU
ƒ Defective BCU
161 The error result of self-diagnostic by
D ƒ Defective connection between
-001 the Taurus (ASIC on the IPU) is
IPU and SBU
detected.
1. Check the connection between
IPU and SBU.

B229 4-4 SM
 Service Call

2. Replace the IPU.

ASIC (Taurus) memory error
The memory check error of ASIC
161 ƒ Defective IPU (Taurus memory)
D (Taurus) is detected when a machine
-002 ƒ Unusual power source
turns on or recovers from the energy
3. Replace the IPU.
saver mode.
Copy Data Security Unit error
ƒ The copy data security board ƒ Incorrect installation of the copy
is not detected when the copy data security board
data security function is set ƒ Defective copy data security
165 D "ON" with the initial setting. board
ƒ A device check error occurs 1. Reinstall the copy data security
when the copy data security board.
function is set "ON" with the 2. Replace the copy data security

shooting
Trouble-
initial setting. board.

SC2xx
No.
Symptom Possible Cause/Countermeasure
Definition
Maintenance unit home position error
ƒ The maintenance unit sensor
does not get "OFF" signal after
ƒ Defective maintenance unit
the maintenance unit motor
home position sensor
has rotated.
ƒ Defective maintenance unit drive
ƒ The maintenance unit sensor
200 D motor
does not get "ON" signal after
1. Replace the maintenance unit
the maintenance unit motor
home position sensor.
has rotated for certain time
2. Replace the maintenance unit
when it is assumed that the
drive motor.
maintenance unit has to return
to the home position.
Tank full lever error
202 D ƒ The position of the tank full ƒ Defective tank full sensor
lever does not stay at the tank ƒ Tank full lever bent or broken

SM 4-5 B229
Service Call

No.
Symptom Possible Cause/Countermeasure
Definition
full position after ink ƒ Incorrect ink suction
initialization or air releasing. 1. Check the harness of the tank
ƒ The position of the tank full full sensor.
lever is not detected at ink 2. Replace the GJ engine.
suction. 3. Replace the maintenance unit.
Main scan encoder signal error
ƒ Defective main scan encoder
ƒ Defective main scan encoder
sensor
ƒ Defective main scan drive motor
The input signal from the main scan
210 D 1. Replace the main scan
encoder is not detected during
encoder.
operation of the main scan motor.
2. Replace the main scan
encoder senor.
3. Replace the main scan drive
motor.
Main scan encoder error
ƒ Defective main scan drive motor
ƒ Main scan encoder coming off
ƒ Defective main scan encoder
sensor
The carriage unit does not stop at
211 D 1. Replace the main scan drive
home position (rear side) or reverse
motor.
position (front side).
2. Reinstall or replace the main
scan encoder.
3. Replace the main scan
encoder sensor.

B229 4-6 SM
 Service Call

SC5xx
No.
Symptom Possible Cause/Countermeasure
Definition
Tray 2 (optional paper tray unit) feed error
ƒ The lift sensor is not activated ƒ Defective or disconnected tray
within 18 seconds twice lift motor
consecutively after the tray lift ƒ Paper or other obstacle trapped
motor starts lifting the bottom between tray and motor
502 C
plate. ƒ Pick-up solenoid disconnected or
ƒ When the tray lowers, the tray blocked by an obstacle
lift sensor does not go off ƒ Reverse connection of harness
within 1.5 sec twice 1. Remove an obstacle.
consecutively. 2. Replace the lift sensor.

shooting
Tray 3 (optional paper tray unit) feed error

Trouble-
ƒ Defective or disconnected tray
ƒ The lift sensor is not activated
lift motor
within 18 seconds twice
ƒ Paper or other obstacle trapped
consecutively after the tray lift
between tray and motor
motor starts lifting the bottom
503 C ƒ Pick-up solenoid disconnected or
plate.
blocked by an obstacle
ƒ When the tray lowers, the tray
ƒ Reverse connection of harness
lift sensor does not go off
1. Check the harness.
within 1.5 sec twice
2. Remove an obstacle.
consecutively.
3. Replace the lift sensor.
Paper feed motor lock error (optional paper tray unit)
ƒ Defective paper feed motor
A motor lock signal is not detected
ƒ Too much load on the drive
506 C for more than 1.5 s or the lock signal
mechanism
is not detected for more than 1.0 s
1. Remove too much load.
during rotation.
2. Replace the paper feed motor.

SM 4-7 B229
Service Call

Sub scan motor error

ƒ Defective sub scan encoder
sensor
ƒ Timing belt of the sub scan
The sub scan motor does not reply encoder is come off.
520 D for 100ms when a machine sends ƒ Defective sub scan motor
the "stop" command to the sub scan 1. Check the sub scan encoder
motor. and timing belt.
2. Replace the sub scan encoder
sensor.
3. Replace the sub scan motor.
Charge bias leak
570 D High voltage unit sends a signal of ƒ Defective charge roller
charge bias leak. ƒ Defective high voltage unit
Ink head temperature error
ƒ Disconnect harness
ƒ Defective temperature sensor at
The temperature sensor at the ink
571 D the ink head
head detects unusual temperature
1. Check the connector (CN138).
for 8 seconds.
2. Replace the temperature
sensor at the ink head.
Belt temperature error
ƒ Disconnect harness
ƒ Defective temperature sensor at
The temperature sensor at the belt the ink head
572 D
unit detects unusual temperature for 1. Check the connector (CN139,
8 seconds. CONIJ-CN503 and CN507).
2. Replace the temperature
sensor at the ink head.

B229 4-8 SM
 Service Call

Belt temperature and absolute humidity error

ƒ Disconnect harness
ƒ The temperature sensor at the
ƒ Defective temperature sensor at
belt unit detects less than
the ink head
573 D –15°C or more than 85°C.
1. Check the connector (CN114).
ƒ The humidity sensor at the belt
2. Replace the temperature
unit detects less than 0% or
sensor and/or humidity sensor
more than 100%.
at the ink head.

Controller SC
SC6xx
No.
Symptom Possible Cause/Countermeasure
Definition

shooting
Trouble-
Mechanical counter error
The machine detects disconnection ƒ Disconnected mechanical
610 D
of a mechanical counter when counter
SP5987-1 is set to "ON". 1. Connect a mechanical counter.
Communication command error between BCU and ADF
ƒ Defective connection between
ADF and BCU
A communication error occurs after ƒ Defective ADF
620 D the machine detects the correct ƒ Defective IPU
communication between BCU and 1. Check the connection between
ADF. ADF and BCU.
2. Replace the ADF.
3. Replace the IPU.
Memory address command error
ƒ Loose connection
ƒ Defective controller
The BCU does not receive a memory
ƒ Defective BCU
687 D address command from the
1. Check if the controller is firmly
controller 120 seconds after paper is
connected to the BCU.
in the position for registration.
2. Replace the controller.
3. Replace the BCU.

SM 4-9 B229
Service Call

No.
Symptom Possible Cause/Countermeasure
Definition
CSS communication error
The machine tries to communicate ƒ Communication error on the
630 C with one of the terminals of a public telephone network
relevant service center. An error (logged only; the machine can
signal returns. still operate)
MF accounting device error 1
The machine sends a data frame.
632 D No normal end signal returns. ƒ Defective or broken line
This symptom happens three between machine and device
times.
MF accounting device error 2
The machine is communicating
633 D ƒ Defective or broken line
with the accounting device. The
between machine and device
break signal returns.
MF accounting device error 3
ƒ Defective accounting device
634 D A backup RAM error is reported controller
from the accounting device. ƒ Defective battery in the
accounting device
MF accounting device error 4
ƒ Defective accounting device
635 D A battery voltage error is reported controller
from the accounting device. ƒ Defective battery in the
accounting device
636 SD Card Error
Expanded authentication module error
There is no expanded
authentication module in the 1. Install the correct SD card or the
-001 B machine. file of the expanded
The SD card or the file of the authentication module.
expanded authentication module is 2. Install the DESS module.
broken.

B229 4-10 SM
 Service Call

No.
Symptom Possible Cause/Countermeasure
Definition
There is no DESS module in the
machine.
Version error
The version of the expanded
-002 B 1. Install the correct file of the
authentication module is not
expanded authentication module.
correct.
650 Communication error of the remote service modem (Cumin-M)
Authentication error
1. Check and set the correct user
-001 D The authentication for the Cumin-M
name (SP5816-156) and
fails at a dial up connection.
password (SP5816-157).
D Incorrect modem setting

shooting
Trouble-
Dial up
fails due
-004 to the 3. Check and set the correct AT
incorrect command (SP5819-160).
modem
setting.
Communication line error
The supplied voltage is not
-005 D sufficient due to the defective 1. Consult with the user's local
communication line or defective telephone company.
connection.
Incorrect network setting
-011 D Both the NIC and Cumin-M are
1. Disable the NIC with SP5985-1.
activated at the same time.
Modem board error
The modem board does not work 1. Install the modem board.
-012 D properly even though the setting of 2. Check and reset the modem
the modem board is installed with a board setting with SP5816.
dial up connection. 3. Replace the modem board.

SM 4-11 B229
Service Call

No.
Symptom Possible Cause/Countermeasure
Definition
651 Incorrect dial up connection
Program parameter error
The unexpected error occurs when
-001 C the modem (Cumin-M) tries to call
ƒ Software bug.
the center with a dial up
connection.
Program execution error
-002 C
Same as SC651-001. ƒ Software bug.
Engine startup error
Just after the main power is turned
on or the machine is recovering ƒ Poor connection between the
670 D from auto off mode, the engine BCU and controller board
ready signal assertion fails. ƒ Defective BCU
Just after the main power is turned ƒ Defective controller board
on, the engine does not respond.
Controller-to-operation panel communication error at startup
ƒ Controller stalled
ƒ Controller board installed
incorrectly
ƒ Defective controller board
After powering on the machine, ƒ Operation panel connector
communication between the loose or defective
672 D
controller and operation panel does ƒ Poor connection of DIMM and
not begin, or the communication is optional boards on the
interrupted after a normal startup. controller board
1. Check the setting of
SP5875-001. If the setting is
set to "1 (OFF)", change it to "0
(OFF)".

B229 4-12 SM
 Service Call

SBU/IPU communication error

While data is sent between the ƒ Defective scanner unit cable
685 D
scanner and BCU board, a ƒ Defective SBU board
communication error has occurred. ƒ Defective BCU board

SC8xx
No.
Symptom Possible Cause/Countermeasure
Definition
Watchdog error
While the system program is
ƒ Defective controller board
818 B running, no other programs
1. Reinstall the system program.
can run (due to a bus hold or
2. Replace the controller board.
endless loop).

shooting
Trouble-
819 Kernel stop
[0696e] B Process error
ƒ Defective RAM DIMM
ƒ Defective SD card in slot 1
ƒ Defective controller
ƒ Software error
1. Check and/or replace the
System completely down RAM DIMM.
2. Check and/or replace the
SD card in slot 1.
3. Replace the controller.
4. See NOTE at the end of the
SC table.
[0766d] B VM full error
ƒ Defective RAM DIMM
ƒ Defective SD card in slot 1
ƒ Defective controller
Unexpected system memory
ƒ Software error
size
1. Check and/or replace the
RAM DIMM.
2. Check and/or replace the

SM 4-13 B229
Service Call

No.
Symptom Possible Cause/Countermeasure
Definition
SD card in slot 1.
3. Replace the controller.
See NOTE at the end of the SC
table.
Cache error
[4361] B ƒ Defective CPU
Cache error in the CPU
Replace the controller board.
[----] B The others
ƒ Defective memory
ƒ Defective flash memory
Error in OS
ƒ Defective CPU
Replace the controller board.
Self-Diagnostic Error: CPU
B [0001-0015] [000A-000D]: Detailed error code
ƒ Defective CPU device
During the boot monitor ƒ Defective boot monitor
program and self-diagnostic, program or self-diagnostic
any exception or cut-in are not program
supposed to happen. If these 1. Replace the controller
happen, it is defined as SC. board.
Reinstall the system firmware.
820
B [00FF]: Detailed error code
ƒ Defective CPU
ƒ Defective local bus
1. Turn the main power
Cache access error in the switch off and on.
CPU 2. Reinstall the system
program.
3. Replace the controller
board.

B229 4-14 SM
 Service Call

No. Symptom Possible Cause/Countermeasure

Definition
[0601, 0602, 0605, 0606, 0607, 0609]: Detailed error code
Exceptional command does
B ƒ Defective CPU devices
not operate even though it is
Replace the controller board.
executed on purpose.
[060A-060E]: Detailed error code
ƒ Defective CPU devices
B Cut-in command does not
ƒ Defective ASIC devices
operate when it is executed.
Replace the controller board.
[0610]: Detailed error code
B Timer cut-in does not operate ƒ Defective CPU devices
even though it is set. Replace the controller board.

shooting
Trouble-
[0612]: Detailed error code
ƒ Defective ASIC
B ƒ Defective devices in which
Cut-in in ASIC occurs.
ASIC detects cut-in.
Replace the controller board.
[06FF]: Detailed error code
ƒ Defective CPU devices
The pipeline clock frequency
B ƒ Mode bit data error, which is
rate is different from the
used for initializing CPU.
prescribed value.
Replace the controller board.
[0702]: Detailed error code
ƒ Insufficient CPU cache
The result when the program ƒ Insufficient memory process
B is executed in the command speed
cache is different from 1. Replace the controller
desirable value. board.
2. Replace the RAM DIMM.

SM 4-15 B229
Service Call

No. Symptom Possible Cause/Countermeasure

Definition
[0709, 070A]: Detailed error code
ƒ Defective CPU devices
Even you write the data in the
ƒ Incorrect SPD
only cache of memory, the
B ƒ Boot mode setting error
data is actually written in
1. Replace the controller
another area (not cache) of
board.
memory.
2. Replace the RAM DIMM.
[0801, 0804, 0807, 0808, 0809, 80A]: Detailed error code
B An error occurs when ƒ Defective CPU devices
checking the TLB. Replace the controller board.
[4002-4005]: Detailed error code
B The calculation error in the ƒ Defective CPU
CPU occurs. Replace the CPU.
821 Self-Diagnostic Error: ASIC
ASIC error
[0B00] B The write-&-verify check error ƒ Defective controller board
has occurred in the ASIC. Replace the controller.
ASIC not detected
ƒ ASIC (controller board
defective)
[0B06] B The ASIC of the I/O is not
ƒ Poor connection between
detected.
North Bridge and PCI I/F.
Replace controller board.
SHM register check error
Failed to initialize or could not ƒ Defective bus connection
[0B10] B
read connection bus. Data in ƒ Defective SHM
SHM register incorrect. Replace controller board.

B229 4-16 SM
 Service Call

No. Symptom Possible Cause/Countermeasure

Definition
Timer error between ASIC and CPU
The CPU checks if the ASIC ƒ System firmware problem
timer works properly ƒ Defective RAM-DIMM
compared with the CPU timer. ƒ Defective controller
[0D05] B
If the ASIC timer does not ƒ Reinstall the controller
function in the specified system firmware.
range, this SC code is 1. Replace the RAM-DIMM.
displayed. 2. Replace the controller board.
822 Self-Diagnostic Error: HDD
Timeout error/ [3004]: Command error
ƒ Loose connection

shooting
Trouble-
ƒ Defective HDD
When the main switch is
ƒ Defective controller
turned on or starting the
[3003]: B 1. Check that the HDD is
self-diagnostic, the HDD stays
correctly connected to the
busy for the specified time or
controller.
more.
2. Replace the HDD.
3. Replace the controller.
823 Self-diagnostic Error: NIB
MAC address check sum error
The result of the MAC
[6101] B address check sum does not ƒ Defective controller
match the check sum stored Replace the controller.
in ROM.
PHY IC error
The PHY IC on the controller
[6104] B
cannot be correctly Same as SC823-[6101]
recognized.

SM 4-17 B229
Service Call

No. Symptom Possible Cause/Countermeasure

Definition
PHY IC loop-back error
An error occurred during the
[6105] B
loop-back test for the PHY IC Same as SC823-[6101]
on the controller.
Self-diagnostic Error: NVRAM
ƒ NVRAM damaged or
The controller cannot abnormal
824 B recognize the standard ƒ Backup battery has
NVRAM installed or detects discharged
that the NVRAM is defective. ƒ NVRAM socket damaged
Replace the NVRAM.
Self-diagnostic Error: RTC/Optional NVRAM
[1501]: Clock error
ƒ An RTC device is
recognized, and the ƒ RTC defective
difference between the ƒ NVRAM without RTC
826 B
RTC device and the installed
CPU exceeds the ƒ Backup battery discharged
defined limit. Replace the NVRAM with another
ƒ No RTC device is NVRAM with an RTC device.
recognized.
[15FF]: RTC not detected
• NVRAM without RTC
installed
B The RTC device is not
• Backup battery discharged
detected.
Replace the NVRAM with another
NVRAM with an RTC device.
827 Self-diagnostic Error: RAM

B229 4-18 SM
 Service Call

No. Symptom Possible Cause/Countermeasure

Definition
Verification error
ƒ Loose connection
Error is detected during a ƒ Defective SDRAM DIMM
[0201] B write/verify check for the ƒ Defective controller
standard RAM (SDRAM 1. Replace the SDRAM
DIMM). DIMM.
2. Replace the controller.
Resident memory error
ƒ Defective RAM DIMM
The SPD values in all RAM ƒ Defective SPD ROM on
[0202] B
DIMM are incorrect or RAM DIMM

shooting
Trouble-
unreadable. ƒ Defective 12C bus
Replace the RAM DIMM.
828 Self-diagnostic Error: ROM
Boost lap code error
The boot monitor and OS
program stored in the ROM ƒ Defective ROM DIMM
[0101] B DIMM is checked. If the check ƒ Defective controller
sum of the program is 1. Replace the ROM DIMM.
incorrect, this SC code is 2. Replace the controller.
displayed.
ROMFS error
All areas of the ROM DIMM
are checked. If the check sum
[0104] B ƒ Defective ROM DIMM
of all programs stored in the
Replace the ROM DIMM.
ROM DIMM is incorrect, this
SC code is displayed.
829 Self-diagnostic Error: Optional RAM

SM 4-19 B229
Service Call

No. Symptom Possible Cause/Countermeasure

Definition
Verification error (Slot 1)
ƒ Not specified RAM DIMM
installed
The data stored in the RAM in
[0401] B ƒ Defective RAM DIMM
Slot 1 does not match the
1. Replace the RAM DIMM.
data when reading.
2. Replace the controller
board.
Composition error (Slot 1)
ƒ Not specified RAM DIMM
The result of checking the installed
[0402] B composition data of the RAM ƒ Defective RAM DIMM
in Slot 1 on the controller is 1.Replace the RAM DIMM.
incorrect. 2.Replace the controller
board.
IEEE1394 I/F abnormal
The IEEE1394 interface ƒ IEEE1394 interface board
851 B
cannot be used, due to a defective
driver error. ƒ Defective controller board
Wireless card startup error
The machine starts up. The
IEEE802 11b card connection
ƒ Loose connection between
853 B board is recognized. The
the card and the connection
wireless LAN card or
board
bluetooth card is not
recognized.

B229 4-20 SM
 Service Call

No. Symptom Possible Cause/Countermeasure

Definition
854 B Wireless card access error
The machine has been
reading the data from the
card. The machine loses ƒ Loose connection between
access to the card; the the card and the connection
wireless LAN card or board
bluetooth card connection
board is still recognized.
Wireless card error
855 B Some illegal data is found in
ƒ Defective card
the card.

shooting
Trouble-
Wireless card connection
856 B
board error
An error is detected in the
wireless LAN card or ƒ Defective card connection
bluetooth card connection board
board.
USB I/F Error
ƒ Defective controller
1. Check the USB connections,
857 B USB interface error is
and make sure that they are
detected.
securely connected.
2. Replace the controller board.
HDD startup error at main power on
ƒ No formatted HDD
HDD is connected but a driver
ƒ Label name input during
error is detected.
860 B formatting is corrupted.
The driver does not respond
ƒ Defective HDD
with the status of the HDD
1. Reformat the HDD.
within 30 s.
2. Replace the HDD.

SM 4-21 B229
Service Call

No. Symptom Possible Cause/Countermeasure

Definition
HDD reboot error
ƒ Loose connection
ƒ Defective cables
ƒ Defective HDD
ƒ Defective controller
The HDD does not become
1. Check the connection
861 D ready within 30 seconds after
between the HDD and
the power is supplied to the
controller.
HDD.
2. Check and replace the
cables.
3. Replace the HDD.
4. Replace the controller.
HDD read error
ƒ Bad sector detected during
operation of the HDD
ƒ Defective HDD
ƒ Defective controller
1. Reformat the HDD.
863 D The data stored in the HDD 2. Replace the HDD when
cannot be read correctly. SC863 occurs more than
ten times or it takes more
than twenty seconds to
get ready condition.
3. Replace the controller
board.
HD data CRC error
While reading data from the
864 D
HDD or storing data in the ƒ Defective HDD
HDD, data transmission fails.

B229 4-22 SM
 Service Call

No. Symptom Possible Cause/Countermeasure

Definition
HD access error
An error other than SC863
865 D
and SC864 is detected while ƒ Defective HDD
operating the HDD.
SD card authentication error
866 B A digital license error of an SD ƒ SD card data has corrupted.
card application is detected. Store correct data in the SD card.
SD card error
An application SD card is
867 D removed from the boot slot ƒ An application SD card is
while an application is ejected.

shooting
Trouble-
activated.
SD card access error
(-13 to -3: File system error, other number: Device error)
ƒ SD card not inserted
correctly
ƒ SD card defective
ƒ Controller board defective
1. For a file system error,
format the SD card on
868 D
An error report is sent from PC.
the SD card reader. 2. For a device error, turn
the main switch off and
on.
3. Remove and re-install the
SD card.
4. Replace the SD card.
5. Replace the controller.

SM 4-23 B229
Service Call

No. Symptom Possible Cause/Countermeasure

Definition
Address book data error
The address book in the
hard disk is accessed.
An error is detected in the
address book data;
address book data is not
read; or data is not written
ƒ Data corruption
into the address book..
ƒ Defective hard disk
ƒ Defective controller software
ƒ To recover from the
870 B Replace the hard disk (the user
error, do any of the
codes and counters are recovered
following
when the main switch is turned on
countermeasures:
if those data are stored in Smart
ƒ Format the address
Device Monitor for Admin).
book by using
SP5-846-050 (all data
in the address
book–including the user
codes and counters–is
initialized).
HDD received mail data error
ƒ Defective HDD
An error is detected in the ƒ Power failure during an
872 B received mail data partition of access to the HDD
the HDD at machine 1. Initialize the HDD
initialization. partition (SP5-832-007).
2. Replace the HDD.

B229 4-24 SM
 Service Call

No. Symptom Possible Cause/Countermeasure

Definition
HDD sent mail data error
ƒ Defective HDD
ƒ Power failure during an
An error is detected in the
873 B access to the HDD
sent mail data partition of the
1. Initialize the HDD
HDD at machine initialization.
partition (SP5-832-008).
2. Replace the HDD.
Delete All error 1: HDD
ƒ Not installed Data Overwrite
An error is detected while the
Security Unit (SD card)
all data of the HDD or NVRAM
874 D ƒ Defective HDD
are formatted physically by

shooting
Trouble-
1. Install the Data Overwrite
the Data Overwrite Security
Security Unit (B735).
Unit (B735).
2. Replace the HDD.
Delete All error 2: Data area
An error is detected while the
ƒ The logical format for HDD
all data of the HDD or NVRAM
875 D fails.
are formatted logically by the
Turn the main switch off/on and try
Data Overwrite Security Unit
the operation again.
(B735).
876 Log Data Error
Log Data Error 1
An error was detected in the
handling of the log data at ƒ Damaged log data file in the
-001 D power on or during machine HDD
operation. This can be caused Initialize the HDD with
by switching the machine off SP5832-004.
while it is operating.

SM 4-25 B229
Service Call

No. Symptom Possible Cause/Countermeasure

Definition
Log Data Error 2
ƒ An encryption module not
installed
-002 D 1. Disable the log
Same as -001
encryption setting.
2. Install the encryption
module
Log Data Error 3
ƒ Invalid encryption key log
due to defective NVRAM
data
-003 D
Same as -001 1. Initialize the HDD with
SP5832-004.
2. Disable the log
encryption setting.
Log Data Error 4
ƒ Unusual encryption function
log due to the defective
-004 D
Same as -001 NVRAM data
Initialize the HDD with
SP5832-004.
Log Data Error 5
ƒ Installed NVRAM or HDD,
which is used in other
machine
-005 D
Same as -001 1. Reinstall the previous
NVRAM or HDD.
2. Initialize the HDD with
SP5832-004.
Log Data Error 99
-099 D ƒ Other than above causes
Same as -001
Ask your supervisor.

B229 4-26 SM
 Service Call

No. Symptom Possible Cause/Countermeasure

Definition
HDD Data Overwrite Security SD card error
ƒ Defective SD card (B735)
ƒ Not installed SD card
The all delete cannot be
(B735)
executed even though the
877 B 1. Replace the NVRAM and
Data Overwrite Security Unit
then install the new SD
(B735) is installed and
card (B735).
activated.
2. Check and reinstall the
SD card (B735).
File Format Converter (MLB) error
A request to get access to the
880 D

shooting
Trouble-
MLB was not answered within ƒ MLB defective
the specified time.

SC9xx
Electronic total counter error
900 D The value of the total counter is out
ƒ Defective NVRAM
of the normal range.
Printer error
ƒ Defective software
920 B An application error that stops the
Unexpected hardware resource (e.g.,
machine operation is detected.
memory shortage)
Printer font error
ƒ A necessary font is not found in
A necessary font is not found in the the SD card.
921 B
SD card when the printer ƒ The SD card data is corrupted.
application starts. Check that the SD card stores correct
data.

SM 4-27 B229
Service Call

No. Symptom Possible Cause/Countermeasure

Definition
Net file error
ƒ Defective hard disk
ƒ Data corruption
ƒ Defective software
When SC860 to 865 occurs with
this SC at the same time:
ƒ The main cause is in
SC860 to 865. Refer to
those possible causes.
When only SC925 occurs:
ƒ Initialize the net file
The management file for net files
partition of the HDD
is corrupted; net files are not
(with SP5-832-11) after
normally read.
925 D you ask the customer
Netfiles:
for permission. This
Jobs to be printed from the
also erases the
document server using a PC and
transmitted and
the DeskTopBinder software
received fax
documents.
ƒ If the above actions do
not solve the problem,
try to initialize all
partitions of the HDD
with SP5-832-1 after
you ask the customer
for permission.
ƒ Replace the HDD.

B229 4-28 SM
 Service Call

No. Symptom Possible Cause/Countermeasure

Definition
Software performance error
The software attempted to
perform an unexpected
operation.
NOTE: When this error occurs,
the file name, address, and data
ƒ Software defective
990 B will be stored in NVRAM. This
ƒ Internal parameter incorrect
information can be checked by
ƒ Insufficient working memory
using SP7-403. See the data and
the situation in which this SC
occurs. Then report the data and
conditions to your technical

shooting
Trouble-
control center.
Software continuity error
The software attempted to
perform an unexpected
991 C ƒ Logged only; the machine can
operation. However, unlike
continue to operate
SC990, the process can keep on
running.
Undefined error
An error not controlled by the
992 D system occurred (the error does
ƒ Defective software program
not come under any other SC
code).

SM 4-29 B229
Service Call

No. Symptom Possible Cause/Countermeasure

Definition
Application function selection error
ƒ Software for that application is
defective
ƒ An option required by the
The application selected by a key application (RAM, DIMM,
997 B press on the operation panel board) is not installed.
does not start or ends ƒ Too complicated nest of the
abnormally. fax group address
As for the fax operation problem,
simplify the nest of the fax group
address.
Application start error
ƒ Software for that application is
defective
After switching the machine on, ƒ An option required by the
998 D the application does not start application (RAM, DIMM,
within 60 s. (No applications start board) is not installed.
or end normally.) Check the setting of SP5875-001. If
the setting is set to "1 (OFF)",
change it to "0 (OFF)".

B229 4-30 SM
 Self-Diagnostic mode

4.2 SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

4.2.1 OVERVIEW
There are three types of self-diagnostics for the controller.
ƒ Power-on self-diagnostics: The machine automatically starts the self-diagnostics just
after the power has been turned on.
ƒ Detailed self-diagnostics: The machine does the detailed self-diagnostics by using a
loop-back connector (P/N G0219350)
ƒ SC detection: The machine automatically detects SC conditions at power-on or
during operation.

4.2.2 DETAILED SELF-DIAGNOSTICS

This detailed self-diagnostic test requires a loop-back connector (P/N: G0219350).

shooting
Trouble-
1. Turn off the machine (power switch located in the rear of the machine) and
attach the loop-back connector to the parallel interface.
2. Hold down "Pound (#) " key, press and hold down "Asterisk (*) " key, and then
while pressing both keys at the same time, switch on the machine (power switch
located in the rear of the machine). You will see “Now Loading” on the
touch-panel, and prints the diagnostic report after completing the test.
ƒ Refer to the diagnostics report for the detected errors. The errors detected
during self-diagnostics can be checked with SP7-832-001 (Diag. Result).
ƒ Refer to section 4.1 for details about the error codes.

SM 4-31 B229
General Troubleshooting

4.3 GENERAL TROUBLESHOOTING

4.3.1 TROUBLESHOOTING FOR EXPECTED PROBLEMS IN

THE FIELD

No. Problems Possible causes/Countermeasures

ƒ The engine entrance sensor may have a
problem about its movement.
1. Check the trailing margin with SP2103-2 "Prt
Trailing edge margin is not
1 Erase Margin Adj TEdge Margin".
enough.
2. Check the engine entrance sensor. Make
sure that the spring of the engine entrance
sensor is correctly set.
ƒ Memory defective
ƒ A machine is still formatting the HDD. It takes
A machine stops indicating the approximately 5 minutes.
2
"Please Wait" message. 1. Replace the controller board if this problem
still occurs after checking above possible
causes.
Check what SC happens to a machine and do the
A machine automatically
3 proper counter measure. You can confirm SC number
reboots.
with SP7403-1 to -10.
ƒ SD card error (not installed or defective)
ƒ Incorrect NIS or USB setting
A machine does not get "Online 1. Check that an SD card is installed correctly.
mode" even the copier screen 2. Set the SP5985-001 for NIS setting or -002
4
comes up on the operation for USB setting to the "1".
panel. 3. Replace the controller board if this problem
still occurs after checking above possible
causes.
ƒ Defective IPU
5 SC142 occurs at power on.
1. Replace the IPU.
Background dirty occurs after ƒ Defective IPU
6
recovering. 1. Replace the IPU.

B229 4-32 SM
 General Troubleshooting

No. Problems Possible causes/Countermeasures

Horizontal line or no image
area (0.1mm to 1.5mm width) ƒ Defective IPU
7
occurs due to the other reason 1. Replace the IPU.
than a nozzle problem.
ƒ Dirty paper path
Smeared dirt occurs in feed
8 1. Clean the paper path (transport roller, idle
direction.
roller etc.)
Paper jam occurs at the
registration roller. (A leading
ƒ Defective paper feed motor
9 edge of paper comes out 0mm
1. Replace the paper feed motor.
to 0.5mm from the registration
roller nip.)

shooting
Trouble-
Paper jam occurs at the paper
exit roller. (The leading edge of
ƒ Defective paper exit motor
10 paper is no damage but there is
2. Replace the paper exit motor.
a line pressed like "Z" on the
paper.)

4.3.2 POOR QUALITY IMAGE

Colors Not What You Expect
The correct paper was not used for the print job, or the paper was not
Cause 1:
loaded correctly.
Check the selection for the type of paper in the printer driver (transparency,
Solution 1: ink jet, plain paper, etc.). Confirm that the same type of paper is loaded
correctly in the printer.
Cause 2: The print mode selection was not correct.
Make sure that the print mode selection in the printer software application
Solution 2:
and the printer driver is correct (Paper Type, Print Quality, Level Color, etc.)
Cause 3: Job settings in the software application are not correct.
Check the settings for the print job in the software application. The settings
Solution 3:
in the software application have priority over the printer driver settings.
Cause 4: One or more print heads are blocked.
Solution 4: Do cleaning Cycle 1 and then Cleaning Cycle 2.

SM 4-33 B229
General Troubleshooting

Colors Faint
Cause 1: The correct paper was not used for the print job.
Check the selection for the type of paper in the printer driver (transparency,
Solution 1: ink jet, plain paper, etc.). Confirm that the same type of paper is loaded in
the printer.
Cause 2: The print mode selection was not correct.
Make sure that the print mode selection in the printer software application
Solution 2: and the printer driver is correct (Paper Type, Print Quality, Level Color, etc.)
Make sure that the “Color/Black and White” selection is correct.
Cause: 3 One or more print heads are blocked.
Solution 3: Do cleaning Cycle 1 and then Cleaning Cycle 2.

Color Print Job Prints in Monochrome

Cause 1: “Black and White” was selected for the print job.
On the “Setup” sheet of the printer driver, make sure “Color” is selected
Solution 1:
under “Color/Black and White”.
Cause 2: Correct data not selected for the print job.
Solution 2: Confirm that the software application printed the correct data.

White Patches, or Horizontal White Lines

Cause 1: Original image abnormal.
In the software application, check the original image for streaking (especially
Solution 1:
at borders between different colors). Correct the original image.
Cause 2: One or more print heads are blocked.
Solution 2: Do cleaning Cycle 1 and then Cleaning Cycle 2.

Vertical White Lines

Solid or intermittent white lines from the top to the bottom of the sheet caused
Cause:
by a blocked ink nozzle.
Solution: Do cleaning Cycle 1 once.

Image Chaffed in Horizontal Direction

Solid or intermittent white lines from edge to edge of the sheet caused by a
Cause:
blocked ink nozzle.
Solution: Do cleaning Cycle 1 once.

B229 4-34 SM
 General Troubleshooting

Only 1 Line Printed at Leading Edge

Paper with punched holes, or thin or slick paper with too much “play” was
Cause 1:
used that allowed slippage during feed.
Check the paper used for the print job and make sure that it meets standards
Solution 1: for use with this printer. For more see the Operating Instructions or the last
section “Specifications” of the Service Manual.
Paper is jammed or slipping on the transport belt due to the accumulation of
Cause 2:
paper dust, etc. on the belt.
Clean accumulated paper dust, etc. from the transport belt. The service
Solution 2:
technician must clean the transport belt.

Unwanted Dots
Cause: Flakes of paper dust or dry ink have fallen onto the printed sheet.
Do cleaning Cycle 1 once. Operator should call for service if cleaning does
Solution:
not solve the problem.

shooting
Trouble-
Text Dirty
Cause 1: Print job was not set up correctly for special print media.
Special procedures are necessary to set up print jobs for special print media
such as postcards, envelopes, and transparencies. Review and carefully
Solution 1:
follow the instructions in the Operating Instructions. Pay special attention to
these settings “Paper Type”, “Job Type”, and “Print Quality”.
Cause 2: The sheets are not flat or are deformed in some way.
Make sure the sheets are perfectly flat (especially envelopes, postcards).
Make sure the sheets neither curled nor deformed in any way. If using thick or
Solution 2:
any type of coated paper, make sure that the paper is approved for use with
this printer.
Cause 3: One or more print heads are blocked.
Solution 3: Do cleaning Cycle 1 and then Cleaning Cycle 2.

Backs of Sheets Stained With Ink

Cause: Paper has jammed in the printer or the transport belt is dirty.
Run a print job with several sheets of paper to use clean up the ink. Use a
Solution: damp cloth to clean the surface of the transport belt, and then use a clean, dry
cloth to clean the surface of the belt.

SM 4-35 B229
General Troubleshooting

Transparency Sheets Scratched

Cause: More than 1 sheet of transparency was set.
Set transparencies one by one for printing one sheet at time. For more,
Solution:
please refer to the Operating Instructions.

Miscellaneous
Cause 1: The paper in use is not the correct paper for the print job.
Check the paper loaded for feeding. Make sure that it matches the type of
paper specified for the print job (transparency, ink jet, plain paper, etc.).
Solution 1: Make sure that the paper is approved for use with this printer. For more, see
the Operating Instructions or the “Specifications” in the last section of the
Service Manual.
Cause 2: The print mode selection was not correct.
Make sure that the print mode selection in the printer software application and
Solution 2: the printer driver is correct (Paper Type, Print Quality, Level Color, etc.) Make
sure that the “Color/Black and White” selection is correct.
Cause 3: Job settings in the software application are not correct.
Check the settings for the print job in the software application. The settings in
Solution 3:
the software application have priority over the printer driver settings.
Cause 4: Correct data not selected for the print job.
Solution 4: Confirm that the software application printed the correct data.
Cause 5: One or more of the nozzles is blocked.
Solution 5: Do cleaning Cycle 1 once.

4.3.3 POOR PRINTER PERFORMANCE (MISCELLANEOUS)

Cannot set paper cassette.
The cassette is damaged or there is a jammed sheet of paper inside the
Cause:
printer.
Remove the paper cassette. Remove the jammed sheet from inside the
Solution: printer. Inspect the paper cassette for damage. If the cassette is damaged,
replace the paper cassette.

B229 4-36 SM
 General Troubleshooting

Cannot remove paper cassette.

Cause: The paper cassette is blocked.
Raise the paper output tray and reset it. Attempt to remove the paper cassette
Solution:
again. Replace the paper cassette.

Printer does not turn on.

Cause: The power cord is not connected to the power source.
Follow the instructions on the screen if an error message appears in the
Status Monitor, or do the following:
Make sure the power cord is securely connected to the printer and to the
power source.
Solution:
Make sure the operator knows how to switch on the printer correctly. For
more, refer to the Setup Guide and the Operating Instructions.
Switch the printer off. Remove the power cord from the power source. Wait 2
minutes then connect the power cord and switch the printer on.

shooting
Trouble-
Printer fails to enter “Ready” mode.
Cause: An error has occurred at the printer.
Check the operation panel and determine which LED’s are on or flashing
Solution: (temperature out of range, ink out, cover open, etc.). Refer to the checklist in
the previous section.

Printing stops before print job finishes.

Cause: The print heads have overheated.
The printer has stopped to allow the print heads to cool. After the print heads
Solution: have cooled down to the standard operating temperature, the print job will
resume.
Cause: A fatal error has occurred on the computer side.
Check the screen for messages. Shut down the computer. Switch off the
Solution: printer. Check the USB connection at the printer and the computer. Switch the
printer on. Restart the computer.

Printer loses power.

Cause: Power loss at the source.
Power to the printer has been interrupted, due to a power failure or some
Solution: other external cause. Unplug the printer from the power source. Wait 2
minutes. Reconnect the power plug and switch the printer on.

SM 4-37 B229
General Troubleshooting

Cause: The printer has blown a fuse.

The printer must be returned to the service center for replacement of the F300
Solution:
board.

Firmware update failed.

Cause: Incorrect procedure.
Solution: Update the firmware. (5.3)

4.3.4 UNUSUAL NOISES

Printer emits strange noises at power on.
Cause: Paper scraps remain inside the printer.
Open the top cover, rear cover (or Duplex Unit) cover and inspect inside the
Solution:
printer and Duplex Unit for paper scraps left behind after clearing a paper jam.
Cause: Special print media may make a noise on feeding the last sheet.
Load one blank sheet of plain paper at the bottom of a stack of special media
Solution:
(coated paper, etc.) This problem may occur with a new paper cassette.

B229 4-38 SM
 General Troubleshooting

4.3.5 MAINTAINING THE PRINTER HEAD CONDITION

Preparing for Test Printing
1. Make sure A4 size or LTR size paper is loaded in the printer.
2. Make sure the printer is ready to print (the [Power] key is on).

Entering the User Tools

3. Press the "User Tools" button to enter the UP mode.
4. Select “Maintenance”.

Cleaning Cycle 1
1. Select “Clean Print-heads” (User Tools > Maintenance > Clean Print-heads), and
then press the “OK” button.
2. Select the five print-heads to be cleaned with left or right arrow button. (You can
cancel it also pressing the left or right arrow button again.)

shooting
Trouble-
ƒ You can select multiple print-heads in this cleaning. If the print-head is
selected for this cleaning, the checked mark shows at left next to the
print-head name.
3. Press “OK” button, and then “This function consumes a large quantity of ink. Do
you want to continue?” message shows on the display.
4. Press “Yes” button to execute the cleaning.
5. After cleaning, “Cleaning complete” message shows on the display.
6. Press “Exit” button and follow the instruction on the display.

ƒ Wait for cleaning to finish. Never do any other operation at the time of
cleaning.
ƒ Check the results of the nozzle check pattern. Examine which nozzles
need cleaning.
ƒ Do Steps 1 to 6 again. You can do this up to three times.
ƒ Do Cleaning Cycle 2 after the third printing of the test problem if the
pattern is still not correct.

Cleaning Cycle 2

ƒ Cleaning Cycle 2 uses a lot of ink. Do Cleaning Cycle 1 at least 3 times before
you do Cleaning Cycle 2.

SM 4-39 B229
General Troubleshooting

1. Select “Flush Print-heads” (User Tools > Maintenance > Flush Print-heads), and
then press the "OK" button.
2. Select the five print-heads to be cleaned with left or right arrow button. (You can
cancel it also pressing the left or right arrow button again.)

ƒ You can select multiple print-heads in this cleaning. If the print-head is

selected for this cleaning, the checked mark shows at left next to the
print-head name.
3. Press “OK” button, and then “This function consumes a large quantity of ink. Do
you want to continue?” message shows on the display.
4. Press “Yes” button to execute the cleaning.
5. After flushing, “Flushing complete” message shows on the display.
6. Press "Exit" button and follow the instruction on the display.

ƒ Wait for cleaning to finish. Never do any other operation at the time of
cleaning.
ƒ Check the results of the nozzle check pattern after completing this
function.

If Cleaning Cycle 2 Does Not Solve the Problem...

7. Let the machine stay unused overnight.
8. In the morning, turn on the main power switch of the machine.
9. Print the nozzle check pattern using UP mode.
10. Then check the results of the test pattern.
11. If a problem is remaining, clean the print heads. For details, see the "Print
Heads" ("Cleaning Procedures" in the section "Preventive Maintenance").
12. Print the nozzle check pattern using UP mode again, and then check the results
of the test pattern.
13. If a problem is still remaining, wipe the nozzle surface with a damp cloth (For
details, refer to the "Trouble Shooting Guide").

ƒ Use water; Never use alcohol or dry cloth for wiping the nozzle surface.
14. Print the nozzle check pattern using UP mode again, and then check the results
of the test pattern.
15. If a problem is still remaining, replace the engine unit.

B229 4-40 SM
 Image Test Mode

4.4 IMAGE TEST MODE

4.4.1 OVERVIEW
The SBU, BCU, and LD board have the function that prints out their test pattern. It is useful
to find the defective board when the image data problem is occurred.

4.4.2 IPU TEST

The BCU board has the IPU test pattern. To make sure the image processing is functioning,
output the IPU test pattern with SP4-417.

shooting
Trouble-

SM 4-41 B229
Electrical Component Defects

4.5 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DEFECTS

4.5.1 SENSORS
Component CN Condition Symptom
The Paper Jam message will appear whenever
Open a copy is made (paper hasn't reached the
115-6
First Registration sensor).
(BCU)
The Paper Jam message appears even if there
Shorted
is no paper at the sensor.
The Paper Jam message will appear whenever
Open a copy is made except for 1st and by-pass tray
116-2
Relay feeding.
(BCU)
The Paper Jam message appears even if there
Shorted
is no paper at the sensor.
The Paper End indicator lights when the bypass
Open
tray is selected, even if there is paper in the tray.
By-pass Paper 127-11 The Paper End indicator does not light when the
End (BCU) bypass tray is selected, even if there is no paper
Shorted
in the tray. The Paper Jam message will appear
whenever a copy is made from the bypass tray.
The Paper Jam message will appear whenever
Open a copy is made (paper hasn't reached the
114-A9
Junction Gate sensor).
(BCU)
The Paper Jam message appears even if there
Shorted
is no paper at the sensor.
The Paper Jam message will appear whenever
Open a copy is made (paper hasn't reached the
114-A4
Exit sensor).
(BCU)
The Paper Jam message appears even if there
Shorted
is no paper at the sensor.

B229 4-42 SM
 Electrical Component Defects

Component CN Condition Symptom

The Paper Jam message will appear whenever
Open a copy is made (paper hasn't reached the
161-2
Engine Entrance sensor).
(BCU)
The Paper Jam message appears even if there
Shorted
is no paper at the sensor.
The Paper Jam message will appear whenever
Open a copy is made (paper hasn't reached the
114-B7
Engine Exit sensor).
(BCU)
The Paper Jam message appears even if there
Shorted
is no paper at the sensor.
102-2 Open
Scanner H.P. SC120 is displayed.
(BCU) Shorted

shooting
Trouble-
APS and Auto Reduce/Enlarge do not function
Open
correctly.
102-5
Platen Cover If the Start button is pressed with the platen
(BCU)
Shorted cover or A(R)DF closed, “Cannot detect original
size” is displayed.
Open The CPU cannot detect the original size
103-2,5
Original Width properly. APS and Auto Reduce/Enlarge do not
(BCU) Shorted
function correctly.
Open The CPU cannot detect the original size
103-8,11
Original Length properly. APS and Auto Reduce/Enlarge do not
(BCU) Shorted
function correctly.
The Paper Jam message will appear whenever
Open a duplex copy is made (paper hasn't reached
105-4
Duplex Entrance the sensor).
(DCB)
The Paper Jam message appears even if there
Shorted
is no paper at the sensor.

SM 4-43 B229
Electrical Component Defects

Component CN Condition Symptom

The Paper Jam message will appear whenever
106-4
Duplex Exit Open a duplex copy is made (paper hasn't reached
(DCB)
the sensor).
The Paper Jam message appears even if there
Shorted
is no paper at the sensor.
The Paper Jam message will appear whenever
Open a duplex copy is made (paper hasn't reached
104-2
Duplex Inverter the sensor).
(DCB)
The Paper Jam message appears even if there
Shorted
is no paper at the sensor.
Waste Ink Tank 123-1 Open
Full (BCU) Shorted
161-7,8 Open
Sub Scan Encoder SC520 is displayed.
(BCU) Shorted
Main Scan 3-3,4 Open
SC210 or SC211 is displayed.
Encoder (COM) Shorted
508-11 Open
Ink Full SC202 is displayed.
(BCU) Shorted
140-6,7 Open
Lift sensor 1 SC503 is displayed.
(I/F) Shorted
140-1,2 Open
Lift sensor 2 SC504 is displayed.
(I/F) Shorted

4.5.2 SWITCHES
Component CN Condition Symptom
Open The CPU cannot detect the paper end, and a
113-2
Paper End paper jam may occur when a copy is made from
(BCU) Shorted
the standard paper tray.
113- Open The CPU cannot detect the proper paper size,
Paper Size 3,4,6 and misfeeds may occur when a copy is made
Shorted
(BCU) from the 1st paper tray.

B229 4-44 SM
 Electrical Component Defects

Component CN Condition Symptom

The Cover Open indicator is lit even if the
Open
Vertical Transport 110-5 vertical transport door is closed.
Door (BCU) The Cover Open indicator is not lit even if the
Shorted
vertical transport door is opened.
127- Open The CPU misdetects or is not able to detect the
By-pass Paper
1,2,4,5 size of the paper set in the bypass tray, causing
Size Shorted
(BCU) possible misfeeds when feeding from this tray.
The machine detects that the one-sheet
Open
One-sheet 127-9 by-pass tray is open even it is closed.
By-pass Tray (BCU) The machine does not detect that the one-sheet
Shorted
by-pass tray is open even it is actually opened.

shooting
Trouble-
The machine does not open the one-sheet
Open by-pass shutter even a sheet of paper is set to
One-sheet
113-8 the one-sheet by-pass tray.
By-pass Paper
(BCU) The machine open the one-sheet by-pass
Set
Shorted shutter even a sheet of paper is not set to the
one-sheet by-pass tray.
The Cover Open indicator is lit even if doors are
Open
One-sheet 114-A2 closed.
By-pass Exit Door (BCU) The Cover Open indicator is not lit even if doors
Shorted
are open.
The Cover Open indicator is lit even if the right
Open
115-2 door is closed.
Right Door
(BCU) The Cover Open indicator is not lit even if the
Shorted
right door is open.
The Cover Open indicator is lit even if doors are
Open
111-4 closed.
Front Door
(BCU) The Cover Open indicator is not lit even if doors
Shorted
are open.

SM 4-45 B229
Electrical Component Defects

Component CN Condition Symptom

The Cover Open indicator is lit even if doors are
Open
114-A7 closed.
Left Door
(BCU) The Cover Open indicator is not lit even if doors
Shorted
are open.
The Cover Open indicator is lit even if doors are
Open
Left Junction 126-4 closed.
Cover (BCU) The Cover Open indicator is not lit even if doors
Shorted
are open.
161-5 Open
Carriage Position SC200 is displayed.
(BCU) Shorted
Open The machine does not turn on.
The machine
Main
Shorted does not turn
off.

4.5.3 BLOWN FUSE CONDITIONS

Rating
Fuse Symptom when turning on the main switch
120 V 220 – 240 V
Power Supply Board
FU1 3.15A/250V 6.3A/250V No response.
FU2 1A/250V 1A/250V
FU4 4A/250V 4A/250V
FU5 4A/250V 4A/250V
FU6 4A/250V 4A/250V
FU7 4A/250V 4A/250V
FU8 3.15A/250V 3.15A/250V
High Voltage Power Supply
F1 2.5A/72V
Lamp Inverter
F1 1.25A/250V

B229 4-46 SM
SERVICE TABLES
 Service Program Mode

5. SERVICE TABLES

5.1 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE

ƒ Do not let the user access the SP mode. Only service representatives but no
other persons are allowed to access the SP mode. The machine quality or its
operation is NOT guaranteed after any person other than service
representatives accesses the SP mode.
5.1.1 HOW TO ENTER THE SP MODE
The following two modes are available:
ƒ SP Mode (Service Program Mode): The SP Mode includes the programs that are
necessary for standard maintenance work.
ƒ SSP Mode (Special SP Mode): The SSP Mode includes SP-Mode programs and
some special programs. You need some extra knowledge to manipulate these
special programs. For details, consult your supervisor.

Service
Tables

Starting SP Mode
1. Type the keys as follows: [Clear Modes] > [1] > [0] > [7].
2. Press the [Clear/Stop] key and hold it down until the SP-mode menu is displayed
(about 3 seconds).

Selecting Programs
ƒ When a blinking underscore (or several blinking underscores) is displayed, you can
type a number from the numeric keypad [D].

SM 5-1 B229
Service Program Mode

ƒ When the sign " /OK" [A] is displayed upper right corner, you can scroll through
the menu by pressing the left-arrow key [B] or the right-arrow key [C]. To select a
program, press the "OK" key [F].

Specifying Values
1. After locating a program, press the "OK" key. A blinking underscore (or several
blinking underscores) indicates which value you can change. The value in
parentheses is the default value of the menu.
2. Type a necessary value from the numeric keypad. To switch between positive
(plus) and negative (minus) values, press the [./*] (period/asterisk) key.
3. To validate the value, press the "OK" key. To cancel the value, press the cancel
key [E].

Activating Copy Mode

You can activate the copy mode while the SP mode is running. When you do so, the copier
outputs images or patterns that help you adjust the SP-mode program.
1. Press the key. The copy mode is activated.
2. Specify copy settings and press the "OK" key.
3. To return to the SP mode, press the key.

ƒ You cannot end the SP mode while the copy mode is activated.

Quitting Programs/Ending (S)SP Mode

Press the key or the "Cancel" key to quit the program. You can end the SP mode by
pressing one of these keys several times.

B229 5-2 SM
 SP Mode Tables

5.2 SP MODE TABLES

The tables in this section list the service programs (SP’s).

The following codes are used:
ƒ Asterisk (*): The settings are saved in the NVRAM. Most of them return to the default
values when you execute SP 5801 2
ƒ The DFU menu is for design or factory use only. You must not change the settings.
ƒ Brackets ([ ]): The brackets enclose the setting rage, default value, and minimum
step (with unit) as follows: [Minimum to Maximum / Default / Step].
ƒ SSP: Consult your supervisor before you use this program.

5.2.1 SP1-XXX (FEED)

1001* [LE Regist] Leading Edge Registration
1001 1 All Trays Adjusts the printing leading-edge registration from
1001 2 By-pass paper trays.
[–9.0 to 9.0 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step]
1001 3 Duplex
( Copy Adjustments)
Adjusts the printing trailing-edge registration from
1001 4 End space the paper trays.

Service
Tables
[–9.0 to 9.0 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step]
Adjusts the printing leading-edge registration of
1001 5 OHP OHP from the by-pass tray.
[–9.0 to 9.0 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step]
1001 6 All Trays (Fact)
These SP’s store the factory setting of SP1001-1
1001 7 By-pass (Fact)
to 5. Do the SP5884-1 when you change the
1001 8 Duplex (Fact)
values of SP1001-1 to 5 to the SP1001-6 to 10
1001 9 End Space (Fact)
(factory settings).
1001 10 OHP (Fact)

[S-to-S Registration]
Adjusts the printing side-to-side registration from each paper feed station.
1002* Adjustments are effective for all 4 possible feed trays (including optional trays).
ƒ A "–" value shifts the image to the right side of the paper.
ƒ A "+" value shifts the image to the left side of the paper.

SM 5-3 B229
SP Mode Tables

The SP 1002 1 setting is applied to all trays, not just the 1st tray. Settings for
trays 2 to 4 are offsets relative to the SP 1002 1 setting.
For duplex copies, the value for the front side is determined by SP 1002-1 to -4,
and the value for the rear side is determined by SP 1002-6.
1002 1 1st Tray
1002 2 1st Optional
1002 3 2nd Optional
[–9.0 to 9.0 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step] ( Copy
1002 4 By-pass:100
Adjustments)
1002 5 By-pass
1002 6 Duplex
1002 7 OHP
1002 8 1st Tray (Fact)
1002 9 1st Optional (Fact)
1002 10 2nd Optional (Fact)
Resets each adjusted value (SP1002-1 to 7) to
1002 11 By-pass:100 (Fact)
the factory setting.
1002 12 By-pass (Fact)
1002 13 Duplex (Fact)
1002 14 OHP (Fact)

1003* [Paper Buckle]

1003 1 1st tray Adjusts the amount of buckle that the paper feed
1003 2 Reg Bank motor applies to the paper after the registration
1003 3 Reg By-pass sensor is activated. A higher setting applies
greater buckling.
1003 4 Reg Duplex
[0 to 10 / 3 / 1 mm/step]
1003 5 Belt1 Tray Adjusts the amount of buckle that the paper feed
1003 6 Belt1 Multi: Plain motor applies to the paper after the belt entrance
1003 7 Belt1 Multi: Thk1 sensor is activated. A higher setting applies
1003 8 Belt1 Multi: Thk2 greater buckling.
1003 9 Belt1 Duplex [0 to 10 / 3 / 1 mm/step]

B229 5-4 SM
 SP Mode Tables

1003 10 Belt2 Tray Adjusts the amount of buckle that the paper feed
1003 11 Belt2 Multi: Plain motor applies to the paper after the carriage
1003 12 Belt2 Multi: Thk1 sensor is activated. A higher setting applies
1003 13 Belt2 Multi: Thk2 greater buckling.
1004 14 Belt2 Duplex [0 to 10 / 4 / 1 mm/step]

1014 [Single By-pass] Single By-pass Setting

Adjusts the transport distance of paper fed from
by-pass tray.
1014 1 Pre-feed Distance Do not specify 40 mm with this SP. If so, the
machine detects paper jam.
[20 to 40 / 30 / 1 mm/step]
Adjusts the interval for the single bypass mode to
be ready. The machine resets the ready state for
1014 2 Reset Time single bypass mode after the specified time with
this SP has passed.
[5 to 20 / 5 / 1 min/step]

Service
Tables
[Feed Time Adj] Feed Time Adjustment
1015
Adjusts the time when a paper stops to be dried.
1015 1 Pause 1 [0 to 80 / 10 / 1 sec/step]
1015 2 Pause 2 [0 to 60 / 10 / 1 sec/step]
1015 3 Pause 3 [0 to 40 / 7/ 1 sec/step]
1015 4 Pause 4 [0 to 20 / 2 / 1 sec/step]
1015 5 Pause 5 [0 to 10 / 0 / 1 sec/step]

1017* [Temp Abnormal] Abnormal Temperature Detection

1017 1 High Temp Stop H DFU
1017 2 High Temp HM The specified value with this SP is the threshold
for machine stop. The machine stops when the
measured temperature goes up to the specified
1017 3 High Temp Rec HL value and recoveries when the measured
temperature goes down to the specified value.
This temperature is measured by thermistor at

SM 5-5 B229
SP Mode Tables

the transport belt.

[20 to 50 / 48.5 / 0.5°C/step]
1017 4 Low Temp Rec LH The specified value with this SP is the threshold
1017 5 Low Temp LM for machine stop. The machine stops when the
measured temperature goes down to the
specified value and recoveries when the
measured temperature goes up to the specified
1017 6 Low Temp Stop L
value. This temperature is measured by
thermistor at the transport belt.
[1 to 20 / 1 / 0.5°C/step]

1018* [Env Temp Abnormal] Environment Temperature Abnormal Detection

DFU
The specified value with this SP is the threshold
for machine stop. The measured temperature
1018 1 High Temp Stop H
goes up to the specified value. This temperature
is measured by thermistor at the carriage.
[20 to 50 / 43.5 / 0.5°C/step]
1018 2 High Temp HM DFU
The specified value with this SP is the threshold
for machine recovery. The measured temperature
goes down to the specified value. This
1018 3 High Temp Rec HL
temperature is measured by thermistor at the
carriage.
[20 to 50 / 41.5 / 0.5°C/step]
1018 4 Low Temp Rec LH DFU
1018 5 Low Temp LM The specified value with this SP is the threshold
for machine stop. The machine stops when the
measured temperature goes down to the
specified value and recoveries when the
1018 6 Low Temp Stop L measured temperature goes up to the specified
value. This temperature is measured by
thermistor at the transport belt.
[1 to 20 / 1 / 0.5°C/step]

B229 5-6 SM
 SP Mode Tables

[Feed Clutch Boost]

Adjusts the amount of extra push that the feed clutch gives to the paper after the
1903 skew has been corrected at registration. This feature helps the registration roller
feed certain types of paper (such as thick paper). Increase the value if thick
paper is jamming after feeding from the registration roller.
1903 1 1st Tray
[0 to 100 / 30 / 5 ms/step]
1903 2 By-pass: 100
1903 3 Optional Tray [0 to 100 / 10 / 5 ms/step]

[Option Tray Adj] Optional Tray Adjustment

Adjusts the bottom plate pressure of the optional paper feed unit.
ƒ +value increases pressure between the papers and the feeding roller at
1908
the optional feed unit.
ƒ –value decreases pressure between the papers and the feeding roller at
the optional feed unit.
1908 1 1st Optional
[–2 to 2 / 0 / 1%/step]
1908 2 2nd Optional

1922* ［SubScan: Send Adj］ Sub Scan: Line Adjustment

Service
Tables
Value [–100 to 100 / 22 / 1/step]
1922 1 Adjusts the sub scan line referring to the adjustment sheet printed with
SP3109-4.
This value is the factory setting. This value over
1922 2 Value(Fact) writes the value of SP1-922-1 when SP5-884-1
is executed.
LEFT SCAN [-400 to 400 / 0 / 1 pulse/step]
1922 3 This value is reference for the returning way (front to rear: home position)
scanning. Therefore, it is not adjusted normally.
RIGHT SCAN [-400 to 400 / 0 / 1 pulse/step]
1922 4 Adjusts the gap between going way (rear to front) and returning way (front to
rear) scanning position.

1923* ［Belt Temp Adj] Belt Temperature Adjustment DFU

1923 1 Adj Value [0 to 100 / 23 / 1 mm/step]
1923 2 User Adj Value [0 to 100 / 0 / 1 mm/step]

SM 5-7 B229
SP Mode Tables

5.2.2 SP2-XXX (DRUM)

2010 [Head Maint] Head Maintenance
Cleaning [0 to 30 / 0 / 1 /step]
Executes the printer heads cleaning for each color.
Check the nozzle check pattern with the SP3109-3. Set the number in
correspond with each color if there is a problem in the sheet of the nozzle check
2010 1 pattern.
0: All colors, 1: Cyan, 2: Black 1, 4: Black 2, 8: Magenta, 16: Yellow
ƒ If it is necessary to clean more than two colors at same time, set the total
number of the colors to be cleaned. e.g. If you want to clean the printer
heads of Magenta and Yellow, set 24 (8+16) in this SP.
Refresh [0 to 30 / 0 / 1 /step]
Executes the printer heads refreshing for each color.
Do this SP in case that "Cleaning" (SP2010-1) does not solve a problem in the
sheet of the nozzle check pattern.
2010 2
0: All colors, 1: Cyan, 2: Black 1, 4: Black 2, 8: Magenta, 16: Yellow
ƒ If it is necessary to clean more than two colors at same time, set the total
number of the colors to be cleaned. e.g. If you want to clean the printer
heads of Magenta and Yellow, set 24 (8+16) in this SP.

2100 [Spe Maint] Special Maintenance

Ink Purge [0 or 1 / 0 / - ]
2100 1 Removes remained ink from the sub tanks for replacing the engine unit or
transporting the machine.

2101 [Special Cleaning]

2101 1 K1 Executes the head cleaning for each printer
2101 2 K2 head.
2101 3 C The machine uses 32.04 ml of ink for this
2101 4 M special cleaning.

ƒ Do not use customer's ink for this mode.

2101 5 Y
ƒ After performing this special cleaning, you
need to perform normal refreshing once to

B229 5-8 SM
 SP Mode Tables

recover all nozzle condition. (Special

cleaning flows ink at a faster speed, and
sometimes air may get caught in the nozzle.
As a result, the corrected nozzle may
temporary write a white line. To recover such
condition, you need to perform the normal
refreshing once.)

[Prt Erase Margin] Printer Erase Margin

2103 Adjusts the erase margin of each edge for each paper type or in each printing
mode.
Leading edge for standard paper
2103 1 Adj LEdge Margin
[2 to 6 / 3.3 / 0.1 mm/step]
Trailing edge for standard paper
2103 2 Adj TEdge Margin
[0.5 to 4 / 2 / 0.1 mm/step]
Left edge for standard paper
2103 3 Adj Left Margin
[0 to 4 / 2.0 / 0.1 mm/step]
Right edge for standard paper
2103 4 Adj Right Margin
[0 to 4 / 2.0 / 0.1 mm/step]

Service
Tables
Leading edge for OHP
2103 5 Lead Edge OHP
[2 to 6 / 3.3 / 0.1 mm/step]
Trailing edge for OHP
2103 6 Back End OHP
[0.5 to 4 / 2 / 0.1 mm/step]
Left edge for OHP
2103 7 Left Mar OHP
[0 to 10 / 5 / 0.1 mm/step]
Right edge for OHP
2103 8 Right Mar OHP
[0 to 10 / 5 / 0.1 mm/step]
Left edge in By-pass mode
2103 9 Left Mar By-pass
[0 to 10 / 5 / 0.1 mm/step]
Right edge in By-pass mode
2103 10 Right Mar By-pass
[0 to 10 / 5 / 0.1 mm/step]
Leading edge for an envelope
2103 11 Lead Edge Envelope
[2 to 50 / 38 / 0.1 mm/step]
Trailing edge for an envelope
2103 12 Back End Envelope
[2 to 16 / 8.0 / 0.1 mm/step]

SM 5-9 B229
SP Mode Tables

Left edge for an envelope

2103 13 Left Mar Envelope
[0 to 10 / 5 / 0.1 mm/step]
Right edge for an envelope
2103 14 Right Mar Envelope
[2 to 16 / 8.0 / 0.1 mm/step]

[Normal Fil Pos] Normal Filling Ink Position

2200* Displays the standard position of the ink actuator when the air releasing is done.
These values are referred for checking the ink quantity.
2200 1 K1
2200 2 K2
2200 3 C [0 to 60000 / 0 / 1 pulse/step]
2200 4 M
2200 5 Y

[Wst Ink # Reset] Ink Collection Bottle Counter Reset

2505
Clears the ink collection bottle counter (Front or Rear).
This clears the counter of SP7-221-2. Do this SP
after replacing the front ink collection bottle.
2200 1 Front
The counter of SP7-854-2 counts up after clearing
the counter of SP7-221-2.
2200 2 Rear Do SP7-804-005 instead of this SP.

[Wst Ink Near Full] Ink Collection Bottle Near Full Threshold
2507*
Specifies the threshold of the ink collection bottle near full.
2507 1 Rear [500000 to 2000000 / 1212000 / 1/step]

2508 [Exhalation Interval]

Selects the exhalation interval. Multiple printing may cause blocked nozzles.
The exhalation prevents a nozzle from being blocked.
2508 1
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step]
0: every twenty seconds, 1: every fifteen seconds

B229 5-10 SM
 SP Mode Tables

5.2.3 SP3-XXX (PROCESS)

3001* [Gamma Setting]
3001 1 K1
3001 2 K2
DFU
3001 3 C
[1 to 9 / 5 / 1/step]
3001 4 M
3001 5 Y

[Head: Gap Adj] Printer Head: Gap Adjustment

3002* Adjusts the head gap referring to the adjustment sheet printed with SP3109-1
(300 dpi) or 3109-2 (1200 dpi).
3002 1 300: A
3002 2 300: B
3002 3 300: C
3002 4 300: D
3002 5 300: E [–100 to 100 / 0 / 1 dot/step]
3002 6 300: F
3002 7 300: G

Service
Tables
3002 8 300: H
3002 9 300: I
3002 10 1200: A
3002 11 1200: B
3002 12 1200: C
3002 13 1200: D
3002 14 1200: E [–100 to 100 / 0 / 1/step]
3002 15 1200: F
3002 16 1200: G
3002 17 1200: H
3002 18 1200: I
3002 21 300: A (Fact) These are values of the factory settings.
3002 22 300: B (Fact) SP3002-001 to -009 are reset to these settings
3002 23 300: C (Fact) when SP5884-1 is done.
3002 24 300: D (Fact)
3002 25 300: E (Fact)

SM 5-11 B229
SP Mode Tables

3002 26 300: F (Fact)

3002 27 300: G (Fact)
3002 28 300: H (Fact)
3002 29 300: I (Fact)
3002 30 1200: A (Fact)
3002 31 1200: B (Fact)
3002 32 1200: C (Fact)
3002 33 1200: D (Fact) These are values of the factory settings.
3002 34 1200: E (Fact) SP3002-010 to -018 are reset to these settings
3002 35 1200: F (Fact) when SP5884-1 is done.
3002 36 1200: G (Fact)
3002 37 1200: H (Fact)
3002 38 1200: I (Fact)
Adjusts the gap precisely in B/W printing mode.
Do this SP only if a result of executing "Standard"
in the "Head Position Adjust" (User Tools >
3002 41 1200: Ruled line
Maintenance > Adjustment > Head Position
Adjustment) is not satisfactory.
[–10 to 10 / 0 / 1/step]

[Print: Pattern]
3109 Prints the adjustment sheet for each print head adjustment. For details, refer to
the "Image Adjustment" in section "Replace and Adjustment".
This sheet is for the print head gap adjustment in
3109 1 Head: Gap Adj 300
300 x 300 dpi.
This sheet is for the print head gap adjustment in
3109 2 Head: Gap Adj 1200
1200 x 1200 dpi.
3109 3 Nozzle Check This sheet is for the nozzle pattern adjustment.
This sheet is for the adjustment fro the paper
3109 4 Sub Scan: Send Adj
feeding amount.
This sheet is for the main and sub scan
3109 5 Reg Adj
registration adjustment.
3109 6 Auto: Gap Adj 300 DFU
3109 7 Auto: Gap Adj 1200 DFU
3109 10 For Fact DFU

B229 5-12 SM
 SP Mode Tables

3112* [Print Mode Set] Print Mode Setting

Setting 1 [0 to 255 / 0 / 1/step]
Bit0: Scanning method adjustment
[0: Normal, 1: Always one scanning (rear to front)]
It is possible to disable the returning scanning (front to rear: home position) to
keep a high quality printing whatever jobs a machine gets.
Bit1: One scanning mode for envelop
[0: Normal, 1: Always one scanning (rear to front) when the envelop lever is
"ON".]
It is possible to disable the returning scanning (front to rear: home position) to
3112 1 keep a high quality printing when the envelop lever is set to "ON".
Bit2 and 3: Image density adjustment at duplex mode
[Bit3: "0" and Bit2: "1", 80%]
[Bit3: "1" and Bit2: "0", 74%]
[Bit3: "0" and Bit2: "0", Normal (80 to 98%)]
It is possible to reduce ink to prevent the other side transparent image of paper
when the duplex mode is used.
Bit4: reserved
Bit5: DFU

Service
Tables
Bit6 and 7: Not used
3112 2 Setting 2 DFU
3112 3 Setting 3
3112 4 Setting 4
3112 5 Setting 5 Not used
3112 6 Setting 6
3112 7 Setting 7
3112 8 Setting 8 DFU
3112 9 Setting 9 DFU
3112 10 Setting 10 Not used

SM 5-13 B229
SP Mode Tables

3130* [Head Rank (W Ptn)]

3130 1 K1
3130 2 K2
DFU
3130 3 C
[0 to 7/ 0 / 1/step]
3130 4 M
3130 5 Y

3131* [Head Rank (Vol)]

3131 1 K1
3131 2 K2
DFU
3131 3 C
[0 to 7/ 0 / 1/step]
3131 4 M
3131 5 Y

3557* [Hum Bf Idle]

Displays the relative humidity when the machine has previously capped the
3557 2 printer head.
[0 to 100 / 0 / 1 %/step]

[Paper Feed ReDrv] Paper Feed Re-drive Setting

3803* Adjusts the paper feed retry time when the no-feed paper jam occurs at each
tray.
3803 1 Retry Times [0 to 5 / 0 / 1/step]

5.2.4 SP4-XXX (SCANNER)

4008* [Sub Scan Mag] (Scanner) [–0.9 to +0.9 / 0.0 / 0.1%/step]
Adjusts the actual sub-scan direction scanning magnification. The higher the
4008 1
setting, the lower the scanner motor speed (Copy Adjustments-Scanning).

B229 5-14 SM
 SP Mode Tables

4010 [LE Scan Regist] (Scanner) [–2 to +2 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step]

Adjusts the leading edge registration for scanning in platen mode (Copy
Adjustments-Scanning).
4010 1
ƒ (–): The image moves toward the leading edge.
ƒ (+): The image moves toward the trailing edge·

4011* [StoS Scan Regist] (Scanner) [–2.5 to +2.5 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step]
Adjusts the side-to-side registration for scanning in platen mode ( Copy
Adjustments-Scanning).
4011 1
ƒ Increasing the value shifts the image to the right.
ƒ Decreasing the value shifts the image to the left.

[Set Scale Mask]

Adjusts the scanning margin individually for each of the four edges in book
4012
scanning or ADF scanning. It is generally best to adjust the scanning margin as
little as possible, and use the printing margin for image adjustments.
4012 1 Book: Sub: LEdge [0 to 3 / 1.0 / 0.1 mm/step]
4012 2 Book: Sub: TEdge

Service
Tables
4012 3 Book: Main: LEdge
4012 4 Book: Main: TEdge
4012 5 ADF: Sub: LEdge
4012 7 ADF: Main: LEdge
4012 8 ADF: Main: TEdge

[Scanner Free Run]

4013 Performs a scanner free run with the exposure lamp on or off. Press ON to start.
Press OFF to stop.
4013 1 Lamp: ON [0 or 1/ 0 / 1/step]
4013 2 Lamp: OFF 0: Off, 1: ON

4014 [Scan]
4014 1 HP Detect: Enable Enables the scanner home position detection.
4014 2 HP Detect: Disable Disables the scanner home position detection.

SM 5-15 B229
SP Mode Tables

4020* [Dust Check]

Enables or disables the dust detection on the
4020 1 Dust Detect: ON/OFF ADF scanning glass or the white plate.
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step]
Selects the dust detection level.
[ 0 to 8 / 4 / 1 /step]
4020 2 Dust Detect: Lvl
0: lowest detection level
8: highest detection level
Selects the level of the sub scan line correction
when using the ADF.
4020 3 Dust Reject: Lvl [ 0 to 4 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Off, 1: Weakest, 2: Weak,
3: Strong, 4: Strongest

4301 [APS Sns Chk]

Displays the status of the APS sensors and platen/DF cover sensor ( ADF/APS
4301 1
Sensor Output Display).

4303* [APS Small Origin] [0 = No (not detected) / 1 = Yes (A5/HLT LEF)]

Selects whether or not the copier will consider the original to be A5/HLT LEF
when the APS sensors cannot detect its size. If “Yes” is selected, paper sizes
4303 1
that cannot be detected by the APS sensors are regarded as A5/HLT LEF. If
“No" is selected, “Cannot detect original size” will be displayed.

4305* [APS Priority] [0 = Unknown size / 1 = A5/HLT LEF]

4305 1 Selects the paper size when the machine detects the smaller size than B5.

B229 5-16 SM
 SP Mode Tables

[Org Edge Mask] Set the Mask for Original

4400
This SP sets the area to be masked during platen (book) mode scanning.
4400 1 Book:Sub:LEdge
4400 2 Book:Sub:TEdge
4400 3 Book:Main:LEdge
4400 4 Book:Main:TEedge [0 to 3.0 / 0 /0.1 mm/step]
4400 5 ADF:Sub:LEdge
4400 7 ADF:Main:LEdge
4400 8 ADF:Main:TEdge

4417 [IPU Test Pattern] Set IPU Test Pattern

Use this SP to select the IPU test pattern to print.
Test Pattern [0to25/ 0 / 1/step]
0 Scanned Image 13 Grid Pattern CMYK
1 Gradation Main Scan A 14 Color Patch CMYK
2 Gradation Main Scan B 15 Gray Pattern (1)
3 Gradation Main Scan C 16 Gray Pattern (2)
4 Gradation Main Scan D 17 Gray Pattern (3)

Service
Tables
4417 1 5 Gradation Sub Scan 1 18 Shading Pattern
6 Grid Pattern 19 Thin Line Pattern
7 Slant Grid Pattern 20 Scanned + Grid Pattern
8 Gradation RGBCMYK 21 Scanned + Grayscale
9 UCR Pattern 22 Scanned + Color Patch
10 Color Patch 16 (1) 23 Scanned + Slant Grid C
11 Color Patch 16 (2) 24 Scanned + Slant Grid D
12 Color Patch 16 64 25 H Rank Pt

4429 ICI Output Level

Sets the ICI output level
4429 1
[35 to 255 / 128 / 1/step]

SM 5-17 B229
SP Mode Tables

4440 [Saturation Adj] Adjust Color Saturation

This SP adjusts the saturation level for copying.
[0 to 5 / 3 / 1/step]
0: High
1: Lowest
2: Lower
3: Default
4: Higher
5: Highest

4450 [Scan Img Pas Swch] Scan Image Path Switch

Bk Subt ON/OFF [0 or 1 / 1 / - ] 0: OFF, 1: ON
4450 1
Uses or does not use the black reduction image path.
SH Pas ON/OFF [0 or 1 / 0 / - ] 0: OFF, 1: ON
4450 2
Uses or does not use the shading image path.

4460 [Digital AE set] Digital AE Setting FA

4460 1 Low Limit Set [0 to 1024 / 364 / 4 digit/step]
4460 2 Back Ground Level [512 to 1532 / 972 / 1 digit/step]]

[Print Coverage] Print Coverage Correction

4540 This SP corrects printer coverage of 12 hues (RY, YR, YG, etc. x 4 Colors
(Option, R, G, B) for a total of 48 parameters.
001 – 004 RY: Option, R, G, B
005 – 008 YR: Option, R, G, B
009 – 012 YG: Option, R, G, B
013 – 016 GY: Option, R, G, B [–128 to +128 / 0 / 1/step]
017 – 020 GC: Option, R, G, B
021 – 024 CG: Option, R, G, B
025 – 028 CB: Option, R, G, B

B229 5-18 SM
 SP Mode Tables

029 – 032 BC: Option, R, G, B

033 – 036 BM: Option, R, G, B
037 – 040 MB: Option, R, G, B
041 – 044 MR: Option, R, G, B
045 – 048 RM: Option, R, G, B

4550 [SApli: Txt Prt] Scanner Application: Text/Picture Mode

4551 [SApli:TxtOCR1] Scanner Application: Text Mode
4552 [SApli:TxtOCR2] Scanner Application: Text/Drop Out
4553 [SApli: T/P] Scanner Application: Text/Photo
4554 [SApli: Photo] Scanner Application: Photo
4565 [SApli: Gray Scale] Scanner Application: Gray Scale
4570 [SApli: Color T/P] Scanner Application: Text/Photo
4571 [SApli: Color P]: Text/Printing Paper
MTF Lvl: 0-15 [0 to 15 / 8 / 1/step]
-005 Sets the MTF level (Modulation Transfer Function) designed to improve image
contrast. Set higher for stronger effect, lower for weaker effect.
Smooth:0-7 [0 to 15 / 4 / 1/step]

Service
Tables
-006
Use to remove "jaggies" if they appear. Set higher for smoother.
Brightness:1-255 [1 to 255 / 128 / 1/step]
-007
Set higher for darker, set lower for lighter.
Contrast:1-255 [1 to 255 / 128 / 1/step]
-008
Set higher for more contrast, set lower for less contrast.
Standoff:1-7 [0 to 7 / 0 / 1/step]
Sets the Erasure level of Irregular Dots. Set higher for stronger effect, lower for
-009
weaker effect.
0: Not activated

4580 [FaxApli: TxPrt] Fax Application: Text/Picture Mode

4581 [FaxApli: Txt] Fax Application: Text
4582 [FaxApli: T/P] Fax Application: Text/Photo
4583 [FaxApli: Photo] Fax Application: Photo
4584 [FaxApli: Original1] Fax Application: Original 1

SM 5-19 B229
SP Mode Tables

4585 [FaxApli: Original2] Fax Application: Original 2

MTF Lvl: 0-15 [0 to 15 / 8 / 1/step]
-005 Sets the MTF level (Modulation Transfer Function) designed to improve image
contrast. Set higher for stronger effect, lower for weaker effect.
Smooth:0-7 [0 to 15 / 4 / 1/step]
-006
Use to remove "jaggies" if they appear. Set higher for smoother.
Brightness:1-255 [1 to 255 / 128 / 1/step]
-007
Set higher for darker, set lower for lighter.
Contrast:1-255 [1 to 255 / 128 / 1/step]
-008
Set higher for more contrast, set lower for less contrast.
Standoff:1-7 [0 to 7 / 0 / 1/step]
Sets the erasure level of irregular dots. Set higher for stronger effect, lower for
-009
weaker effect.
0: Not activated
[0 to 2 / 0 / 1/step]
Texture:1-2 This SP (suffix "-010") only exists in SP4580,
4582 and 4583.
-010
Sets the erasure level of textures. Set higher for stronger effect, lower for weaker
effect.
0: Not activated

4600 [Display SBU ID]

Displays the board version of the SBU. First
4600 1 production model indicates "0".
[0 to7 / 0 / 1/step]

4602 [SBU Mem Access] SBU Memory Access Not Used

4602 1 SBU Mem Access
4602 2 Set Address
4602 3 Set Data

4603 [Do AGC] Auto Gain Control Execution

4603 1 HP Detect: Enable Executes the AGC.
4603 2 HP Detect: Disable DFU

B229 5-20 SM
 SP Mode Tables

4604 [Open/Close FGATE] DFU

Opens or closes the FGATe signal. This SP automatically returns to the default
status (close) after exiting this SP.
4604 1
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step]
0: OFF, 1: ON

4606 [Wht Lvl Adj: R] White Level Adjustment: Red DFU

This value is the target value of red for the white level adjustment.
4606 1
[0 to 1024 / 784 / 1 digit/step]

4607 [Wht Lvl Adj: G] White Level Adjustment: Green DFU

This value is the target value of green for the white level adjustment.
4607 1
[0 to 1024 / 784 / 1 digit/step]

4608 [Wht Lvl Adj: B] White Level Adjustment: Blue DFU

This value is the target value of blue for the white level adjustment.
4608 1
[0 to 1024 / 784 / 1 digit/step]

4623 [BkLvl Adj: ValueR] Black Level Adjustment: Current Value of Red

Service
Tables
4624 [BkLvl Adj: ValueG] Black Level Adjustment: Current Value of Green
4625 [BkLvl Adj: ValueB] Black Level Adjustment: Current Value of Blue
CrsAdj: Rough Adjustment, FinAdj: Fine Adjustment
RE (GE or BE): Red (Green or Blue) Even signal, RO (GO or BO): Red (Green
or Blue) Odd signal
-001 CrsAdj: RE (GE or BE) Clr Displays the black offset value for the each even
-002 CrsAdj: RO (GO or BO) Clr or odd color (red, green or blue) signal in the CCD
-003 FinAdj: RE (GE or BE) Clr circuit board (color printing speed).
-004 FinAdj: RO (GO or BO) Clr [0 to 255 / 128 / 1 digit/step]
-005 CrsAdj: RE (GE or BE) Bk Displays the black offset value for the each even
-006 CrsAdj: RO (GO or BO) Bk or odd color (red, green or blue) signal in the CCD
-007 FinAdj: RE (GE or BE) Bk circuit board (B/W printing speed).
-008 FinAdj: RO (GO or BO) Bk [0 to 255 / 128 / 1 digit/step]

SM 5-21 B229
SP Mode Tables

4628 [Gain Adj: ValueR] Gain Adjustment: Current Value of Red

4629 [Gain Adj: ValueG] Gain Adjustment: Current Value of Green
4630 [Gain Adj: ValueB] Gain Adjustment: Current Value of Blue
R: Red, G: Green, B: Blue
-001 Value: R(G or B)Even Clr Displays the gain value of the amplifiers on the
controller for each color (red, green or blue) in
-002 Value: R(G or B)Odd Clr color printing mode.
[0 to 255 / 0 / 1 digit/step]
-003 Value: R(G or B)Even Bk Displays the gain value of the amplifiers on the
controller for each color (red, green or blue) in
-004 Value: R(G or B)Odd Bk B/W printing mode.
[0 to 255 / 0 / 1 digit/step]

[Bk Lvl Adj Loop] Black Level Adjustment Loop

4640
Adj1: First adjustment, Adj2: Second adjustment
4640 1 Adj1:Clr
Displays the black level adjustment time for each
4640 2 Adj1:BK
mode.
4640 3 Adj2:Clr
[0 to 20 / 0 / 1 time/step]
4640 4 Adj2:BK

4641 [White Lvl Loop] White Level Adjustment Loop

4640 1 Color Displays the white level adjustment time for each
mode.
4640 2 B/W
[0 to 20 / 0 / 1 time/step]

4646 [Read Adj Timeout] Read Adjustment Timeout

4640 1 Bk Offset Adj1 Displays the result of the AGC adjustment. If the
4640 2 Bk Offset Adj2 AGC adjustment fails, SC141 (Bk Lvl) or SC142
(White Lvl) occurs.
4640 3 Wht Lvl Adj [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step]
0: OK, 1: AGC adjustment failure

B229 5-22 SM
 SP Mode Tables

4647 [Read Hard Error] Read Hard Error

Displays the result of the SBU connection check.
If the SBU connection check fails, SC144-001,
4640 1 At Power On -002 or -003 occurs.
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step]
0: OK, 1: SBU connection check failure

4654 [BkLvl Adj: PrevR] Black Level Adjustment: Previous Value of Red
4655 [BkLvl Adj: PrevG] Black Level Adjustment: Previous Value of Green
4656 [BkLvl Adj: PrevB] Black Level Adjustment: Previous Value of Blue
Displays the previous vale of the black level adjustment for each color.
CrsAdj: Rough Adjustment, FinAdj: Fine Adjustment
RE (GE or BE): Red (Green or Blue) Even signal, RO (GO or BO): Red (Green
or Blue) Odd signal
-001 CrsAdj: RE (GE or BE) Clr
[0 to 255 / 112 / 1 digit/step]
-002 CrsAdj: RO (GO or BO) Clr
-003 FinAdj: RE (GE or BE) Clr
[0 to 255 / 128 / 1 digit/step]
-004 FinAdj: RO (GO or BO) Clr

Service
Tables
-005 CrsAdj: RE (GE or BE) Bk
[0 to 255 / 112 / 1 digit/step]
-006 CrsAdj: RO (GO or BO) Bk
-007 FinAdj: RE (GE or BE) Bk
[0 to 255 / 128 / 1 digit/step]
-008 FinAdj: RO (GO or BO) Bk

4658 [Gain Adj: PrevR] Gain Adjustment: Previous Value of Red

4659 [Gain Adj: PrevG] Gain Adjustment: Previous Value of Green
4660 [Gain Adj: PrevB] Gain Adjustment: Previous Value of Blue
Displays the previous vale of the gainl adjustment for each color.
RE (GE or BE): Red (Green or Blue) Even signal, RO (GO or BO): Red (Green
or Blue) Odd signal
-001 S Prev: RE (GE or BE) Clr
-002 S Prev: RO (GO or BO) Clr
[0 to 255 / 0 / 1 digit/step]
-003 S Prev: RE (GE or BE) BK
-004 S Prev: RO (GO or BO) Bk

SM 5-23 B229
SP Mode Tables

4661 [BkLvl2 Adj: PrevR] Black Level2 Adjustment: Previous Value of Red
4662 [BkLvl2 Adj: PrevG] Black Level2 Adjustment: Previous Value of Green
4663 [BkLvl2 Adj: PrevB] Black Level2 Adjustment: Previous Value of Blue
Displays the previous vale of the second black level adjustment for each color.
CrsAdj: Rough Adjustment, FinAdj: Fine Adjustment
RE (GE or BE): Red (Green or Blue) Even signal, RO (GO or BO): Red (Green
or Blue) Odd signal
-001 CrsAdj: RE (GE or BE) Clr
[0 to 255 / 112 / 1 digit/step]
-002 CrsAdj: RO (GO or BO) Clr
-003 FinAdj: RE (GE or BE) Clr
[0 to 255 / 128 / 1 digit/step]
-004 FinAdj: RO (GO or BO) Clr
-005 CrsAdj: RE (GE or BE) Bk
[0 to 255 / 112 / 1 digit/step]
-006 CrsAdj: RO (GO or BO) Bk
-007 FinAdj: RE (GE or BE) Bk
[0 to 255 / 128 / 1 digit/step]
-008 FinAdj: RO (GO or BO) Bk

[BkLvl Adj: FactR] Black Level Adjustment: Factory Setting of Red

Displays the factory setting values of the black level adjustment.
4673
CrsAdj: Rough Adjustment, FinAdj: Fine Adjustment
RE: Red Even signal, RO: Red Odd signal
4673 1 CrsAdj: RE Clr
[0 to 255 / 112 / 1 digit/step]
4673 2 CrsAdj: RO Clr
4673 3 FinAdj: RE Clr
[0 to 255 / 128 / 1 digit/step]
4673 4 FinAdj: RO Clr
4673 5 CrsAdj: RE Bk
[0 to 255 / 112 / 1 digit/step]
4673 6 CrsAdj: RO Bk
4673 7 FinAdj: RE Bk
[0 to 255 / 128 / 1 digit/step]
4673 8 FinAdj: RO Bk

B229 5-24 SM
 SP Mode Tables

[BkLvl Adj: FactG] Black Level Adjustment: Factory Setting of Green

Displays the factory setting values of the black level adjustment.
4674
CrsAdj: Rough Adjustment, FinAdj: Fine Adjustment
GE: Green Even signal, GO: Green Odd signal
4674 1 CrsAdj: GE Clr
[0 to 255 / 112 / 1 digit/step]
4674 2 CrsAdj: GO Clr
4674 3 FinAdj: GE Clr
[0 to 255 / 128 / 1 digit/step]
4674 4 FinAdj: GO Clr
4674 5 CrsAdj: GE Bk
[0 to 255 / 112 / 1 digit/step]
4674 6 CrsAdj: GO Bk
4674 7 FinAdj: GE Bk
[0 to 255 / 128 / 1 digit/step]
4674 8 FinAdj: GO Bk

[BkLvl Adj: FactB] Black Level Adjustment: Factory Setting of Blue

Displays the factory setting values of the black level adjustment.
4675
CrsAdj: Rough Adjustment, FinAdj: Fine Adjustment
BE: Blue Even signal, BO: Blue Odd signal
4675 1 CrsAdj: BE Clr

Service
[0 to 255 / 112 / 1 digit/step]

Tables
4675 2 CrsAdj: BO Clr
4675 3 FinAdj: BE Clr
[0 to 255 / 128 / 1 digit/step]
4675 4 FinAdj: BO Clr
4675 5 CrsAdj: BE Bk
[0 to 255 / 112 / 1 digit/step]
4675 6 CrsAdj: BO Bk
4675 7 FinAdj: BE Bk
[0 to 255 / 128 / 1 digit/step]
4675 8 FinAdj: BO Bk

[Gain Adj: FactR] Gain Adjustment: Factory Setting of Red

4677 Displays the factory setting values of the gain adjustment.
RE: Red Even signal, RO: Red Odd signal
4677 1 Factini: RE Clr
4677 2 Factini: RO Clr
[0 to 255 / 0 / 1 digit/step]
4677 3 Factini: RE BK
4677 4 Factini: RO Bk

SM 5-25 B229
SP Mode Tables

[Gain Adj: FactG] Gain Adjustment: Factory Setting of Green

4678 Displays the factory setting values of the gain adjustment.
GE: Green Even signal, GO: Green Odd signal
4678 1 Factini: GE Clr
4678 2 Factini: GO Clr
[0 to 255 / 0 / 1 digit/step]
4678 3 Factini: GE BK
4678 4 Factini: GO Bk

[Gain Adj: FactB] Gain Adjustment: Factory Setting of Blue

4679 Displays the factory setting values of the gain adjustment.
BE: Blue Even signal, BO: Blue Odd signal
4679 1 Factini: BE Clr
4679 2 Factini: BO Clr
[0 to 255 / 0 / 1 digit/step]
4679 3 Factini: BE BK
4679 4 Factini: BO Bk

[Gray Balance: R] Gray Balance Adjustment: Red

4685
Adjusts the gray balance of red signal for each scanning mode. DFU
4685 1 For Book Read
[–512 to 511 / –240 / 1 digit/step]
4685 2 For DF Read

[Gray Balance: G] Gray Balance Adjustment: Green

4686
Adjusts the gray balance of green signal for each scanning mode. DFU
4686 1 For Book Read
[–512 to 511 / –240 / 1 digit/step]
4686 2 For DF Read

[Gray Balance: B] Gray Balance Adjustment: Blue

4687
Adjusts the gray balance of blue signal for each scanning mode. DFU
4687 1 For Book Read
[–512 to 511 / –240 / 1 digit/step]
4687 2 For DF Read

B229 5-26 SM
 SP Mode Tables

[DF Density Adj] DF Density Adjustment

Adjusts the white shading parameter when scanning an image with the ARDF.
4688
Adjusts the density level if the image density of outputs made in the DF and
Platen mode is different.
4688 1 [50 to 150 / 109 / 1%/step]

4690 [White Lvl Peak: R] White Level Scanning Peak Value: Red
4691 [White Lvl Peak: G] White Level Scanning Peak Value: Green
4692 [White Lvl Peak: B] White Level Scanning Peak Value: Blue
-001 RE (GE or BE)
Displays the peak level of the white level
-002 RO (GO or BO)
scanning.
-003 RE (GE or BE) BK
[0 to 1024 / 0 / 1 digit/step]
-004 RO (GO or BO) Bk

4693 [Black Lvl Scan: R] Black Level Scanning Peak Value: Red
4694 [Black Lvl Scan: G] Black Level Scanning Peak Value: Green
4695 [Black Lvl Scan: B] Black Level Scanning Peak Value: Blue
-001 RE (GE or BE)

Service
Tables
Displays the peak level of the white level
-002 RO (GO or BO)
scanning.
-003 RE (GE or BE) BK
[0 to 1024 / 0 / 1 digit/step]
-004 RO (GO or BO) Bk

[DF Shade FreeRun] DF Free Run for Shading

4802 Executes the scanner free run of shading movement with exposure lamp on or
off. Press "OFF" to stop this free run. Otherwise, the free run lasts.
4802 1 Lamp ON [0 or 1 / 0 / - ]
4802 2 Lamp OFF 0: OFF, 1: ON

4804 [Home Position] Scanner Home Position Adjustment

4804 1 Checks the scanner home position movement.

SM 5-27 B229
SP Mode Tables

4806 [Carriage Escape]

Moves the carriage from the scanner home
position. Dust may fall through the DF contact
4806 1
glass. Therefore, do this SP when you transport
this machine for a long term.

[Test Scan IPU] Test Scanner IPU Board

4904 Performs a write and read check of the ASICs on the scanner IPU board and
displays the result. Turn off and on after doing this SP.
Bit0: ASIC0 image register
Bit1: ASIC0 serial register
Bit2: ASIC1 register
Bit3: ASIC1 register
Bit4: ASIC1 register
4904 1 Test 1
Bit5: ASIC3 register
Bit6: ASIC2 register
Bit7: ASIC4 (MC) register
Bit8: ASIC4 (YK) register
0: OK, 1: Error
Bit0: ASIC0 image register
Bit1: ASIC0 serial register
Bit2: ASIC1 register
Bit3: ASIC1 register
Bit4: ASIC1 register
4904 2 Test 2
Bit5: ASIC3 register
Bit6: ASIC2 register
Bit7: ASIC4 (MC) register
Bit8: ASIC4 (YK) register
0: OK, 1: Error

4905 [Dither Select] DFU

Changes the parameters for error diffusion.
4905 1
[0 to 255 / 0 / 1/step]

B229 5-28 SM
 SP Mode Tables

[SBU Pattern]
4907
Selects the test pattern generated by the controller board.
[0 to 255 / 0 / 1/step]
0: Default (Scanned image)
1: Grid pattern
4907 1
2: Gradation main scan
3: Gradation sub scan
4 to 250: Default (Scanned image)

4909 [Man Gamma: P ColK] Manual Gamma Adjustment: Photo Mono-Black

4910 [Man Gamma: Txt: K] Manual Gamma Adjustment: Text Black
4911 [Man Gamma: Txt: C] Manual Gamma Adjustment: Text Cyan
4912 [Man Gamma: Txt: M] Manual Gamma Adjustment: Text Magenta
4913 [Man Gamma: Txt: Y] Manual Gamma Adjustment: Text Yellow
4914 [Man Gamma: T: ColK] Manual Gamma Adjustment: Text Mono-Black
4915 [Man Gamma: Pht: K] Manual Gamma Adjustment: Photo Black
4916 [Man Gamma: Pht: C] Manual Gamma Adjustment: Photo Cyan
4917 [Man Gamma: Pht: M] Manual Gamma Adjustment: Photo Magenta
4918 [Man Gamma: Pht: Y] Manual Gamma Adjustment: Photo Yellow

Service
Tables
-001 Offset: Highlight
Adjusts the offset data of the printer gamma for
-002 Offset: Middle
each color in Photo mode or Text mode.
-003 Offset: Shadow
[0 to 30 / 15 / 1/step]
-004 Offset: IDmax
-005 Option: Highlight
Adjusts the option data of the printer gamma for
-006 Option: Middle
each color in Photo mode or Text mode.
-007 Option: Shadow
[0 to 255 / 0 / 1/step]
-008 Option: IDmax

4991 [IPU Img Path Sel] IPU Image Path Switch

Use this SP to determine the image path. Enter the number to be selected using
the 10-key pad.
4991 1 RGB Frame Mem [0 to 11 / 2 / 1/step]
0 Scanner input RGB images
1 Scanner I/F RGB images

SM 5-29 B229
SP Mode Tables

2 RGB images done by Shading correction (Shading ON, Black offset ON)
3 Shading data
4 Inner pattern data: Gray scale
5 RGB images done by Line skipping correction
6 RGB images done by Digital AE
7 RGB images done by Vertical line correction
8 RGB image done by Scanner gamma correction
9 RGB image done by Filtering correction
10 RGB images done by Full color ADS
11 RGB image done by Color correction

4993 [Highlight Cor] Highlight Correction

Sensibility [0 to 9 / 4 / 1/step]
4993 1 Selects the Highlight correction level.
0: Weakest sensibility, 9: Strongest sensibility
Region [0 to 9 / 4 / 1/step]
002 Selects the range level of Highlight correction.
0: Weakest skew correction, 9: Strongest skew correction

5.2.5 SP5-XXX (MODE)

5001 [All Indicators On]
All LED’s turn on. The LCD turns on or off every 3 seconds. Press the reset key
001
to end this program.

5024* [mm/inch Selection]

Selects whether mm or inches are used in the display.

ƒ After selecting the number, you must turn the main power switch
001
off and on.
Europe/Asia model: [0: mm / 1: inch]
American model: [0: mm / 1: inch]

B229 5-30 SM
 SP Mode Tables
Rev. 11/2006

5045 [Counter Model]

001 Selects the counting method if the meter charge mode is enabled with
SP5-930-001.

You can change the setting only one time.

[0 or 1/ 0]
0: Development counter. Shows the total counts for color (Y,M,C) and black
(K).
1: Paper counter. Shows the total page counts for: Color Total, Black Total,
Color Copies, Black Copies, Color Prints, Black Prints.
⇒ NOTE: Settings “2” and “3” are also displayed on the LCD, but they cannot
be selected.

[Refill Toner Displ] Refill Toner Detection Display

5051
Enables or disables the toner refill detection display.
Toner Refill Detection [ 0 or 1 / 0 /- ]
001 *CTL
Display 0: ON, 1: OFF

5055 [Display IP address]

Display or does not display the IP address on
the LCD.

Service
Tables
001 Display IP address *CTL
[0 or 1 / 0 / -]
0: Not display, 1: Display

5056 [Coverage Counter]

Display or does not display the coverage
counter on the LCD.
001 Coverage Counter *CTL
[0 or 1 / 0 / -]
0: Not display, 1: Display

[A3 Double Count] SSP

5104*
A3 Double Count *CTL [0 = No / 1 = Yes / 2 = No Unclear]
Selects whether the machine counts twice for each sheet of A3/11"x 17". If this
001 is set to “Yes” is selected, the total (mechanical) counter and the current user
counter will both increment by two for each A3/11" x 17" sheet.

SM 5-31 B229
SP Mode Tables

5112 [Non-Std. Paper Set] Non-Standard Paper Set

Determines whether a non-standard paper size can be input for the universal
cassette trays (Tray 2, Tray 3)
[0 or 1 / 0 / - ]
001
0: No
1: Yes. If “1” is selected, the customer will be able to input a non-standard
paper size using the UP mode.

5113 [Optional Counter Type]

This program specifies the counter type.
0: None
1: Key card (RK 3, 4)
2: Key card (down)
Default Optional Counter
001 *CTL 3: Prepaid card
Type
4: Coin Rack
5: MF key card
8: Key counter + Vendor
9: Bar-code Printer
This program specifies the external counter
type.
External Optional Counter 0: None
002 *CTL
Type 1: External optional counter type 1
2: External optional counter type 2
3: External optional counter type 3

5118 [Disable Copying] *CTL [0: Not disabled/ 1: Disabled]

001 This program disables copying.

B229 5-32 SM
 SP Mode Tables

Mode Clear Opt. Counter

5120* *CTL [0=Yes / 1=Standby only / 2=No]
Removal
Determines under which conditions the copy job settings are reset when the
key counter is removed. With 0, the settings are cleared if the counter is
removed at the end of a job or midway through a job. With 1, they are only
001
cleared if the counter is removed at the end of a job. With 2, they are not
cleared at all, under either condition. With duplex copies, the job settings are
always preserved, regardless of the setting of this SP mode.

5121* Count Up Timing *CTL [0 = Feed In / 1 = Exit]

Selects whether the key counter increments at time of paper feed-in or at time
001
of paper exit.

5127 [APS Mode] *CTL [0: Not disabled/ 1: Disabled]

001 This program disables the APS.

[Code Mode With

5128 *CTL
Key/Card]

Service
Tables
001 DFU

5131 [Size For Dest] *CTL [0: DOM (Japan)/1: NA /2: EU or ASIA]
The program selects a paper size system from the following alternatives: the AB
001 system (0), the LT system (1), and the AF system (2). (Default depends on DIP
SW 101 setting.)

[0 or 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
5150 [By-pass Long Paper] *CTL
0: OFF, 1: ON
Determines whether the transfer sheet from the by-pass tray is used or not.
001 Normally the paper length for sub scanning paper from the by-pass tray is
limited to 600 mm, but this can be extended with this SP to 1260 mm.

5162 [App. Switch Method] *CTL [ 0: Soft Key Set/1: Hard Key Set]
001 This program specifies the switch that selects an application program.

SM 5-33 B229
SP Mode Tables

[Fax Printing Mode at Optional]

Enables or disables the automatic print out without an accounting device. This
5167
SP is used when the receiving fax is accounted by an external accounting
device.
[ 0 or 1 / 0 / – ]
Fax Printing Mode at
001 *CTL 0: Automatic printing
Optional Counter Off
1: No automatic printing

[CE Login]
5169 If you change the printer bit switches, you must ‘log in’ to service mode with this
SP before you go into the printer SP mode.
[0 or 1 / 0 / - ]
001 CE Login *CTL 0: Disabled
1: Enabled

5178* [Copy Data Security Setting]

Do this SP after installation of the Copy Data Security Unit.
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step]
0: Copy data security function disabled
1: Copy data security function enabled
001
ƒ The copy data security option will not operate correctly after installation
until this SP is turned on.
ƒ This SP is not displayed until the machine is powered on with the Copy
Data Security Setting board installed.

[Set Time]
Adjusts the RTC (real time clock) time setting for the local time zone.
Examples: For Japan (+9 GMT), enter 540 (9 hours x 60 min.)
DOM: +540 (Tokyo)
5302 NA :-300 (New York)
EU :+ 60 (Paris)
CH :+480 (Peking)
TW :+480 (Taipei)
AS :+480 (Hong Kong)

B229 5-34 SM
 SP Mode Tables

*CTL
002 Set Time [ -1440 to 1440 / Area / 1 min./step ]
#

5307 [Summer Time]

[ 0 or 1 / NA, EU, ASIA / 1 /step]
0: Disabled
Setting
1: Enabled
NA and EUR: 1, ASIA: 0
001
Enables or disables the summer time mode.

ƒ Make sure that both SP5-307-3 and -4 are correctly set. Otherwise,
this SP is not activated even if this SP is set to "1".
Rule Set (Start)
Specifies the start setting for the summer time mode.
There are 8 digits in this SP. For months 1 to 9, the "0" cannot be input in the
first digit, so the eight-digit setting for -2 or -3 becomes a seven-digit setting.
1st and 2nd digits: The month. [1 to 12]
3rd digit: The week of the month. [1 to 5]

Service
4th digit: The day of the week. [0 to 6 = Sunday to Saturday]

Tables
003
5th and 6th digits: The hour. [00 to 23]
7th digit: The length of the advanced time. [0 to 9 / 1 hour /step]
8th digit: The length of the advanced time. [0 to 5 / 10 minutes /step]
For example: 3500010 (EU default)
The timer is advanced by 1 hour at am 0:00 on the 5th Sunday in March
ƒ The digits are counted from the left.
ƒ Make sure that SP5-307-1 is set to "1".
Rule Set (End)
Specifies the end setting for the summer time mode.
There are 8 digits in this SP.
1st and 2nd digits: The month. [1 to 12]
004
3rd digit: The week of the month. [0 to 5]
4th digit: The day of the week. [0 to 6 = Sunday to Saturday]
5th and 6th digits: The hour. [00 to 23]
The 7th and 8 digits must be set to "00".

SM 5-35 B229
SP Mode Tables

ƒ The digits are counted from the left.

ƒ Make sure that SP5-307-1 is set to "1".

[Access Control]
5401 When installing the SDK application, SAS (VAS) adjusts the following settings.
DFU
006 C
016 DS
026 F
036 S SSP: These SP’s are not disclosed due to the security
046 P protection.
076 SDK 1
086 SDK 2
096 SDK 3
SDK1 Unique This ID is overwritten by SAS (VAS) when you install or
200 *CTL
ID uninstall the SDK application.
SDK1
201 Certification *CTL [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1 /step] DFU
Method
SDK2 Unique
210 *CTL DFU
ID
SDK2
211 Certification *CTL [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1 /step] DFU
Method
SDK3 Unique
220 *CTL DFU
ID
SDK3
221 Certification *CTL [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1 /step] DFU
Method

5404 [User Code Clear]

Clears the counts for the user codes assigned by the key operator to restrict
001
the use of the machine. Press [Execute] to clear.

B229 5-36 SM
 SP Mode Tables

5501 [PM Alarm Interval] *CTL

[ 0 to 9999 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Alarm off
001 Printout
1 to 9999: Alarm goes off when Value (1 to 9999) x
1000 PM counter
[ 0 or 1 / 1 / – ]
0: No alarm sounds
002 ADF
1: Alarm sounds after the number of originals passing
through the A(R)DF 10,000

5504 [Jam Alarm] *CTL

Sets the alarm to sound for the specified jam level (document misfeeds are not
included).
001
[ 0 to 3 / 3 / 1 /step]
0: Zero (Off), 1: Low (2.5K jams), 2: Medium (3K jams), 3: High (6K jams)

5505* [Error Alarm]

Sets the error alarm level.

Service
Tables
The error alarm counter counts "1" when any SC is detected. However, the
error alarm counter decreases "1" when any SC is not detected during specified
001
sheets of copies (for example, default 1500 sheets).
The error alarm occurs when the SC error alarm counter reaches "5".
[0 to 255 / 15 / 100 copies per step]

5507 [Supply Alarm] *CTL

001 Paper Size 0: Off, 1: On, DFU
002 Staple 0: Off, 1: On, DFU
003 Toner 0: Off, 1: On, DFU
128 Interval :Others [250 to 10000 / 1000 / 1 /step] DFU
132 Interval :A3
133 Interval :A4
134 Interval :A5
141 Interval :B4
142 Interval :B5

SM 5-37 B229
SP Mode Tables

160 Interval :DLT

164 Interval :LG
166 Interval :LT
172 Interval :HLT

5508* [Auto Call Setting] *CTL

Jam Remains 0: Disable, 1: Enable
001*
Enables/disables initiating a call for an unattended paper jam.
Frequent Jams 0: Disable, 1: Enable
002*
Enables/disables initiating a call for consecutive paper jams.
Door Open 0: Disable, 1: Enable
003*
Enables/disables initiating a call when the front door remains open.
Jam Remains: Time [ 03 to 30 / 10 / 1 minute /step]
011* Sets the time a jam must remain before it becomes an “unattended paper jam”.
This setting is enabled only when SP5508 004 is set to 1.
Freq Jam: # of Time [ 02 to 10 / 5 / 1 /step]
012* Sets the number of consecutive paper jams required to initiate a call. This
setting is enabled only when SP5508 004 is set to 1.
Door Open: Time [ 03 to 30 / 10 / 1 minute/step]
Sets the length of time the door remains open before the machine initiates a
013*
call.
This setting is enabled only when SP5508 004 is set to 1.
0: Automatic Call
Jam Remains: Mode
021* 1: Audible Warning at Machine
Determines what happens when a paper jam is left unattended.
0: Automatic Call
Freq Jam: Mode
022* 1: Audible Warning at Machine
Determines what happens when a paper jam happens continually.
Door Open: Mode 0: OFF, 1: ON
Determines what happens if the door remains open (15 min.).
023*
Displays a warning if set to ON. Pressing the call button will contact the service
center.

B229 5-38 SM
 SP Mode Tables

[SC/Alarm Setting] *CTL

With NRS (New Remote Service) in use, these SP codes can be set to issue an
5515
SC call when an SC error occurs. If this SP is switched off, the SC call is not
issued when an SC error occurs.
001 SC Call
002 Service Parts Near End
003 Service Parts End
004 User Call [0 or 1 / 1 / -]
006 Communication Test 0: Off, 1: On
007 Machine Information
008 Alarm Notice
009 Non Genuine Toner
010 Supply Automatic Order
[0 or 1 / 0 / -] 0: Off,1: On
011 Supply Management Report
012 Jam/Door Open Call [0 or 1 / 1 / -] 0: Off,1: On

5610 [ACC Factory Setting]

Value

Service
004

Tables
Recalls the factory settings.
Value Setting
005
Overwrites the current values onto the factory settings.
Restore Org
006
Recalls the previous settings.

[Memory Clear]
5801
Before executing any of these SP codes, print an SMC Report.
001 All Clear
Initializes items SP5801-002 to -014 below.
Turn off and on the main power switch after executing this SP.
002 Engine
Clears the engine settings.
003 SCS
Clears the system settings.

SM 5-39 B229
SP Mode Tables

[Memory Clear]
5801
Before executing any of these SP codes, print an SMC Report.
IMH
004
Clears IMH data. DFU
MCS
005
Clears MCS data. DFU
Copier
006
Clears the copy application settings.
Fax
007
Clears the fax application settings.
Printer
008
Clears the printer application settings.
Scanner
009
Clears the scanner application settings.
GWWS/NFA
010 Delete the netfile application management files and thumbnails, and initializes
the job login ID.
NCS
Initializes the system default and interface settings (IP address also),
SmartNetMonitor for
011
Admin, WebStatusMonitor settings, and the TELNET settings.
The name of Apple talk is not cleared only if this SP is executed. Turns off and
on after executing this SP.
R-FAX
012 Initializes the job login ID, SmartNetMonitor for
Admin, job history, and local storage file numbers.
Clear DCS Setting
014
Initializes the DCS (Delivery Control Service) settings.
Clear UCS Setting
015
Initializes the UCS (User Information Control Service) settings.
MIRS Setting
016
Initializes the MIRS (Machine Information Report Service) settings.
CCS
017
Initializes the CCS (Certification and Charge-control Service) settings.

B229 5-40 SM
 SP Mode Tables

[Memory Clear]
5801
Before executing any of these SP codes, print an SMC Report.
SRM Memory Clr
018
Initializes the SRM (System Resource Manager) settings.
LCS
019
Initializes the LCS (Log Count Service) settings.

INPUT CHECK
5803
( Input Check)

OUTPUT CHECK
5804
( Output Check)

5811* [Machine Serial] Machine Serial Number

001 Set ( Serial Number Input)
002 Display Displays the machine serial number.

5812 [Service TEL]

Telephone *CTL

Service
Tables
Sets the telephone number for a service representative. This number is printed
001 on the Counter List, which can be printed with the user’s “Counter” menu.
This can be up to 20 characters (both numbers and alphabetic characters can
be input).
Facsimile *CTL
Sets the fax or telephone number for a service representative. This number is
002 printed on the Counter List.
This can be up to 20 characters (both numbers and alphabetic characters can
be input).
Supply *CTL
Use this to input the telephone number of your supplier for consumables. Enter
003
the number and press "StringIn" key.
Press the “Clear modes” key to delete the telephone number.
Sales *CTL
004 Use this to input the telephone number of your sales agency. Enter the number
and press #. Press the “Clear modes” key to delete the telephone number.

SM 5-41 B229
SP Mode Tables

5816 [NRS Function] *CTL

Selects the remote service setting.
[ 0 to 2 / 2 / 1 /step]
001 I/F Setting 0: Remote service off
1: CSS remote service on
2: NRS remote service on
Performs the CE Call at the start or end of the
service.
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
002 CE Call 0: Start of the service, 1: End of the service

ƒ This SP is activated only when SP

5816-001 is set to “2”.
Enables or disables the remote service function.
003 Function Flag [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
Uses or does not use the RCG certification by SSL
when calling the RCG.
007 SSL Disable [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Uses the RCG certification
1: Does no use the RCG certification
Specifies the connect timeout interval when calling
008 RCG Connect Timeout the RCG.
[1 to 90 / 10 / 1 second/step]
Specifies the write timeout interval when calling the
009 RCG Write Timeout RCG.
[1 to 100 / 60 / 1 second/step]
Specifies the read timeout interval when calling the
010 RCG Read Timeout RCG.
[1 to 100 / 60 / 1 second/step]
Enables/disables access via port 80 to the SOAP
method.
011 Port 80
[0 or 1 / 0 / – ]
0: Disabled, 1: Enabled

B229 5-42 SM
 SP Mode Tables

Function Flag
This SP displays the Cumin installation end flag.
021
1: Installation completed
2: Installation not completed
Install Status
This SP displays the Cumin installation status.
022 0: Basil not registered
1: Basil registered
2: Device registered
Connect Mode (N/M)
This SP displays and selects the Cumin connection method.
023
0: Internet connection
1: Dial-up connection
NotiTime ExpTime DFU
061
Proximity of the expiration of the certification.
HTTP Proxy Use
062 This SP setting determines if the proxy server is used when the machine
communicates with the service center.
HTTP Proxy Host

Service
Tables
This SP sets the address of the proxy server used for communication between
Cumin-N and the gateway. Use this SP to set up or display the customer proxy
server address. The address is necessary to set up Cumin-N.
063
ƒ The address display is limited to 127 characters. Characters
beyond the 127th character are ignored.
ƒ This address is customer information and is not printed in the SMC
report.
HTTP Proxy Port Number
This SP sets the port number of the proxy server used for communication
between Cumin-N and the gateway. This setting is necessary to set up
064 Cumin-N.

ƒ This port number is customer information and is not printed in the

SMC report.
065 HTTP Proxy Aut Usr

SM 5-43 B229
SP Mode Tables

This SP sets the HTTP proxy authentication user name.

ƒ The length of the name is limited to 31 characters. Any character

beyond the 31st character is ignored.
ƒ This name is customer information and is not printed in the SMC
report.
HTTP Proxy Aut Pass
This SP sets the HTTP proxy authentication password.

066 ƒ The length of the password is limited to 31 characters. Any

character beyond the 31st character is ignored.
ƒ This name is customer information and is not printed in the SMC
report.
Cer Updt Cond
Displays the status of the certification update.
0 The certification used by Cumin is set correctly.
The certification request (setAuthKey) for update has been received from
1
the GW URL and certification is presently being updated.
The certification update is completed and the GW URL is being notified of
2
the successful update.
The certification update failed, and the GW URL is being notified of the
3
failed update.
The period of the certification has expired and new request for an update
4
is being sent to the GW URL.
067
A rescue update for certification has been issued and a rescue
11
certification setting is in progress for the rescue GW connection.
The rescue certification setting is completed and the GW URL is being
12
notified of the certification update request.
The notification of the request for certification update has completed
13 successfully, and the system is waiting for the certification update request
from the rescue GW URL
The notification of the certification request has been received from the
14
rescue GW controller, and the certification is being stored.
The certification has been stored, and the GW URL is being notified of the
15
successful completion of this event.

B229 5-44 SM
 SP Mode Tables

The storing of the certification has failed, and the GW URL is being
16
notified of the failure of this event.
The certification update request has been received from the GW URL,
the GW URL was notified of the results of the update after it was
17
completed, but an error has been received, and the rescue certification is
being recorded
The rescue certification of No. 17 has been recorded, and the GW URL is
18
being notified of the failure of the certification update.
Cer Abnml Cause
Displays a number code that describes the reason for the request for update of
the certification.
0 Normal. There is no request for certification update in progress.
Request for certification update in progress. The current certification has
1
expired.
068 An SSL error notification has been issued. Issued after the certification
2
has expired.
Notification of shift from a common authentication to an individual
3
certification.

Service
Tables
4 Notification of a common certification without ID2.
5 Notification that no certification was issued.
6 Notification that GW URL does not exist.
Cert: Updtt ReqID
069
The ID of the request for certification.
Firm Updating
083
Displays the status of the firmware update.
Firm UpFlg No HDD
084 This setting determines if the firmware can be updated, even without the HDD
installed.
Firm Up Usr Conf
This SP setting determines if the operator can confirm the previous version of
085 the firmware before the firmware update execution. If the option to confirm the
previous version is selected, a notification is sent to the system manager and
the firmware update is done with the firmware files from the URL.

SM 5-45 B229
SP Mode Tables

Firmware Size
086 Allows the service technician to confirm the size of the firmware data files during
the firmware update execution.
CERT: Macro Version
087
Displays the macro version of the NRS certification.
CERT: PAC Version
088
Displays the PAC version of the NRS certification.
CERT: ID2 Code
089 Displays ID2 for the NRS certification. Spaces are displayed as underscores (_).
Asterisks (*) indicate that no NRS certification exists.
CERT: Subject
Displays the common name of the NRS certification subject. CN = the following
090
17 bytes. Spaces are displayed as underscores (_). Asterisks (*) indicate that no
DESS exists.
CERT: Serial Number
091 Displays serial number for the NRS certification. Asterisks (*) indicate that no
DESS exists.
CERT: Issuer
092 Displays the common name of the issuer of the NRS certification. CN = the
following 30 bytes. Asterisks (*) indicate that no DESS exists.
CERT: St ExpTime
093 Displays the start time of the period for which the current NRS certification is
enabled.
CERT: End ExpTime
094 Displays the end time of the period for which the current NRS certification is
enabled.

B229 5-46 SM
 SP Mode Tables

Ins Country
Select from the list the name of the country where Cumin-M is installed in the
machine. After selecting the country, you must also set the following SP codes
for Cumin-M:
150 ƒ SP5816-153
ƒ SP5816-154
ƒ SP5816-161
0: Japan, 1: USA, 2: Canada, 3: UK, 4: Germany, 5: France
6: Italy, 7: Netherlands, 8: Belgium, 9: Luxembourg, 10: Spain
Aut Line Detect
Press [Execute].
Setting this SP classifies the telephone line where Cumin-M is connected as
either dial-up or push type, so Cumin-M can automatically distinguish the
number that connects to the outside line.
151
ƒ The current progress, success, or failure of this execution can be
displayed with SP5816 152.
ƒ If the execution succeeded, SP5816 153 will display the result for
confirmation and SP5816 154 will display the telephone number for the
connection to the outside line.

Service
Tables
Line Detect Rst
Displays a number to show the result of the execution of SP5816 151. Here is a
list of what the numbers mean.
0: Success
1: In progress (no result yet). Please wait.
2: Line abnormal
152 3: Cannot detect dial tone automatically
4: Line is disconnected
5: Insufficient electrical power supply
6: Line classification not supported
7: Error because fax transmission in progress – ioctl() occurred.
8: Other error occurred
9: Line classification still in progress. Please wait.

SM 5-47 B229
SP Mode Tables

Dial/Push Select
This SP displays the classification (tone or pulse) of the telephone line to the
access point for Cumin-M. The numbered displayed (0 or 1) is the result of the
execution of SP5816 151. However, this setting can also be changed manually.
[0to1/0/1]
153 0: Tone Dialing Phone
1: Pulse Dialing Phone
Inside Japan "2" may also be displayed:
0: Tone Dialing Phone
1: Pulse Dialing Phone 10PPS
2: Pulse Dialing Phone 20PPS
Outline Phone #
The SP sets the number that switches to PSTN for the outside connection for
Cumin-M in a system that employs a PBX (internal line).
ƒ If the execution of SP5816-151 has succeeded and Cumin-M has
connected to the external line, this SP display is completely blank.
154 ƒ If Cumin-M has connected to an internal line, then the number of the
connection to the external line is displayed.
ƒ If Cumin-M has connected to an external line, a comma is displayed with
the number. The comma is inserted for a 2 sec. pause.
ƒ The number setting for the external line can be entered manually
(including commas).
Remove Service: PPP Recognition Timeout
SSP: Sets the length of the timeout for the Cumin-M connection to its access
155 point. The timeout is the time from when the modem sends the ATD to when it
receives the result code.
[1 to 65536 / 60 / 1 /step]
Dial Up User
Use this SP to set a user name for access to remote dial up. Follow these rules
when setting a user name:
156
ƒ Name length: Up to 32 characters
ƒ Spaces and # allowed but the entire entry must be enclosed by double
quotation marks (").

B229 5-48 SM
 SP Mode Tables

Dial Up Password
Use this SP to set a password for access to remote dial up. Follow these rules
when setting a user name:
157
ƒ Name length: Up to 32 characters
ƒ Spaces and # allowed but the entire entry must be enclosed by double
quotation marks (").
Phone Number
Use this SP to set the telephone number of the line where Cumin-M is
161 connected. This number is transmitted to and used by the Call Center to return
calls.
Limit: 24 numbers (numbers only)
Ans Timing Adj
When the Call Center calls out to a Cumin-M modem, it sends a repeating ID
tone (*#1#). This SP sets the line remains open to send these ID tones after the
162 number of the Cumin-M modem is dialed up and connected.
[0 to 24/ 1 /1 /step]
The actual amount of time is this setting x 2 sec. For example, if you set "2" the
line will remain open for 4 sec.

Service
Access Point

Tables
This is the number of the dial-up access point for Cumin-M. If no setting is done
for this SP code, then a preset value (determined by the country selected) is
163
used.
Default: 0
Allowed: Up to 16 alphanumeric characters
Comm Line
This SP sets the connection conditions for the customer. This setting dedicates
the line to Cumin-M only, or sets the line for sharing between Cumin-M and a fax
unit.
[0 or 1 / 0 / - ]
164
0: Line shared by Cumin-M/Fax
1: Line dedicated to Cumin-M only

ƒ If this setting is changed, the copier must be cycled off and on.
ƒ SP5816 187 determines whether the off-hook button can be used

SM 5-49 B229
SP Mode Tables

to interrupt a Cumin-M transmission in progress to open the line for

fax transaction.
Modem Serial Number
173
This SP displays the serial number registered for the Cumin-M.
Lmt Resend Cncl
Normally, it is best to allow unlimited time for certification and ID2 update
requests, and for the notification that the certification has been completed.
174 However, Cumin-M generates charges based on transmission time for the
customer, so a limit is placed upon the time allowed for these transactions.
If these transactions cannot be completed within the allowed time, do this SP to
cancel the time restriction.
FAX TX Priority
This SP determines whether pushing the off-hook button will interrupt a
Cumin-M transmission in progress to open the line for fax transaction. This SP
can be used only if SP5816-164 is set to "0".
[0 or 1/ 0 / - ]
0: Disable. Setting the fax unit off-hook does not interrupt a fax transaction in
187
progress. If the off-hook button is pushed during a Cumin-M transmission, the
button must be pushed again to set the fax unit on-hook after the Cumin-M
transmission has completed.
1: Enable. When Cumin-M shares a line with a fax unit, setting the fax unit
off-hook will interrupt a Cumin-M transmission in progress and open the line for
a fax transaction.
Polling Man Exc
200
Executes the polling test.
Instl: Condition
Displays a number that indicates the status of the NRS service device.
0: Neither the NRS device nor Cumin device are set.
1: The Cumin device is being set. Only Box registration is completed. In this
201 status the Basil unit cannot answer a polling request.
2: The Cumin device is set. In this status the Basil unit cannot answer a polling
request.
3: The NRS device is being set. In this status the Cumin device cannot be set.
4: The NRS module has not started.

B229 5-50 SM
 SP Mode Tables

Instl: ID#
202
Allows entry of the number of the request needed for the Cumin device.
Instl: Reference
203
Executes the inquiry request to the NRS GW URL.
Instl: Ref Rslt
Displays a number that indicates the result of the inquiry executed with
SP5816-203.
0: Succeeded
1: Inquiry number error
2: Registration in progress
204 3: Proxy error (proxy enabled)
4: Proxy error (proxy disabled)
5: Proxy error (Illegal user name or password)
6: Communication error
7: Certification update error
8: Other error
9: Inquiry executing
Instl: Ref Section

Service
Tables
Displays the result of the notification sent to the device from the GW URL in
205
answer to the inquiry request. Displayed only when the result is registered at the
GW URL.
Instl: Rgstltn
206
Executes Cumin Registration.
Instl: Rgstltn Rst
Displays a number that indicates the registration result.
0: Succeeded
2: Registration in progress
3: Proxy error (proxy enabled)
207 4: Proxy error (proxy disabled)
5: Proxy error (Illegal user name or password)
6: Communication error
7: Certification update error
8: Other error
9: Registration executing

SM 5-51 B229
SP Mode Tables

Instl Error Code

Displays a number that describes the error code that was issued when either
SP5816 204 or SP5816 207 was executed.
Cause Code Meaning
-11001 Chat parameter error
Illegal Modem
-11002 Chat execution error
Parameter
-11003 Unexpected error
Inquiry, registration attempted without acquiring
-12002
device status.
Operation Error, Attempted registration without execution of an
-12003
Incorrect Setting inquiry and no previous registration.
Attempted setting with illegal entries for
-12004
certification and ID2.
208
Attempted dial up overseas without the correct
-2385
international prefix for the telephone number.
-2387 Not supported at the Service Center
-2389 Database out of service
-2390 Program out of service
Error Caused by -2391 Two registrations for same device
Response from GW -2392 Parameter error
URL -2393 Basil not managed
-2394 Device not managed
-2395 Box ID for Basil is illegal
-2396 Device ID for Basil is illegal
-2397 Incorrect ID2 format
-2398 Incorrect request number format
Instl Clear
209
Releases a machine from its Cumin setup.
Print Com Log
250
Prints the communication log.

B229 5-52 SM
 SP Mode Tables

5821 [NRS Address]

Sets the PI device code. After you change this
001 CSS-PI Device
setting, you must turn the machine off and on.
Sets the IP address of the RCG (Remote
Communication Gate) destination for call
002 RCG IP Address
processing at the remote service center.
[00000000h to FFFFFFFFh/1]

5824 NVRAM Upload

001 ( NVRAM Upload)

5825 NVRAM Download

001 ( NVRAM Download)

5828 [Network Setting] *CTL

Enables or disables 1284 Compatibility.
050 1284 Compatibility (Centro) [0 or 1 / 1 / 1 / step]
0: Disabled, 1: Enabled

Service
Tables
Enables or disables ECP Compatibility.
[0 or 1 / 1 / 1 / step]
052 ECP (Centro) 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
3. This SP is activated only when SP5-828-50 is
set to "1".
Enables/disables Job Spooling.
065 Job Spooling [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
Treatment of the job when a spooled job exists at
Job Spooling Clear: Start power on.
066
Time 0: ON (Data is cleared)
1: OFF (Automatically printed)
Validates or invalidates the job spooling function for
each protocol.
069 Job Spooling (Protocol)
0: Validates
1: Invalidates

SM 5-53 B229
SP Mode Tables

5828 [Network Setting] *CTL

bit0: LPR
bit1: FTP
bit2: IPP
bit3: SMB
bit4: BMLinkS
bit5: DIPRINT
bit6: (Reserved)
bit7: (Reserved)
Enables or disables the Telnet protocol.
090 TELNET (0: OFF 1: ON) [ 0 or 1 / 1 / – ]
0: Disable, 1: Enable
Enables or disables the Web operation.
091 Web (0: OFF 1: ON) [ 0 or 1 / 1 / – ]
0: Disable, 1: Enable
Operation IPv6 Link Local Address
This is the IPv6 local address link referenced on the Ethernet or wireless LAN
(802.11b) in the format:
145
"Link Local Address" + "Prefix Length"
The IPv6 address consists of a total 128 bits configured in 8 blocks of 16 bits
each.
Operation IPv6 Status
147
Address 1
Operation IPv6 Status These SPs are the IPv6 status addresses (1 to 5)
149
Address 2 referenced on the Ethernet or wireless LAN
Operation IPv6 Status (802.11b) in the format:
151
Address 3 "Status Address" + "Prefix Length"
Operation IPv6 Status The IPv6 address consists of a total 128 bits
153
Address 4 configured in 8 blocks of 16 bits each.
Operation IPv6 Status
155
Address 5
IPv6 Manual Setting Address
This SP is the IPv6 manually set address referenced on the Ethernet or wireless
156
LAN (802.11b) in the format:
"Manual Set Address" + "Prefix Length"

B229 5-54 SM
 SP Mode Tables

5828 [Network Setting] *CTL

The IPv6 address consists of a total 128 bits configured in 8 blocks of 16 bits
each.
IPv6 Gateway Address
This SP is the IPv6 gateway address referenced on the Ethernet or wireless
158
LAN (802.11b). The IPv6 address consists of a total 128 bits configured in 8
blocks of 16 bits each.

5832 [HDD] HDD Initialization *CTL

001 Format ALL
002 HDD Formatting (IMH)
003 Format Thumbnail
004 Format Job Log
005 Format Font
Initializes the hard disk. Use this SP mode only if
006 Format User Info
there is a hard disk error.
007 Format Rec Mail
008 Format Sed Mail
009 Formatting DFU Data
010 Formatting All Log

Service
Tables
011 Format Ridoc I/F

5839 [IEEE1394] *CTL

DFU: Turns the cycle master function on/off.
007 Cycle Master [0 or 1 / 1 / 1 /step]
0: OFF, 1: ON
DFU: Selects either ‘Standard’, 'IRM Color Copy', or
008 BCR mode
'Always Effective'.
DFU: Turns the IRM 1394a check on/off.
[0 or 1 / 0 / - ]
009 IRM 1394a Check 0: OFF, 1: ON
If the IRM is not defined as 1394a standard, its
node is used as IRM.
DFU
010 Unique ID [0 or 1 / 1 / - ]
0: OFF, 1: ON

SM 5-55 B229
SP Mode Tables

DFU: Prevents initiators from logging on or makes

initiators log off.
[0 or 1 / 1 / - ]
0: OFF
011 Logout (Prevents the initiators, having already logged on,
to log on if they try to log on.)
1: ON
(Makes initiators, having already logged on, to log
off if they try to log on.)
DFU: Allows/disallows an initiator to exclusively log
on.
012 Login
[0 or 1 / 0 / - ]
0: OFF (Disallows), 1: ON (Allows)
DFU: Specifies the maximum initiators able to log
013 Login MAX on.
[0 to 63 / 8 / 1 /step]

5840 [IEEE 802.11b]

[1 to 11 or 13 / 11 or 13 / 1 /step]
Channel MAX *CTL Europe: 1 to 13, default: 13
NA/ Asia: 1 to 11, default: 11
Sets the maximum number of channels available for data transmission via the
006 wireless LAN. The number of channels available varies according to location.
The default settings are set for the maximum end of the range for each area.
Adjust the upper 4 bits to set the maximum number of channels. DFU

ƒ Do not change the setting.

B229 5-56 SM
 SP Mode Tables

[ 1 to 11 or 13 / 1 / 1 /step]
Channel MIN *CTL Europe: 1 to 13
NA/ Asia: 1 to 11
Sets the minimum number of channels available for data transmission via the
007 wireless LAN. The number of channels available varies according to location.
The default settings are set for the minimum end of the range for each area.
Adjust the lower 4 bits to set the minimum number of channels. DFU

ƒ Do not change the setting.

[00 to 11 / 00 / 1 binary]
00: Key #1
WEP Key Select *CTL 01: Key #2 (Reserved)
011
10: Key #3 (Reserved)
11: Key #4 (Reserved)
Selects the WEP key.

5841 [Supply Name]

001 Toner Name: Bk

Service
Tables
002 Toner Name: C Specifies supply names. These appear on
003 Toner Name: Y *CTL the screen when the user presses the
004 Toner Name: M Inquiry button in the user tools screen.
007 Org Stamp

5842 [GWWS Analysis] DFU

Setting 1
Bit Groups
0 System & other groups (LSB)
1 Capture related
This is a debugging tool. It sets
2 Certification related
001 the debugging output mode of
3 Address book related
each Net File process.
4 Machine management related
Default: Bit SW 1000 0000
5 Output related (printing, delivery)
6 Repository related
7 Debug log output

SM 5-57 B229
SP Mode Tables

Setting 2
Bit Groups
0-6 Not used
002
Default: Bit SW 0000 0000 Log time stamp setting
7 0: Date/Hour/Minute/Second
1: Minute/Second/Msecond

5844 USB
Transfer Rate
Sets the speed for USB data transmission.
001
[Full Speed]
[Auto Change]
Vendor ID
Sets the vendor ID:
002
Initial Setting: 0x05A Ricoh Company
[0x0000 to 0xFFFF/1] DFU
Product ID
003 Sets the product ID.
[0x0000 to 0xFFFF/1] DFU
Device Release No.
Sets the device release number of the BCD (binary coded decimal) display.
004 [0000 to 9999/1] DFU
Enter as a decimal number. NCS converts the number to hexadecimal number
recognized as the BCD.

[Delivery Server Setting] *CTL

5845
Provides items for delivery server settings.
FTP Port Num [ 0 to 65535 / 3670 / 1 /step]
001
Sets the FTP port number used when image files to the Scan Router Server.
Srv IP (Primary) Range: 000.000.000.000 to 255.255.255.255
002 Use this SP to set the Scan Router Server address. The IP address under the
transfer tab can be referenced by the initial system setting.

B229 5-58 SM
 SP Mode Tables

Delivery Error Display Time [ 0 to 999 / 300 / 1 second /step]

Use this setting to determine the length of time the prompt message is
006
displayed when a test error occurs during document transfer with the NetFile
application and an external device.
Srv IP (Secondary) Range: 000.000.000.000 to 255.255.255.255
Specifies the IP address assigned to the computer designated to function as
008
the secondary delivery server of Scan Router. This SP allows only the setting
of the IP address without reference to the DNS setting.
Delivery Server Model [ 0 to 4 / 0 / 1 /step]
Allows changing the model of the delivery server registered by the I/O device.
009
0: Unknown, 1: SG1 Provided, 2: SG1 Package,
3: SG2 Provided, 4: SG2 Package
Delivery Svr Capability [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1 /step]
Bit7 = 1 Comment information exits
Bit6 = 1 Direct specification of mail address possible
Bit5 = 1 Mail RX confirmation setting possible
Bit4 = 1 Address book automatic update function Changes the capability
010 exists of the server that is

Service
Tables
Bit3 = 1 Fax RX delivery function exists registered as an I/O
Bit2 = 1 Sender password function exists device.

Bit1 = 1 Function to link MK-1 user and Sender exists

Bit0 = 1 Sender specification required (if set to 1, Bit6
is set to “0”)
Delivery Svr Capability (Ext) [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1 /step]
Changes the capability of the server that is registered as an I/O device.
011 Bit7 = 1 Address book usage limitation (Limitation for each authorized user)
Bit6 = 1 RDH authorization link
Bit5 to 0: Not used
Svr Schm (Primary)
013
Specifies the scheme of the primary delivery server.
Svr Port Num (Pri)
014
Specifies the port number of the primary delivery server.
Srv URL Path (Pri)
015
Specifies the URL path of the primary delivery server.

SM 5-59 B229
SP Mode Tables

Svr Schm (Sec)

016
Specifies the scheme of the secondary delivery server.
Svr Port Num (Sec)
017
Specifies the port number of the secondary delivery server.
Srv URL Path (Sec)
018
Specifies the URL path of the secondary delivery server.
CapSvr Schm
019
Specifies the scheme of the capture server.
CapSvr Port Num
020
Specifies the port number of the capture server.
CapSrv URL Path
021
Specifies the URL path of the s capture server.

5846 [UCS Settings] *CTL

Machine ID (For Delivery Server) Displays ID
Displays the unique device ID in use by the delivery server directory. The value
001
is only displayed and cannot be changed. This ID is created from the NIC MAC
or IEEE 1394 EUI. The ID is displayed as either 6-byle or 8-byte binary.
Machine ID Clear (For Delivery Server) Clears ID
Clears the unique ID of the device used as the name in the file transfer
002 directory. Execute this SP if the connection of the device to the delivery server
is unstable. After clearing the ID, the ID will be established again automatically
by cycling the machine off and on.
Maximum Entries [150 to 999 / 150 / 1 /step]
Changes the maximum number of entries that UCS can handle.
003
If a value smaller than the present value is set, the UCS managed data is
cleared, and the data (excluding user code information) is displayed.
Delivery Server Retry Timer [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 /step]
006 Sets the interval for retry attempts when the delivery server fails to acquire the
delivery server address book.
Delivery Server Retry Times [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 /step]
007 Sets the number of retry attempts when the delivery server fails to acquire the
delivery server address book.
Delivery Server Maximum Entries [200 to 999 / 200 / 1/step]
008
Sets the maximum number account entries of the delivery server user

B229 5-60 SM
 SP Mode Tables

5846 [UCS Settings] *CTL

information managed by UCS.
LDAP Search Timeout [1 to 255 / 60 / 1 /step]
010
Sets the length of the timeout for the search of the LDAP server.
[AddrBMig (SD–> HDD)] Address Book Migration (SD–> HDD)
This SP moves the address book data from an SD card to the HDD. You
must cycle the machine off and on after executing this SP.
040 When you do this SP without a HDD, SC991 occurs.

ƒ We recommend that you back up all directory information to an

SD card with SP5846-051 before you execute this SP.
[AddrB Acl Info] Address Book Access Control List Information
This SP must be executed immediately after installation of an HDD unit in a
basic machine that previously had no HDD. The first time the machine is
powered on with the new HDD installed; the system automatically takes the
041
address book from the NVRAM and writes it onto the new HDD. However, the
new address book on the HDD can be accessed only by the system
administrator at this stage. Executing this SP by the service technician
immediately after power on grants full address book access to all users.

Service
Tables
Clears the local address book information,
047 Initialize Local Addr Book
including the user code.
Clears the distribution address book
048 Initialize Delivery Addr Book
information, except the user code.
Clears the LDAP address book information,
049 Initialize LDAP Addr Book
except the user code.
Clears all directory information managed by
UCS, including all user codes.
050 Initialize All Addr Book
Turn off and on the main power switch after
executing this SP.
Uploads all directory information to the SD
051 Backup All Addr Book
card.
Downloads all directory information from the
052 Restore All Addr Book
SD card.
Clear Backup Info
053
Deletes the address book data from the SD card in the service slot.

SM 5-61 B229
SP Mode Tables

5846 [UCS Settings] *CTL

Deletes only the files that were uploaded from this machine.
This feature does not work if the card is write-protected.

ƒ After you do this SP, go out of the SP mode, and then turn the
power off. Do not remove the SD card until the Power LED stops
flashing.
Search Option
This SP uses bit switches to set up the fuzzy search options for the UCS local
address book.
060
Bit0: Checks both upper/lower case characters
Bit1: Japan only
Bit2 to 7: Not used
Compl Opt1
Use this SP to set the conditions for password entry to access the local
address book. Specifically, this SP limits the password entry to upper case and
sets the length of the password.
062 [0 to 32 / 0 / 1 /step]

ƒ This SP does not normally require adjustment.

ƒ This SP is enabled only after the system administrator has set up
a group password policy to control access to the address book.
Compl Opt2
Use this SP to set the conditions for password entry to access the local
address book. Specifically, this SP limits the password entry to lower case and
defines the length of the password.
063 [0 to 32 / 0 / 1 /step]

ƒ This SP does not normally require adjustment.

ƒ This SP is enabled only after the system administrator has set up
a group password policy to control access to the address book.
Compl Opt3
Use this SP to set the conditions for password entry to access the local
064
address book. Specifically, this SP limits the password entry to numbers and
defines the length of the password.

B229 5-62 SM
 SP Mode Tables

5846 [UCS Settings] *CTL

[0 to 32 / 0 / 1 /step]

ƒ This SP does not normally require adjustment.

ƒ This SP is enabled only after the system administrator has set up
a group password policy to control access to the address book.
Compl Opt4
Use this SP to set the conditions for password entry to access the local
address book. Specifically, this SP limits the password entry to symbols and
defines the length of the password.
065 [0 to 32 / 0 / 1 /step]

ƒ This SP does not normally require adjustment.

ƒ This SP is enabled only after the system administrator has set up
a group password policy to control access to the address book.
Specifies the FTP port for getting a distribution
server address book that is used in the
091 FTP Auth Port Setting
identification mode.
[0 to 65535 / 3671 / 1 /step]

Service
Shows the status of the encryption function for

Tables
094 Encryption Stat
the address book data.

[Web Service] *CTL

SP5848-1 sets the 4-bit switch assignment for the access control setting.
5848
Setting of 0001 has no effect on access and delivery from Scan Router.
ac: Access Control
ac: Netfile (Lower 4 bits only) Bit switch settings.
0000: No access control
001
0001: Denies access to DeskTop Binder. Access and deliveries from Scan
Router have no effect on capture.
004 ac: UD (only Lower 4 bits)
ac: For Cherry (only Lower 4 Switches access control on and off.
005
bits) 0000: No access control
007 ac: Log Fax (Lower 4 bits) 0001: Denies access to DeskTop Binder.
009 ac: Job Ctrl (Lower 4 bits)

SM 5-63 B229
SP Mode Tables

ac: Device Management

011
(Lower 4 bits)
022 ac: Uadmin (Lower 4bits)
210 Log Type: Job1
211 Log Type: Job2
Displays the log server settings.
212 Log Type: Access
These can be adjusted with the Web Image
213 Primary Srv
Monitor.
214 Secondary Srv
215 Start Time
Specifies the transmit interval.
[1 to 1000 / 1 / 1 hour/step]
216 Interval Time
This SP is activated only when SP5848-217 is
set to "2 (Transmit periodically)".
Selects the transmit timing.
[0 to 2 / 0 / 1/step]
217 Timing
0: No Transmit, 1: Transmit one by one
2: Transmit periodically

[Installation Date]
5849
Displays or prints the installation date of the machine.
The “Counter Clear Day” has been changed to “Installation
001 Display
Date” or “Inst. Date”.
Determines whether the installation date is printed on the
printout for the total counter.
002 Print
[0 or 1/ 1 / 1/step]
0: No Print, 1: Print

5851 [Bluetooth]
Sets the operation mode for the Bluetooth Unit. Press either key.
001
0 :Public, 1: Private

B229 5-64 SM
 SP Mode Tables

[Remote ROM Update]

5856 Allows the technician to upgrade the firmware using a parallel cable when
updating the remote ROM.
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step]
002 Local Port *CTL 0: Not allowed
1: Allowed

5857 [Debug Log Save] *CTL

On/Off (1:ON 0:OFF) 0: ON, 1: OFF
001 Switches the debug log feature on and off. The debug log cannot be captured
until this feature is switched on.
Target (2: HDD 3: SD) 2: HDD, 3: SD Card
Selects the storage device to save debug logs information when the conditions
002
set with SP5-858 are satisfied.
[ 2 to 3 / 2 / 1 /step]
Save to HDD DFU
Saves the debug log in memory to the HDD.
005 A unique file name is generated to avoid overwriting existing file names on the

Service
Tables
HDD. Up to 4MB can be copied to the HDD. 4 MB segments can be copied one
by one to the HDD.
006 Save to SD Card
009 HDD to SD Latest (Latest 4 MB)
010 HDD to SD Any (Latest 4 MB Any Key)
011 Erase HDD Debug
012 Erase SD Debug
013 Dsply-SD Space
014 SD to SD Latest (Latest 4 MB)
015 SD to SD Any (Latest 4 MB Any Key)
016 Make HDD Debug
017 Make SD Debug

SM 5-65 B229
SP Mode Tables

[Debug Log Save: SC] *CTL

These SP’s select the content of the debugging information to be saved to the
5858 destination selected by SP5857-2.
SP5858-3 stores one SC specified by number. Refer to Section 4 for a list of SC
error codes.
Turns on/off the debug save for SC codes
generated by copier engine errors.
001 Engine SC Error
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1/ step]
0: OFF, 1: ON
Turns on/off the debug save for SC codes
generated by GW controller errors.
002 Controller SC Error
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1/ step]
0: OFF, 1: ON
003 Any SC Error [0 to 65535 / 0 / 1 /step]
Turns on/off the debug save for jam errors.
004 Jam [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/ step]
0: OFF, 1: ON

5859 [Debug Log Save Key] *CTL

001 Key 1
002 Key 2
003 Key 3
004 Key 4 These SP’s allow you to set up to 10 keys for log
005 Key 5 files for functions that use common memory on the
006 Key 6 controller board.
007 Key 7 [ –9999999 to 9999999 / 0 / – ]
008 Key 8
009 Key 9
010 Key 10

B229 5-66 SM
 SP Mode Tables

5860 [SMTP/POP3/IMAP4] *CTL

Partial Mail Receive Timeout [1 to 168 / 72 / – ]
Sets the amount of time to wait before saving a mail that breaks up during
020
reception. The received mail is discarded if the remaining portion of the mail is
not received during this prescribed time.
MDN Response RFC2298 Compliance [0 to 1 / 1 / – ]
021 Determines whether RFC2298 compliance is switched on for MDN reply mail.
0: No, 1: Yes
SMTP Auth. From Field Replacement [0 to 1 / 0 / – ]
Determines whether the FROM item of the mail header is switched to the
022
validated account after the SMTP server is validated.
0: No. “From” item not switched. 1: Yes. “From" item switched.
SMTP Auth. Direct Setting [0 or 1 / 0 / – ]
Selects the authentication method for SMPT.
Bit switch:
Bit 0: LOGIN
Bit 1: PLAIN
025 Bit 2: CRAM MD5

Service
Tables
Bit 3: DIGEST MD5
Bit 4 to 7: Not used

ƒ This SP is activated only when SMTP authorization is enabled by

UP mode.

5866 [E-mail Report] Not Used

Report Validity [ 0 or 1 / 0 / – ] 0: Enabled, 1: Disabled
001
Enables or disables the E-mail alert function.
Add Date Field *CTL [ 0 or 1 / 0 / – ] 0: Not add, 1: Add
005
Adds or does not add the date field to the header of the alert mail.

5869 [RAM Disk Setting] Not Used

PDL Storage GWINIT [0 to 255 / 4 / 1 /step]
002
Specifies the RAM disk storage size for PDL.

SM 5-67 B229
SP Mode Tables

5870 [Common Key Info Writing]

Writes to flash ROM the common proof for
001 Writing *CTL validating the device for NRS
specifications.
Formats the common proof area of the
003 Initialize *CTL
flash ROM. FA

5873 [SD Card Appli Move]

This SP copies the application programs from the
001 Move Exec original SD card in the SD card slot 3 to an SD card
in the SD card slot 2.
This SP copies back the application programs from
an SD card in the SD Card Slot 3 to the original SD
002 Undo Exec card in the SD card slot 2. Use this menu when you
have mistakenly copied some programs by using
"Move Exec" (SP5873-1).

5875 [SC Auto Reboot]

Enables or disables the automatic reboot function
when an SC error occurs.
[0 or 1 / 0 / – ]
0: The machine reboots automatically when the
machine issues an SC error and logs the SC error
001 Reboot Mode *CTL code. If the same SC occurs again, the machine does
not reboot.
1: The machine does not reboot when an SC error
occurs.
The reboot is not executed for Type A, B or C SC
codes.
Selects the reboot method for SC.
002 Reboot Method *CTL [0 or 1 / 0 / -]
0: Manual reboot, 1: Automatic reboot

B229 5-68 SM
 SP Mode Tables

5878 [Option Setup]

Enables the Data Overwrite Security unit.
001 Option Setup Press "EXECUTE" on the operation panel.
Then turn the machine off and on.

5881 [Delete Fixed Sent]

001 Delete Fixed Sent Deletes the fixed form sentence.

5884 [Factini] Factory Initial Setting

Restores the factory settings to the machine.
001 Value Restore This SP restores the settings of SP1001, 1002, 1922 and
3002.

5886 [Permit ROM Update] DFU

This SP determines whether the ROM can be updated.
001 [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step]
0: On, 1: Off

Service
Tables
[Plug & Play] Plug & Play Name Selection
Selects the brand name and production name for the Plug and Play function.
These names are registered in the NVRAM. If the NVRAM becomes defective,
5907
these names should be re-registered. Use the right-arrow or left-arrow key to
scroll through the list of brand names. To select a brand name, press the "#" key.
An asterisk (*) indicates which manufacture is currently selected.
[ 0 to 5 / 0 / 1 /step ] FA
0: RICOH: MP C1500/615C
1: SAVIN: SGC 1506
001 Plug & Play *BCU 2: Gestetner: MPC1500/GS106
3: NRG: MP C1500SP
4: infotec ISC 615G
5: LANIER: MPC1500sp/LD2015c

SM 5-69 B229
SP Mode Tables

5913 [Switchover Permission Time]

Print Application Timer
Sets the length of time to elapse before allowing another application to take
002 control of the display when the application currently controlling the display is
not operating because a key has not been pressed.
[3 to 30 / 3 / 1 second/step]

5974 [Cherry Server]

Selects which version of the Scan Router application program, “Light” or “Full
(Professional)”, is installed.
001 [0 to 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Light version (supplied with this machine)
1: Full version (optional)

[Device Setting]
The NIC and USB support features are built into the GW controller. Use this SP
5985
to enable and disable these features. In order to use the NIC and USB
functions built into the controller board, these SP codes must be set to "1".
[0 to 2 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Disable, 1: Enable, 2: Function limitation
When the "Function limitation" is set, "On board NIC" is
limited only for the NRS or LDAP/NT authentication.

001 On Board NIC

ƒ Other network applications than NRS or LDAP/NT
authentication are not available when this SP is set
to "2". Even you can change the initial settings of
those network applications, settings does not work
actually.
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step]
002 On Board USB
0: Disable, 1: Enable

B229 5-70 SM
 SP Mode Tables

5987 [Mech. Counter] Mechanical Counter Device

This SP detects that a mechanical counter device is
removed. If it is detected, SC610 occurs.
0: OFF / 1: ON

ƒ This SP is active only for NA model.

5988 [Contract Form] Contract Form Setting SSP

001 Maintenance ID [0 to 255 / 1 / 1 /tep]

5989 [Parts PM] SSP

Enables or disables the PM parts alarm.
001 On/Off [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Enable, 1: Disable

[SP Print Mode] SMC Print

In the SP mode, press Copy Window to move to the copy screen, select the
5990 paper size, then press Start. Select A4/LT (Sideways) or larger to ensure that all
the information prints. Press SP Window to return to the SP mode, select the

Service
Tables
desired print, and press "EXECUTE".
001 All (Data List)
002 SP (Mode Data List)
003 User Program Data
004 Logging Data
005 Diagnostic Report
006 Non-Default (Prints only SP’s set to values other than defaults.)
007 NIB Summary
021 Copier User Program
022 Scanner SP
023 Scanner User Program

SM 5-71 B229
SP Mode Tables

5.2.6 SP6-XXX (PERIPHERALS)

ADF Adjustment ( ADF Image Adjustment)

6006*
ƒ Available menus depend on the machine model and its
configuration.
StoS/Front Regist [–7 to +9.5 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step]
001 Adjusts the side-to-side registration for the front side of the original, for ADF
mode. Use the key to select “+” or “–” before entering the value.
Leading Regist [–5.0 to +5.0 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step]
002 Adjusts the leading edge registration for ADF mode. Use the key to select
“+” or “–” before entering the value.
Trailing Erase [–3.0 to +3.0 / –1.0 / 0.1 mm/step]
003 Adjusts the trailing edge erase margin for ADF mode. Use the key to select
“+” or “–” before entering the value.
StoS/Rear Regist [–7 to +9.5 / 0.0 / 0.5 mm/step]
004 Adjusts the side-to-side registration for the rear side of duplex originals, for ADF
mode. Use the key to select “+” or “–” before entering the value.
Sub-scan Magnif [–9.0 to +9.0 / 0.0 / 0.1 %/step]
005
Adjust the sub-scan magnification for the ADF.
Original Curl Adj [0 = No / 1 = Yes]
Enables or disables the skew adjustment for the reverse sides of originals.
006
When you enable SP6-006-6, adjust the distance of the skew adjustment (SP
6-006-7).
Skew Correction [–20 to +20 / 0 / 1 mm/step]
007 Specifies the distance of the skew adjustment. SP6006-7 is effective when you
enable SP6006-6 (ADF Adjustment [Original Curl Adj]).

6009 ADF Free Run

001 Performs an ADF free run. Press "ON" to start; press "OFF" to stop.

[Stamp Position Adj.] Fax Stamp Position Adjustment

6010
Adjusts the horizontal position of the stamp on the scanned originals.
6010 1 Stamp Position Adj. *CTL [-10 to 10 / 0 / 1 mm/step ]

B229 5-72 SM
 SP Mode Tables

6901 Display ADF/APS

Displays the status of the ADF original size sensors ( ADF/ APS Sensor
001
Output Display).

6910* ADF Shading Time [0 to 60 / 10 / 1 s/step]

Adjusts the interval used for the shading processing in the ADF mode. Light and
001 heat in the room may affect the scanner response. Reduce this setting if copy
quality indicates that the white level is drifting during ADF copy jobs.

5.2.7 SP7-XXX (DATA LOG)

[Total Counter]
7002
Displays the total print count (number of printouts) for the selected mode.
001 Color Counter
[0 to 99999999 / - / 1 page/step]
002 Black Counter *CTL
003 GJ Unit Clr
ƒ These counters are cleared with SP7959-1.
004 GJ Unit Bk

Service
[User Cleaning #]

Tables
7212
Displays the user cleaning job number for the selected print head.
001 K1
002 K2 [0 to 999999 / - / 1/step]
003 C *CTL
004 M ƒ These counters are cleared with SP7959-1.
005 Y

[User Refresh #]
7213
Displays the user refreshing job number for the selected print head.
001 K1
002 K2 [0 to 999999 / - / 1/step]
003 C *CTL
004 M ƒ These counters are cleared with SP7959-1.
005 Y

SM 5-73 B229
SP Mode Tables

[Air Rls Fill #] Air Release and Ink Filling Counter

Displays the air releasing job number for the selected print head. This SP
7214
counts up the number of the air releasing job other than the jobs that are done
with SP7215-xxx and 7219-xxx.
001 K1
002 K2 [0 to 999999 / - / 1/step]
*CTL
003 C
004 M ƒ These counters are cleared with SP7959-1.
005 Y

[Aie Detec #] Air Releasing Detection Counter

Displays the air releasing job number for the selected print head. This SP
7215
counts up the number of the air releasing job other than the jobs that are done
with SP7214-xxx and 7219-xxx.
001 K1
002 K2
*CTL
003 C [0 to 30000 / - / 1/step]
004 M
005 Y

[Auto Cleaning #]
Displays the automatic cleaning job number for the selected print head.
The automatic cleaning is done as follows:
7216
4. when the counter of SP7222-xxx reaches 4240000nl (during job) or
3816000nl (job end).
5. when the counter of SP7302-xxx reaches 336 pages (job end).
001 K1
002 K2 [0 to 999999 / - / 1/step]
*CTL
003 C
004 M ƒ These counters are cleared with SP7959-1.
005 Y

B229 5-74 SM
 SP Mode Tables

[Idle Cleaning #]
Displays the idle cleaning job number for the selected print head. The idle
7217
cleaning is done when the machine does not get any job for more than 7 days
and less than 3 months.
001 K1
[0 to 20000 / - / 1/step]
002 K2
*CTL
003 C
ƒ These counters are cleared with
004 M
SP7959-1.
005 Y

[Idle Refresh #]
7218 Displays the idle refresh job number for the selected print head. The idle refresh
is done when the machine does not get any job for more than 3 months.
001 K1
[0 to 100 / - / 1/step]
002 K2
*CTL
003 C
ƒ These counters are cleared with
004 M
SP7959-1.
005 Y

Service
Tables
[Idle Air Rls #]
Displays the idle air releasing job number for the selected print head. The idle
7219
air releasing is done when the machine does not get any job for more than 1
month and less than 3 months.
001 K1
002 K2
*CTL [0 to 300 / - / 1/step]
003 C
These counters are cleared with SP7959-1.
004 M
005 Y

SM 5-75 B229
SP Mode Tables

[Waste Ink Count]

7221
Displays the amount of the collected ink in the rear and front ink collection tank.
Rear *CTL [0 to 800000000/ - / 1 nl/step]
The ink collection bottle (rear) near full is detected when this counter reaches
the value specified with SP2-507-1 or the ink collection tank full sensor detects
001
"ON".
The ink collection bottle (rear) full is detected when this counter reaches
"20000000nl (20ml)".
Front *CTL [0 to 400000000/ - / 1 nl/step]
The ink collection bottle (front) near full is detected when this counter reaches
002 "210000000nl (210ml)".
The ink collection bottle (front) full is detected when this counter reaches
"210300000nl (210.3ml)".

[Mist Count]
Displays the ink mist counter. This counter counts "1" with the formula of
7222 calculating ink mist.
These counters are references for the automatic cleaning. These counters are
cleared after the automatic cleaning has been done.
001 K1
002 K2
*CTL
003 C [0 to 8000000 / - / 1 nl/step]
004 M
005 Y

[Cleaning #]
7223
Displays the total cleaning job number for the selected print head.
001 K1
[0 to 999999 / - / 1/step]
002 K2
*CTL
003 C
ƒ These counters are cleared with
004 M
SP7804-2 and 7959-1.
005 Y

B229 5-76 SM
 SP Mode Tables

[Refresh #]
7224
Displays the total refresh job number for the selected print head.
001 K1
[0 to 999999 / - / 1/step]
002 K2
*CTL
003 C
ƒ These counters are cleared with
004 M
SP7804-2 and 7959-1.
005 Y

[AirRlsFill Total] Air Release and Ink Filling Total Counter

Displays the total air releasing job number for the selected print head.
7225
This counter counts "1" when either of SP7214-xxx, SP7215-xxx or SP7219-xxx
is counted.
001 K1
[0 to 999999 / - / 1/step]
002 K2
*CTL
003 C
ƒ These counters are cleared with
004 M
SP7804-2 and 7959-1.
005 Y

Service
Tables
[Total Page Count] Total Page Counter
Displays the total fed paper number for the selected print head.
7302 This counter counts "1" when less than A4LEF size is fed and counts "1.4" when
bigger than A4LEF size is fed. These counters are references for the automatic
cleaning.
001 K1
[0 to 1000 / - / 0.1 page/step]
002 K2
*CTL
003 C
ƒ These counters are cleared after
004 M
the auto cleaning is done.
005 Y

7401* [Counter–SC Total] *CTL [0 to 9999 / 0 / 1/step]

001 Displays how many times SC codes are generated.

SM 5-77 B229
SP Mode Tables

[Filler Posn SC #] Tank Full Lever Position Error SC Counter

Displays the number of the SC202 occurrences for the selected print head.
7402
SC202 occurs when the machine fails to memorize the position of the tank full
lever.
001 K1
002 K2
*CTL
003 C [0 to 10000 / - / 1/step]
004 M
005 Y

7403 [SC History]

001 Latest
002 Latest 1
003 Latest 2 Logs the SC codes detected.
004 Latest 3 The 10 most recently detected SC Codes
005 Latest 4 *CTL are displayed on the screen.
006 Latest 5 L: Asset line
007 Latest 6 V: Assert location

008 Latest 7 F: Assert file

009 Latest 8
010 Latest 9

[Maint Mot SC #] Maintenance Unit Motor HP Sensor Error Counter

7404 Displays the number of the SC200 occurrences. SC200 occurs when the
machine detects the home position error for the maintenance unit.
001 *CTL [0 to 10000 / - / 1/step]

7502* [Counter–Paper Jam] [0 to 9999 / 0 / 1/step]

7502 1 Displays the total number of paper jams.

7503* [Counter–Orgn Jam] [0 to 9999 / 0 / 1/step]

7503 1 Displays the total number of original jams,

B229 5-78 SM
 SP Mode Tables

[Paper Jam/Loc] [0 to 9999 / 0 / 1/step]

7504*
Displays the total number of the paper jams classified by timing and location.
At Power On
7504 1
Paper jam occurs at power on.
Non Feed Tray1
7504 3
Paper does not reach the first registration sensor (from the paper tray1).
Non Feed 100 Bypass
7504 4
Paper does not reach the first registration sensor (from the by-pass tray).
Non Feed Bypass
7504 5 Paper does not reach the second registration sensor (from the one-sheet
by-pass tray).
Non Feed Tray2
7504 6 Paper does not reach the vertical transport sensor or duplex exit sensor (from
the optional paper tray2).
Non Feed1 Tray3
7504 7 Paper does not reach the vertical transport sensor (from the optional paper
tray3).
Non Feed2 Tray3
7504 8
Paper does not reach the duplex exit sensor (from the optional paper tray3).

Service
Tables
Off EngEntrance
7504 10 Paper does not reach the engine entrance sensor (from other than bypass
tray).
Off EngRegist SN
7504 11 Paper does not reach the second registration sensor (from other than bypass
tray).
Off EngExit
7504 12
Paper does not reach the engine exit sensor.
Off IntChange SN
7504 13
Paper does not reach the junction gate sensor.
Off Exit SN
7504 14
Paper does not reach the paper exit sensor.
Off FedRegist SN
7504 15 Paper does not reach the first registration sensor (from the duplex unit or
optional paper tray unit).

SM 5-79 B229
SP Mode Tables

Off DupEnt SN
7504 19
Paper does not reach the duplex entrance sensor.
7504 20 Off DupWait SN
Paper does not reach the duplex wait sensor.
Off DupRevers SN
7504 21
Paper does not reach the duplex inverter sensor.
Off VertOP SN
7504 22
Paper does not reach the relay sensor.
Off DupExit SN
7504 23
Paper does not reach the duplex exit sensor.
Off FedRegist SN
7504 53
Paper is caught at the first registration sensor.
On Bypass SN
7504 55 Paper from the one-sheet by-pass tray is caught at the engine entrance
sensor.
On Jam Tray2
7504 56
Paper from the tray2 (optional paper try unit) is caught at the relay sensor.
On Jam Tray3
7504 57 Paper from the tray3(optional paper try unit) is caught at the vertical transport
sensor at the optional unit.
On EngEnt SN
7504 60 Paper from other than one-sheet by-pass tray is caught at the engine
entrance sensor.
On EngRegist SN
7504 61
Paper is caught at the second registration sensor.
On EngExit SN
7504 62
Paper is caught at the engine exit sensor.
On IntChange SN
7504 63
Paper is caught at the junction gate sensor.
On MFExit SN
7504 64
Paper is caught at the paper exit sensor.
On DupEnt SN
7504 69
Paper is caught at the duplex entrance sensor.

B229 5-80 SM
 SP Mode Tables

On DupWait SN
7504 70
Paper is caught at the duplex wait sensor.
On DupRevers SN
7504 71
Paper is caught at the duplex inverter sensor.
On VertOP SN
7504 72
Paper from the duplex unit is caught at the relay sensor.
On DupExit VerSN1
7504 73
Paper from the duplex unit is caught at the duplex exit sensor.
On DupExit VerSN2
7504 74
Paper from the optional paper tray unit is caught at the duplex exit sensor.

[Original Jam/Loc] [0 to 9999 / 0 / 1/step]

7505* Displays the total number of the original jams on the ADF that have occurred
at a certain timing or at a certain location.
At Power ON
7505 1
Paper jam occurs at power on.
Off DF Regist SN
7505 3
The original does not reach the first registration sensor.

Service
Tables
Off DF Exit SN
7505 4
The original does not reach the exit sensor.
Off DF Revers SN
7505 5
The original does not reach the inverter sensor.
On DF Regist SN
7505 53
The original is caught at the first registration sensor.
On DF Exit SN
7505 54
The original is caught at the exit sensor.
On DF Revers SN
7505 55
The original is caught at the inverter sensor.

7506 [Paper Jam/ Size] Jam Counter: Paper Size

7506 5 A4 LEF *CTL Displays the number of jams according to
7506 6 A5 LEF the paper size.
7506 14 B5 LEF [ 0 to 9999 / 0 / 1 sheet/step ]

SM 5-81 B229
SP Mode Tables

7506 38 LT LEF
7506 44 HLT LEF
7506 132 A3 SEF
7506 133 A4 SEF
7506 134 A5 SEF
7506 141 B4 SEF
7506 142 B5 SEF
7506 160 DLT SEF
7506 164 LG SEF
7506 166 LT SEF
7506 172 HLT SEF
7506 255 Others

7507* [Disply-P Jam Hist] Display: Paper Jam History

7507 1 Last Displays the copy jam history (the most recent 10 jams)
7507 2 Latest 1 Sample Display:
7507 3 Latest 2 CODE:007
7507 4 Latest 3 SIZE:05h

7507 5 Latest 4 TOTAL:0000334

7507 6 Latest 5 DATE:DEC 1 09:44/06 2005

where:
7507 7 Latest 6
CODE is the SP7504-*** number (see above.)
7507 8 Latest 7
SIZE is the ASAP paper size code in hex.
7507 9 Latest 8
TOTAL is the total jam error count (SP7003)
7507 10 Latest 9 DATE is the date the jams occurred.
Size Code Size Code Size Code
A4 (S) 05 A3 (L) 84 DLT (L) A0
A5 (S) 06 A4 (L) 85 LG (L) A4
B5 (S) 0E A5 (L) 86 LT (L) A6
LT (S) 26 B4 (L) 8D HLT (L) AC
HLT (S) 2C B5 (L) 8E Others FF

[Disply-O Jam Hist] Display: Original Jam History

7508* Displays the original jam history of the transfer unit in groups of 10, starting with
the most recent 10 jams. Display contents are as follows:

B229 5-82 SM
 SP Mode Tables

CODE is the SP7-505-*** number.

SIZE is the paper size code in hex. (See “Paper Size Hex Codes” below.)
TOTAL is the total jam error count (SP7-003)
DATE is the date the previous jam occurred
1* Latest
2* Latest 1
3* Latest 2
Sample Display:
4* Latest 3
CODE: 007
5* Latest 4
SIZE: 05h
6* Latest 5
TOTAL: 0000334
7* Latest 6
DATE: Mon Mar 15 11:44:50 2000
8* Latest 7
9* Latest 8
10* Latest 9

[Total Decap Time]

7703 Displays the time when the print head has not been covered. This SP is the
threshold for the auto cleaning. This counter is cleared after the auto cleaning.
7703 1 *CTL [0 to 1000000 / - / 1 sec/step]

Service
Tables
[Ink Condition]
7704
Displays the ink cartridge condition.
7704 1 K1 [0 to 3 / 0 / 1 /step]
7704 2 K2 0: Ink remains in the both ink cartridge
7704 3 C and sub-tank.

7704 4 M 1: Ink remains only in the sub-tank. (No

ink in the ink cartridge) However,
*CTL
printing is still possible.
2: Ink is not enough to print because the
7704 5 Y
sub-tank is nearly empty. "Ink empty"
message appears on the LCD
3: Ink is empty.

SM 5-83 B229
SP Mode Tables

[Ink Consumption]
7705 Displays the amount of the ink consumption. This counter is cleared after ink
filling up.
7705 1 K1
7705 2 K2
7705 3 C *CTL [0 to 4000000 / 0 / 1 nl/step]
7705 4 M
7705 5 Y

[Ink Cons Near End] Ink Consumption After Ink Near End
7706 Displays the amount of the ink consumption after the ink near end has been
detected. This counter is cleared after ink filling up.
7706 1 K1
7706 2 K2
7706 3 C *CTL [0 to 4000000 / 0 / 1 nl/step]
7706 4 M
7706 5 Y

[Memory/ Version/ PN]

7801
Displays the part number and version of all ROMs in the machine.
-001 Memory/ Version/ PN

[PM Counter]
7803
Displays the PM counter for each PM part.
7803 1 Paper
7803 2 Maintenance Unit
7803 3 Charge Roller
7803 4 Transport Belt
7803 5 Waste Ink Tank *CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1/step]
7803 6 Roller (Bypass)
7803 7 Roller (Tray1)
7803 8 Roller (Tray2)
7803 9 Roller (Tray3)

B229 5-84 SM
 SP Mode Tables

[PM Count. Reset]

7804
Clears the PM counter for each PM part.
7804 1 Paper *CTL This clears the counter of SP7803-1.
This clears the counter of SP7803-2,
7804 2 Maintenance Unit *CTL SP7223-001 to -005, SP7224-001 to -005
and SP7225-001 to -005.
7804 3 Charge Roller *CTL This clears the counter of SP7803-3.
7804 4 Transport Belt *CTL This clears the counter of SP7803-4.
This clears the counter of SP7-221-001,
7804 5 Waste Ink Tank *CTL
SP7-803-005 and SP7-941-001
7804 6 Roller (Bypass) *CTL This clears the counter of SP7803-6.
7804 7 Roller (Tray1) *CTL This clears the counter of SP7803-7.
7804 8 Roller (Tray2) *CTL This clears the counter of SP7803-8.
7804 9 Roller (Tray3) *CTL This clears the counter of SP7803-9.
7804 10 Head Unit *CTL DFU

7807 [Reset–SC/Jam Counters]

Resets the SC, paper, original, and total jam counters. When the program ends

Service
Tables
normally, the message "Completed" is displayed. SP 7807 1 does not reset the
7807 1
following logs: SP 7507 (Display-Paper Jam History) and SP 7508
(Display-Original Jam History).

[MF Error Counter] Japan Only

7826
Displays the number of counts requested of the card/key counter.
A request for the count total failed at power on. This
001 Error Total error will occur if the device is installed but
disconnected.
The request for a staple count failed at power on.
002 Error Staple This error will occur if the device is installed but
disconnected.

[MF Error Counter Clear]

7827
Press Execute to reset to 0 the values of SP7826. Japan Only

SM 5-85 B229
SP Mode Tables

7832* [Display-Self-Diag]
Displays the SC codes and the number of their occurrences. Each number is in
7832 1
the range of 0 to 9999.

[Resident Memory]
7836
Displays the contents of the memory on the controller board.

7852 [ADF Scan Glass]

Dust Counter [0 to 9999 / - / 1/step]
Counts the number of occurrences (0 to 65,535) when dust was detected on the
7852 1 scanning glass of the ADF. Counting is done only if SP4020 1 (ADF Scan Glass
Dust Check) is switched on. Memory All Clear (SP5801) resets this counter to
zero
Clear Counter [0 to 9999 / - / 1/step]
7852 2
Clears the total counter of the dust diction.

[Cart Replace #] Ink Cartridge Replacement Counter

7853
Displays the replacement time of the ink cartridge for each color.
7853 1 K
7853 2 C
*CTL [0 to 1000 / 0 / 1/step]
7853 3 M
7853 4 Y

[Wst Tnk Rep #] Ink Collection Tank Replacement Counter

7854 Displays the replacement time of the ink collection tank at front side or rear
side.
78541 Rear [0 to 100 / - / 1/step]
78542 Front [0 to 100 / - / 1/step]

B229 5-86 SM
 SP Mode Tables

[Assert Info]
7901 Records the location where a problem is detected in the program. The data
stored in this SP is used for problem analysis. DFU
7901 1 File Name
7901 2 Number of Lines
7901 3 Location

7931 Ink Info: BK

7932 Ink Info: M
7933 Ink Info: C
7934 Ink Info: Y
–1 Model ID Displays the model ID that is used in RAPI.
–2 Cartridge Ver Displays the cartridge version.
Displays the brand ID.
01H: RICOH 05H: Nashuatec
–3 Brand ID 02H: Savin 06H: Rex
03H: NRG 07H: Danka-Infotec
04H: Gestetner 08H: Lanie

Service
Tables
Displays the area ID.
01H: Japan 04H: ASIA
-004 Area ID
02H: NA 05H: CHINA
03H: EU 06H: LA
-005 Production ID Displays the production ID.
Displays the color ID.
-006 Color ID 01H: Bk 03H: M
02H: C 04H: Y
-007 Maintenance ID Displays the maintenance ID. Japan Only?
Displays the information of the new cartridge.
-008 New 64H: New unit
00H: Used unit
-009 Recycle Count Displays how many times a cartridge is recycled.
-010 Product Date Displays the production date and model number.
-011 Serial No Displays the serial number.
-012 Ink Remaining Displays the amount of the ink remaining.

SM 5-87 B229
SP Mode Tables

7931 Ink Info: BK

7932 Ink Info: M
7933 Ink Info: C
7934 Ink Info: Y
-013 EDP Code Displays the EDP (type) code.
-014 Ink End Displays the history of the ink end.
-015 Ink Refill Displays the information of the refill.
[0 to 9999999 / - / 1/step]
-016 Total Count:Start Displays the total counter for B/W printing mode when
the new cartridge is installed.
[0 to 9999999 / - / 1/step]
-017 Color Count:Start Displays the total counter for color printing mode
when the new cartridge is installed.
[0 to 9999999 / - / 1/step]
-018 Total Count:End Displays the total counter for B/W printing mode when
the new cartridge is installed.
[0 to 9999999 / - / 1/step]
-019 Color Count:End Displays the total counter for color printing mode
when the new cartridge is installed.
-020 Install Date Displays the installation date.
-021 Ink End Date Displays the ink end date.
-022 ID Chip Ink Cons Displays the amount of the ink consumption.
-023 Ink Cons: Mirror1 This SP is the mirroring SP of SP793x-021.
-024 Ink Cons: Mirror2 This SP is the mirroring SP of SP793x-021.
-025 Due Date Displays the guarantee date for product quality.
Displays how many times the initial ink filling up is
-026 Initial Fill #
done.
-027 Refresh # Displays how many times the refresh mode is done.
-028 Cleaning # Displays how many times the cleaning mode is done.
Displays how many times the air release mode is
-029 Air Rls Fill #
done.

7935 Ink Info Log: BK

7936 Ink Info Log: M
7937 Ink Info Log: C

B229 5-88 SM
 SP Mode Tables

7938 Ink Info Log: Y

-001 1: Serial No Displays the serial number of the current ink cartridge.
Displays the date when the current ink cartridge is
-002 1: Install Date
installed.
Displays the total counter when the current ink
-003 1: Total Count cartridge is installed.
[0 to 99999999 / - / 1/step]
Displays the serial number of the previous ink
-004 2: Serial No
cartridge.
Displays the date when the previous ink cartridge is
-005 2: Install Date
installed.
Displays the total counter when the previous ink
-006 2: Total Count cartridge is installed.
[0 to 99999999 / - / 1/step]
Displays the serial number of the one before the
-007 3: Serial No
previous ink cartridge.
Displays the date when t the one before the previous
-008 3: Install Date
ink cartridge is installed.
Displays the total counter when the one before the

Service
Tables
-009 3: Total Count previous ink cartridge is installed.
[0 to 99999999 / - / 1/step]
Displays the serial number of the one before the
-010 4: Serial No
third-previous ink cartridge.
Displays the date when the one before the
-011 4: Install Date
third-previous ink cartridge is installed.
Displays the total counter when the one before the
-012 4: Total Count third-previous ink cartridge is installed.
[0 to 99999999 / - / 1/step]
Displays the serial number of the one before the
-013 5: Serial No
fourth-previous ink cartridge.
Displays the date when the one before the
-014 5: Install Date
fourth-previous ink cartridge is installed.
Displays the total counter when the one before the
-015 5: Total Count fourth-previous ink cartridge is installed.
[0 to 99999999 / - / 1/step]

SM 5-89 B229
SP Mode Tables

7935 Ink Info Log: BK

7936 Ink Info Log: M
7937 Ink Info Log: C
7938 Ink Info Log: Y
7959 [GJ Eng Count. Reset] GelJet Engine Counter Reset
Clears the following counters related with GJ engine unit.
SP7-002-003
SP7-221-002
SP7-002-004
SP7-223-001 to 005
SP7-212-001 to 005
SP7-224-001 to 005
SP7-213-001 to 005
SP7-225-001 to 005
001 SP7-214-001 to 005
SP7-402-001 to 005
SP7-215-001 to 005
SP7-404-001
SP7-216-001 to 005
SP7-803-002
SP7-217-001 to 005
SP7-803-003
SP7-218-001 to 005
SP7-803-004
SP7-219-001 to 005

5.2.8 SP8-XXX (HISTORY)

Many of these counters are provided for features that are currently not available, such as
sending color faxes, and so on. However, here are some Group 8 codes that when used in
combination with others, can provide useful information.
SP Numbers What They Do
SP8-211toSP8-216 The number of pages scanned to the document server.
SP8-401toSP8-406 The number of pages printed from the document server
SP8-691toSP8-696 The number of pages sent from the document server
Specifically, the following questions can be answered:
ƒ How is the document server actually being used?
ƒ What application is using the document server most frequently?
ƒ What data in the document server is being reused?
Most of the SP’s in this group are prefixed with a letter that indicates the mode of operation
(the mode of operation is referred to as an “application”). Before reading the Group 8
Service Table, make sure that you understand what these prefixes mean.

B229 5-90 SM
 SP Mode Tables

Prefixes What it means

Grand total of the items counted for all applications
T: Total: (Grand Total).
(C, F, P, etc.)..
C: Copy application.
Totals (pages, jobs, etc.) executed for each
F: Fax application.
application when the job was not stored on the
P: Print application.
document server.
S: Scan application.
Totals (jobs, pages, etc.) for the document server.
The L: counters work differently case by case.
Sometimes, they count jobs/pages stored on the
document server; this can be in document server
Local storage mode (from the document server window), or from
L:
(document server) another mode, such as from a printer driver or by
pressing the Store File button in the Copy mode
window. Sometimes, they include occasions when
the user uses a file that is already on the document
server. Each counter will be discussed case by case.
Other applications Refers to network applications such as Web Image

Service
Tables
(external network Monitor. Utilities developed with the SDK (Software
O:
applications, for Development Kit) will also be counted with this group
example) in the future.
The Group 8 SP codes are limited to 17 characters, forced by the necessity of displaying
them on the small LCDs of printers and faxes that also use these SPs. Read over the list of
abbreviations below and refer to it again if you see the name of an SP that you do not
understand.
Key for Abbreviations
Abbreviation What it means
/ “By”, e.g. “T:Jobs/Apl” = Total Jobs “by” Application
> More (2> “2 or more”, 4> “4 or more”
AddBook Address Book
Apl Application
B/W Black & White
Bk Black
C Cyan

SM 5-91 B229
SP Mode Tables

Abbreviation What it means

ColCr Color Create
ColMode Color Mode
Comb Combine
Comp Compression
Deliv Delivery
Designated Application. The application (Copy, Fax, Scan, Print)
DesApl
used to store the job on the document server, for example.
Dev Counter Development Count, no. of pages developed.
Dup, Duplex Duplex, printing on both sides
Emul Emulation
FC Full Color
FIN Post-print processing, i.e. finishing (punching, stapling, etc.)
Full Bleed No Margins
GenCopy Generation Copy Mode
Get Print Counter. For jobs 10 pages or less, this counter does
not count up. For jobs larger than 10 pages, this counter counts
GPC
up by the number that is in excess of 10 (e.g., for an 11-page job,
the counter counts up 11-10 =1)
IFax Internet Fax
Image Edit performed on the original with the copier GUI, e.g.
ImgEdt
border removal, adding stamps, page numbers, etc.
K Black (YMCK)
LS Local Storage. Refers to the document server.
LSize Large (paper) Size
Mag Magnification
MC One color (monochrome)
New Remote Service, which allows a service center to monitor
NRS machines remotely. “NRS” is used overseas, “CSS” is used in
Japan.
Org Original for scanning
OrgJam Original Jam
Print Job Manager/Desk Top Editor: A pair of utilities that allows
Palm 2 print jobs to be distributed evenly among the printers on the
network, and allows files to moved around, combined, and

B229 5-92 SM
 SP Mode Tables

Abbreviation What it means

converted to different formats.
PC Personal Computer
Pages. A page is the total scanned surface of the original. Duplex
PGS pages count as two pages, and A3 simplex count as two pages if
the A3/DLT counter SP is switched ON.
PJob Print Jobs
Ppr Paper
PrtJam Printer (plotter) Jam
PrtPGS Print Pages
Red (Toner Remaining). Applies to the wide format model A2
R only. This machine is under development and currently not
available.
Rez Resolution
SC Service Code (Error SC code displayed)
Scn Scan
Sim, Simplex Simplex, printing on 1 side.
S-to-Email Scan-to-E-mail
SMC report printed with SP5990. All of the Group 8 counters are

Service
SMC

Tables
recorded in the SMC report.
Svr Server
TonEnd Toner End
TonSave Toner Save
TXJob Send, Transmission
YMC Yellow, Magenta, Cyan
YMCK Yellow, Magenta, Cyan, Black

ƒ All of the Group 8 SP’s are reset with SP5 801 1 Memory All Clear.

These SP’s count the number of times each

T:Total Jobs *CTL
8 001 application is used to do a job.
8 002 C:Total Jobs *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
8 003 F:Total Jobs *CTL
8 004 P:Total Jobs *CTL ƒ The L: counter is the total number of

SM 5-93 B229
SP Mode Tables

8 005 S:Total Jobs *CTL times the other applications are used to
send a job to the document server, plus
8 006 L:Total Jobs *CTL the number of times a file already on
the document server is used.
ƒ These SP’s reveal the number of times an application is used, not the number of
pages processed.
ƒ When an application is opened for image input or output, this counts as one job.
ƒ Interrupted jobs (paper jams, etc.) are counted, even though they do not finish.
ƒ Only jobs executed by the customer are counted. Jobs executed by the customer
engineer using the SP modes are not counted.
ƒ When using secure printing (when a password is required to start the print job), the
job is counted at the time when either “Delete Data” or “Specify Output” is specified.
ƒ A job is counted as a fax job when the job is stored for sending.
ƒ When a fax is received to fax memory, the F: counter increments but the L: counter
does not (the document server is not used).
ƒ A fax broadcast counts as one job for the F: counter (the fax destinations in the
broadcast are not counted separately).
ƒ A fax broadcast is counted only after all the faxes have been sent to their
destinations. If one transmission generates an error, then the broadcast will not be
counted until the transmission has been completed.
ƒ A printed fax report counts as one job for the F: counter.
ƒ The F: counter does not distinguish between fax sending or receiving.
ƒ When a copy job on the document server is printed, SP8022 also increments, and
when a print job stored on the document server is printed, SP8024 also increments.
ƒ When an original is both copied and stored on the document server, the C: and L:
counters both increment.
ƒ When a print job is stored on the document server, only the L: counter increments.
ƒ When the user presses the Document Server button to store the job on the
document server, only the L: counter increments.
ƒ When the user enters document server mode and prints data stored on the
document server, only the L: counter increments.
ƒ When an image received from Palm 2 is received and stored, the L: counter
increments.
ƒ When the customer prints a report (user code list, for example), the O: counter
increments. However, for fax reports and reports executed from the fax application,
the F: counter increments.

B229 5-94 SM
 SP Mode Tables

8 011 T:Jobs/LS *CTL These SP’s count the number of jobs stored to the
8 012 C:Jobs/LS *CTL document server by each application, to reveal how
8 013 F:Jobs/LS *CTL local storage is being used for input.
8 014 P:Jobs/LS *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
8 015 S:Jobs/LS *CTL The L: counter counts the number of jobs stored
8 016 L:Jobs/LS *CTL from within the document server mode screen at the

8 017 O:Jobs/LS *CTL operation panel.

ƒ When a scan job is sent to the document server, the S: counter increments. When
you enter document server mode and then scan an original, the L: counter
increments.
ƒ When a print job is sent to the document server, the P: counter increments.
ƒ When a network application sends data to the document server, the O: counter
increments.
ƒ When an image from Palm 2 is stored on the document server, the O: counter
increments.
ƒ When a fax is sent to the document server, the F: counter increments.

8 021 T:Pjob/LS *CTL These SP’s reveal how files printed from the

Service
Tables
8 022 C:Pjob/LS *CTL document server were stored on the document
8 023 F:Pjob/LS *CTL server originally.
8 024 P:Pjob/LS *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
8 025 S:Pjob/LS *CTL The L: counter counts the number of jobs
8 026 L:Pjob/LS *CTL stored from within the document server mode

8 027 O:Pjob/LS *CTL screen at the operation panel.

ƒ When a copy job stored on the document server is printed with another application,
the C: counter increments.
ƒ When an application like DeskTopBinder merges a copy job that was stored on the
document server with a print job that was stored on the document server, the C: and
P: counters both increment.
ƒ When a job already on the document server is printed with another application, the L:
counter increments.
ƒ When a scanner job stored on the document server is printed with another
application, the S: counter increments. If the original was scanned from within
document server mode, then the L: counter increments.

SM 5-95 B229
SP Mode Tables

ƒ When images stored on the document server by a network application (including

Palm 2), are printed with another application, the O: counter increments.
ƒ When a copy job stored on the document server is printed with a network application
(Web Image Monitor, for example), the C: counter increments.
ƒ When a fax on the document server is printed, the F: counter increments.

8 031 T:Pjob/DesApl *CTL These SP’s reveal what applications were

8 032 C:Pjob/DesApl *CTL used to output documents from the document
8 033 F:Pjob/DesApl *CTL server.
8 034 P:Pjob/DesApl *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
8 035 S:Pjob/DesApl *CTL The L: counter counts the number of jobs
8 036 L:Pjob/DesApl *CTL printed from within the document server mode

8 037 O:Pjob/DesApl *CTL screen at the operation panel.

ƒ When documents already stored on the document server are printed, the count for
the application that started the print job is incremented.
ƒ When the print job is started from a network application (Desk Top Binder, Web
Image Monitor, etc.) the L: counter increments.

8 041 T:TX Jobs/LS *CTL These SP’s count the applications that
8 042 C:TX Jobs/LS *CTL stored files on the document server that
8 043 F:TX Jobs/LS *CTL were later accessed for transmission over

8 044 P:TX Jobs/LS *CTL the telephone line or over a network

8 045 S:TX Jobs/LS *CTL (attached to an e-mail, or as a fax image

8 046 L:TX Jobs/LS *CTL by I-Fax).

[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

ƒ Jobs merged for sending are

8 047 O:TX Jobs/LS *CTL counted separately.

The L: counter counts the number of jobs
scanned from within the document server
mode screen at the operation panel.
ƒ When a stored copy job is sent from the document server, the C: counter increments.
ƒ When images stored on the document server by a network application or Palm2 are
sent as an e-mail, the O: counter increments.

B229 5-96 SM
 SP Mode Tables

8 051 T:TX Jobs/DesApl *CTL These SP’s count the applications used to
8 052 C:TX Jobs/DesApl *CTL send files from the document server over the
8 053 F:TX Jobs/DesApl *CTL telephone line or over a network (attached to

8 054 P:TX Jobs/DesApl *CTL an e-mail, or as a fax image by I-Fax). Jobs

8 055 S:TX Jobs/DesApl *CTL merged for sending are counted separately.

8 056 L:TX Jobs/DesApl *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

The L: counter counts the number of jobs sent

8 057 O:TX Jobs/DesApl *CTL from within the document server mode screen
at the operation panel.
ƒ If the send is started from Desk Top Binder or Web Image Monitor, for example, then
the O: counter increments.

T:FIN Jobs *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

8 061 These SPs total the finishing methods. The finishing method is specified by
the application.
C:FIN Jobs *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
8 062 These SPs total finishing methods for copy jobs only. The finishing method
is specified by the application.
F:FIN Jobs *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

Service
Tables
These SPs total finishing methods for fax jobs only. The finishing method is
8 063 specified by the application.

ƒ Finishing features for fax jobs are not available at this time.
P:FIN Jobs *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
8 064 These SPs total finishing methods for print jobs only. The finishing method
is specified by the application.
S:FIN Jobs *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs total finishing methods for scan jobs only. The finishing method
8 065 is specified by the application.

ƒ Finishing features for scan jobs are not available at this time.
L:FIN Jobs *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs total finishing methods for jobs output from within the document
8 066
server mode screen at the operation panel. The finishing method is
specified from the print window within document server mode.

SM 5-97 B229
SP Mode Tables

O:FIN Jobs *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

These SP’s total finishing methods for jobs executed by an external
8 067
application, over the network. The finishing method is specified by the
application.
Number of jobs started in Sort mode. When a stored copy job is
-001 Sort set for Sort and then stored on the document server, the L: counter
increments. (See SP8066-1)
-002 Stack Number of jobs started out of Sort mode.
-003 Staple Number of jobs started in Staple mode.
Number of jobs started in Booklet mode. If the machine is in staple
-004 Booklet
mode, the Staple counter also increments.
Number of jobs started In any mode other than the Booklet mode
-005 Z-Fold
and set for folding (Z-fold).
Number of jobs started in Punch mode. When Punch is set for a
-006 Punch
print job, the P: counter increments. (See SP8064-6.)
-007 Other Reserved. Not used.

T:Jobs/PGS *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

8 071 These SP’s count the number of jobs broken down by the number of pages
in the job, regardless of which application was used.
C:Jobs/PGS *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
8 072 These SP’s count and calculate the number of copy jobs by size based on
the number of pages in the job.
F:Jobs/PGS *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
8 073 These SP’s count and calculate the number of fax jobs by size based on the
number of pages in the job.
P:Jobs/PGS *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
8 074 These SP’s count and calculate the number of print jobs by size based on
the number of pages in the job.
S:Jobs/PGS [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
8 075 These SP’s count and calculate the number of scan jobs by size based on
the number of pages in the job.

B229 5-98 SM
 SP Mode Tables

L:Jobs/PGS *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

These SP’s count and calculate the number of jobs printed from within the
8 076
document server mode window at the operation panel, by the number of
pages in the job.
O:Jobs/PGS *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
These SP’s count and calculate the number of “Other” application jobs
8 077
(Web Image Monitor, Palm 2, etc.) by size based on the number of pages in
the job.
-001 1 Page -008 21to50 Pages
-002 2 Pages -009 51to100 Pages
-003 3 Pages -010 101to300 Pages
-004 4 Pages -011 301to500 Pages
-005 5 Pages -012 501to700 Pages
-006 6to10 Pages -013 701to1000 Pages
-007 11to20 Pages -014 1001to Pages
ƒ For example: When a copy job stored on the document server is printed in document
server mode, the appropriate L: counter (SP8076-0xx) increments.
ƒ Printing a fax report counts as a job and increments the F: counter (SP 8073).

Service
Tables
ƒ Interrupted jobs (paper jam, etc.) are counted, even though they do not finish.
ƒ If a job is paused and re-started, it counts as one job.
ƒ If the finisher runs out of staples during a print and staple job, then the job is counted
at the time the error occurs.
ƒ For copy jobs (SP 8072) and scan jobs (SP 8075), the total is calculated by
multiplying the number of sets of copies by the number of pages scanned. (One
duplex page counts as 2.)
ƒ The first test print and subsequent test prints to adjust settings are added to the
number of pages of the copy job (SP 8072).
ƒ When printing the first page of a job from within the document server screen, the
page is counted.

SM 5-99 B229
SP Mode Tables

T:FAX TX Jobs *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

These SP’s count the total number of jobs (color or black-and-white)
sent by fax, either directly or using a file stored on the document server,
8 111
on a telephone line.

ƒ Color fax sending is not available at this time.

F: FAX TX Jobs *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
These SP’s count the total number of jobs (color or black-and-white)
8 113 sent by fax directly on a telephone line.

ƒ Color fax sending is not available at this time.

-001 B/W
-002 Color
ƒ These counters count jobs, not pages.
ƒ This SP counts fax jobs sent over a telephone line with a fax application, including
documents stored on the document server.
ƒ If the mode is changed during the job, the job will count with the mode set when the
job started.
ƒ If the same document is faxed to both a public fax line and an I-Fax at a destination
where both are available, then this counter increments, and the I-Fax counter (8 12x)
also increments.
ƒ The fax job is counted when the job is scanned for sending, not when the job is sent.

T:IFAX TX Jobs *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

These SP’s count the total number of jobs (color or black-and-white)
sent, either directly or using a file stored on the document server, as fax
8 121
images using I-Fax.

ƒ Color fax sending is not available at this time.

F: IFAX TX Jobs *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
These SP’s count the number of jobs (color or black-and-white) sent
8 123 (not stored on the document server), as fax images using I-Fax.

ƒ Color fax sending is not available at this time.

B229 5-100 SM
 SP Mode Tables

-001 B/W
002 Color
ƒ These counters count jobs, not pages.
ƒ The counters for color are provided for future use; the color fax feature is not
available at this time.
ƒ The fax job is counted when the job is scanned for sending, not when the job is sent.

T:S-to-Email Jobs *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

These SP’s count the total number of jobs (color or black-and-white)
8 131
scanned and attached to an e-mail, regardless of whether the document
server was used or not.
S:S-to-Email Jobs *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
8 135 These SP’s count the number of jobs (color or black-and-white) scanned
and attached to e-mail, without storing the original on the document server.
001 B/W
002 Color
-003 ACS
ƒ These counters count jobs, not pages.
ƒ If the job is stored on the document server, after the job is stored it is determined to

Service
Tables
be color or black-and-white then counted.
ƒ If the job is cancelled during scanning, or if the job is cancelled while the document is
waiting to be sent, the job is not counted.
ƒ If the job is cancelled during sending, it may or may not be counted, depending on
what stage of the process had been reached when the job was cancelled.
ƒ If several jobs are combined for sending to the Scan Router, Scan-to-Email, or
Scan-to-PC, or if one job is sent to more than one destination. each send is counted
separately. For example, if the same document is sent by Scan-to-Email as well as
Scan-to-PC, then it is counted twice (once for Scan-to-Email and once for
Scan-to-PC).

T:Deliv Jobs/Svr *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

8 141 These SP’s count the total number of jobs (color or black-and-white)
scanned and sent to a Scan Router server.

SM 5-101 B229
SP Mode Tables

S:Deliv Jobs/Svr *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

8 145 These SP’s count the number of jobs (color or black-and-white) scanned in
scanner mode and sent to a Scan Router server.
001 B/W
002 Color
-003 ACS
ƒ These counters count jobs, not pages.
ƒ The jobs are counted even though the arrival and reception of the jobs at the Scan
Router server cannot be confirmed.
ƒ If even one color image is mixed with black-and-white images, then the job is
counted as a “Color” job.
ƒ If the job is cancelled during scanning, or if the job is cancelled while the document is
waiting to be delivered, the job is not counted.
ƒ If the job is cancelled during sending, it may or may not be counted, depending on
what stage of the process had been reached when the job was cancelled.
ƒ Even if several files are combined for sending, the transmission counts as one job.

T:Deliv Jobs/PC *CTL [0to9999999 / 0 / 1]

These SP’s count the total number of jobs (color or black-and-white)
scanned and sent to a folder on a PC (Scan-to-PC).
8 151

ƒ At the present time, SP8151 and 8155 perform identical

counts.
S:Deliv Jobs/PC *CTL [0to9999999 / 0 / 1]
8 155 These SP’s count the total number of jobs (color or black-and-white)
scanned and sent with Scan-to-PC.
-001 B/W
-002 Color
-003 ACS
ƒ These counters count jobs, not pages.
ƒ If the job is cancelled during scanning, it is not counted.
ƒ If the job is cancelled while it is waiting to be sent, the job is not counted.
ƒ If the job is cancelled during sending, it may or may not be counted, depending on
what stage of the process had been reached when the job was cancelled.

B229 5-102 SM
 SP Mode Tables

ƒ Even if several files are combined for sending, the transmission counts as one job.

8 161 T:PCFAX TX Jobs *CTL These SP’s count the number of PC Fax
transmission jobs. A job is counted from
when it is registered for sending, not when
it is sent.
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
8 163 F:PCFAX TX Jobs *CTL

ƒ At the present time, these

counters perform identical
counts.
ƒ This counts fax jobs started from a PC using a PC fax application, and sending the
data out to the destination from the PC through the copier.

8 191 T:Total Scan PGS *CTL

These SP’s count the pages scanned by each
8 192 C:Total Scan PGS *CTL
application that uses the scanner to scan
8 193 F:Total Scan PGS *CTL
images.
8 195 S:Total Scan PGS *CTL
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
8 196 L:Total Scan PGS *CTL

Service
Tables
ƒ SP 8 191 to 8 196 count the number of scanned sides of pages, not the number of
physical pages.
ƒ These counters do not count reading user stamp data, or reading color charts to
adjust color.
ƒ Previews done with a scanner driver are not counted.
ƒ A count is done only after all images of a job have been scanned.
ƒ Scans made in SP mode are not counted.
Examples
ƒ If 3 B5 pages and 1 A3 page are scanned with the scanner application but not stored,
the S: count is 4.
ƒ If both sides of 3 A4 sheets are copied and stored to the document server using the
Store File button in the Copy mode window, the C: count is 6 and the L: count is 6.
ƒ If both sides of 3 A4 sheets are copied but not stored, the C: count is 6.
ƒ If you enter document server mode then scan 6 pages, the L: count is 6.

SM 5-103 B229
SP Mode Tables

T:LSize Scan PGS *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

These SP’s count the total number of large pages input with the
scanner for scan and copy jobs. Large size paper (A3/DLT) scanned for
8 201 fax transmission are not counted.

ƒ These counters are displayed in the SMC Report, and in the

User Tools display.
F:LSize Scan PGS *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
8 203 These SP’s count the number of large pages scanned by original type for
Fax jobs.
S:LSize Scan PGS *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
These SP’s count the total number of large pages input with the
scanner for scan jobs only. Large size paper (A3/DLT) scanned for fax
8 205 transmission are not counted.

ƒ These counters are displayed in the SMC Report, and in the

User Tools display.

8 211 T:Scan PGS/LS *CTL These SP’s count the number of pages scanned
8 212 C:Scan PGS/LS *CTL into the document server .
8 213 F:Scan PGS/LS *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
8 215 S:Scan PGS/LS *CTL The L: counter counts the number of pages
stored from within the document server mode
screen at the operation panel, and with the
8 216 L:Scan PGS/LS *CTL
Store File button from within the Copy mode
screen
ƒ Reading user stamp data is not counted.
ƒ If a job is cancelled, the pages output as far as the cancellation are counted.
ƒ If the scanner application scans and stores 3 B5 sheets and 1 A4 sheet,
the S: count is 4.
ƒ If pages are copied but not stored on the document server, these counters do not
change.
ƒ If both sides of 3 A4 sheets are copied and stored to the document server, the C:
count is 6 and the L: count is 6.
ƒ If you enter document server mode then scan 6 pages, the L: count is 6.

B229 5-104 SM
 SP Mode Tables

ADF Org Feeds *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

8 221 These SP’s count the number of pages fed through the ADF for front and
back side scanning.
Number of front sides fed for scanning:
With an ADF that can scan both sides simultaneously, the Front
side count is the same as the number of pages fed for either
simplex or duplex scanning.
001 Front
With an ADF that cannot scan both sides simultaneously, the Front
side count is the same as the number of pages fed for duplex front
side scanning. (The front side is determined by which side the user
loads face up.)
Number of rear sides fed for scanning:
With an ADF that can scan both sides simultaneously, the Back
count is the same as the number of pages fed for duplex scanning.
002 Back
With an ADF that cannot scan both sides simultaneously, the Back
count is the same as the number of pages fed for duplex rear-side
scanning.
ƒ When 1 sheet is fed for duplex scanning the Front count is 1 and the Back count is 1.
ƒ If a jam occurs during the job, recovery processing is not counted to avoid double

Service
Tables
counting. Also, the pages are not counted if the jam occurs before the first sheet is
output.

Scan PGS/Mode *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

8 231 These SP’s count the number of pages scanned by each ADF mode to
determine the work load on the ADF.
Selectable. Large copy jobs that cannot be
001 Large Volume
loaded in the ADF at one time.
Selectable. Feeding pages one by one through
002 SADF
the ADF.
Selectable. Select “Mixed Sizes” on the operation
003 Mixed Size
panel.
004 Custom Size Selectable. Originals of non-standard size.
Book mode. Raising the ADF and placing the
005 Platen
original directly on the platen.

SM 5-105 B229
SP Mode Tables

ƒ If the scan mode is changed during the job, for example, if the user switches from
ADF to Platen mode, the count is done for the last selected mode.
ƒ The user cannot select mixed sizes or non-standard sizes with the fax application so
if the original’s page sizes are mixed or non-standard, these are not counted.
ƒ If the user selects “Mixed Sizes” for copying in the platen mode, the Mixed Size count
is enabled.
ƒ In the SADF mode if the user copies 1 page in platen mode and then copies 2 pages
with SADF, the Platen count is 1 and the SADF count is 3.

T:Scan PGS/Org *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

8 241 These SP’s count the total number of scanned pages by original type for all
jobs, regardless of which application was used.
C:Scan PGS/Org *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
8 242 These SPs count the number of pages scanned by original type for Copy
jobs.
F:Scan PGS/Org *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
8 243 These SP’s count the number of pages scanned by original type for Fax
jobs.
S:Scan PGS/Org *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
8 245 These SPs count the number of pages scanned by original type for Scan
jobs.
L:Scan PGS/Org *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
These SP’s count the number of pages scanned and stored from within the
8 246
document server mode screen at the operation panel, and with the Store
File button from within the Copy mode screen
8 241 8 242 8 243 8 245 8 246 8 247
001: Text Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
002: Text/Photo Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
003: Photo Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
004: GenCopy, Pale Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes
005: Map Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes
006: Normal/Detail Yes No Yes No No No
007: Fine/Super Fine Yes No Yes No No No
008: Binary Yes No No Yes No No
009: Grayscale Yes No No Yes No No

B229 5-106 SM
 SP Mode Tables

010: Color Yes No No Yes No No

011: Other Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No
ƒ If the scan mode is changed during the job, for example, if the user switches from
ADF to Platen mode, the count is done for the last selected mode.

8 251 T:Scan PGS/ImgEdt *CTL These SP’s show how many times Image
8 252 C:Scan PGS/ImgEdt *CTL Edit features have been selected at the
8 254 P:Scan PGS/ImgEdt *CTL operation panel for each application.

8 256 L:Scan PGS/ImgEdt *CTL Some examples of these editing features

are:
ƒ Erase> Border
ƒ Erase> Center
ƒ Image Repeat
ƒ Centering
ƒ Positive/Negative
8 257 O:Scan PGS/ImgEdt *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

ƒ The count totals the number of

times the edit features have been
used. A detailed breakdown of

Service
Tables
exactly which features have been
used is not given.
The L: counter counts the number of pages stored from within the document server mode
screen at the operation panel, and with the Store File button from within the Copy mode
screen.

8 261 T:Scn PGS/ColCr *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

8 262 C:Scn PGS/ ColCr *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
8 266 L:Scn PGS/ColCr *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
001 Color Conversion
These SP’s show how many times color
002 Color Erase
creation features have been selected at the
003 Background
operation panel.
004 Other

SM 5-107 B229
SP Mode Tables

8 281 T:Scan PGS/TWAIN *CTL These SP’s count the number of pages
scanned using a TWAIN driver. These
counters reveal how the TWAIN driver is
used for delivery functions.
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
8 285 S:Scan PGS/TWAIN *CTL

ƒ At the present time, these

counters perform identical
counts.

8 291 T:Scan PGS/Stamp *CTL These SP’s count the number of pages
8 293 F:Scan PGS/Stamp *CTL stamped with the stamp in the ADF unit.
8 295 S:Scan PGS/Stamp *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
The L: counter counts the number of pages
stored from within the document server mode
8 296 L:Scan PGS/Stamp *CTL screen at the operation panel, and with the
Store File button from within the Copy mode
screen

T:Scan PGS/Size *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

These SP’s count by size the total number of pages scanned by all
8 301
applications. Use these totals to compare original page size (scanning) and
output (printing) page size [SP 8-441].
C:Scan PGS/Size *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs count by size the total number of pages scanned by the Copy
8 302
application. Use these totals to compare original page size (scanning) and
output (printing) page size [SP 8-442].
F:Scan PGS/Size *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
These SP’s count by size the total number of pages scanned by the Fax
8 303
application. Use these totals to compare original page size (scanning) and
output page size [SP 8-443].
S:Scan PGS/Size *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
8 305 These SP’s count by size the total number of pages scanned by the Scan
application. Use these totals to compare original page size (scanning) and

B229 5-108 SM
 SP Mode Tables

output page size [SP 8-445].

L:Scan PGS/Size *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
These SP’s count by size the total number of pages scanned and stored
from within the document server mode screen at the operation panel, and
8 306
with the Store File button from within the Copy mode screen. Use these
totals to compare original page size (scanning) and output page size [SP
8-446].
-001 A3
002 A4
003 A5
004 B4
005 B5
006 DLT
007 LG
008 LT
009 HLT
010 Full Bleed
-254 Other (Standard)
-255 Other (Custom)

Service
Tables
T:Scan PGS/Rez *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
8 311 These SP’s count by resolution setting the total number of pages scanned
by applications that can specify resolution settings.
Scan PGS/Rez *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
These SP’s count by resolution setting the total number of pages
scanned by applications that can specify resolution settings.
8 315

ƒ At the present time, SP8-311 and 8-315 perform identical

counts.
001 1200dpi to
002 600dpito1199dpi
003 400dpito599dpi
004 200dpito399dpi
005 to199dpi

SM 5-109 B229
SP Mode Tables

ƒ Copy resolution settings are fixed so they are not counted.

ƒ The Fax application does not allow finely-adjusted resolution settings so no count is
done for the Fax application.

8 381 T:Total PrtPGS *CTL These SP’s count the number of pages printed
8 382 C:Total PrtPGS *CTL by the customer. The counter for the
8 383 F:Total PrtPGS *CTL application used for storing the pages

8 384 P:Total PrtPGS *CTL increments.

8 385 S:Total PrtPGS *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

8 386 L:Total PrtPGS *CTL The L: counter counts the number of pages
stored from within the document server mode
screen at the operation panel. Pages stored
8 387 O:Total PrtPGS *CTL
with the Store File button from within the Copy
mode screen go to the C: counter.
ƒ When the A3/DLT double count function is switched on with SP5104, 1 A3/DLT page
is counted as 2.
ƒ When several documents are merged for a print job, the number of pages stored are
counted for the application that stored them.
ƒ These counters are used primarily to calculate charges on use of the machine, so
the following pages are not counted as printed pages:
ƒ Blank pages in a duplex printing job.
ƒ Blank pages inserted as document covers, chapter title sheets, and slip
sheets.
ƒ Reports printed to confirm counts.
ƒ All reports done in the service mode (service summaries, engine maintenance
reports, etc.)
ƒ Test prints for machine image adjustment.
ƒ Error notification reports.
ƒ Partially printed pages as the result of a copier jam.

LSize PrtPGS *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

These SP’s count pages printed on paper sizes A3/DLT and larger.

8 391
ƒ In addition to being displayed in the SMC Report, these
counters are also displayed in the User Tools display on the
copy machine.

B229 5-110 SM
 SP Mode Tables

8 401 T:PrtPGS/LS *CTL These SPs count the number of pages printed
8 402 C:PrtPGS/LS *CTL from the document server. The counter for the
8 403 F:PrtPGS/LS *CTL application used to print the pages is

8 404 P:PrtPGS/LS *CTL incremented.

8 405 S:PrtPGS/LS *CTL The L: counter counts the number of jobs

stored from within the document server mode
8 406 L:PrtPGS/LS *CTL screen at the operation panel.
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
ƒ Print jobs done with Web Image Monitor and Desk Top Binder are added to the L:
count.
ƒ Fax jobs done with Web Image Monitor and Desk Top Binder are added to the F:
count.

This SP counts the amount of paper

(front/back counted as 1 page) used for duplex
8 411 Prints/Duplex *CTL printing. Last pages printed only on one side
are not counted.
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

Service
Tables
T:PrtPGS/Dup Comb *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
8 421 These SP’s count by binding and combine, and n-Up settings the number of
pages processed for printing. This is the total for all applications.
C:PrtPGS/Dup Comb *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
8 422 These SP’s count by binding and combine, and n-Up settings the number of
pages processed for printing by the copier application.
F:PrtPGS/Dup Comb *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
8 423 These SP’s count by binding and combine, and n-Up settings the number of
pages processed for printing by the fax application.
P:PrtPGS/Dup Comb *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
8 424 These SP’s count by binding and combine, and n-Up settings the number of
pages processed for printing by the printer application.
S:PrtPGS/Dup Comb *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
8 425 These SP’s count by binding and combine, and n-Up settings the number of
pages processed for printing by the scanner application.

SM 5-111 B229
SP Mode Tables

L:PrtPGS/Dup Comb *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

These SP’s count by binding and combine, and n-Up settings the number of
8 426
pages processed for printing from within the document server mode window
at the operation panel.
O:PrtPGS/Dup Comb *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
8 427 These SP’s count by binding and combine, and n-Up settings the number of
pages processed for printing by Other applications
001 Simplex> Duplex
002 Duplex> Duplex
003 Book> Duplex
004 Simplex Combine
005 Duplex Combine
006 2> 2 pages on 1 side (2-Up)
007 4> 4 pages on 1 side (4-Up)
008 6> 6 pages on 1 side (6-Up)
009 8> 8 pages on 1 side (8-Up)
010 9> 9 pages on 1 side (9-Up)
011 16> 16 pages on 1 side (16-Up)
012 Booklet
013 Magazine
ƒ These counts (SP8-421 to SP8-427) are especially useful for customers who need to
improve their compliance with ISO standards for the reduction of paper consumption.
ƒ Pages that are only partially printed with the n-Up functions are counted as 1 page.
ƒ Here is a summary of how the counters work for Booklet and Magazine modes:

Booklet Magazine
Original Original
Count Count
Pages Pages
1 1 1 1
2 2 2 2
3 2 3 2
4 2 4 2
5 3 5 4
6 4 6 4

B229 5-112 SM
 SP Mode Tables

7 4 7 4
8 4 8 4

T:PrtPGS/ImgEdt *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

8 431 These SP’s count the total number of pages output with the three features
below, regardless of which application was used.
C:PrtPGS/ImgEdt *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
8 432 These SPs count the total number of pages output with the three features
below with the copy application.
P:PrtPGS/ImgEdt *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
8 434 These SP’s count the total number of pages output with the three features
below with the print application.
L:PrtPGS/ImgEdt *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
These SP’s count the total number of pages output from within the
8 436
document server mode window at the operation panel with the three
features below.
O:PrtPGS/ImgEdt *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
8 437 These SP’s count the total number of pages output with the three features
below with Other applications.

Service
Tables
Total number of covers or slip sheets inserted. The
001 Cover/Slip Sheet
count for a cover printed on both sides counts 2.
The number of pages printed in series (one side) or
002 Series/Book
printed as a book with booklet right/left pagination.
The number of pages printed where stamps were
003 User Stamp applied, including page numbering and date
stamping.

T:PrtPGS/Ppr Size *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

8 441 These SP’s count by print paper size the number of pages printed by all
applications.
C:PrtPGS/Ppr Size *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
8 442 These SP’s count by print paper size the number of pages printed by the
copy application.
F:PrtPGS/Ppr Size *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
8 443
These SP’s count by print paper size the number of pages printed by the fax

SM 5-113 B229
SP Mode Tables

application.
P:PrtPGS/Ppr Size *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
8 444 These SP’s count by print paper size the number of pages printed by the
printer application.
S:PrtPGS/Ppr Size *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
8 445 These SP’s count by print paper size the number of pages printed by the
scanner application.
L:PrtPGS/Ppr Size *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
8 446 These SP’s count by print paper size the number of pages printed from
within the document server mode window at the operation panel.
O:PrtPGS/Ppr Size *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
8 447 These SP’s count by print paper size the number of pages printed by Other
applications.
001 A3
002 A4
003 A5
004 B4
005 B5
006 DLT
007 LG
008 LT
009 HLT
010 Full Bleed
254 Other (Standard)
255 Other (Custom)
ƒ These counters do not distinguish between LEF and SEF.

PrtPGS/Ppr Tray *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

8 451
These SP’s count the number of sheets fed from each paper feed station.
001 Bypass Bypass Tray
002 Tray 1 Copier
003 By pass Copier
004 Tray 2 Paper Tray Unit (Option)
005 Tray 3 Paper Tray Unit (Option)

B229 5-114 SM
 SP Mode Tables

006 Tray 4 Paper Tray Unit (Option)

007 Tray 5 Paper Tray Unit (Option)
008 Tray 6 Currently not used.
009 Tray 7 Currently not used.
010 Tray 8 Currently not used.

T:PrtPGS/Ppr Type *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

These SP’s count by paper type the number pages printed by all
applications.
ƒ These counters are not the same as the PM counter. The PM counter
8 461 is based on feed timing to accurately measure the service life of the
feed rollers. However, these counts are based on output timing.
ƒ Blank sheets (covers, chapter covers, slip sheets) are also counted.
ƒ During duplex printing, pages printed on both sides count as 1, and a
page printed on one side counts as 1.
C:PrtPGS/Ppr Type *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
8 462 These SP’s count by paper type the number pages printed by the copy
application.
F:PrtPGS/Ppr Type *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

Service
Tables
8 463 These SP’s count by paper type the number pages printed by the fax
application.
P:PrtPGS/Ppr Type *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
8 464 These SP’s count by paper type the number pages printed by the printer
application.
L:PrtPGS/Ppr Type *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
8 466 These SP’s count by paper type the number pages printed from within the
document server mode window at the operation panel.
001 Normal
002 Recycled
003 Special
004 Thick
005 Normal (Back)
006 Thick (Back)
007 OHP
008 Other

SM 5-115 B229
SP Mode Tables

B229 5-116 SM
 SP Mode Tables

PrtPGS/Mag *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

8 471
These SP’s count by magnification rate the number of pages printed.
001 to49%
002 50%to99%
003 100%
004 101%to200%
005 201% to
ƒ Counts are done for magnification adjusted for pages, not only on the operation
panel but performed remotely with an external network application capable of
performing magnification adjustment as well.
ƒ Magnification adjustments done with printer drivers with PC applications such as
Excel are also counted.
ƒ Magnification adjustments done for adjustments after they have been stored on the
document server are not counted.
ƒ Magnification adjustments performed automatically during Auto Reduce/Enlarge
copying are counted.
ƒ The magnification rates of blank cover sheets, slip sheets, etc. are automatically
assigned a rate of 100%.

Service
Tables
8 481 T:PrtPGS/TonSave *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
8 484 P:PrtPGS/TonSave *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
These SP’s count the number of pages printed with the Toner Save
feature switched on.

ƒ These SP’s return the same results as this SP is limited to the

Print application.

8 491 T:PrtPGS/Col Mode *CTL These SP’s count the number of pages
8 492 C:PrtPGS/Col Mode *CTL printed in the Color Mode by each
8 493 F:PrtPGS/Col Mode *CTL application.
8 496 L:PrtPGS/Col Mode *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

SM 5-117 B229
SP Mode Tables

8 497 O:PrtPGS/Col Mode *CTL

001 B/W
002 Single Color
003 Two Color
004 Full Color

8 501 T:PrtPGS/Col Mode *CTL These SP’s count the number of pages
8 504 P:PrtPGS/Col Mode *CTL printed in the Color Mode or B/W Mode by
the print application.
8 507 O:PrtPGS/Col Mode *CTL
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
001 B/W
002 Single Color
003 Full Color
004 Single Color
-005 Two Color

T:PrtPGS/Emul *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

8 511 These SP’s count by printer emulation mode the total number of pages
printed.
P:PrtPGS/Emul *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
8 514 These SP’s count by printer emulation mode the total number of pages
printed.
001 RPCS
002 RPDL
003 PS3
004 R98
005 R16
006 GL/GL2
007 R55
008 RTIFF
009 PDF
010 PCL5e/5c
011 PCL XL

B229 5-118 SM
 SP Mode Tables

012 IPDL-C
013 BM-Links
014 Other
ƒ SP8 511 and SP8 514 return the same results as they are both limited to the Print
application.
ƒ Print jobs output to the document server are not counted.

T:PrtPGS/FIN *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

8 521 These SP’s count by finishing mode the total number of pages printed by all
applications.
C:PrtPGS/FIN *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
8 522 These SP’s count by finishing mode the total number of pages printed by
the Copy application.
F:PrtPGS/FIN *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs count by finishing mode the total number of pages printed
by the Fax application.
8 523

ƒ Print finishing options for received faxes are currently not

available.

Service
Tables
P:PrtPGS/FIN *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
8 524 These SP’s count by finishing mode the total number of pages printed by
the Print application.
S:PrtPGS/FIN *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
8 525 These SP’s count by finishing mode the total number of pages printed by
the Scanner application.
L:PrtPGS/FIN *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
8 526 These SPs count by finishing mode the total number of pages printed from
within the document server mode window at the operation panel.
001 Sort
002 Stack
003 Staple
004 Booklet
005 Z-Fold
006 Punch
007 Other

SM 5-119 B229
SP Mode Tables

ƒ If stapling is selected for finishing and the stack is too large for stapling, the
unstapled pages are still counted.
ƒ The counts for staple finishing are based on output to the staple tray, so jam
recoveries are counted.

This SP counts the amount of staples used by the

8 531 Staples *CTL machine.
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

T:Counter *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

These SP’s count the total output broken down by color output, regardless
8 581 of the application used. In addition to being displayed in the SMC Report,
these counters are also displayed in the User Tools display on the copy
machine.
001 Total
002 Total: Full Color
003 B&W/Single Color
004 Development: CMY
005 Development: K
006 Copy: Color
007 Copy: B/W
008 Print: Color
009 Print: B/W
010 Total: Color
-011 Total: B/W
012 Full Color: A3
013 Full Color: –B4
014 Full Color Print
015 Mono Color Print
016 Full Color GPC

B229 5-120 SM
 SP Mode Tables

8 582 C:Counter *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

These SP’s count the total output of the copy application broken down by
color output.
001 B/W
002 Single Color
003 Two Color
004 Full Color

8 583 F:Counter *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

These SP’s count the total output of the fax application broken down by
color output.
8583-001 B/W
8 583 2 Single Color

8 584 P:Counter *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

These SP’s count the total output of the print application broken down by
color output.
8 584 1 B/W

Service
Tables
8 584 2 Mono Color
8 584 3 Full Color
8 584 4 Single Color
8 584 5 Two Color

8 586 L:Counter *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

These SP’s count the total output of the local storage broken down by color
output.
8 582 1 B/W
8 582 2 Single Color
8 582 3 Two Color
8 582 4 Full Color

SM 5-121 B229
SP Mode Tables

8 591 O:Counter *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

8 591 1 A3/DLT These SP’s count the totals for A3/DLT paper use, number
of duplex pages printed, and the number of staples used.
8 591 2 Duplex
These totals are for Other (O:) applications only.

8 601 Cvg Counter *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

8 601 1 Cvg: BW %
Displays the total coverage of each mode.
8 601 2 Cvg: FC %
8 601 11 Cvg: BW Pages
Displays the number of the printouts in each mode.
8 601 12 Cvg: FC Pages

T:FAX TX PGS *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

8 631 These SP’s count by color mode the number of pages sent by fax to a
telephone number.
F:FAX TX PGS *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
8 633 These SP’s count by color mode the number of pages sent by fax to a
telephone number.
001 B/W
002 Color
ƒ If a document has color and black-and-white pages mixed, the pages are counted
separately as B/W or Color.
ƒ At the present time, this feature is provided for the Fax application only so SP8631
and SP8633 are the same.
ƒ The counts include error pages.
ƒ If a document is sent to more than one destination with a Group transmission, the
count is done for each destination.
ƒ Polling transmissions are counted but polling RX are not.
ƒ Relay, memory, and confidential mailbox transmissions and are counted for each
destination.

T:IFAX TX PGS *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

8 641 These SP’s count by color mode the number of pages sent by fax to as fax
images using I-Fax.
8 643 F:IFAX TX PGS *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

B229 5-122 SM
 SP Mode Tables

These SP’s count by color mode the number of pages sent by Fax as fax
images using I-Fax.
001 B/W
002 Color
ƒ If a document has color and black-and-white pages mixed, the pages are counted
separately as B/W or Color.
ƒ At the present time, this feature is provided for the Fax application only so SP8641
and SP8643 are the same.
ƒ The counts include error pages.
ƒ If a document is sent to more than one destination with a Group transmission, the
count is done for each destination.
ƒ Polling transmissions are counted but polling RX is not.
ƒ Relay, memory, and confidential mailbox transmissions and are counted for each
destination.

T:S-to-Email PGS *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

8 651 These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages attached to an
e-mail for both the Scan and document server applications.
S:S-to-Email PGS *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

Service
8 655

Tables
These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages attached to an
e-mail for the Scan application only.
001 B/W
002 Color

ƒ The count for B/W and Color pages is done after the document is stored on
the HDD. If the job is cancelled before it is stored, the pages are not counted.
ƒ If Scan-to-Email is used to send a 10-page document to 5 addresses, the
count is 10 (the pages are sent to the same SMTP server together).
ƒ If Scan-to-PC is used to send a 10-page document to 5 folders, the count is 50
(the document is sent to each destination of the SMB/FTP server).
ƒ Due to restrictions on some devices, if Scan-to-Email is used to send a
10-page document to a large number of destinations, the count may be
divided and counted separately. For example, if a 10-page document is sent to
200 addresses, the count is 10 for the first 100 destinations and the count is
also 10 for the second 100 destinations, for a total of 20.).

SM 5-123 B229
SP Mode Tables

T:Deliv PGS/Svr *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

8 661 These SP’s count by color mode the total number of pages sent to a Scan
Router server by both Scan and LS applications.
S:Deliv PGS/Svr *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
8 665 These SP’s count by color mode the total number of pages sent to a Scan
Router server by the Scan application.
001 B/W
002 Color

ƒ The B/W and Color counts are done after the document is stored on the HDD
of the Scan Router server.
ƒ If the job is canceled before storage on the Scan Router server finishes, the
counts are not done.
ƒ The count is executed even if regardless of confirmation of the arrival at the
Scan Router server.

T:Deliv PGS/PC *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

8 671 These SP’s count by color mode the total number of pages sent to a folder
on a PC (Scan-to-PC) with the Scan and LS applications.
S:Deliv PGS/PC *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
8 675 These SP’s count by color mode the total number of pages sent with
Scan-to-PC with the Scan application.
001 B/W
002 Color

ƒ Print jobs done with Web Image Monitor and Desk Top Binder are added to
the count.
ƒ If several documents are merged for sending, the number of pages stored are
counted for the application that stored them.
ƒ When several documents are sent by a Fax broadcast, the F: count is done
for the number of pages sent to each destination.

B229 5-124 SM
 SP Mode Tables

TX PGS/Port *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

These SP’s count the number of pages sent by the physical port used to send
8 701
them. For example, if a 3-page original is sent to 4 destinations via ISDN G4,
the count for ISDN (G3, G4) is 12.
8 701 1 PSTN-1
8 701 2 PSTN-2
8 701 3 PSTN-3
8 701 4 ISDN (G3,G4)
8 701 5 Network

8 711 T:Scan PGS/Comp *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

S:Scan PGS/Comp *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
8 715
These SP’s count the number of pages sent by each compression mode.
-001 JPEG/JPEG2000
TIFF M/S
-002
(Multi/Single)
003 PDF
-004 Other

Service
Tables
RX PGS/Port *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
8 741 These SP’s count the number of pages received by the physical port used to
receive them.
8 741 1 PSTN-1
8 741 2 PSTN-2
8 741 3 PSTN-3
8 741 4 ISDN (G3,G4)
8 741 5 Network

Ink Botol Info. *BCU [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

These SP’s display the number of already replaced ink cartridges.
8 781
ƒ Currently, the data in SP7-833-011 through 014 and the data in
SP8-781-001 through 004 are the same.

SM 5-125 B229
SP Mode Tables

8 781 1 BK The number of black-ink cartridges

8 781 2 Y The number of yellow-ink cartridges
8 781 3 M The number of magenta-ink cartridges
8 781 4 C The number of cyan-ink cartridges

This SP displays the percent of space

available on the document server for
8 791 LS Memory Remain *CTL
storing documents.
[0 to 100 / 0 / 1]

Ink Remain *CTL [0 to 100 / 0 / 1]

These SP’s display the percent of ink remaining for each color. This SP
allows the user to check the toner supply at any time.
8 801
ƒ This precise method of measuring remaining ink supply (1%
steps) is better than other machines in the market that can only
measure in increments of 10 (10% steps).
8 801 1 K
8 801 2 Y
8 801 3 M
8 801 4 C

Cvr Cnt:0-10% *BCU [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

8 851 These SP’s display the number of scanned sheets on which the coverage of
each color is from 0% to 10%.
8 851 11 0-2%:Bk
8 851 12 0-2%:Y
8 851 13 0-2%:M
8 851 14 0-2%:C
8 851 21 3-4%: Bk
8 851 22 3-4%: Y
8 851 23 3-4%: M
8 851 24 3-4%: C
8 851 31 5-7%: Bk
8 851 32 5-7%: Y

B229 5-126 SM
 SP Mode Tables

8 851 33 5-7%: M
8 851 34 5-7%: C
8 851 41 8-10%: Bk
8 851 42 8-10%: Y
8 851 43 8-10%: M
8 851 44 8-10%: C

Cvr Cnt: 11-20% *BCU [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

8 861 These SP’s display the number of scanned sheets on which the coverage of
each color is from 11% to 20%.
8 851 1 BK
8 851 2 Y
8 851 3 M
8 851 4 C

Cvr Cnt: 21-30% *BCU [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

8 871 These SP’s display the number of scanned sheets on which the coverage of
each color is from 21% to 30%.
8 871 1 BK

Service
Tables
8 871 2 Y
8 871 3 M
8 871 4 C

Cvr Cnt: 31%- *BCU [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

8 881 These SP’s display the number of scanned sheets on which the coverage of
each color is 31% or higher.
8 881 1 BK
8 881 2 Y
8 881 3 M
8 881 4 C

SM 5-127 B229
SP Mode Tables

Page/Ink Bottle *BCU [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

8 891
These SP’s display the number of sheets output by the scan application.
8 891 1 BK
8 891 2 Y
8 891 3 M
8 891 4 C

Page/Ink Prev1 *BCU [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

8 901 These SP’s display the number of sheets output by the scan application
with the previously replaced units.
8 901 1 BK
8 901 2 Y
8 901 3 M
8 901 4 C

Page/Ink Prev2 *BCU [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

8 911 These SP’s display the number of sheets output by the scan application
with the one before previously replaced units.
8 911 1 BK
8 911 2 Y
8 911 3 M
8 911 4 C

8 921 Cvr Cnt/Total *BCU [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

8 921 1 Coverage(%): BK
8 921 2 Coverage(%): Y These SP’s display the total coverage percentage
8 921 3 Coverage(%): M of sheets output by the machine.
8 921 4 Coverage(%): C
8 921 11 Covwerage/P: Bk
8 921 12 Covwerage/P: Y These SP’s display the total coverage pages
8 921 13 Covwerage/P: M output by the machine.
8 921 14 Covwerage/P: C

B229 5-128 SM
 SP Mode Tables

8 921 21 Ink Cons(ml): BK

8 921 22 Ink Cons(ml): Y These SP’s display the total ink consumption used
8 921 23 Ink Cons(ml): M by the machine.
8 921 24 Ink Cons(ml): C

Machine Status *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

These SP’s count the amount of time the machine spends in each operation
8 941
mode. These SP’s are useful for customers who need to investigate
machine operation for improvement in their compliance with ISO Standards.
Engine operation time. Does not include time while
8 941 1 Operation Time controller is saving data to HDD (while engine is not
operating).
Engine not operating. Includes time while controller
8 941 2 Standby Time saves data to HDD. Does not include time spent in
Energy Save, Low Power, or Off modes.
Includes time while the machine is performing
8 941 3 Energy Save Time
background printing.
Includes time in Energy Save mode with Engine on.

Service
Tables
8 941 4 Low Power Time Includes time while machine is performing
background printing.
Includes time while machine is performing
8 941 5 Off Mode Time background printing. Does not include time machine
remains powered off with the power switches.
8 941 6 SC Total down time due to SC errors.
8 941 7 PrtJam Total down time due to paper jams during printing.
Total down time due to original jams during
8 941 8 OrgJam
scanning.
8 941 9 Spl PM Unit End Total down time due to ink end.

SM 5-129 B229
SP Mode Tables

AddBook Register *CTL

8 951 These SP’s count the number of events when the machine manages data
registration.
8 951 1 User Code User code registrations.
8 951 2 Mail Address Mail address registrations.
8 951 3 Fax Destination Fax destination registrations.
8 951 4 Group Group destination registrations. [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
Fax relay destination registrations
8 951 5 Transfer Request
for relay TX.
8 951 6 F-Code F-Code box registrations.
Copy application registrations
8 951 7 Copy Program with the Program (job settings)
feature.
Fax application registrations with
8 951 8 Fax Program the Program (job settings)
feature.
[0 to 255 / 0 / 255]
Printer application registrations
8 951 9 Printer Program with the Program (job settings)
feature.
Scanner application registrations
8 951 10 Scanner Program with the Program (job settings)
feature.

AdominCounter *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

8 999
Displays the user setting counter for administrator.
8 999 1 Total
8 999 2 Copy: FC
8 999 3 Copy: BW
8 999 6 Printer: FC
8 999 7 Printer: BW
8 999 8 Printer: OneC
8 999 9 Printer: TwoC
8 999 10 FaxP: BW
8 999 11 FaxP: OneC

B229 5-130 SM
 SP Mode Tables

8 999 12 A3/DLT
8 999 13 Duplex
8 999 14 Cvr: FC %
8 999 15 Cvr: BW %
8 999 16 Cvr: FC Pages
8 999 17 Cvr: BW Pages
8 999 101 SendTtl: FC
8 999 102 SendTtl: BW
8 999 103 FaxSend
8 999 104 FaxSend: FC
8 999 105 FaxSend: BW

Service
Tables

SM 5-131 B229
Printer Service Mode

5.3 PRINTER SERVICE MODE

1001 [Bit Switch]

1001 1 Bit Switch 1 *CTL Adjusts bit switch settings. DFU
Bit 0 to 2: Not used. Do not change settings.
Bit 3: Changing print language (PCL <-> PS)
1001 2 Bit Switch 2 *CTL 0: Enabled
1: Disabled (No change)
Bit 4 to 7: Not used. Do not change settings.
Bit Switch 3 *CTL Adjusts bit switch settings.
Bit 0: PostScript3 Euro glyph
0: Disabled
1: Enabled (Even if there is no Euro Glyph in ROM, it is possible to load the
Euro Glyph data.)
Bit 1: Not used. Do not change setting.
Bit 2:PCL5e/5c (HP4000/HP8000)
The left space command is set to “0”, the machine is changed to “1”
1001 3 0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Bit 3: PCL5e/GL2: pen # of PW
0: Normal
1: Patch
Bit 4: Tray selecting
0: Select tray is determined auto tray selecting
1: Like HP/SV
Bit 5 to 7: Not used. Do not change settings.
1001 4 Bit Switch 4 *CTL Adjusts bit switch settings. DFU
Bit 0 to 2: Not used. Do not change settings.
Bit 3: Enabled the “%%” command of the
PostScript detection condition for the auto
1001 5 Bit Switch 5 *CTL print language selection function.
0: Enabled
1: Disabled
Bit 4 to 7: Not used. Do not change settings.

B229 5-132 SM
 Printer Service Mode

1001 6 Bit Switch 6 *CTL

1001 7 Bit Switch 7 *CTL Adjusts bit switch settings. DFU
1001 8 Bit Switch 8 *CTL

1003 [Clear Setting]

Initializes settings in the System menu of the
1003 1 Init. System
user mode.
1003 3 Delete Program DFU

1004 [Print Summary]

Prints the service summary sheet (a summary
1004 1 Service Summary
of all the controller settings).

1005 [Disp. Version]

1005 1 Displays the version of the controller firmware.

1101 [ToneCtlSet]
1101 1 Tone (Factory) *CTL Recalls a set of gamma settings. This can be

Service
Tables
1101 2 Tone (Prev.) *CTL either a) the factory setting, b) the previous
1101 3 Tone (Current) *CTL setting, or c) the current setting.

[ToneCtlSet] *CTL
Sets the printing mode (resolution) for the printer gamma adjustment. The
1102
asterisk (*) shows which mode is set.
Refer to the tone control selection list following these SP tables

1103 [PrnColorSheet]
1103 001 ToneCtlSheet Prints the test page to check the color balance
1103 002 ColorChart before and after the gamma adjustment.

SM 5-133 B229
Printer Service Mode

[ToneCtlValue]
1104
Adjusts the printer gamma for the mode selected in the Mode Selection menu.
1104 001 Set Black 1 *CTL
1104 021 Set Cyan 1 *CTL
[0 to 255 / 16 / 1/step]
1104 041 Set Magenta 1 *CTL
1104 061 Set Yellow 1 *CTL
1104 002 Set Black 2 *CTL
1104 022 Set Cyan 2 *CTL
[0 to 255 / 32 / 1/step]
1104 042 Set Magenta 2 *CTL
1104 062 Set Yellow 2 *CTL
1104 003 Set Black 3 *CTL
1104 023 Set Cyan 3 *CTL
[0 to 255 / 48 / 1/step]
1104 043 Set Magenta 3 *CTL
1104 063 Set Yellow 3 *CTL
1104 004 Set Black 4 *CTL
1104 024 Set Cyan 4 *CTL
[0 to 255 / 64 / 1/step]
1104 044 Set Magenta 4 *CTL
1104 064 Set Yellow 4 *CTL
1104 005 Set Black 5 *CTL
1104 025 Set Cyan 5 *CTL
[0 to 255 / 80 / 1/step]
1104 045 Set Magenta 5 *CTL
1104 065 Set Yellow 5 *CTL
1104 006 Set Black 6 *CTL
1104 026 Set Cyan 6 *CTL
[0 to 255 / 96 / 1/step]
1104 046 Set Magenta 6 *CTL
1104 066 Set Yellow 6 *CTL
1104 007 Set Black 7 *CTL
1104 027 Set Cyan 7 *CTL
[0 to 255 / 112 / 1/step]
1104 047 Set Magenta 7 *CTL
1104 067 Set Yellow 7 *CTL

B229 5-134 SM
 Printer Service Mode

1104 008 Set Black 8 *CTL

1104 028 Set Cyan 8 *CTL
[0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step]
1104 048 Set Magenta 8 *CTL
1104 068 Set Yellow 8 *CTL
1104 009 Set Black 9 *CTL
1104 029 Set Cyan 9 *CTL
[0 to 255 / 144 / 1/step]
1104 049 Set Magenta 9 *CTL
1104 069 Set Yellow 9 *CTL
1104 010 Set Black 10 *CTL
1104 030 Set Cyan 10 *CTL
[0 to 255 / 160 / 1/step]
1104 050 Set Magenta 10 *CTL
1104 070 Set Yellow 10 *CTL
1104 011 Set Black 11 *CTL
1104 031 Set Cyan 11 *CTL
[0 to 255 / 176 / 1/step]
1104 051 Set Magenta 11 *CTL
1104 071 Set Yellow 11 *CTL
1104 012 Set Black 12 *CTL
1104 032 Set Cyan 12 *CTL

Service
Tables
[0 to 255 / 192 / 1/step]
1104 052 Set Magenta 12 *CTL
1104 072 Set Yellow 12 *CTL
1104 013 Set Black 13 *CTL
1104 033 Set Cyan 13 *CTL
[0 to 255 / 208 / 1/step]
1104 053 Set Magenta 13 *CTL
1104 073 Set Yellow 13 *CTL
1104 014 Set Black 14 *CTL
1104 034 Set Cyan 14 *CTL
[0 to 255 / 224 / 1/step]
1104 054 Set Magenta 14 *CTL
1104 074 Set Yellow 14 *CTL
1104 015 Set Black 15 *CTL
1104 035 Set Cyan 15 *CTL
[0 to 255 / 240 / 1/step]
1104 055 Set Magenta 15 *CTL
1104 075 Set Yellow 15 *CTL

SM 5-135 B229
Printer Service Mode

[ToneCtlSave]
Saves the print gamma (adjusted with the Gamma Adj.) as the new Current
1105 Setting. Before the machine stores the new “current setting”, it moves the data
stored as the “current setting” to the “previous setting” memory-storage
location.

[Toner Limit]
1106
Adjusts the maximum toner amount for image development.
1106 001 TonerLimitPhot *CTL [100 to 400 / 260 / 1 %/step]
1106 002 TonerLimitText *CTL [100 to 400 / 200 / 1 %/step]

[FactoryTestPrt]
1107 Prints the test page to check the color balance before transportation (600 x 600
2 bit). DFU

1108 [Ext. Toner Save]

1108 001 Mode 1: Text
1108 002 Mode 2: Text
1108 003 Mode 1: Image
1108 004 Mode 2: Image
DFU
1108 005 Mode 1: Line
1108 006 Mode 2: Line
1108 007 Mode 1: paint
1108 008 Mode 2: Paint

Tone Control Setting: SP1102-001

Input Number Paper Type Resolution Mode
0 Photo
300 dpi
1 Text
2 Photo
Plain Paper
3 Text
600 dpi
4 Photo
5 Text

B229 5-136 SM
 Printer Service Mode

6 Photo
7 Text
8 Photo
High Grade Plain Paper 600 dpi
9 Text
10 Photo
11 Text
12 Photo
13 Text
Glossy Paper 600 dpi
14 Photo
15 Text
16 Photo
17 Text
18 Photo
OHP 600 dpi
19 Text
20 Photo
21 Text
22 Envelop 600 dpi Photo
23 Text

Service
Tables
24 Photo
25 Envelop 600 dpi Text
26 Photo
27 Text
28 Photo
29 Text
30 Envelop for Ink jet Photo
600 dpi
31 (Japan Only) Text
32 Photo
33 Text

SM 5-137 B229
Scanner SP Mode

5.4 SCANNER SP MODE

SP1-xxx (System and Others)

[Compression Type]
1004
Selects the compression type for binary picture processing.
[ 1 to 3 / 1 / 1/step ]
1004 1 Compression Type *CTL
1: MH, 2: MR, 3: MMR

[Erase margin]
1005 Creates an erase margin for all edges of the scanned image.
If the machine has scanned the edge of the original, create a margin.
1005 1 Range from 0 to 5 mm *CTL [0 to 5 / 0 / 1 mm/step ]

[ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
1009 [Remote scan disable] *CTL
0: enable, 1: disable
1009 1 Enable or disable the TWAIN network scan.

SP2-XXX (Scanning-image quality)

[Compression ratio of gray-scale]
2021 Selects the compression ratio for grayscale processing mode (JPEG) for the
three settings that can be selected at the operation panel.
Level 3 (Standard
2021 1 [ 5 to 95 / 40 / 1 /step ]
compression)
2021 2 Level 2 (Higher compression) [ 5 to 95 / 50 / 1 /step ]
2021 3 Level 4 (Lower compression) *CTL [ 5 to 95 / 30 / 1 /step ]
Level 1 (Highest
2021 4 [ 5 to 95 / 60 / 1 /step ]
compression)
2021 5 Level 5 (Lowest compression) [ 5 to 95 / 20 / 1 /step ]

B229 5-138 SM
 Using SP Modes

5.5 USING SP MODES

5.5.1 ADJUSTING REGISTRATION AND MAGNIFICATION

To adjust the registration and magnification, you need to use several service programs.
The chart shows an example of the procedure to adjust the machine in the basic
configuration.
5.5.2 DISPLAY APS DATA (SP 4301 1)
- Sensor Positions -
The APS (auto paper select) sensors are arranged as shown in the diagram.
- Reading the Data -

Example 1 Example 2
ƒ (7)00001100(0) [0C] ƒ Paper Size: 00000011 [03]

Example 1 indicates that the paper size and its orientation is "81/2 x 13 SEF," and that the
document feeder (or platen cover) is open. Example 2 indicates that the paper size and its
orientation is "A4 LEF," and that the document feeder (or platen cover) is closed.

Service
Tables
The "Paper Size" data starts with eight digits. The first digit indicates the output of L2; the
second digit, L1; the third digit, W2; and the fourth digit, W1. The other four digits (from the
fifth through the eighth) are always "0000." In Example 1, the APS sensors L2 and L1
Detect paper (W2 and W1 do not).
In Example 2, APS sensors W2 and W1 detect paper (L2 and L1 do not). The paper size
and its orientation is based on the outputs of these four APS sensors.
The "DF Open" data shows "1" or "0," indicating if the document feeder (or platen cover) is
open or closed respectively. The data is based on the output of the platen cover sensor [A].
5.5.3 MEMORY CLEAR
The machine stores the engine data in the NVRAM on the BCU, and stores the other data
in the NVRAM on the controller. To distinguish between the engine data and the other data,
see SP5801-1 through 19. This service program (SP 5801) handles the controller data. Any
data that is not handled by SP 5801 is the engine data. The data in the BCU NVRAM
(engine data) is cleared by SP5998-1 while the data in the controller NVRAM (controller
data) is cleared by SP 5801-xxx (for exceptions, see "xxx").

SM 5-139 B229
Using SP Modes

Machine Data NVRAM Cleared by Remarks

Any data other
Engine data BCU SP 5998-002 than controller
data
SCS, IMH, MCS,
Copier
application, Fax
application,
MFP
Printer
SP 5801-001,
Controller data Controller application,
003 to 009
Scanner
application, Web
service/network
application, NCS,
R-Fax, DCS, UCS
- Exceptions -
SP 5998-1 clears most of the settings and counters stored in the NVRAM on the BCU (the
values return to their default values). However, the following settings are not cleared:
ƒ SP 5807 (Area Selection)
ƒ SP 5811-1 (Serial Num Input [Code Set])
ƒ SP 5811-3 (Serial Num Input [ID2 Code Display])
ƒ SP 5812-1 (Service TEL [Telephone])
ƒ SP 5812-2 (Service TEL [Facsimile])
ƒ SP 5907 (Plug & Play)
ƒ SP 7 (Data Log)
ƒ SP 8 (History)
SP 5998-1 (MFP machine) after you have replaced the BCU NVRAM or when the BCU
NVRAM data is corrupted. When the program ends normally, the message "Completed" is
displayed. When you have replaced the controller NVRAM or when the controller NVRAM
data is corrupted, use SP 5801-1. The message is the same as the basic machine.
1. Upload the NVRAM data to a flash memory card ( NVRAM Data
Upload/Download).
2. Print out all SMC data lists ( SMC Print).

ƒ Be sure to print out all the lists. You have to manually change the SP
settings if the NVRAM data upload ends abnormally.

B229 5-140 SM
 Using SP Modes

3. Select SP 5801-2.
4. Press the OK key.
5. Select "Execute." The messages "Execute?" followed by "Cancel" and
"Execute" are displayed.
6. Select "Execute."
7. When the program has ended normally, the message "Completed" is displayed.
If the program has ended abnormally, an error message is displayed.
8. Press the cancel key.
9. Turn the main switch off and on.
10. Download the NVRAM data from a flash memory card ( NVRAM Data
Upload/Download).

5.5.4 INPUT CHECK (SP 5803)

- Conducting an Input Check -
1. Select SP 5803.
2. Select the number (see the table below) corresponding to the component.
3. Select "Execute." The copy mode is activated.
4. The sign "01H" or "00H" is displayed (see the table below).

Service
Tables
- Input Check Table -
Num. Sensor/Switch 01H 00H
001 Safety SW Open Close
002 Front Cover SW (Front door) Open Close
003 Right Cover SW (Right door) Open Close
004 Left Cover SW (Left upper door) Open Close
005 Left LowCover SW (Left lower door) Open Close
Straight Cover SW
006 Open Close
(Multi-duplex exit door)
Manual Cover SW
007 Open Close
(Duplex entrance door)
Exit Cover SW
008 Open Close
(Exit tray cover left and right)
009 Mech Counter (Mechanical counter) Detected Not detected
010 Regist Sensor (First registration sensor) Paper detected Not detected
011 Belt In Sensor (Engine entrance sensor) Paper detected Not detected

SM 5-141 B229
Using SP Modes

Num. Sensor/Switch 01H 00H

Image Reg Sensor (Second Registration
012 Paper detected Not detected
Sensor)
013 Branch Sensor (Junction gate sensor) Paper detected Not detected
014 Exit Sensor Paper detected Not detected
015 Mun PE S (Paper end Sensor: By-pass) Paper detected Not detected
016 OP Sensor (Relay sensor) Paper detected Not detected
017 Upper PE S (Paper end sensor: Tray 1) Paper detected Not detected
Upper P Size S
018 *1
(Paper size switch: Tray1)
019 System Temp (Temperature sensor) Display at 5 to 45°C
020 System Humidity (Humidity sensor) Display at 0 to 100 %
By-pass PE S
021 Paper detected Not detected
(Multi-bypass paper detection sensor)
By-pass P Size S
022 *1
(Multi-bypass paper size sensor)
Duplex Installed (Duplex unit selection
023 Duplex unit detected Not detected
switch )
Duplex Entrance S
024 Paper detected Not detected
(Duplex entrance sensor)
025 Duplex Internal S (Duplex wait sensor) Paper detected Not detected
Duplex Inverter S
026 Paper detected Not detected
(Duplex inverter sensor)
027 Duplex Exit S (Duplex exit sensor) Paper detected Not detected
Duplex R-Cover SW (Duplex right door
028 Open Close
Switch)
Duplex L-Cover SW
029 Open Close
(Duplex left door Switch)
BK Installed (Optional paper tray unit
030 OPT detected Not detected
detection switch)
BK-Upper PE S
031 Paper detected Not detected
(Paper end sensor: Tray 2)
BK-Upper P Size S
032 *1
(Paper size switch: Tray 2)
033 BK-Upper Lift S Paper detected Not detected

B229 5-142 SM
 Using SP Modes

Num. Sensor/Switch 01H 00H

(Paper upper limit sensor: Tray 2)
BK-Up P Height S
034 Paper detected Not detected
(Paper height sensor: Tray 2)
BK Cover SW (Right door switch:
035 Open Close
Optional paper tray unit)
BK type 00: Not installed, 01: One tray unit
038
02: Two tray unit
BK-Low PE S (Paper end sensor: Tray
039 Paper detected Not detected
3)
BK-Low P Size S 00: Not installed, 02: A4 LEF,
040 (Paper size switch: Tray 2) 03: A4 SEF, 05: B4 SEF, 07: B5 LEF,
08: B5 SEF, 0C: A5 SEF, 0F: A3 SEF
BK-Low Lift S
041 Detected Not detected
(Paper upper limit sensor: Tray 3)
BK-Low P Height S
042 Detected Not detected
(Paper height sensor: Tray 3)
Air Detected S (Air sensor pin at printer
046
head)

Service
Tables
047 Filler S (Tank full sensor) Detected Not detected
Cartrg Det:Y
048 (Ink cartridge detection sensor for Detected Not detected
yellow)
Cartrg Det:M (Ink cartridge detection
049 Detected Not detected
sensor for magenta)
Cartrg Det:C
050 Detected Not detected
(Ink cartridge detection sensor for cyan)
Cartrg Det:K
051 Detected Not detected
(Ink cartridge detection sensor for black)
052 New Cartridge: Y New Not new
053 New Cartridge: M New Not new
054 New Cartridge: C New Not new
055 New Cartridge: K New Not new
056 Ink Remainder: Y 0 to 100%
057 Ink Remainder: M 0 to 100%

SM 5-143 B229
Using SP Modes

Num. Sensor/Switch 01H 00H

058 Ink Remainder: C 0 to 100%
059 Ink Remainder: K 0 to 100%
060 Refill Cartrg: Y Refill cartridge Not refill
061 Refill Cartrg: M Refill cartridge Not refill
062 Refill Cartrg: C Refill cartridge Not refill
063 Refill Cartrg: K Refill cartridge Not refill
Maintenance-M HP S
064 HP Not HP
(Maintenance unit HP sensor)
Waste Ink Full S
065
(Ink collection bottle full sensor)
066 Mist-Fan Lock Detected Not detected
Carig Enc-Counter
067
(Main scan encoder sensor)
068 Carriage Lift S Carriage lift Not lift
069 Head Temperature Displayed at 0 to 55°C
Belt Enc-Counter
070
(Sub scan encoder sensor)
071 Belt Temperature Displayed at 0 to 55°C
PP-Leak Detect (High voltage unit
072 Detected Not detected
current leak detection)
073 Print Exit Sens (Paper exit sensor) Detected Not detected
100 Key-Card Sensor Detected Not detected
Key-Cnt Sensor
101 Detected Not detected
(Key counter detection sensor)
200 Scanner HP Sensor HP Not HP
201 Platen Opn Sens (Platen cover sensor) Close Open
202 DF Installed (DF detection sensor) Installed Not installed
203 DF-Position S Close Open
204 DF-Cover Open S Close Open
205 DF-Original Set S Detected Not detected
206 DF-Registration S Detected Not detected
207 DF-Exit S Detected Not detected
208 DF-Trailing S Detected Not detected

B229 5-144 SM
 Using SP Modes

Num. Sensor/Switch 01H 00H

209 DF-Reverse S Detected Not detected

ƒ *1 Paper Size

Copier 00 02 03 04 05 06 07
Europe DLT SEF LT LEF LG SEF A4 SEF Foolscap A4 LEF Not set
North
A3 SEF LT LEF A5 LEF LT SEF Foolscap A4 LEF Not set
America

Paper Feed
00 02 03 05 07 0C 0F
Unit
Europe Not set A4 LEF A4 SEF DLT SEF LT LEF LG SEF A3 SEF
North
Not set A4 LEF A4 SEF DLT SEF LT LEF LG SEF A3 SEF
America

By-Pass Tray 03 07 09 0B 0C 0D 0E
Europe A4 SEF A3 F/GL A5 SEF
North
LT SEF DLT HLT SEF

Service
Tables
America

- *2 Paper Amount -
10 Near end
11 About 25%
00 About 75%
00 About 100%

- *3 Available Paper Feed Unit -

00 None
20 2-tray paper feed unit
30 1-tray paper feed unit

SM 5-145 B229
Using SP Modes

5.5.5 OUTPUT CHECK (SP 5804)

Conducting an Output Check

ƒ To prevent mechanical or electrical damage, do not keep an electrical

component on for a long time.
1. Select SP 5804.
2. Select the number (see the table below) corresponding to the component.
3. Select "ON."
4. To stop the operation, select "OFF."

Output Check Table

Number 005, 006, 040, and 041 may not respond when the fusing temperature is high.
Num. Component
001 Feed M-Fwd 220
002 Feed M-Fwd 100
003 Upper Feed CL (Paper feed clutch: Tray 1)
004 Registration CL
005 Guide SOL
006 Exit M-Fwd 225
007 Exit M-Fwd 105
008 Branch SOL
009 By-Pass CL
010 Duplex M-Fwd 225
011 Reverse M-Fwd 225
012 Reverse M-Fwd 146
013 Duplex CL
014 Duplex Branch SOL
015 BK-Up M-Fwd
016 BK-Up Relay CL
017 BK-Up Lift M-Up
018 BK-Up Lift M-Dw
019 BK-Low M-Fwd
020 BK-Low Relay CL
021 BK-Low Lift M-Up

B229 5-146 SM
 Using SP Modes

Num. Component
022 BK-Low Lift M-Dw
023 Supply M-Fwd K2
024 Supply M-Fwd K
025 Supply M-Fwd C
026 Supply M-Fwd M
027 Supply M-Fwd Y
028 Air Open SOL
029 Maintenance M-Fwd
030 Mist-Fan
031 Carriage M-Fwd
032 Belt M-Fwd 220
033 Belt M-Fwd 100
034 PP High:4mm
035 PP High:8mm
036 PP High:12mm
037 PP High:16mm
038 PP High:20mm
039 PP Low:4mm

Service
Tables
040 PP Low:8mm
041 PP Low:12mm
042 PP Low:16mm
043 PP Low:20mm
044 Decap
045 Capping
100 Carig FreeRun (Carriage unit free run)
101 Belt FreeRun (Belt unit free run)
BeltCarig FreeRun
102
(Belt unit and Carriage unit free run)
202 Scanner Lamp
203 DF-Feed M
204 DF-Duplex M
205 DF-Feed CL
206 DF-Pickup SOL

SM 5-147 B229
Using SP Modes

Num. Component
207 DF-Stamp SOL
208 DF-Gate SOL

5.5.6 SERIAL NUMBER INPUT (SP 5811)

- Specifying Characters -
SP 5811 1 specifies the serial number. You use the numeric keypad and the operation
panel.

You use the numeric keypad to type numbers. In addition, you use the operation panel to
type other characters. When you press the "ABC" key, the letter changes as follows: A
B C. To input the same letter two times, for example "AA," you press the "ABC" key, the
"Space" key, and the "ABC" key. To switch between uppercase letters and lowercase letters,
press the "Shift" key.
- Serial Number and NVRAM -
Serial numbers are stored in the NVRAM before shipment and are not cleared. You must
specify a serial number after you replace the NVRAM or BCU.

5.5.7 NVRAM DATA UPLOAD/DOWNLOAD (SP 5824/5825)

ƒ Make sure that you turn off the main switch before inserting or removing an
SD card. Installing or removing an SD card while the main switch is on may
damage the BCU or SD card.
- Overview -
You can copy the data from the NVRAM to an SD card (NVRAM Upload), or from an SD
card to the NVRAM (NVRAM download).

SP 5824-1
From the BCU to an SD card
(NVRAM Upload)
SP 5825-1
From an SD card to the BCU
(NVRAM Download)

You should execute NVRAM Upload before replacing the NVRAM or before executing SP
5801-2 ( Memory Clear). You can copy back the data from the SD card to the NVRAM
as necessary.

B229 5-148 SM
 Using SP Modes

- NVRAM Upload (SP 5824-1) -

Print out the SMC reports (“SP Mode Data” and “Logging Data”) with SP5990-001 before
you do the NVRAM upload.
1. Turn off the main power switch.
2. Remove the slot cover [B] ( x 1).
3. Face a label of an SD card [A] ("A" is printed on it) to the rear side, and insert it
into the SD card slot 3 (service slot).
4. Turn on the main power switch.

Service
Tables
5. Start the SP mode and select SP 5824-1.
6. The machine erases the settings on the SD card (if any), then writes the
machine’s settings to the SD card. This takes about 20 seconds. If uploading
fails, an error message appears. If an error message appears, retry the upload
procedure.
7. Turn off the main power switch.
8. Remove the SD card.

- NVRAM Download (SP 5825-1) -

SP 5825-1 copies the data from the SD card to the NVRAM. The following data is NOT
copied (the data in the NVRAM remains unchanged).
ƒ SP8581-xxx (Total counter)
1. Turn off the main power switch.
2. Remove the slot cover [B] ( x 1).
3. Face a label of an SD card [A] ("A" is printed on it) to the rear side, and insert it
into the SD card slot 1, and insert it into the SD card slot 3 (service slot).

SM 5-149 B229
Using SP Modes

4. Turn on the main power switch.

5. Start the SP mode and select SP 5825-1.
6. The machine erases the current settings, then writes the new settings onto the
NVRAM on the BCU board. This takes about 1 second. If downloading fails, an
error message appears. If an error message appears, retry the download
procedure.
7. Turn off the main power switch.
8. Remove the SD card.

5.5.8 FIRMWARE UPDATE PROCEDURE

This section shows how to update the firmware of the machine.
1. Turn the main power switch off.
2. Remove the slot cover ( x 1).
3. Face a label of an SD card [A] ("A" is printed on it) to the rear side, and insert it
into the SD card slot 3 (service slot).
4. Turn on the main power switch.
5. Select a firmware that you want to update.

ƒ You can update multiple firmwares at the same time. However, it is not
possible to update controller firmware (System/Copy, Network, Support,
Fax and Web Support) at the same time. Update a controller firmware one
by one.
6. Press "Execute" [C].
7. Do not touch any key while the message "Load Status..." is displayed. This
message indicates that the program is running.
8. Check that the message "End Sum..." is displayed. This message indicates that
the program has ended normally.
9. Turn off the main power switch (on the rear cover).
10. Remove the SD card.
11. Install the slot cover.
12. Turn on the main power switch.
13. Check the operation.

B229 5-150 SM
 Using SP Modes

5.5.9 SD CARD APPLI MOVE

Overview
The service program “SD Card Appli Move” (SP5-873) lets you copy application programs
from one SD card to another SD card.
Slot 1 and Slot 2 are used to store application programs. Slot 3 is for maintenance work
only. You cannot run application programs from Slot 3. However, you can move application
programs from Slot 3 to Slot 2. Do the following procedure if you want to move an
application procedure from Slot 3:
1. Choose an SD card with enough space.
2. Enter SP5873 “SD Card Appli Move”. Then move the application from the SD
Card in Slot 3 to Slot 2.

ƒ Do steps 1-2 again if you want to move another application program.

3. Exit the SP mode.
Be very careful when you do the SD Card Appli Move procedure:
ƒ The data necessary for authentication is transferred with the application program
from an SD card to another SD card. Authentication fails if you try to use the SD card
after you copy the application program from one card to another card.

Service
Tables
ƒ Do not use the SD card if it has been used before for other purposes. Normal
operation is not guaranteed when such an SD card is used.
ƒ Keep the SD card in a safe place after you copy the application program from one
card to another card. This is done for the following reasons:
6. The SD card can be the only proof that the user is licensed to use the application
program.
7. You may need to check the SD card and its data to solve a problem in the future.
ƒ You cannot copy PostScript data to another SD card. You have to copy other data to
the SD card that stores the PostScript data.

Move Exec
The menu “Move Exec” (SP5-873-001) lets you copy application programs from the original
SD card to another SD card.

ƒ Do not turn ON the write protect switch of the system SD card or application
SD card on the machine. If the write protect switch is ON, a download error
(e.g. Error Code 44) occurs during a firmware upgrade or application merge.

SM 5-151 B229
Using SP Modes

1. Turn the main switch off.

2. Make sure that an SD card is in SD Card Slot 2. The application program is
copied into this SD card.
3. Insert the SD card (having stored the application program) in SD Card Slot 3. The
application program is copied from this SD card.
4. Turn the main switch on.
5. Start the SP mode.
6. Select SP5-873-001 “Move Exec.”
7. Follow the messages shown on the operation panel.
8. Turn the main switch off.
9. Remove the SD card from SD Card Slot 3.
10. Turn the main switch on.
11. Check that the application programs run normally.

Undo Exec
“Undo Exec” (SP5-873-002) lets you copy back application programs from an SD card to
the original SD card. You can use this program when, for example, you have mistakenly
copied some programs by using Move Exec (SP5-873-001).

ƒ Do not turn ON the write protect switch of the system SD card or application
SD card on the machine. If the write protect switch is ON, a download error
(e.g. Error Code 44) occurs during a firmware upgrade or application merge.
1. Turn the main switch off.
2. Insert the original SD card in SD Card Slot 2. The application program is copied
back into this card.
3. Insert the SD card (having stored the application program) to SD Card Slot 3.
The application program is copied back from this SD card.
4. Turn the main switch on.
5. Start the SP mode.
6. Select SP5-873-002 “Undo Exec.”
7. Follow the messages shown on the operation panel.
8. Turn the main switch off.
9. Remove the SD card from SD Card Slot 2
10. Remove the SD card from SD Card Slot 3 and insert it in SD Card Slot 2.

ƒ This step assumes that the application programs in the SD card are used by
the machine.

B229 5-152 SM
 Using SP Modes

1. Turn the main switch on.

2. Check that the application programs run normally.

5.5.10 SMC PRINT (SP 5990)

SP 5990 outputs machine status lists.
1. Select SP 5990.
2. Select a menu:
ƒ 001 All (Data List), 002 SP (Mode Data List), 003 User Program, 004 Logging
Data, 005 Diagnostic Report, 006 Non-Default, 007 NIB Summary, 021 Copier
User Program, 022 Scanner SP, 023 Scanner User Program,

ƒ The output given by the menu "Big Font" is suitable for faxing.
3. Press the "Execute" key.
ƒ MFP machine: The machine status list is output.
4. To return to the SP mode, press the key.

5.5.11 ADF APS SENSOR OUTPUT DISPLAY (SP 6901)

- Sensor Positions -
Large to Small

Service
Tables
W1 1 0 0 1
W2 0 0 1 1

- Reading Data -
Paper Size
W1 W2 L1 L2
NA EU/AA
1 1 1 1 11" x 17" A3
0 1 1 1 - B4
0 0 1 1 81/2" x 14" 81/2" x 13"
0 0 1 0 81/2" x 11" A4 SEF
1
1 1 0 0 11" x 8 /2" A4 LEF
0 1 0 0 - B5 LEF
0 0 0 0 81/2" X 51/2" A5 LEF

SM 5-153 B229
DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS
 Overview

6. DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS

6.1 OVERVIEW

6.1.1 COMPONENT LAYOUT

(Color)

Descriptions
1. Scanner H.P. Sensor 13. Engine Unit 25. Sub-scan sensor
Detailed
2. 3rd Mirror 14. Engine Entrance Sensor 26. Engine Exit Sensor
3. 2nd Mirror 15. One-sheet By-pass Tray 27. Ink Cartridge Black
4. Exposure Glass 16. By-pass Tray 28. Ink Cartridge Cyan
5. Original Width Sensors 17. Registration Roller 29. Ink Cartridge Magenta
6. Exposure Lamp 18. First Registration Sensor 30. Ink Cartridge Yellow
7. 1st Mirror 19. By-pass Paper Feed Roller 31. Junction Gate Sensor
8. Original Length Sensors 20. Paper Size Switch 32. Junction Gate
9. Lens Block 21. Vertical Transport Roller 33. Paper Exit Roller
10. CCD 22. Paper Feed Roller 34. Paper Exit Sensor
11. SBU 23. Sub-scan Encoder
12. Scanner Motor 24. Charge Roller

SM 6-1 B229
Overview

6.1.2 PAPER PATH

(Color)

1. Original Tray 7. Tray 3: : Optional Two-tray Paper Tray Unit

2. Original Exit Tray 8. Duplex Inverter
3. One-sheet By-pass Tray 9. To the Duplex Unit
4. By-pass Tray 10. Straight Exit Tray
5. Duplex Feed 11. Standard Tray
6. Tray 2: Optional One-tray Paper Tray
Unit/Two-tray Paper Tray Unit

This model can use the optional duplex unit and paper tray unit.

B229 6-2 SM
 Overview

6.1.3 DRIVE LAYOUT

1. Scanner Motor 6. Relay Clutch

2. Exit Motor 7. By-pass Clutch
3. Sub Scan Motor 8. Registration Clutch
4. Feed Motor 9. Main Scan Motor
5. Feed Clutch

Descriptions
Detailed

SM 6-3 B229
Board Structure

6.2 BOARD STRUCTURE

6.2.1 BLOCK DIAGRAM

B229 6-4 SM
 Board Structure

1. BCU (Base Engine Control Unit)

The main board controls the following functions:
ƒ Engine sequence
ƒ Timing control for peripherals
ƒ Image processing, video control
ƒ Drive control for the sensors, motors, and clutches of the copier and scanner
ƒ High voltage supply board control
ƒ Serial interfaces with peripherals

2. Controller
The controller board controls the following functions.
ƒ Machine-to-host interface
ƒ Operation panel interface
ƒ Network interface
ƒ Interfacing and control of the optional IEEE1284, Bluetooth, IEEE1394, IEEE802.11b
(wireless LAN), HDD, and DRAM DIMM

3. CONIJ (Connect Ink Jet Module)

The CONIJ is connecting board between COM and BCU board and COM and IOB board.

4. COM
The COM board controls the print heads.

5. SBU (Sensor Board Unit)

The SBU deals with the analog signals from the CCD and converts them into digital
signals.

Descriptions
6. IPU (Image Processing Unit)
Detailed
The Image Processing Unit is a large-scale integrated circuit. This unit processes digital
signals.

7. IOB (In Out Board)

The IOB controls the motors, clutches , solenoids and high voltage power supply of the
engine unit.

8. PSU (Power Supply Unit)

The PSU supplies DC to the machine.

9. FCU (Fax Control Unit): Optional

The FCU controls the fax programs and communicates with the controller to share copier
resources.

SM 6-5 B229
Board Structure

10. HDD (Hard Disk Drives)

This board stores all the temporary files for job processing and all permanent files for the
document server.

B229 6-6 SM
 Copy Process Overview

6.3 COPY PROCESS OVERVIEW

6.3.1 EXPOSURE
A xenon lamp exposes the original. Light reflected from the original passes to the CCD,
where it is converted into an analog data signal. This data is converted to a digital signal,
processed and stored in the memory. At the time of printing, the data is retrieved and sent
to the COM board, which controls the carriage unit.

6.3.2 IMAGE CREATION

The ink jet engine processes an image to the paper with the carriage unit. The carriage unit
has 5 print heads (K1, K2, C, M, Y). It scans the paper from rear (home position) to front to
print an image to the paper. The carriage scans in two mode, one-way scanning and
two-way scanning. Two-way scanning saves time because the carriage can print an image
at returning way (front to rear).
The printing speed differs depending on the mode, resolution, paper type and so on.

6.3.3 NO FUSING

Descriptions
This machine uses the ink jet engine. As a result, it is not necessary to fuse the ink on the Detailed

paper. However, the machine may need time to exit the paper depending on the high ink
coverage on the paper or installation environment. This waiting time prevents the paper
from becoming curl.

SM 6-7 B229
Scanning

6.4 SCANNING

6.4.1 OVERVIEW

1. Scanner H.P. Sensor 6. CCD

2. Exposure Glass 7. Scanner Motor
3. Exposure Lamp 8. Original Length Sensor
4. 1st Scanner 9. Original Width Sensors
5. Lens Block

The original is illuminated by the exposure lamp (a xenon lamp). The image is reflected
onto a CCD (charge coupled device) on the lens block via the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd mirrors,
and through the lens on the lens block.
The 1st scanner consists of the exposure lamp, a reflector, and the 1st mirror.
A lamp stabilizer energizes the exposure lamp. The light reflected by the reflector is of
almost equal intensity, to reduce shadows on pasted originals.
An optics anti-condensation heater is available as an option. It can be installed on the left
side of the scanner. It turns on whenever the power cord is plugged in.

6.4.2 LAMP STABILIZER FUSE

Rating Manufacturer Type No.
Fuse 1.25A BEL FUSE INC MRT

B229 6-8 SM
 Scanning

6.4.3 SCANNER DRIVE

A stepper motor drives the 1st and 2nd scanners [A, B]. The 1st scanner and 2nd scanner
are driven by the scanner drive motor [C], drive gear through the timing belt [D], scanner
drive pulley [E], scanner drive shaft [F], and two scanner wires [G].

Book Mode
The BCU controls and operates the scanner drive motor. In full size mode, the 1st scanner
speed is 100 mm/s in B/W mode and 66.6 mm/s in color mode during scanning. The 2nd
scanner speed is half that of the 1st scanner.

Descriptions
In reduction or enlargement mode, the scanning speed depends on the magnification ratio.
Detailed
The returning speed is always the same, whether in full size or magnification mode. The
image length change in the sub scan direction is done by changing the scanner drive motor
speed, and in the main scan direction it is done by image processing on the BCU board.
Magnification in the sub-scan direction can be adjusted by changing the scanner drive
motor speed using SP4-008.

ADF Mode
The scanners are always kept at their home position (the scanner H.P. sensor [H] detects
the 1st scanner) to scan the original. The ADF motor feeds the original through the ADF. In
reduction/enlargement mode, the image length change in the sub-scan direction is done by
changing the ADF motor speed. Magnification in the main scan direction is done in the
BCU board, like for book mode.

SM 6-9 B229
Scanning

Magnification in the sub-scan direction can be adjusted by changing the ADF motor speed
using SP6-006-005.

6.4.4 ORIGINAL SIZE DETECTION IN PLATEN MODE

In the optics cavity for original size detection, there are four reflective sensors. The original
width sensors [A] detect the original width, and the original length sensors [B] detect the
original length. These are the APS (Auto Paper Select) sensors. Each APS sensor is a
reflective photo sensor.
While the main switch is on, these sensors are active and the original size data is always
sent to the CPU. However, the CPU checks the data only when the platen cover sensor [C]
is activated. This is when the platen is positioned about 15 cm above the exposure glass,
for example while it is being closed. The CPU can recognize the original size from the
combination of on/off signals from the APS sensors.
If the copy is made with the platen fully open, the CPU decides the original size from the
sensor outputs when the Start key is pressed.

B229 6-10 SM
 Scanning

[A]: NA, [B]: EU/ASIA

Original Size Length Sensors Width Sensors SP4-301

A4/A3 version LT/DLT version L2 L1 W2 W1 display
A3 11" x 17" 1 1 1 1 00001111
B4 — 1 1 1 0 00001110
8.5" x 13" 8.5" x 14" 1 1 0 0 00001100
A4-SEF 8.5" x 11" 0 1 0 0 00000100
A4-LEF 11" x 8.5" 0 0 1 1 00000011
B5-LEF — 0 0 1 0 00000010
A5-LEF 8.5" x 5.5" 0 0 0 0 00000000

ƒ 0: High (no paper), 1: Low (paper present)

The above table shows the outputs of the sensors for each original size. This original size
detection method eliminates the necessity for a pre-scan and increases the machine's
productivity.
For other combinations, “Cannot Detect Original Size” will be indicated on the operation
panel display (if SP4-303 is kept at the default setting).
However, if the by-pass feeder is used, note that the machine assumes that the copy paper
is short-edge first. For example, if A4 paper is placed long-edge first on the by-pass tray,
the machine assumes it is A3 paper and scans the full A3 area for the first copy of each
page of the original, disregarding the original size sensors. However, for each page, the
data signal to the laser diode is stopped to match the copy paper length detected by the

Descriptions
registration sensor. This means that copy time for the first page may be slower (because of
the longer time required for scanning), but it will be normal for the rest of the job. Detailed

Original size detection using the ADF is described in the manual for the ADF.

SM 6-11 B229
Image Processing

6.5 IMAGE PROCESSING

6.5.1 SBU (SENSOR BOARD UNIT)

SBU
The VPU (Video Processor Unit) does the following functions:
Black level correction
White level correction
Gradation calibration
ADS control (Background Density)
Creating the SBU test pattern

Operation Summary
The signals from the 3-line CCD, one line for each color (R, G, B) and 2 analog signals per
line (ODD, EVEN), are sampled by the ASIC and converted to digital signals in the 10-bit
A/D converter. This is the first phase of processing the data scanned from the original.

Storing Operation Settings

The controller stores the SBU settings. These values must be restored after the lens block
is replaced:

SP4008 001 Sub Scan Mag Sub Scan Magnification Adjustment

SP4010 001 Sub Scan Reg Sub Scan Registration Adjustment
SP4011 001 Main Scan Reg Main Scan Registration Adjustment

Also, before lens block replacement, enter the SP mode and note the settings of
SP4800-001 to 003 (ARDF density adjustments for R, G, B). After lens block replacement,
do some copy samples with the ARDF, then check the copies. If the copies have
background, change SP4800-001 to 003 to their previous settings, or adjust until the
background is acceptable. These SP codes are also used to adjust the ARDF scanning
density, if the scanning densities of the ARDF and the platen mode are not the same.

SBU Test Mode

There are two SP codes to create a test pattern which can be used as a diagnostic tool to
troubleshoot problems in the SBU:
SP4907-001 SBU Pattern - Test Pattern
SP4907-002 SBU Pattern - Select Fixed Pattern

B229 6-12 SM
 Image Processing

To print the pattern:

• Select the pattern to print.
• Touch "Copy Window" then press the Start key twice.

6.5.2 IPU (IMAGE PROCESSING UNIT)

The IPU does the following:
ƒ Controls the scanner
ƒ Processes the image signals from the SBU and sends them over the PCI bus to the
controller memory
ƒ Receives the image processing signals sent over the PCI bus from the controller
memory, processes them, then outputs them to the BATTI.
ƒ Controls the relay of power and signals

Image processing, ADS correction, and line width correction are done on the BCU board
for all the digital data sent from the SBU. Finally, the processed data is sent to the printer as
digital signals (2 bits/pixel).

Descriptions
Detailed

SM 6-13 B229
Carriage Unit

6.6 CARRIAGE UNIT

6.6.1 OVERVIEW

(Color Photo)

1. Carriage Unit
2. Print Head Tank
3. Air Release Valve
4. Print Head
5. Second Registration Sensor

B229 6-14 SM
 Carriage Unit

6.6.2 PRINT HEAD

[A]: 32.3 mm (1.27")

The wider print head increases the width of the band printed with one pass. This lets the
machine print faster.

Print Head Specifications

Item Remark
Number of Print
5 (Y, M, C, K1, K2)
Heads
384 x 4 colors
Number of Nozzles
192 nozzles x 2 lines/head
Array Cross-Hatch (150 dpi x 2 lines)

Descriptions
Voltage Element Piezoelectric Detailed

Two Black Print Heads

This machine has two black print heads on the carriage unit. As a result, it can copy/print at
a faster speed in B/W mode than a one-print head machine and can make a 600dpi print in
one print pass.

SM 6-15 B229
Carriage Unit

Line A of K1
Line A of K2
Line B of K1
Line B of K2

The following drawing shows the pixel pattern in 600dpi B/W solid printing mode.

If the gap between 1-3 and 2-4 is different, an image problem may occur. The carriage
prints an image in the forward direction [A] (rear to front) and in the reverse direction [B]
(front to rear). Also if the gap between 1-3 and 1*-3*, 2-4 and 2*-4* is different, an image
gap between forward and reverse may occur.

This can be adjusted with SP3-002. For details, refer to the "Initial Setting" in the section
"Installation Procedure".

B229 6-16 SM
 Carriage Unit

6.6.3 PRINT HEAD TANK

1. Ink Supply Port

2. Ink Reservoir
3. Air Release Valve
4. Tank Full Lever
5. Plastic Bellows

This copier employs a dual-tank system. Each print cartridge (YMCK) is connected to a
print head tank with a plastic tube. The first "tank" of the dual-tank system is the cartridge
that supplies the ink through a tube to the print head tank unit, and the second "tank" is the

Descriptions
ink reservoir inside the print head tank unit.
Both the high volume Print cartridges and the carriage components are extremely Detailed

lightweight.
A print head tank has four main parts as shown above:
ƒ Ink supply port: Ink enters here from the ink cartridge mounted under the operation
panel.
ƒ Ink reservoir: This is where ink collects before it is fed to the print head below.
ƒ Plastic Bellows: A spring forces out the flexible, thin plastic film on the left side of
the ink tank.
ƒ Tank Full Lever: When the ink tank is mounted in the copier, this lever pushes the
bellows down to increase pressure in the ink reservoir.
ƒ Air release valve: Vents periodically to keep the ink inside the ink tank unit under
the prescribed pressure.

SM 6-17 B229
Carriage Unit

On the B229 there are four independent units.

ƒ Each print head tank [A] has an independent print head [B] with a nozzle array [C].
ƒ Each print head tank holds 6ml of ink.

6.6.4 INK EJECTION DEVICE

Each print head uses a piezo-electric element (PZT) [A]. This will force the ink from the
ink reservoirs out of the ink nozzles and onto the paper.
This is done with pressure. At the prescribed time, an electric charge is given to the PZT.
This makes the PZT expand. The expansion of the PZT [B] puts pressure on the ink [C]
below. This makes the ink move in both directions. The ink on the right is forced out the
ejection port [D].
This device is unique. You cannot see this device on other copier on the market that use
small heaters to form bubbles to eject ink from the ports.

B229 6-18 SM
 Carriage Unit

6.6.5 INK NEAR END

[A]

Each print head has a tank full lever [A]. This lever presses against a spring loaded
bellows in the center of the print head tank. The rear side of each tank is constructed of
flexible plastic:
ƒ As ink enters the tank, the pressure of the ink pushes against the side of the tank and
moves the lever away from the side of the print head tank.
ƒ As ink is consumed during printing, the vacuum created by the ink leaving the tank
pulls the lever toward the side of the print head tank.

Descriptions
The tank full sensor [B], mounted above the left frame, checks the front and rear
positioning of the tank full lever every time the carriage passes below. Detailed

When the tank full sensor detects the lever against the side of the tank, the copier sends a
prescribed amount of ink to the tank from the Print cartridge.
The sensor signals the ‘ink near-end’ if the tank full lever does not return to the full position
(away from the side of the tank) within the prescribed time after the copier requests another
fill from the Print cartridge.
After the near-end alert, the copier will continue to print (B/W mode: approximately 300 to
500 sheets, Color mode: approximately 50 sheets) with the ink that remains in the partially
filled tank until the copier issues the ink end alert. ( "Ink Out" in this section)

SM 6-19 B229
Carriage Unit

6.6.6 INK OUT

(Color Photo)

Two sensor pins [A] monitor air in the print head tank. These pins detect changes in the
voltage differential on the surface of the ink inside the print head tank.
When these terminals detect air in the tank:
ƒ The air release solenoid [B] energizes and opens the air release valve [C] so air can
escape from the ink reservoir.
ƒ This allows more ink to enter the tank.
ƒ This is a continuous operation. The sensor pin readings signal the ink-out condition
when:
ƒ The ink near-end alert has been issued.
ƒ The amount of air detected in the tank indicates that no ink remains in the tank.
Also, as a backup measure, the firmware counts up for the amount of ink consumed after
every near end occurrence. When this count reaches the value prescribed for the toner
cartridge, this will also signal an ink-out condition.

B229 6-20 SM
 Carriage Unit

6.6.7 PAPER REGISTRATION AND SIZE DETECTION SENSOR

1. Second Registration Sensor

2. Transport Belt
3. Paper (Leading Edge)
The second registration sensor is attached to the front side of the carriage. The carriage
moves from rear to front during printing.
The second registration sensor performs two important functions for printing control:
ƒ Detects the leading edge and trailing edge of every sheet
ƒ Detects the width of the paper when the carriage and sensor pass in main scan

Descriptions
direction over the side edges of the paper as it feeds.
Detailed

ƒ This is not automatic paper size detection. The paper size must be set with the
paper size switch on the paper tray.
ƒ The copier will signal an alert if the detected size does not match the size
selected with the paper size switch on the paper tray.

For more, see "Leading Edge and Page Width Detection" and "Trailing Edge Detection".

SM 6-21 B229
Ink Supply Unit

6.7 INK SUPPLY UNIT

6.7.1 OVERVIEW

(Color Photo)

1. Ink cartridges x 4 (with Viscous Ink: Y, M, C, K)

2. Supply Pump Unit
3. Supply Tube

B229 6-22 SM
 Ink Supply Unit

6.7.2 PRINT CARTRIDGES

There is a separate Print cartridge for each color (Y, M, C, K). Each Print cartridge is
vacuum packed [A].
Color Amount Life
Black 194.44cc (210 g) 9K
Cyan 90.00cc (94.5 g) 3K
Magenta 59.90cc (62.9 g) 3K
Yellow 53.81cc (56.5 g) 3K

All the colors (Y, M, C, K) of Viscous ink are pigment inks.

ƒ Require only standard PPC to get quality printouts (special print media are not
required).

Descriptions
ƒ Do not let smears occur because they dry more quickly (there is less chance of
Detailed
smearing wet ink).
ƒ Do not let fades occur in bright light. This makes their colors highly durable.

SM 6-23 B229
Ink Supply Unit

6.7.3 PRINT CARTRIDGE SET SENSOR

(Color Photo)
Four micro switches detect the Print cartridges. These are connected in series above the
cartridge set detection plate [A].
Each tank has a micro switch. The machine cannot specifically detect if a Print cartridge is
not set correctly. The open switch signals these:
ƒ A cartridge is not in the machine
ƒ A cartridge is not installed correctly
To solve this problem, you must open the front door of the copier. At this time you can
check these:
ƒ A cartridge is not in the machine
ƒ A cartridge is not installed correctly

B229 6-24 SM
 Ink Supply Unit

6.7.4 INK SUPPLY PUMP

(Color Photos)
The ink supply pump is divided into three compartments:
ƒ [A]: K compartment (for Black 1 and 2 Print cartridges)
ƒ [B]: C compartment (for Cyan Print cartridge)
ƒ [C]: M/Y compartment (for Magenta, Yellow Print cartridges)
Each compartment contains:
ƒ 1 ink supply motor [D]
ƒ 1 or 2 pumps [E] (one pump for each Print cartridge)
ƒ 1 or 2 cams [F] (one cam for each Print cartridge)
ƒ 1 One-way clutch (not shown)
When a print head tank needs ink:
ƒ The copier switches on the ink supply motor. The motor and its worm gear get
rotated forward or backward (depending on which type of ink is required). (Only one
pump can operate at a time.)

Descriptions
ƒ A one-way clutch engages and drives the shaft to operate the cam that repeatedly
strikes a pump arm to siphon ink from the cartridge. Detailed

ƒ The ink supply motor operates long enough to pump the prescribed amount of ink to
the tank. Then it switches off.

SM 6-25 B229
Maintenance Unit

6.8 MAINTENANCE UNIT

6.8.1 OVERVIEW

(Color Photos)
1. Flushing Gate
2. Maintenance Unit

6.8.2 MAINTENANCE UNIT

(Color Photo)

The maintenance unit does these two important functions:

ƒ Keeps the surface of the print heads moist at the time they are not in use.
ƒ Cleans the print heads with suction at the time you do cleaning with the copier driver.
(The print heads are also cleaned automatically at prescribed intervals).

B229 6-26 SM
 Maintenance Unit

The caps [A] cover the print heads above. This occurs when the carriage stays at the home
position on the right side of the copier.
The first cap [B] is the only cap that can siphon excess ink from a print head. The ink gets
siphoned from the head with a simple, pressure tube-pump mechanism.
You must do these to the maintenance unit in order to position the print head to do the
siphon procedure:
ƒ Lower the maintenance unit
ƒ Move the carriage to the left. This sets the print head for cleaning (for more, see next
page).
The maintenance motor [C] rotates forward. Then it lowers two cams to let them press
against the bottom to lower the unit. Then it reverses at the prescribed time.
When the motor reverses, it disengages a one-way clutch attached to the main shaft. Then
it drives the second shaft to rotate the cam of the tube-pump mechanism.
At the prescribed time, the motor runs forward again until a feeler on the main shaft gets to
the gap of the maintenance HP sensor [D]. Then it switches the motor off.
Another cam attached to the main shaft raises and lowers the wiper [E]. The wiper cleans
the surface of the print head above as the carriage moves left and then right.

Maintenance Unit Cleaning Cycle

The operator can start the cleaning operation from the copier driver or the operation panel.
ƒ You can set the print head for cleaning (or clean them all) if you start the clean job
with UP mode or SP mode.
ƒ All the print heads get cleaned if the job starts from the operation panel.

Descriptions
Detailed

Cleaning starts with the carrier and print heads [A] capped and resting on top of the
maintenance unit [B].

SM 6-27 B229
Maintenance Unit

When the cleaning cycle starts, the maintenance unit [C] is lowered by the rotation of the
main shaft. Then the cams rotate away from the bottom of the unit.
At the same time, the carriage [D] moves to the front side.

The carriage moves the first print head (in this example, "K1" the black print head) above
the first vent [E] of the maintenance unit.

ƒ Only the first vent can siphon ink.

Another cam on the main shaft presses the maintenance unit up so the print head (K)
covers the first vent.
At this time the maintenance motor reverses. The one-way clutch disengages the main
shaft and engages the second shaft. This operates the tube-pump. The suction from the
pump below sucks ink [F] from the surface of the print head.

B229 6-28 SM
 Maintenance Unit

The maintenance [G] unit lowers.

Another cam raises the wiper [H]. At the same time the carriage moves the print heads to
the front side far enough so the vacuumed print head can make contact with the wiper. The
wiper cleans the ink [I] from the print head.

Descriptions
Then the carriage [J] moves rear to the home position. Then the maintenance unit caps the
Detailed
print heads [K].
A cam on the main shaft below vibrates the small scraper [L]. This removes the
ink bolus from the wall of the trap. Then it goes to the ink collection tank.

ƒ This cycle repeats for each print head when you start a clean job from the
operation panel.
ƒ If cleaning is done from the copier driver, the operator has the option of
selecting one print head, more than one, or all print heads for cleaning.
For more, see Troubleshooting.
ƒ This cleaning cycle is also done automatically for all print heads if the copier
stays idle for the time intervals shown in the table below.

SM 6-29 B229
Maintenance Unit

Total Time
Idle Time
Required for Cleaning
> 10 Hours < 3 Days 24 s
> 3 Days < 7 Days 24 to 160 s
> 7 Days < 1 Month 160 s
> 1 Month < 3 Months 360 s
> 3 Months 360 s
The B229 has 5 print heads.

6.8.3 INK COLLECTION TANK

The wiper [A] sweeps the residual ink of the each printer head. As a result, the ink
collection tank [B] collects the used ink from the maintenance unit above and the flushing
gate. The used ink gets collected at the ink collection port [C].
The capacity of the ink collection tank is 1232 ml. The copier should be able to use the ink
collection tank for about 150K pages of normal use. The tank has an ink collection tank full
sensor [D]. The sensor detects when the ink collection tank gets full (hardware detection).
In addition to that sensor, the copier calculates the total amount of flushed ink and judges
when ink collection tank gets to the near-full or full condition (software detection).

B229 6-30 SM
 Maintenance Unit

6.8.4 INK COLLECTION TANK FULL DETECTION

(Color Photo)
There are two different methods to detect ink collection tank full condition;
i) Detected by the ink collection tank full sensor [A] (hardware detection).
ii) Detected by accumulating amount of flushed ink (software detection).
The ink collection tank full sensor [A] is a “smart” reflective photo sensor. The photo sensor
measures the changes in the density of the ink materials in the tank. This lets you know
when the tank is full.
A “tank is near-full” prompt shows the copier needs maintenance when this sensor detects
the near-full condition. The default setting of near-full is set as 1212 ml. You can use the
copier to print these amounts of print jobs at the time the maintenance alert shows:

Descriptions
ƒ 300 to 500 prints (B/W mode)/ 50 prints (Color mode)
These are only rough estimates. Fewer pages get printed if many normal and full print head Detailed

cleanings are done after the maintenance alert.

A “tank is full” prompt shows when this sensor detects the ink full condition. You cannot use
the copier when the sensor detects ink full. At this time you must replace the ink collection
tank. After replace the ink collection tank, you must reset the counter at SP7804-005.

SM 6-31 B229
Maintenance Unit

6.8.5 FLUSHING UNIT

(Color Photo)

The machine flushes all the nozzles with some amount of ink to keep the nozzles clear and
in good working condition. when the one of some conditions is met. The flushing gate [A]
and the flushing collection unit (below the gate) are located at the right side of the engine
unit.

Before Printing Job

The machine flushes all the nozzles (384 nozzles/head) with following amount of ink
whenever the machine gets the printing job.

Temperature Ink Drops – M/Y/K Ink Drops - C

Less than 5°C 0.036 (µ l) 0.036 µ l
5°C to 10°C 0.036 (µ l) 0.036 µ l
10°C to 15°C 0.03 / 0.014* (µ l) 0.03 / 0.014* (µ l)
15°C to 20°C 0.0018 (µ l) 0.014 (µ l)
20°C to 25°C 0.0018 ((µ l) 0.014 (µ l)
25°C to 30°C 0.0018 (µ l) 0.014 (µ l)
30°C to 35°C 0.0018 (µ l) 0.014 (µ l)
35°C or more 0.0018 (µ l) 0.014 (µ l)

*For only 300 dpi B&W printing, the flushed amount of ink are different from other printing
mode.

B229 6-32 SM
 Maintenance Unit

During Printing
The machine flushes all the nozzles (384 nozzles/head) with following amount of ink and at
following interval during the printing job.

Ink Drops
Temperature Interval
K C/M/Y
Less than 5°C 0.0022 (µ l) 0.0022 (µ l) Every 5 seconds
5°C to 10°C 0.0022 (µ l) 0.0022 (µ l) Every 5 seconds
10°C to 15°C 0.0036 (µ l) 0.0029 (µ l) Every 5 seconds
15°C to 20°C 0.0029 (µ l) 0.0018 (µ l) Every 20 seconds
20°C to 25°C 0.0022 (µ l) 0.0007 (µ l) Every 20 seconds
25°C to 30°C 0.0022 (µ l) 0.0007 (µ l) Every 20 seconds
30°C to 35°C 0.0022 (µ l) 0.0007 (µ l) Every 20 seconds
35°C or more 0.0022 (µ l) 0.0007 (µ l) Every 20 seconds

After No Operation
The machine flushes all the nozzles with 0.036 µ l of ink when the machine has been left
without any operation for over 10 hours and less than 7 days.

For Maintenance Operation

The machine flushes all the nozzles with 0.06 µ l of ink after wiping the print heads when
the machine gets the "Initial Ink Filling", "Air Releasing and Ink Filling", "Head Cleaning"
and "Refreshing".

Descriptions
ƒ The sum of the flushing collection unit should never fill to capacity for the Detailed
service life of the copier. You do not have to clean or replace the sump.

SM 6-33 B229
Carriage Drive

6.9 CARRIAGE DRIVE

6.9.1 OVERVIEW

(Color Photo)
1. Main Scan Motor
2. Timing Belt
3. Guide Rod
4. Main Scan Encoder (Translucent Film)

6.9.2 CARRIAGE DRIVE

A main scan motor [A] drives the carriage unit via a timing belt [B] connected to the
carriage.

B229 6-34 SM
 Carriage Drive

The main scan encoder strip [C], mounted in left side of the timing belt is threaded through
the main scan encoder sensor mounted on the carriage. This sensor detects the position of
the carriage at the time the carriage moves from rear to front during printing.
The home position of the carriage unit is on the rear side of the copier.

6.9.3 ENVELOPE SELECTOR

(Color Photo)

Move the envelope selector [A] to adjust:

ƒ The gap between the print heads
ƒ The surface of the paper on the transport belt.

Descriptions
Pushing the lever downward moves the print heads slightly away from the surfaces of thick
paper and envelopes. This stops chaffing on the printing surface and smearing the ink. Detailed

A cam operates when the envelope selector is set for printing on thick paper or envelopes.
This moves the guide rod to create a gap about 1.8 mm wider than the gap for normal
printing.

This lever should be down and set for printing on normal paper.

SM 6-35 B229
Paper Feed, Transport, Output

6.10 PAPER FEED, TRANSPORT, OUTPUT

6.10.1 OVERVIEW

(Color Photos)

* The lower picture shows the state after the transport belt unit has been removed.
1. Transport Belt Unit
2. Sub-scan Encoder
3. Sub-scan Encoder Sensor
4. Sub-scan Motor
5. High Voltage Power Supply
6. Charge Roller

B229 6-36 SM
 Paper Feed, Transport, Output

6.10.2 LEADING EDGE AND PAGE WIDTH DETECTION

There is no paper size sensor in the standard paper tray. The paper size must be selected
with the paper size switch of the paper tray.
The second registration sensor [A], mounted on the carriage unit, moves from rear to front
with the carriage during printing.
The second registration sensor detects the leading edge [B] and width [C] of the sheet for
feed timing.

Descriptions
Detailed

SM 6-37 B229
Paper Feed, Transport, Output

6.10.3 TRAILING EDGE DETECTION

The engine entrance sensor [A], which is mounted at the left frame of the engine unit,
detects the trailing edge of the sheet for feed timing.

6.10.4 PAPER TRANSPORT DRIVE

B229 6-38 SM
 Paper Feed, Transport, Output

The sub scan motor [A] drives the timing belt [B] that rotates the paper transport belt [C].
The edge of the rotary encoder [D], attached to the shaft of the transport roller, passes
through the gap of the encoder sensor [E] as the encoder wheel rotates. The sub scan
sensor reads the coded markings on the rim of the encoder and sends this information to
the CPU. The CPU uses these readings to control the on/off timing of the transport belt:

ƒ When servicing the machine, work carefully to prevent scratching, breaking,

or bending the rotary encoder.

6.10.5 PAPER PATH

Here is a summary of the operation that sends paper through the copier:
1. The feed clutch energizes and engages the feed roller and the rotation of the vertical
motor drives the feed roller.
2. Paper feed roller feeds 1 sheet from the top of the stack in the paper tray. A friction pad
at the lip of the paper tray does not let the paper get double-fed.
3. The charge roller charges the transport belt. The charge on the transport belt lets the
paper stay on the transport belt.
4. The sheet feeds onto the transport belt. Then the feeler of the engine entrance sensor
rises and switches the engine entrance sensor on.
5. At the same time the second registration sensor goes on, the carriage moves to the 40
mm rear from the center position. This lets the second registration sensor detect the
leading edge of the paper.
6. The second registration sensor detects the right edge of the sheet when the carriage

Descriptions
and second registration sensor move toward the HP sensor on the right.
7. The detection of the right edge by the second registration sensor is used to determine Detailed

the width of the paper in the paper path.

ƒ The second registration sensor reads the right edge of the sheet only
once. This occurs at the time the first page gets fed for the print job. The
second registration sensor does not detect the right edge for any sheet
after the first sheet.
8. An area equal to the width of each print head gets printed when the carriage goes
across the sheet from right to left.
9. This occurs when the last line gets printed. The transport roller rotates only long
enough to feed the length of paper that stays. Then the paper exits the copier.
10. The print job count goes up by 1 after the paper exits.

SM 6-39 B229
Paper Feed, Transport, Output

6.10.6 TRANSPORT BELT

(Color Photo)

This copier uses the BT (Belt Transfer) system to transport paper through the paper path.
A high voltage power supply [A] charges the charge roller below the transport belt [B].
The charge roller applies a bias charge to the transport belt. This static charge makes the
paper adhere to the transport belt so the paper does not shift during transport and printing.
A temperature/humidity sensor, mounted near the GJ engine unit, monitors the
temperature and humidity near the charge roller. The temperature/humidity values read
from the sensor are used to adjust the width of the bias (bias pitch) applied to the transport
belt. This operation, called belt charge control, operates within the following ranges of
temperature and humidity:

Temperature: 0C to 35C (32F to 95F) Adjusted in 2.5C (4.5F) steps

Humidity: 0% to 100% Adjusted in 10% steps

The machine uses the feedback of the temperature/humidity sensor to reduce the width of
the charge applied to the transport belt below the print heads. This reduces the size of the
electrical field to the smallest size that can still provide the optimum charge to keep the
paper on the belt at the leading edge, center, and trailing edge of the paper without
interfering with the operation of the print nozzles.
Belt charge control is done for every paper feed station (Tray 1, Tray 2, and bypass) and for
every paper type (normal paper, envelopes, thick paper, and OHP).
The sharp curvature of the paper path separates the paper from the transport belt at the
time paper gets fed out the paper exit.

B229 6-40 SM
 Paper Feed, Transport, Output

6.10.7 CHARGE LEAK DETECTION

(Color Photo)
(* This picture shows the state after the transport belt unit has been removed.)
The copier checks for and detects charge leaks at these times:
ƒ Immediately after the copier is turned on.
ƒ When it gets a leak detection signal from the high voltage power pack at the time of
copier operation.
These happen when a charge leak gets detected:
ƒ The voltage supply from the power pack [A] gets interrupted immediately
ƒ The copier stops the current print job in progress.
ƒ The carriage goes back to its home position.
ƒ The print heads gets capped. The copier cannot operate.

Descriptions
Do these to let the copier go back to normal operation:
ƒ You must remove the cause of the leak. Detailed

ƒ Turning the copier off and on.

SM 6-41 B229
Paper Feed

6.11 PAPER FEED

6.11.1 OVERVIEW

There are a standard paper tray (250 sheets), by-pass tray (100 sheets) and one-sheet
by-pass tray (one sheet only).
The standard paper tray and by-pass tray use a friction pad system. However, for the
one-sheet by-pass tray, a sheet of paper is fed directly by the transport belt.
To prevent paper from getting caught inside the machine when the tray is pulled out, the
paper feed roller and shaft do not separate from the tray when the tray is pulled out.
The first registration sensor and engine entrance sensor are used for paper jam. The relay
sensor is used for paper jam detection when paper is fed up from the optional paper feed
unit.
The components of the paper feed station are as follows.

1. One-sheet By-pass Tray Set Sensor 7. Relay Roller

2. Registration Roller 8. Friction Pad
3. First Registration Sensor 9. Paper End Sensor
4. By-pass Paper Feed Roller 10. Paper Feed Roller
5. By-pass Friction Pad 11. Transport Belt
6. Relay Sensor 12. Engine Entrance Sensor

B229 6-42 SM
 Paper Feed

6.11.2 PAPER FEED DRIVE MECHANISM

Standard Tray

The feed motor [A] drives the pick-up and feed mechanism of both the first and second
paper trays. The paper feed clutches [B] transfer drive from this motor to the paper feed
rollers [C].
When the paper feed clutch turns on, the feed roller starts to feed the paper. The paper
feed clutch stays on until shortly after the first registration sensor has been activated.

By-pass Tray

Descriptions
Detailed

When the by-pass tray set sensor [A] detects paper, the machine goes into ready condition.
The feed motor [B] drives the feed roller [D] via the by-pass clutch [C]. The by-pass tray set
sensor also detects the paper end when the filler [E] interrupts the sensor.

SM 6-43 B229
Paper Feed

One-sheet By-pass Tray

When the one-sheet by-pass tray [A] is opened, the machine shows "Make sure the
machine has stopped. Then open the 1 sheet by-pass Output tray". The machine can
detect a sheet of paper on the one-sheet by-pass tray via the set detection filler [B]. If the
one-sheet by-pass output tray is opened with a sheet of paper set on the tray, the
one-sheet by-pass shutter solenoid [C] is activated and the one-sheet by-pass shutter [D]
is opened. As a result, a sheet of paper can be inserted into the machine. a sheet of paper
is directly caught by transport belt of the engine unit after the sheet of paper has reached to
the engine unit.

6.11.3 PAPER FEED AND SEPARATION MECHANISM

The paper feed roller [A] drives the top sheet of paper from the paper tray or by-pass tray to
the copier. The friction pad [B] allows only one sheet to feed at a time. The friction pad
applies pressure to the feed roller with a spring [C].
The friction pad pressure cannot be adjusted.

B229 6-44 SM
 Paper Feed

6.11.4 PAPER LIFT MECHANISM

When the paper tray [A] is closed, projection [B] on the copier frame pushes the slider [C]
(on the bottom part of the paper tray) off the bottom plate hook [D]. After the release slider
comes off, the compressed springs lift the bottom plate.

6.11.5 PAPER END DETECTION

Descriptions
Detailed

If there is any paper in the paper tray, the paper stack lifts the feeler; the paper end sensor
[A] is deactivated.
When the paper tray runs out of paper, the paper end feeler drops into the cutout [B] in the
tray bottom plate and the paper end sensor is activated.
When the paper tray is drawn out with no paper in the tray, the shape of the paper end
feeler causes it to lift up.

SM 6-45 B229
Paper Feed

6.11.6 PAPER SIZE DETECTION

Paper Tray
Size SW1 SW2 SW3
A3, 11" x 17" OFF OFF OFF
A4 LEF ON ON OFF
A4 SEF,81/2" x 11" ON OFF OFF
A5 LEF, 81/2" x 14" OFF ON ON
81/2" x 13" ON OFF ON
11" x 81/2" OFF ON OFF
* (Asterisk) OFF OFF ON

ƒ ON: Not pushed, OFF: Pushed

There are three paper size micro switches [A] on the front right plate of the paper tray unit.
The switches are actuated by a paper size actuator [B] behind the paper size indicator
plate, which is on the front right of the tray.
Each paper size has its own actuator, with a unique combination of notches. To determine
which size has been installed, the CPU reads which micro switches the actuator has
switched off.
The CPU disables paper feed from a tray if the paper size cannot be detected. If the paper
size actuator is broken, or if there is no tray installed, the Add Paper indicator will light.
When the paper size actuator is at the “*” mark, the paper tray can be set up to
accommodate one of a wider range of paper sizes by using User Tools. If the paper size for
this position is changed without changing the User Tool setting, a paper jam will result.

B229 6-46 SM
 Paper Feed

By-pass Tray

The by-pass feed paper size switch [A] monitors the paper width. The side fence is
connected to the terminal plate gear. When the side fences move to match the paper width,
the circular terminal plate rotates over the wiring patterns on the rectangular part of the
paper size switch. The patterns for each paper width in the paper size switch are unique.
North America
CN No. (BICU) 11" x 17" 81/2" x 14" 51/2" x 81/2"
CN127-1 ON/OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
CN127-2 OFF OFF OFF ON OFF
CN127-3 (GND) OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
CN127-4 OFF ON OFF OFF ON
CN127-5 ON ON OFF OFF OFF

Descriptions
Europe/Asia Detailed

CN No. (BICU) A3 A4 SEF 8" x 13" A5 SEF

CN127-1 ON/OFF OFF OFF OFF
CN127-2 OFF OFF OFF ON/OFF
CN127-3 (GND) OFF OFF OFF OFF
CN127-4 OFF ON ON OFF
CN127-5 ON ON OFF OFF

SM 6-47 B229
Paper Feed

6.11.7 SIDE FENCES

If the tray is full of paper and it is pushed in strongly, the fences may deform or bend. This
may cause the paper to skew or the side-to-side registration to be incorrect. To correct this,
each side fence has a stopper [A] attached to it. Each side fence can be secured with a
screw, for customers who do not want to change the paper size.

6.11.8 PAPER REGISTRATION

The drive from the feed motor [A] is transmitted to the registration roller through the
registration clutch gear [B].
The first registration sensor [C] is used for correcting paper skew and for detecting paper
misfeeds.
The cleaning Mylar [D] contacts the registration roller. It removes paper dust from the
registration roller so that this dust will not transfer into the development unit through the
drum-cleaning unit.

B229 6-48 SM
 Paper Feed

The amount of paper buckle at the registration roller to correct skew can be adjusted with
SP1-003.
If jams frequently occur after registration, SP1-903 can be used to activate the relay clutch
so that the relay roller assists the registration roller in feeding the paper along. When
feeding from the by-pass tray, the by-pass feed clutch is activated, turning the by-pass feed
roller. This feature may be needed when feeding thick paper, and cannot be used for the
first paper feed tray.

Descriptions
Detailed

SM 6-49 B229
Paper Exit

6.12 PAPER EXIT

6.12.1 OVERVIEW

(Color)
1. Exit Transport Roller1 to 3 5. Exit Transport Roller 4
2. Engine Exit Sensor 6. Paper Exit Sensor
3. Junction Gate Sensor 7. Paper Exit Roller
4. Junction Gate

B229 6-50 SM
 Paper Exit

Sensors and Switch

ƒ [A]: Paper Exit Sensor

ƒ [B]: One-sheet By-pass Output Tray Switch
ƒ [C]: Engine Exit Sensor
ƒ [D]: Junction Gate Sensor
The paper exit sensor [A] detects the paper jam.
The engine exit sensor [C] activates the exit motor and the junction gate solenoid if the
duplex mode is selected. It also detects the paper jam.
The junction gate sensor [D] activates the duplex transport motor and detects the paper

Descriptions
jam. Detailed
The One-sheet By-pass Output Tray Switch [B] detects if the output tray is open or not. If
this tray is not open, the one-sheet by-pass shutter cannot open.

SM 6-51 B229
Paper Exit

6.12.2 PAPER EXIT PATH

Standard Output Tray

The paper exit motor starts to drive the exit transport rollers [B] and paper exit roller [C]
after the engine exit sensor [A] has detected a sheet of paper. The paper is fed through the
exit transport rollers and paper exit roller. Then the paper exit motor stops rotating after the
paper exit sensor [D] has detected no paper.

External Output Tray

The junction gate [A] for the one-sheet by-pass tray opens after a customer has decided
paper type. A sheet of paper is fed through exit transport rollers and to the external output
tray [B]. The junction gate sensor [C] still detects a sheet of paper until the paper fed to the
external output tray is removed. While this sensor detects a sheet of paper, the shutter of
the one-sheet by-pass tray is closed. So, a next job using the one-sheet by-pass printing
cannot be allowed.

B229 6-52 SM
 Paper Exit

Duplex
The junction gate [A] for the duplex unit opens when a sheet of paper is transported for 150
mm after the engine exit sensor has detected no paper.
The paper is fed through the exit transport rollers and to the duplex transport rollers.
The duplex transport motor starts to drive the duplex transport rollers when a sheet of
paper is transported for 150 mm after the junction gate sensor [B] has detected the paper.
The junction gate [A] is closed when a sheet of paper is transported for 50 mm after the
junction gate sensor [B] has detected no paper.

6.12.3 PAPER STOP FUNCTION

Descriptions
Detailed

(Color)

The exiting paper stops temporarily [A] to get enough time to be dried when much ink is
used for a sheet of paper. The average consumed ink amount (ml/cm2) for each page is
calculated at completing the printing. And also the copier calculates the average consumed
ink amount in the 50 mm area from the trailing edge of paper. This is countermeasure in
case that much amount of ink is used only in the trailing edge area. The copier uses the
higher value among both as the coefficient for the paper stop function. The paper stop time
is defined depending on the combination of the coefficient and table. For details, refer to
the end of this column. The next sheet of paper stays at the registration roller [B].

SM 6-53 B229
Paper Exit

Table for the Paper Stop Time

(Color)
The table has three areas [A], [B], [C].
ƒ The paper stop time is "10 seconds" when the average consumed ink is more than
70 % and the environment is in [A].
ƒ The paper stop time is "10 seconds" when the average consumed ink is more than
50 % and the environment is in [A].
ƒ The paper stop time is "7 seconds" when the average consumed ink is more than
20 % and the environment is in [A].
ƒ The paper stop time is "7 seconds" when the average consumed ink is more than
50 % and the environment is in [B].
ƒ The paper stop time is "2 seconds" when the average consumed ink is more than
20 % and the environment is in [B].
ƒ The paper stop time is "2 seconds" when the average consumed ink is more than
50 % and the environment is in [B].
ƒ The paper stop time is "0 second" when the average consumed ink is more than
20 % and the environment is in [C].

B229 6-54 SM
 Paper Exit

6.12.4 ENERGY SAVER MODES OF BASIC MACHINES

This section illustrates the energy saver modes of the basic machine (the machine without
the optional controller).

Overview

The machine has two energy-saver modes: the Low Power Mode and the Night/Off Mode.
The table lists the status of several components.

Operation panel Engine Exhaust fan

Operating Mode* On On On
Sleep Mode Off Off** Off

Descriptions
Detailed
*The "Operating Mode” refers to all the modes (and status) other than the Sleep Mode.
Actual power consumption (during the Operating Mode) depends on job status and
environmental conditions.
**The SRAM is alive and backs up the engine controller.

Timers
The engine controller references the Auto Off Timer to start the Sleep Mode. The user can
set these timers (Use Tools > System Settings > Timer Settings). The Auto Off Timer starts
at the same time (t0) when the machine ends all jobs or when the user ends all manual
operations.

SM 6-55 B229
Paper Exit

Recovery
Any of the following operations brings the machine back to the Operating Mode:
ƒ The power switch is pressed.
ƒ Originals are set on the document feeder.
ƒ The platen cover (or document feeder) is opened.

B229 6-56 SM
SPECIFICATIONS
 Rev. 11/2006 General Specifications

7. SPECIFICATIONS

7.1 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS

Configuration: Desktop
Copy Process: On-Demand Ink Printing Technology
Originals: Sheet/Book/Object
Original Size: Maximum A3/11" x 17"
Copy Paper Size: Maximum: A3/11" x 17"
Minimum: A5 LEF/81/2" x 51/2" (Paper tray) A6 SEF/51/2" x
81/2" (Bypass)
⇒ Custom sizes in the bypass tray: Width: 90 – 305 mm (3.55"
– 12.2") Length: 148 – 600 mm (5.83" – 23.62") Print Mode
148 – 457.2 mm (5.83" – 18.0”) Copy Mode

ƒ Physically, the by-pass tray can handle the

following size (but this size is not recognized by
the application software):
ƒ Width: 305 mm
ƒ Length: 1,260 mm
Paper Tray: 60 – 105 g/m2, 16 – 28 lb.
By-pass Tray: 60 – 162 g/m2, 16 – 43 lb.
Copy Paper Weight:
One-sheet By-pass Tray: 60 – 220g/㎡ 16lb – 55lb
Duplex: 60 – 105 g/m2, 16 – 28 lb.
Reproduction Ratios: 4 enlargement and 5 reduction
A4/A3 Version LT/DLT Version
400% 400%
200% 155%
Enlargement
141% 129%
Specifications

122% 121%
Full Size 100% 100%
93% 93%
82% 78%
Reduction 71% 65%
50% 50%
25% 25%

SM 7-1 B229
General Specifications

25% 25%
Zoom: 25% to 400%, in 1% steps
North America/ Taiwan: 110V – 120 V, 60 Hz, 12 A
Power Source:
Europe, Asia, China: 220 – 240 V, 50/60 Hz, 7 A

Power Consumption:
North America/ Taiwan Main Unit only Complete System*
Europe/ Asia/ China Main Unit only Complete System*
Maximum Less than 110 W Less than 250 W
Operating About 70 W About 135 W
Stand-by About 38 W About 46 W
Sleep mode 3.1 W or less 7.0 W or less
Maximum Less than 110 W Less than 250 W
Operating About 70 W About 135 W
Stand-by About 40 W About 48 W
Sleep mode 3.7 W or less 7.7 W or less
*Complete System: The complete system consists of the Main unit, A(R)DF, Fax Unit, USB
Host, IEE1284, Function Upgrade Option, Copy Data Security Unit, Duplex unit and Paper
Tray unit.

Noise Emission (Sound Power Level)

Standby (Mainframe/Full system): Not above 40 dB(A)
Operating (Mainframe only): Not above 62 dB(A)
Operating (Full System): Not above 66 dB(A)
The above measurements were made in accordance with ISO 7779. Measurements were
taken from the normal position of the operator.

550 x 728 x 485 mm (22" x 29.1" x 19.4")

Measurement Conditions:
Dimensions (W x D x H):
With bypass feed table closed
Without the A(R)DF
50 kg or less (110 lb.) (Excluding A(R)DF, platen cover,
Weight:
toner, and developer)
Copying Speed in Multi-copy Mode 5 – 24 cpm (B/W mode, A4/LT LEF)
(copies/minute): 3 – 6 cpm (FC mode, A4/LT LEF)

B229 7-2 SM
 General Specifications

From Power-on; Less than 20 seconds (at 20°C [68°F])

Warm-up Time:
From Stand-by; Less than 5.5 seconds (at 20°C [68°F])
Not more than 9.7 seconds (B/W mode)
Not more than 24 seconds (Color mode)
Measurement Conditions
From the ready state, with the polygonal mirror motor
First Copy Time: operating.
A4/LT copying
Not APS mode
100%size
Paper feed from the upper tray
Copy Number Input: Numeric keypad, 1 to 99 (increment, decrement)
Manual Image Density: 5 steps
Default is 60 seconds. Can be set from 60 to 999
Automatic Reset:
seconds with user tools.
Default is 1 minute. Can be set from 1 to 240 minutes
Automatic Shut-off:
with user tools.
Paper Tray: 250 sheets
Optional Paper Tray Unit: 500 sheets x 1, or 500
sheets x 2
Copy Paper Capacity: By-pass Tray: 100 sheets (sheets up to 432 mm [17"]),
40 postcards, 10 envelopes
One-sheet By-pass Tray: 1 sheet
Copy weight: 80 g/m2 (20 lb.)
Ink Replenishment: Cartridge replacement (xxx g/cartridge)
Platen cover
Auto document feeder
Auto-reverse document feeder
Specifications

Paper tray unit (1 tray)

Paper tray unit (2 trays)
Optional Equipment:
Tray heater
Optics anti-condensation heater
Fax unit
Handset
IEEE 1394

SM 7-3 B229
General Specifications

IEEE 1284
Wireless LAN
Bluetooth
PostScript 3
USB Host
PictBridge
Data Overwrite Security Unit
Copy Data Security Unit
JVM SD Card
NRS Cumin-M
BK: 9 k copies (A4 LEF, 6%)
Ink Yield: Color: 3 k copies (A4 LEF, 5%)
*: 1 to 2 copying, normal text mode
Copy-Tray Capacity 250 sheets
Memory: 384 MB (On-board-128 MB + RAM DIMM- 256 MB)

B229 7-4 SM
 Supported Paper Sizes

7.2 SUPPORTED PAPER SIZES

7.2.1 ORIGINAL SIZE DETECTION

North America, Europe, Asia, Taiwan
North America Europe/Asia/Taiwan
Paper Size (W x L)
Platen ADF Platen ADF
A3 SEF 297 x 420 mm O O X X
B4 SEF 257 x 364 mm O O X X
A4 SEF 210 x 297 mm A4/LT A4/LT X X
A4 LEF 297 x 210 mm A4/LT A4/LT X X
B5 SEF 182 x 257 mm O O O X
B5 LEF 257 x 182 mm O O X X
A5 SEF 148 x 210 mm O O O X
A5 LEF 210 x 148 mm O O Sa X
B6 SEF 128 x 182 mm O O O O
B6 LEF 182 x 128 mm O O O O
8K SEF 267 x 390 mm O O O O
16K SEF 195 x 267 mm O O O O
16K LEF 267 x 195 mm O O O O
DLT SEF 11.0" x 17.0" X X O O
SEF 11.0" x 15.0" O O O O
LG SEF 8.5" x 14.0" X X O O
LT SEF 8.5" x 11.0" X X A4/LT A4/LT
LT LEF 11.0" x 8.5" X X A4/LT A4/LT
HLT SEF 5.5" x 8.5" O X O O
HLT LEF 8.5" x 5.5" S X O O
Specifications

F/GL (F4) SEF 8.0" x 13.0" F O F F

Foolscap SEF 8.5" x 13.0" F O F F
Folio SEF 8.25" x 13.0" F O F F
USB4 SEF 10.0" x 14.0" O O O O
Eng Quarto SEF 8.0" x 10.0" O O O O
Eng Quarto LEF 10.0" x 8.0" O O O O

SM 7-5 B229
Supported Paper Sizes

Symbols:
X: Detected
O: Not detected
F: Detected as F (8.5" x 13.0")
S: Detected as specified
A4/LT: Detected as A4 or LT as specified

ƒ When the settings of SP4-305-001 is "1: A4/LT," the settings of SP4-303 is

invalidated (A5 LEF is not detected).

7.2.2 PAPER FEED AND EXIT

Main Frame, Duplex, Optional Paper Tray
Main Frame Tray Optional
Paper Size (W x L) Duplex
NA EU/ASIA Paper Tray
A3 SEF 297 x 420 mm M X X X
A3 LEF 420 x 297 mm O O O O
B4 SEF 257 x 364 mm M M X M
B4 LEF 364 x 257 mm O O O O
A4 SEF 210 x 297 mm M X X X
A4 LEF 297 x 210 mm X X X X
B5 SEF 182 x 257 mm M M X M
B5 LEF 257 x 182 mm M M X M
A5 SEF 148 x 210 mm O O X M
A5 LEF 210 x 148 mm M X X O
B6 SEF 128 x 182 mm O O O O
B6 LEF 182 x 128 mm O O O O
A6 SEF 105 x 148 mm O O O O
A6 LEF 148 x 105 mm O O O O
DLT SEF 11" x 17" X M X X
DLT LEF 17" x 11" O O O O
1
LG SEF 8 /2" x 14" X M X X
LG LEF 14" x 81/2" O O O O
Gov. LG SEF 81/4" x 14" M M X M
1
Gov. LG LEF 14" x 8 /4" O O O O

B229 7-6 SM
 Rev. 11/2006 Supported Paper Sizes

Main Frame Tray Optional

Paper Size (W x L) Duplex
NA EU/ASIA Paper Tray
LT SEF 81/2" x 11" X M X X
LT LEF 11" x 81/2" X X X X
HLT SEF 51/2" x 81/2"" O O O M
1 1
HLT LEF 8 /2" x 5 /2" M M O O
1 1
Executive SEF 7 /2" x 10 /2" M M X O
Executive LEF 101/2" x 71/4" O O O O
F SEF 8" x 13" M M X M
F LEF 13" x 8" O O O O
1
Foolscap SEF 8 /2" x 13" X X X M
Foolscap LEF 13" x 81/2" O O O O
Folio SEF 81/4" x 13" M M X M
1
Folio LEF 13" x 8 /4" O O O O
8K SEF 267 x 390 mm M M X M
8K LEF 390 x 267 mm O O O O
16K SEF 195 x 267 mm M M X M
16K LEF 267 x 195 mm M M X M
C5 Env SEF 162 x 229 mm O O O O
C6 Env SEF 114 x 162 mm O O O O
DL Env SEF 110 x 220 mm O O O O
1 1
Com 10 SEF 4 /8" x 9 /2" O O O O
7 1
Monarch SEF 3 /8" x 7 /2" O O O O
Custom M M M M

Symbols:
X: Detected (Main frame tray)/Processed (Duplex)
Specifications

O: Not detected (Main frame tray)/Not processed (Duplex)

M: Selected manually
K: Specified from the key pad

Custom
ƒ W: 182 to 297 mm, L: 148 to 432 mm for Main Frame
ƒ W: 148 to 297 mm, L: 182 to 432 mm for Optional Paper Tray
⇒ ƒ W: 90 to 305 mm, L: 148 to 600 mm for By-pass/ One-sheet By-pass Tray (Print)
ƒ W: 90 to 305 mm, L: 148 to 457.2 mm for By-pass/ One-sheet By-pass Tray (Copy)

SM 7-7 B229
Supported Paper Sizes

By-pass Tray, One-sheet By-pass Tray

By-pass One-sheet By-pass Tray
Paper Size (W x L)
NA EU/ASIA NA EU/ASIA
A3 SEF 297 x 420 mm M X M M
A3 LEF 420 x 297 mm O O O O
B4 SEF 257 x 364 mm M M M M
B4 LEF 364 x 257 mm O O O O
A4 SEF 210 x 297 mm M X M M
A4 LEF 297 x 210 mm M M M M
B5 SEF 182 x 257 mm M M M M
B5 LEF 257 x 182 mm M M M M
A5 SEF 148 x 210 mm M X M M
A5 LEF 210 x 148 mm M M M M
B6 SEF 128 x 182 mm M M M M
B6 LEF 182 x 128 mm O O O O
A6 SEF 105 x 148 mm K K K K
A6 LEF 148 x 105 mm O O O O
DLT SEF 11" x 17" X M M M
DLT LEF 17" x 11" O O O O
1
LG SEF 8 /2" x 14" M M M M
1
LG LEF 14" x 8 /2" O O O O
Gov. LG SEF 81/4" x 14" M M M M
Gov. LG LEF 14" x 81/4" O O O O
1
LT SEF 8 /2" x 11" X M M M
1
LT LEF 11" x 8 /2" M M M M
HLT SEF 51/2" x 81/2" X M M M
HLT LEF 81/2" x 51/2" O O O O
1 1
Executive SEF 7 /2" x 10 /2" M M M M
1 1
Executive LEF 10 /2" x 7 /4" M M M M
F SEF 8" x 13" M X M M
F LEF 13" x 8" O O O O
1
Foolscap SEF 8 /2" x 13" M M M M
1
Foolscap LEF 13" x 8 /2" O O O O
Folio SEF 81/4" x 13" M M M M

B229 7-8 SM
 Rev. 11/2006 Supported Paper Sizes

By-pass One-sheet By-pass Tray

Paper Size (W x L)
NA EU/ASIA NA EU/ASIA
1
Folio LEF 13" x 8 /4" O O O O
8K SEF 267 x 390 mm M M M M
8K LEF 390 x 267 mm O O O O
16K SEF 195 x 267 mm M M M M
16K LEF 267 x 195 mm M M M M
C5 Env SEF 162 x 229 mm M M M M
C6 Env SEF 114 x 162 mm M M M M
DL Env SEF 110 x 220 mm M M M M
1 1
Com 10 SEF 4 /8" x 9 /2" M M M M
Monarch SEF 37/8" x 71/2" M M M M
Custom K K K K

Symbols:
X: Detected (Opt. paper tray and By-pass)/Processed (One-bin tray)
O: Not detected (Opt. paper tray and By-pass)/Not processed (One-bin tray)
M: Selected manually
K: Specified from the key pad

Custom
ƒ W: 182 to 297 mm, L: 148 to 432 mm for Main Frame
ƒ W: 148 to 297 mm, L: 182 to 432 mm for Optional Paper Tray
⇒ ƒ W: 90 to 305 mm, L: 148 to 600 mm for By-pass/ One-sheet By-pass Tray (Print)
ƒ W: 90 to 305 mm, L: 148 to 457.2 mm for By-pass/ One-sheet By-pass Tray (Copy)
Specifications

SM 7-9 B229
Machine Configuration

7.3 MACHINE CONFIGURATION

Unit/Component Machine Code Diagram

Copier (1-tray non-duplex model) B229 [B]
Platen cover (optional) B406 [E]
ADF (optional) B813 [A]
ARDF (optional) B814 [A]
Copier Paper tray unit–1 tray (optional) B385 [F]
Paper tray unit–2 trays (optional) B384 [D]
Duplex Unit B806 [C]
Tray heater (optional) — —
Optics anti-condensation heater (optional) — —
Fax controller (optional) B267
Fax
Handset (optional) B433

B229 7-10 SM
 Machine Configuration

Unit/Component Machine Code Diagram

PostScript 3 (optional) B850 5
Function Upgrade Option B271 -
Printer/
Data Overwrite Security Unit B735 5
scanner
Copy Data Security Unit B770 8
JVM SD Card G874 6
IEEE 1394 B581 1
IEEE 1284 B679 2
Wireless LAN G813 3
Network
Bluetooth B826 4
USB Host B825 7
Remote Communication Gate B818 -
Specifications

SM 7-11 B229
Optional Equipment

7.4 OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT

7.4.1 ARDF
Standard sizes
Single-sided mode: A3 to A5, 11" x 17" to 51/2" x 81/2"
Double-sided mode: A3 to A5, 11" x 17" to 51/2" x 81/2"
Non-standard sizes (Single-sided mode only)
Original Size:
Max. width 297 mm
Min. width 105 mm
Max. length 1260 mm
Min. length 128 mm
Single-sided mode: 40 – 128 g/m2, 10 – 34 lb.
Original Weight:
Double-sided mode: 64 – 105 g/m2, 17 – 28 lb.
Table Capacity: 50 sheets (80 g/m2, 70 kg)
Original Standard Position: Center
Separation: FRR
Original Transport: Roller transport
Original Feed Order: From the top original
Reproduction Range: 50 to 200% (Sub scan direction only)
Power Source: 24 and 5 VDC from the copier
Power Consumption: 50 W
Dimensions (W x D x H): 550 x 470 x 130 mm
Weight: 10 kg

7.4.2 ADF
Standard sizes (Single-sided mode only):
A3 to A5, 11" x 17" to 51/2" x 81/2"
Non-standard sizes (Single-sided mode only):
Original Size: Max. width 297 mm
Min. width 105 mm
Max. length 1,260 mm
Min. length 128 mm
Original Weight: 52 – 105 g/m2 (14 – 28 lb.)
Table Capacity: 30 sheets (80 g/m2, 22 lb.)

B229 7-12 SM
 Optional Equipment

Original Standard Position: Center

Separation: FRR
Original Transport: Roller transport
Original Feed Order: From the top original
Reproduction Range: 50 – 200%
Power Source: 24 and 5 VDC (from the main frame)
Power Consumption: 25 W
Dimensions (W x D x H): 550 mm x 470 mm x 90 mm
Weight: Not above 7 kg

7.4.3 ONE-TRAY PAPER TRAY UNIT

A5 to A3
Paper Size
51/2" x 81/2" SEF to 11" x 17"
Paper Weight: 60 – 105 g/m2, 16 – 28 lb.
Tray Capacity: 500 sheets (80 g/m2, 20 lb. ) x 1 tray
Paper Feed System: Feed roller and friction pad
Paper Height Detection: 4 steps (100%, 70%, 30%, Near end)
24 VDC and 5VDC (from the copier/printer):
120 VAC: 120 V version, from the copier/printer when the
optional tray heater is installed
Power Source:
220 – 240 VAC:
230 V version, from the copier/printer when the optional tray
heater is installed
Max: 20 W (copying/printing), 23 W (optional tray heater on)
Power Consumption: Average: 13 W (Copying/printing), 15 W (Optional Tray
Heater On)
Weight: 12 kg (26.4 lb.)
Specifications

Size (W x D x H): 550 mm x 520 mm x 134 mm

SM 7-13 B229
Optional Equipment

7.4.4 TWO-TRAY PAPER TRAY UNIT

A5 to A3
Paper Size
51/2" x 81/2" SEF to 11" x 17"
Paper Weight: 60 – 105 g/m2, 16 – 28 lb.
Tray Capacity: 500 sheets (80 g/m2, 20 lb.) x 2 trays
Paper Feed System: Feed roller and friction pad
Paper Height Detection: 4 steps (100%, 70%, 30%, Near end)
24 VDC, 5 VDC (from the copier/printer)
120 VAC: 120 V version, from the copier/printer when the
Power Source: optional tray heater is installed
220 – 240 VAC: 230 V version, from the copier/printer when
the optional tray heater is installed
Max: 30 W (Copying/printing), 23 W (Optional Tray Heater
On)
Power Consumption:
Average: 17 W (Copying/printing), 15 W (Optional Tray
Heater On)
Weight: 25 kg (55 lb.)
Size (W x D x H): 550 mm x 520 mm x 271 mm

7.4.5 DUPLEX UNIT

Maximum: A3/11" x 17"
Copy Paper Size:
Minimum: A5/51/2" x 81/2"
Copy Paper Weight: 64 – 105 g/m2 (20 – 28 lb.)
Power Consumption: 30 W
Weight: 11 kg (24.2 lb.)
Size (W x D x H): 550 mm x 620 mm x 112 mm

B229 7-14 SM
 B267
FAX OPTION
 FAX OPTION B267
TABLE OF CONTENTS

1. INSTALLATION .............................................................................. 1
1.1 FAX UNIT(B267) ........................................................................................... 1
1.1.1 ACCESSORY CHECK ......................................................................... 1
1.1.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ............................................................ 2
1.2.3 INITIAL SETTING ................................................................................ 2
1.2 FAX UNIT OPTIONS ..................................................................................... 8
1.2.1 HANDSET (B443)................................................................................. 8

2. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ........................................... 9

2.1 FCU ............................................................................................................... 9

3. TROUBLESHOOTING .................................................................. 10
3.1 FAX UNIT(B267) ......................................................................................... 10
3.2 I-FAX TROUBLESHOOTING ..................................................................... 30
3.3 IP-FAX TROUBLESHOOTING ................................................................... 30
3.3.1 IP-FAX TRANSMISSION.................................................................... 30
3..3.2 IP_FAX RECEPTION ......................................................................... 36

4. SERVICE TABLES ....................................................................... 40

4.1 BEFOREHAND............................................................................................ 40
4.2 SERVICE TABLES ...................................................................................... 41
4.2.1 SP1-XXX (BIT SWITCHES ) .............................................................. 41
4.2.2 I SP2-XXX (RAM DATA ) ................................................................... 42
4.2.3 SP3-XXX (TEL LINE SETTINGS) ...................................................... 43
4.2.4 SP4-XXX (ROM VERSIONS) ............................................................ 45
4.2.5 SP5-XXX (INITIALIZING) .................................................................. 46
4.2.6 SP6-XXX (REPORTS) ....................................................................... 46
4.2.7 SP7-XXX (TEST MODES) ................................................................. 49
4.2.8 SP9-XXX (DESIGN SWITCH MODE) ............................................... 51
4.3 BIT SWITCHES ........................................................................................... 52
4.3.1 SYSTEM SWITCHES ........................................................................ 52
4.3.2 I-FAX SWITCHES ............................................................................ 64
4.3.3 PRINTER SWITCHES ....................................................................... 71
4.3.4 COMMUNICATION SWITCHES ........................................................ 77
4.3.5 G3 SWITCHES .................................................................................. 84
4.3.6 IP FAX SWITCHES .......................................................................... 93

SM i B267
 4.4 NCU PARAMETERS ................................................................................. 101
4.5 DEDICATED TRANSMISSION PARAMETERS ........................................ 117
4.5.1 PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE ..................................................... 117
4.5.1 PARAMETERS ................................................................................ 117
4.6 SERVICE RAM ADDRESSES................................................................... 125

5. DETAIED DESCRIPTIONS.......................................................... 135

5.1 OVERVIEW ............................................................................................... 135
5.2 BOARDS ................................................................................................... 136
5.2.1 FCU ................................................................................................. 136
5.2.2 MBU ................................................................................................ 137
5.3 VIDEO DATA PATH .................................................................................. 138
5.3.1 TRANSMISSION ............................................................................. 138
5.3.2 RECEPTION ................................................................................... 140
5.4 FAX COMMUNICATION FEATURES ....................................................... 141
5.4.1 INTERNET MAIL COMMUNICATION ............................................. 141
5.5 IP-FAX ...................................................................................................... 150
5.5.1 WHAT IS IP-FAX? ........................................................................... 150

6. SPECIFICATIONS ....................................................................... 151

6.1 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS................................................................... 151
6.2 IFAX SPECIFICATIONS............................................................................ 153
6.3 IP-FAX SPECIFICATIONS ........................................................................ 155
6.4 FAX UNIT CONFIGURATION ................................................................... 156

B267 ii SM
1. INSTALLATION

1.1 FAX UNIT (B267)

Fax Option
B267
1.1.1 ACCESSORY CHECK

No. Description Q'ty

1 Fax Unit 1

2 Fax Operation Panel 1

3 Ferrite Core EU: 1, NA: 2

4 Module Cable (NA only) 1

5 Tel Cap (NA only) 1

6 Handset Bracket (NA only) 1

7 Serial Number Decal 1

8 G3 Decal 1

9 FCC Decal (NA only) 1

SM 1 B267
1.1.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

ƒ Before installing the fax option:

1. Print out all data in the printer buffer (if the printer option is installed).
2. Turn the main switch off and disconnect the power cord and the network cable.

1. Unplug the DF cable [A] (if installed).

2. Remove the rear cover [B] ( x 4).

3. Remove the interface cover [C] ( x 2).

B267 2 SM
 Fax Option
B267
4. Switch the jumper switch [D] on the MBU [E] to “ON” position.

ƒ The jumper switch works as the battery switch.

5. Remove the slot cover [F] ( x 3).

6. Install the Fax unit [G] ( x 3).

ƒ Before installing the Fax unit, push the MBU and confirm that the MBU is
properly connected to the FCU.
7. Install the Tel cap [H] in the “TEL” jack if the optional handset or external
telephone is not installed.

SM 3 B267
8. Attach the ferrite core [I] to the telephone cable [J]. The length [K] must be about
10 cm (4").

ƒ Attach the ferrite core to the handset cable also if the handset is installed to the
copier. In case of attaching to the handset cable, the length [K] must be about 4
cm (1.6").

9. Reassemble the interface cover ( x 2) and rear cover ( x 4).

10. Connect the telephone cable [L] to the "LINE" jack as shown.

ƒ Connect the handset cable [M] to the "TEL" jack as shown if the handset is
installed.

B267 4 SM
 Fax Option
B267
11. Remove the dummy cover [N] from the operation panel.

12. Install the fax operation panel [O] on the operation panel as shown.

ƒ Slide the fax panel to the right pressing down the right edge of the fax operation
panel. Make sure that the connection between the fax operation panel and the
operation panel of the copier is firmly stable.

SM 5 B267
13. Attach the super G3 decal [P] to the front door as shown.

14. Attach the FCC decal to the right side [Q] of the rear cover if you do this
procedure on the NA model. Go to the next step if you do not have the NA model.
15. Attach the serial number label to right side [Q] of the rear cover.
16. Plug in the machine and turn on the main switch.

ƒ The copier must be connected to a properly-grounded socket outlet.

17. Make sure that the clock (date and time) is set.
18. Enter the SP mode and program the serial number into the fax unit with SP 3102.
The serial number can be found on the serial number label (attached to the
machine in step 15).
19. When you press the Fax key for the first time after installation, the error "SRAM
problem occurred / SRAM was formatted" will show on the LCD for initializing the
program of the fax unit. Turn the main power switch off/on to clear the error
display.

ƒ If another error occurs after initialization, this can be a functional problem.

B267 6 SM
1.1.3 INITIAL SETTING
Set the country code with "BIT SW" in the "Fax SP".
Set the service station number with "Machine Set" in the "Fax SP".

Fax Option
B267

SM 7 B267
1.2 FAX UNIT OPTIONS

1.2.1 HANDSET (B433)

ƒ The optional handset is available for the U.S. version only.

1. Make two holes [A] in the scanner left cover.

2. Attach the bracket [B] enclosed with the fax unit ( x 2) as shown.
3. Remove the label [C] from the handset cradle [D]. Attach the cradle [D] to the
bracket [B] ( x 2), and then replace the label [C].
4. Install the handset [E] on the cradle [D].
5. Attach the ferrite core to the cable. (see step 8 in the fax unit installation
procedure)
6. Connect the cable [F] to the “TEL” jack at the rear of the machine.

B267 8 SM
2. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT

2.1 FCU

Fax Option
B267
1. When you replace the FCU board, remove the MBU board from the old FCU board
and install it on the new FCU board.
2. Set the correct date and time with the User Tools: User Tools> System Settings>
Timer Setting> Set Date/Time

ƒ Do not turn off the battery switch (SW1).

ƒ Do SP6101 to print the system parameters, and check the settings.

SM 9 B267
3. TROUBLESHOOTING

3.1 ERROR CODES

If an error code occurs, retry the communication. If the same problem occurs, try to fix the
problem as suggested below. Note that some error codes appear only in the error code
display and on the service report.

Code Meaning Suggested Cause/Action

ƒ Check the line connection.

ƒ The machine at the other end may be
DIS/NSF not detected incompatible.
0-00 within 40 s of Start being ƒ Replace the NCU or FCU.
pressed ƒ Check for DIS/NSF with an oscilloscope.
ƒ If the rx signal is weak, there may be a bad
line.

ƒ The other party is out of paper or has a

DCN received jammed printer.
0-01
unexpectedly ƒ The other party pressed Stop during
communication.

Incompatible modem at the

0-03 The other terminal is incompatible.
other end

ƒ Check the line connection.

ƒ Try changing the tx level and/or cable
equalizer settings.
ƒ Replace the FCU.
CFR or FTT not received ƒ The other terminal may be faulty; try sending
0-04
after modem training to another machine.
ƒ If the rx signal is weak or defective, there may
be a bad line.
Cross reference:
Tx level - NCU Parameter 01 (PSTN)

B267 10 SM
 Code Meaning Suggested Cause/Action

Cable equalizer - G3 Switch 07 (PSTN)

Dedicated Tx parameters in Service Program

FaxOption
Mode

B267
ƒ Check the line connection.
ƒ Try adjusting the tx level and/or cable
Modem training fails even equalizer.
0-05 G3 shifts down to 2400 ƒ Replace the FCU.
bps. ƒ Check for line problems.
Cross reference:
See error code 0-04.

ƒ Check the line connection.

ƒ Try adjusting the tx level and/or cable
equalizer settings.
ƒ Replace the NCU or FCU.
The other terminal did not
0-06 ƒ The other end may be defective or
reply to DCS
incompatible; try sending to another machine.
ƒ Check for line problems.
Cross reference:
See error code 0-04.

ƒ Check the line connection.

ƒ Replace the NCU or FCU.
ƒ The other end may have jammed or run out of
No post-message paper.
0-07 response from the other ƒ The other end user may have disconnected
end after a page was sent the call.
ƒ Check for a bad line.
ƒ The other end may be defective; try sending to
another machine.

The other end sent RTN or ƒ Check the line connection.

PIN after receiving a page, ƒ Replace the NCU or FCU.
0-08
because there were too ƒ The other end may have jammed, or run out of
many errors paper or memory space.

SM 11 B267
 Code Meaning Suggested Cause/Action

ƒ Try adjusting the tx level and/or cable

equalizer settings.
ƒ The other end may have a defective
modem/NCU/FCU; try sending to another
machine.
ƒ Check for line problems and noise.
Cross reference:
ƒ Tx level - NCU Parameter 01 (PSTN)
ƒ Cable equalizer - G3 Switch 07 (PSTN)
ƒ Dedicated Tx parameters in Service Program
Mode

ƒ Incompatible or defective remote terminal; try

sending to another machine.
ƒ Noisy line: resend.
Non-standard post
ƒ Try adjusting the tx level and/or cable
0-14 message response code
equalizer settings.
received
ƒ Replace the NCU or FCU.
Cross reference:
See error code 0-08.

The other terminal is not capable of accepting the

following functions, or the other terminal’s memory
The other terminal is not
is full.
0-15 capable of specific
ƒ Confidential rx
functions.
ƒ Transfer function
ƒ SEP/SUB/PWD/SID

ƒ Check the line connection.

ƒ Replace the NCU or FCU.
CFR or FTT not detected
ƒ Try adjusting the tx level and/or cable
after modem training in
0-16 equalizer settings.
confidential or transfer
ƒ The other end may have disconnected, or it
mode
may be defective; try calling another machine.
ƒ If the rx signal level is too low, there may be a

B267 12 SM
 Code Meaning Suggested Cause/Action

line problem.
Cross reference:

FaxOption
See error code 0-08.

B267
ƒ Check the line connection.
ƒ Replace the NCU or FCU.
ƒ Check for line problems.
Facsimile data not ƒ Try calling another fax machine.
0-20 received within 6 s of ƒ Try adjusting the reconstruction time for the
retraining first line and/or rx cable equalizer setting.
Cross reference:
Reconstruction time - G3 Switch 0A, bit 6
Rx cable equalizer - G3 Switch 07 (PSTN)

ƒ Check the connections between the FCU,

NCU, & line.
ƒ Check for line noise or other line problems.
EOL signal (end-of-line)
ƒ Replace the NCU or FCU.
from the other end not
0-21 ƒ The remote machine may be defective or may
received within 5 s of the
have disconnected.
previous EOL signal
Cross reference:
Maximum interval between EOLs and between
ECM frames - G3 Bit Switch 0A, bit 4

ƒ Check the line connection.

ƒ Replace the NCU or FCU.
The signal from the other ƒ Defective remote terminal.
end was interrupted for ƒ Check for line noise or other line problems.
0-22 more than the acceptable ƒ Try adjusting the acceptable modem carrier
modem carrier drop time drop time.
(default: 200 ms) Cross reference:
Acceptable modem carrier drop time - G3 Switch
0A, bits 0 and 1

Too many errors during ƒ Check the line connection.

0-23
reception ƒ Replace the NCU or FCU.

SM 13 B267
 Code Meaning Suggested Cause/Action

ƒ Defective remote terminal.

ƒ Check for line noise or other line problems.
ƒ Try asking the other end to adjust their tx level.
ƒ Try adjusting the rx cable equalizer setting
and/or rx error criteria.
Cross reference:
Rx cable equalizer - G3 Switch 07 (PSTN)
Rx error criteria - Communication Switch 02, bits 0
and 1

ƒ Check the line connection.

ƒ Try adjusting the tx level and/or cable
The other terminal did not
equalizer settings.
0-30 reply to NSS(A) in AI short
ƒ The other terminal may not be compatible.
protocol mode
Cross reference:
Dedicated tx parameters - Section 4

The other terminal sent a

ƒ Check the protocol dump list.
DCS, which contained
0-32 ƒ Ask the other party to contact the
functions that the receiving
manufacturer.
machine cannot handle.

The data reception (not ƒ Check the line connection.

0-33 ECM) is not completed ƒ The other terminal may have a defective
within 10 minutes. modem/NCU/FCU.

Polarity changed during ƒ Check the line connection.

0-52
communication Retry communication.

FCU does not detect the ƒ FCU firmware or board defective.

0-55
SG3. ƒ SG3 firmware or board defective.

The stored message data

0-56 exceeds the capacity of the ƒ SG3 firmware or board defective.
mailbox in the SG3.

0-70 The communication mode ƒ The other terminal did not have a compatible

B267 14 SM
 Code Meaning Suggested Cause/Action

specified in CM/JM was communication mode (e.g., the other terminal

not available was a V.34 data modem and not a fax

FaxOption
(V.8 calling and called modem.)

B267
terminal) ƒ A polling tx file was not ready at the other
terminal when polling rx was initiated from the
calling terminal.

ƒ The calling terminal could not detect ANSam

The calling terminal fell
due to noise, etc.
back to T.30 mode,
0-74 ƒ ANSam was too short to detect.
because it could not detect
ƒ Check the line connection and condition.
ANSam after sending CI.
ƒ Try making a call to another V.8/V.34 fax.

The called terminal fell

back to T.30 mode, ƒ The terminal could not detect ANSam.
0-75 because it could not detect ƒ Check the line connection and condition.
a CM in response to ƒ Try receiving a call from another V.8/V.34 fax.
ANSam (ANSam timeout).

The calling terminal fell

ƒ The called terminal could not detect a CM due
back to T.30 mode,
to noise, etc.
0-76 because it could not detect
ƒ Check the line connection and condition.
a JM in response to CM
ƒ Try making a call to another V.8/V.34 fax.
(CM timeout).

ƒ The calling terminal could not detect a JM due

The called terminal fell
to noise, etc.
back to T.30 mode,
ƒ A network that has narrow bandwidth cannot
0-77 because it could not detect
pass JM to the other end.
a CJ in response to JM
ƒ Check the line connection and condition.
(JM timeout).
ƒ Try receiving a call from another V.8/V.34 fax.

The called terminal ƒ Check for line noise or other line problems.
0-79 detected CI while waiting ƒ If this error occurs, the called terminal falls
for a V.21 signal. back to T.30 mode.

ƒ The guard timer expired while starting these

0-80 The line was disconnected

SM 15 B267
 Code Meaning Suggested Cause/Action

due to a timeout in V.34

phases. Serious noise, narrow bandwidth, or
phase 2 – line probing.
low signal level can cause these errors.
The line was disconnected If these errors happen at the transmitting terminal:
due to a timeout in V.34 ƒ Try making a call at a later time.
0-81
phase 3 – equalizer ƒ Try using V.17 or a slower modem using
training. dedicated tx parameters.
ƒ Try increasing the tx level.
The line was disconnected
ƒ Try adjusting the tx cable equalizer setting.
due to a timeout in the V.34
0-82 If these errors happen at the receiving terminal:
phase 4 – control channel
ƒ Try adjusting the rx cable equalizer setting.
start-up.
ƒ Try increasing the tx level.
The line was disconnected ƒ Try using V.17 or a slower modem if the same
due to a timeout in the V.34 error is frequent when receiving from multiple
0-83
control channel restart senders.
sequence.

The line was disconnected

ƒ The signal did not stop within 10 s.
due to abnormal signaling
0-84 ƒ Turn off the machine, then turn it back on.
in V.34 phase 4 – control
ƒ If the same error is frequent, replace the FCU.
channel start-up.

The line was disconnected

ƒ The signal did not stop within 10 s.
due to abnormal signaling
0-85 ƒ Turn off the machine, then turn it back on.
in V.34 control channel
ƒ If the same error is frequent, replace the FCU.
restart.

The line was disconnected

because the other terminal
ƒ The other terminal was incompatible.
requested a data rate
0-86 ƒ Ask the other party to contact the
using MPh that was not
manufacturer.
available in the currently
selected symbol rate.

The control channel started ƒ The receiving terminal restarted the control
0-87
after an unsuccessful channel because data reception in the primary

B267 16 SM
 Code Meaning Suggested Cause/Action

primary channel. channel was not successful.

ƒ This does not result in an error

FaxOption
communication.

B267
The line was disconnected
because PPR was
ƒ Try using a lower data rate at the start.
0-88 transmitted/received 9
ƒ Try adjusting the cable equalizer setting.
(default) times within the
same ECM frame.

Only one V.21 connection

2-11 ƒ Replace the FCU.
flag was received

2-12 Modem clock irregularity ƒ Replace the FCU.

ƒ Turn off the machine, then turn it back on.

2-13 Modem initialization error ƒ Update the modem ROM.
ƒ Replace the FCU.

JBIG compression or
2-23 ƒ Turn off the machine, then turn it back on.
reconstruction error

2-24 JBIG ASIC error ƒ Turn off the machine, then turn it back on.

JBIG data reconstruction

2-25
error (BIH error)

JBIG data reconstruction

2-26 ƒ JBIG data error
error (Float marker error)
ƒ Check the sender’s JBIG function.
JBIG data reconstruction ƒ Update the MBU ROM.
2-27
error (End marker error)

JBIG data reconstruction

2-28
error (Timeout)

JBIG trailing edge maker ƒ FCU defective

2-29
error ƒ Check the destination device.

2-50 The machine resets itself ƒ If this is frequent, update the ROM, or replace

SM 17 B267
 Code Meaning Suggested Cause/Action

for a fatal FCU system the FCU.

error

The machine resets itself

ƒ If this is frequent, update the ROM, or replace
2-51 because of a fatal
the FCU.
communication error

Snd msg() in the manual

task is an error because ƒ The user did the same operation many times,
2-53
the mailbox for the and this gave too much load to the machine.
operation task is full.

ƒ Check the line connector.

4-01 Line current was cut ƒ Check for line problems.
ƒ Replace the FCU or the NCU.

Communication failed
because of an ID Code
ƒ Get the ID Codes the same and/or the CSIs
mismatch (Closed
programmed correctly, then resend.
4-10 Network) or Tel. No./CSI
ƒ The machine at the other end may be
mismatch (Protection
defective.
against Wrong
Connections)

5-10 DCR timer expired ƒ Replace the FCU.

Storage impossible
5-20 because of a lack of ƒ Temporary memory shortage.
memory ƒ Test the SAF memory.

5-21 Memory overflow

Print data error when

ƒ Test the SAF memory.
5-23 printing a substitute rx or
ƒ Ask the other end to resend the message.
confidential rx message

ƒ Replace an SD card or HDD.

5-25 SAF file access error
ƒ Replace the FCU.

B267 18 SM
 Code Meaning Suggested Cause/Action

G3 ECM - T1 time out

6-00 during reception of

FaxOption
facsimile data

B267
ƒ Try adjusting the rx cable equalizer.
G3 ECM - no V.21 signal
6-01 ƒ Replace the FCU.
was received

G3 ECM - EOR was

6-02
received

ƒ Check the line connection.

G3 ECM - RTC not ƒ Check for a bad line or defective remote
6-04
detected terminal.
ƒ Replace the FCU.

ƒ Check the line connection.

ƒ Check for a bad line or defective remote
G3 ECM - facsimile data
terminal.
frame not received within
6-05 ƒ Replace the FCU.
18 s of CFR, but there was
ƒ Try adjusting the rx cable equalizer
no line fail
Cross reference:
ƒ Rx cable equalizer - G3 Switch 07 (PSTN)

G3 ECM - coding/decoding ƒ Defective FCU.

6-06
error ƒ The other terminal may be defective.

G3 ECM - PIP/PIN ƒ The other end pressed Stop during

6-08 received in reply to communication.
PPS.NULL ƒ The other terminal may be defective.

ƒ Check for a noisy line.

ƒ Adjust the tx levels of the communicating
6-09 G3 ECM - ERR received
machines.
ƒ See code 6-05.

G3 ECM - error frames still ƒ Check for line noise.

6-10 received at the other end ƒ Adjust the tx level (use NCU parameter 01 or
after all communication the dedicated tx parameter for that address).

SM 19 B267
 Code Meaning Suggested Cause/Action

attempts at 2400 bps ƒ Check the line connection.

ƒ Defective remote terminal.

V.21 flag detected during

ƒ The other terminal may be defective or
6-21 high speed modem
incompatible.
communication

The machine resets the ƒ Check for line noise.

sequence because of an ƒ If the same error occurs frequently, replace the
6-22
abnormal handshake in the FCU.
V.34 control channel ƒ Defective remote terminal.

V.21 signal not stopped

6-99 ƒ Replace the FCU.
within 6 s

ƒ Double registration of the SIP user name.

SIP user name registration
13-17 ƒ Capacity for user-name registration in the SIP
error
server is not sufficient.

ƒ Incorrect initial setting for the SIP server.

13-18 SIP server access error
ƒ Defective SIP server.

ƒ Error occurred during sending to the SMTP

server. Occurs for any error other than 14-01
14-00 SMTP Send Error
to 16. For example, the mail address of the
system administrator is not registered.

ƒ Failed to connect to the SMTP server (timeout)

because the server could not be found.
ƒ The PC is not ready to transfer files.
14-01 SMTP Connection Failed ƒ SMTP server not functioning correctly.
ƒ The DNS IP address is not registered.
ƒ Network not operating correctly.
ƒ Destination folder selection not correct.

ƒ SMTP server operating incorrectly, or the

No Service by SMTP
14-02 destination for direct SMTP sending is not
Service (421)
correct.

B267 20 SM
 Code Meaning Suggested Cause/Action

ƒ Contact the system administrator and check

that the SMTP server has the correct settings

FaxOption
and operates correctly.

B267
ƒ Contact the system administrator for direct
SMTP sending and check the sending
destination.

ƒ Failed to access the SMTP server because the

access is denied.
ƒ SMTP server operating incorrectly. Contact
the system administrator to determine if there
is a problem with the SMTP server and to
check that the SMTP server settings are
correct.
ƒ Folder send destination is incorrect. Contact
Access to SMTP Server
14-03 the system administrator to determine that the
Denied (450)
SMTP server settings and path to the server
are correct.
ƒ Device settings incorrect. Confirm that the
user name and password settings are correct.
ƒ Direct SMTP destination incorrect. Contact the
system administrator to determine if there is a
problem at the destination at that the settings
at the destination are correct.

Access to SMTP Server ƒ SMTP server operating incorrectly

14-04
Denied (550) ƒ Direct SMTP sending not operating correctly

ƒ Failed to access the SMTP server because the

HDD on the server is full.
ƒ Insufficient free space on the HDD of the
SMTP Server HDD Full
14-05 SMTP server. Contact the system
(452)
administrator and check the amount of space
remaining on the SMTP server HDD.
ƒ Insufficient free space on the HDD where the

SM 21 B267
 Code Meaning Suggested Cause/Action

destination folder is located. Contact the

system administrator and check the amount of
space remaining on the HDD where the target
folder is located.
ƒ Insufficient free space on the HDD at the
target destination for SMTP direct sending.
Contact the system administrator and check
the amount of space remaining on the target
HDD.

ƒ The designated user does not exist.

ƒ The designated user does not exist on the
User Not Found on SMTP
14-06 SMTP server.
Server (551)
ƒ The designated address is not for use with
direct SMTP sending.

ƒ Failed to access the SMTP server because the

transmission failed.
ƒ PC not operating correctly.
Data Send to SMTP Server
14-07 ƒ SMTP server operating incorrectly
Failed (4XX)
ƒ Network not operating correctly.
ƒ Destination folder setting incorrect.
ƒ Direct SMTP sending not operating correctly.

ƒ Failed to access the SMTP server because the

transmission failed.
Data Send to SMTP Server ƒ SMTP server operating incorrectly
14-08
Failed (5XX) ƒ Destination folder setting incorrect.
ƒ Direct SMTP sending not operating correctly.
ƒ Software application error.

ƒ POP-Before-SMTP or SMTP authorization

Authorization Failed for
14-09 failed.
Sending to SMTP Server
ƒ Incorrect setting for file transfer

14-10 Addresses Exceeded ƒ Number of broadcast addresses exceeded the

B267 22 SM
 Code Meaning Suggested Cause/Action

limit for the SMTP server.

ƒ The send buffer is full so the transmission

FaxOption
B267
could not be completed. Buffer is full due to
14-11 Buffer Full
using Scan-to-Email while the buffer is being
used send mail at the same time.

ƒ Transmission was cancelled because the

14-12 Data Size Too Large
detected size of the file was too large.

ƒ Processing is interrupted because the user

14-13 Send Cancelled
pressed Stop.

ƒ Update the software because of the defective

14-14 Security Locked File Error
software.

ƒ The transmitting a mail is interrupted via DCS

due to the incorrect data.
14-15 Mail Data Error
ƒ Update the software because of the defective
software.

ƒ When a mail is divided for the mail

transmission and the division number of a mail
Maximum Division Number are more than the specified number, the mail
14-16
Error transmission is interrupted.
ƒ Update the software because of the defective
software.

ƒ Update the software because of the defective

14-17 Incorrect Ticket
software.

ƒ The access to MCS file is denied due to the no

permission of access.
14-18 Access to MCS File Error
ƒ Update the software because of the defective
software.

Failed to create the MCS file because:

14-30 MCS File Creation Failed
ƒ The number of files created with other

SM 23 B267
 Code Meaning Suggested Cause/Action

applications on the Document Server has

exceeded the limit.
ƒ HDD is full or not operating correctly.
ƒ Software error.

UFS file could not be created:

ƒ Not enough space in UFS area to handle both
14-31 UFS File Creation Failed Scan-to-Email and IFAX transmission.
ƒ HDD full or not operating correctly.
ƒ Software error.

Cancelled the Mail Due to ƒ Error detected with NFAX and send was
14-32
Error Detected by NFAX cancelled due to a software error.

ƒ Neither the mail address of the machine nor

No Mail Address For the
14-33 the mail address of the network administrator
Machine
is registered.

ƒ Operational error in normal mail sending or

Address designated in the direct SMTP sending.
14-34 domain for SMTP sending ƒ Check the address selected in the address
does not exist book for SMTP sending.
ƒ Check the domain selection.

Due to an FCU mail job task error, the send was

cancelled:
14-50 Mail Job Task Error ƒ Address book was being edited during
creation of the notification mail.
ƒ Software error.

Not even one return notification can be

downloaded:
UCS Destination ƒ The address book was being edited.
14-51
Download Error ƒ The number for the specified destination does
not exist (it was deleted or edited after the job
was created).

B267 24 SM
 Code Meaning Suggested Cause/Action

ƒ The cancel operation by the user failed to

14-60 Send Cancel Failed
cancel the send operation.

FaxOption
B267
Notification Mail Send
14-61 ƒ All addresses for return notification mail failed.
Failed for All Destinations

Transmission Error due to ƒ When the 0 line page exists in received pages
14-62 the existence of zero line with G3 communication, the transmission is
page interrupted.

ƒ At startup, the system detected that the IP

POP3/IMAP4 Server Not
15-01 address of the POP3/IMAP4 server has not
Registered
been registered in the machine.

POP3/IMAP4 Mail Account ƒ The POP3/IMAP4 mail account has not been
15-02
Information Not Registered registered.

Mail Address Not

15-03 ƒ The mail address has not been registered.
Registered

15-10 DCS Mail Receive Error ƒ Error other than 15-11 to 15-18.

The DNS or POP3/IMAP4 server could not be

found:
ƒ The IP address for DNS or POP3/IMAP4
15-11 Connection Error
server is not stored in the machine.
ƒ The DNS IP address is not registered.
ƒ Network not operating correctly.

POP3/IMAP4 send authorization failed:

ƒ Incorrect IFAX user name or password.
15-12 Authorization Error ƒ Access was attempted by another device,
such as the PC.
ƒ POP3/IMAP4 settings incorrect.

ƒ Occurs only during manual reception.

15-13 Receive Buffer Full Transmission cannot be received due to
insufficient buffer space. The buffer is being

SM 25 B267
 Code Meaning Suggested Cause/Action

used for mail send or Scan-to-Email.

ƒ The mail header is not standard format. For

15-14 Mail Header Format Error
example, the Date line description is incorrect.

ƒ The e-mail is not in standard format. There is

15-15 Mail Divide Error no boundary between parts of the e-mail,
including the header.

ƒ The mail cannot be received because it is too

15-16 Mail Size Receive Error
large.

ƒ May occur during manual receiving only

15-17 Receive Timeout
because the network is not operating correctly.

15-18 Incomplete Mail Received ƒ Only one portion of the mail was received.

Final Destination for

ƒ The format of the final destination for the
15-31 Transfer Request
transfer request was incorrect.
Reception Format Error

The transmission cannot be delivered to the final

destination:
Send/Delivery Destination
15-39 ƒ Destination file format is incorrect.
Error
ƒ Could not create the destination for the file
transmission.

ƒ Reception rejected because the transaction

15-41 SMTP Receive Error exceeded the limit for the “Auth. E-mail RX”
setting.

ƒ The delivery destination address was

15-42 Off Ramp Gateway Error
specified with Off Ramp Gateway OFF.

ƒ Format error in the address of the Off Ramp

15-43 Address Format Error
Gateway.

ƒ The number of addresses for the Off Ramp

15-44 Addresses Over
Gateway exceeded the limit of 30.

B267 26 SM
 Code Meaning Suggested Cause/Action

Attachment File Format

15-61 ƒ The attached file is not TIFF format.
Error

FaxOption
B267
Could not receive transmission due to:
ƒ Resolution error
ƒ Image of resolution greater than 200 dpi
without extended memory.
TIFF File Compatibility ƒ Resolution is not supported.
15-62
Error ƒ Page size error
ƒ The page size was larger than A3.
ƒ Compression error
ƒ File was compressed with other than MH, MR,
or MMR.

The TIFF file sent as the attachment could not be

received because the TIFF header is incorrect:
ƒ The TIFF file attachment is a type not
15-63 TIFF Parameter Error
supported.
ƒ The TIFF file attachment is corrupted.
ƒ Software error.

The file received as an attachment caused the

TIFF decompression error:
15-64 TIFF Decompression Error ƒ The TIFF format of the attachment is
corrupted.
ƒ Software error.

ƒ The file could not be received because the

15-71 Not Binary Image Data
attachment was not binary image data.

ƒ Could not find the Disposition line in the

15-73 MDN Status Error header of the Return Receipt, or there is a
problem with the firmware.

ƒ Could not find the Original Message ID line in

15-74 MDN Message ID Error the header of the Return Receipt, or there is a
problem with the firmware.

SM 27 B267
 Code Meaning Suggested Cause/Action

ƒ Could not receive the transmission because

the destination buffer is full and the destination
15-80 Mail Job Task Read Error could not be created (this error may occur
when receiving a transfer request or a request
for notification of reception).

ƒ Could not repeat receive the transmission

because the destination buffer is full and the
Repeated Destination
15-81 destination could not be created (this error
Registration Error
may occur when receiving a transfer request
or a request for notification of reception).

Could not receive the file for transfer to the final

destination:
ƒ The format of the final destination or the
15-91 Send Registration Error
transfer destination is incorrect.
ƒ Destinations are full so the final and transfer
destinations could not be created.

ƒ Transmission could not be received because

15-92 Memory Overflow
memory overflowed during the transaction.

ƒ Transaction could not complete due to a

15-93 Memory Access Error
malfunction of SAF memory.

ƒ The machine rejected an incoming e-mail for

transfer request, because the ID code in the
15-94 Incorrect ID Code
incoming e-mail did not match the ID code
registered in the machine.

ƒ The machine rejected an incoming e-mail for

15-95 Transfer Station Function transfer because the transfer function was
unavailable.

ƒ Divide the original into more than one page.

Original length exceeded
22-00 ƒ Check the resolution used for scanning. Lower
the maximum scan length
the scan resolution if possible.

B267 28 SM
 Code Meaning Suggested Cause/Action

ƒ Add optional page memory.

ƒ Wait for the files in the queue to be sent.

FaxOption
B267
ƒ Delete unnecessary files from memory.
ƒ Transfer the substitute reception files to an
Memory overflow while
22-01 another fax machine, if the machine’s printer is
receiving
busy or out of order.
ƒ Add an optional SAF memory card or hard
disk.

ƒ The job started normally but did not finish

Tx or rx job stalled due to
normally; data may or may not have been
22-02 line disconnection at the
received fully.
other end
ƒ Restart the machine.

The machine cannot store ƒ Update the ROM

22-04
received data in the SAF ƒ Replace the FCU.

No G3 parameter
22-05 ƒ Defective FCU board or firmware.
confirmation answer

Data read timeout during ƒ Restart the machine.

23-00
construction ƒ Replace the FCU.

The machine software

resets itself after a fatal ƒ Update the ROM
25-00
transmission error ƒ Replace the FCU.
occurred

F0-xx V.34 modem error ƒ Replace the FCU.

ƒ Update the SG3 modem ROM.

ƒ Replace the SG3 board.
F6-xx SG3 modem error
ƒ Check for line noise or other line problems.
ƒ Try communicating another V.8/V.34 fax.

SM 29 B267
3.2 IFAX TROUBLESHOOTING

Use the following procedures to determine whether the machine or another part of the
network is causing the problem.

Communication
Item Action [Remarks]
Route

ƒ Check that the LAN cable is connected to

1. Connection with
the machine.
the LAN
General LAN Check that the LEDs on the hub are lit.

Check that other devices connected to the

2. LAN activity
LAN can communicate through the LAN.

ƒ Check the network settings on the PC.

[Is the IP address registered in the TCP/IP
1. Network settings
properties in the network setup correct?
on the PC
Check the IP address with the administrator
of the network.]

ƒ Use the “ping” command on the PC to

2. Check that PC
contact the machine.
Between IFAX and can connect with
[At the MS-DOS prompt, type ping then the IP
PC the machine
address of the machine, then press Enter.]

ƒ Check the LAN parameters

ƒ Check if there is an IP address conflict
3. LAN settings in with other PCs.
the machine [Use the “Network” function in the User Tools.
If there is an IP address conflict, inform the
administrator.]

ƒ Check the LAN parameters

ƒ Check if there is an IP address conflict
Between machine LAN settings in the
with other PCs.
and e-mail server machine
[Use the “Network” function in the User Tools.
If there is an IP address conflict, inform the

B267 30 SM
 Communication
Item Action [Remarks]
Route

administrator.]

FaxOption
B267
ƒ Make sure that the machine can log into
the e-mail server.
1. E-mail account ƒ Check that the account and password
on the server stored in the server are the same as in
the machine.
[Ask the administrator to check.]
Between machine
ƒ Make sure that the client devices which
and e-mail server
have an account in the server can
send/receive e-mail.
[Ask the administrator to check.
2. E-mail server
Send a test e-mail with the machine’s own
number as the destination. The machine
receives the returned e-mail if the
communication is performed successfully.]

ƒ Make sure that the PC can log into the

e-mail server.
1. E-mail account ƒ Check that the account and password
on the Server stored in the server are the same as in
the machine.
[Ask the administrator to check.]

ƒ Make sure that the client devices which

Between e-mail
have an account in the server can
server and internet
send/receive e-mail.
[Ask the administrator to check.
2. E-mail server
Send a test e-mail with the machine’s own
number as the destination. The machine
receives the returned e-mail if the
communication is performed successfully.]

3. Destination ƒ Make sure that the e-mail address is

SM 31 B267
 Communication
Item Action [Remarks]
Route

e-mail address actually used.

ƒ Check that the e-mail address contains
no incorrect characters such as spaces.

ƒ Use the “ping” command to contact the

router.
Between e-mail
Router settings ƒ Check that other devices connected to
server and internet
the router can sent data over the router.
[Ask the administrator of the server to check.]

ƒ Check whether e-mail can be sent to

Error message by
another address on the same network,
Between e-mail e-mail from the
using the application e-mail software.
server and internet network of the
ƒ Check the error e-mail message.
destination.
[Inform the administrator of the LAN.]

B267 32 SM
3.3 IP-FAX TROUBLESHOOTING

3.3.1 IP-FAX TRANSMISSION

FaxOption
Cannot send by IP Address/Host Name

B267
Check Point Action

1 LAN cable connected? Check the LAN cable connection.

2 Specified IP address/host name correct? Check the IP address/host name.

Cannot breach the firewall. Send by

3 Firewall/NAT is installed? using another method (Fax, Internet
Fax)

4 Transmission sent manually? Manual sending not supported.

5 IP address of local machine registered? Register the IP address.

Remote terminal port number setting other

6 Send by specifying the port number.
than 1720?

Confirm the port number of the remote

7 Specified port number correct?
fax.

DNS server registered when host name

8 Contact the network administrator.
specified?

Check whether the remote fax is a T38

9 Remote fax a T.38 terminal?
terminal.

Check that the remote fax is switched

10 Remote fax switched off or busy?
on.

Request the network administrator to

increase the bandwidth.

11 Network bandwidth too narrow? Raise the delay level.

IPFAX SW 01 Bit 0 to 3

IP-Fax bandwidth is the same as the

SM 33 B267
 DCS speed. Set IP-Fax SW00 Bit 6 to
1.

Check whether the remote fax

12 Remote fax cancelled transmission?
cancelled the transmission.

Cannot send via VoIP Gateway

Check Point Action

1 LAN cable connected? Check the LAN cable connection.

2 VoIP Gateway T.38 standard? Contact the network administrator.

3 VoIP Gateway installed correctly? Contact the network administrator.

4 VoIP Gateway power switched on? Contact the network administrator.

Is the IP address/host name of the

5 Check the IP address/host name.
specified Gateway correct?

6 Number of the specified fax correct? Check the remote fax number.

Cannot breach the firewall. Send by

7 Firewall/NAT is installed? using another method (Fax, Internet
Fax)

8 Transmission sent manually? Manual sending not supported.

9 IP address of local fax registered? Register the IP address.

DNS registered when host name

10 Contact the network administrator.
specified?

11 Remote fax a G3 fax? Check that the remote fax is a G3 fax.

12 G3 fax is connected to VoIP gateway? Check that G3 fax is connected.

13 Remote G3 fax turned on? Check that G3 fax is switched on.

Request the network administrator to

14 Network bandwidth too narrow?
increase the bandwidth.

B267 34 SM
 Raise the network delay level.
IPFAX SW 01 Bit 0 to 3

IP-Fax bandwidth is the same as the

FaxOption
DCS speed. Set IP-Fax SW00 Bit 6 to

B267
1.

Cannot send by Alias Fax number.

Check Point Action

1 LAN cable connected? Check the LAN cable connection.

Confirm the Alias of the remote fax.

2 Number of specified Alias fax correct?
Error Code: 13-14

Cannot breach the firewall. Send by

3 Firewall/NAT installed? using another method (Fax, Internet
Fax)

4 Transmission sent manually? Manual sending not supported.

5 Gatekeeper installed correctly? Contact the network administrator.

6 Gatekeeper power switched on? Contact the network administrator.

IP address/host name of Gatekeeper

7 Check the IP address/host name.
correct?

DNS server registered when Gatekeeper

8 Contact the network administrator.
host name specified?

Check the settings.

9 Enable H.323 SW is set to on?
See User Parameter SW 34 Bit 0

10 IP address of local fax registered? Register the IP address of the local fax.

Register the Alias number of the local

11 Alias number of local fax registered?
fax.

12 Remote fax registered in Gatekeeper? Contact the network administrator.

SM 35 B267
 Check whether the remote fax is a T38
13 Remote fax a T.38 terminal?
terminal.

14 Remote fax switched off or busy? Contact the network administrator.

Request the system administrator to

increase the bandwidth.

Raise the delay level.

15 Network bandwidth too narrow? IPFAX SW 01 Bit 0 to 3

Lower the modem transmission baud

rate.
IPFAX SW 05

Check whether the remote fax

16 Remote fax cancelled transmission?
cancelled the transmission.

3.3.2 IP-FAX RECEPTION

Cannot receive by IP Address/Host name.

Check Point Action

1 LAN cable connected? Check the LAN cable connection.

Cannot breach the firewall. Send by using

2 Firewall/NAT is installed?
another method (Fax, Internet Fax)

3 IP address of local fax registered? Register the IP address.

Port number specified at remote sender Request the sender to specify the port
4
fax (if required)? number.

Specified port number correct (if Request the sender to check the port
5
required)? number.

Contact the network administrator.

DNS server registered when host name
6
specified on sender side? ƒ The sender machine displays this
error code if the sender fax is a Ricoh

B267 36 SM
 model.

Request the system administrator to

increase the bandwidth.

FaxOption
7 Network bandwidth too narrow?

B267
Lower the start modem reception baud
rate on the receiving side.
IPFAX SW06

Check whether the remote fax cancelled

8 Remote fax cancelled transmission?
the transmission.

Cannot receive by VoIP Gateway.

Check Point Action

1 LAN cable connected? Check the LAN cable connection.

Cannot breach the firewall. Request the

2 Firewall/NAT is installed? remote fax to send by using another
method (Fax, Internet Fax)

3 VoIP Gateway installed correctly? Contact the network administrator.

4 VoIP Gateway power switched on? Contact the network administrator.

IP address/host name of specified VoIP Request the remote fax to check the IP
5
Gateway correct on sender’s side? address/host name.

DNS server registered when host name

6 Contact the network administrator.
specified on sender side?

Request the network administrator to

7 Network bandwidth too narrow?
increase the bandwidth.

8 G3 fax connected? Check that G3 fax is connected.

9 G3 fax power switched on? Check that G3 fax is switched on.

SM 37 B267
Cannot receive by Alias Fax number.

Check Point Action

1 LAN cable connected? Check the LAN cable connection.

Cannot the breach firewall. Request the

2 Firewall/NAT is installed? remote fax to send by using another
method (Fax, Internet Fax)

Contact the network administrator.

3 Gatekeeper installed correctly? ƒ The sender machine displays this error

code when the sender fax is a Ricoh
model.

Contact the network administrator.

4 Power to Gatekeeper switched on? ƒ The sender machine displays this error
code when the sender fax is a Ricoh
model.

Request the sender to check the IP

address/host name.
IP address/host name of Gatekeeper
5
correct on the sender’s side? ƒ The sender machine displays this error
code when the sender fax is a Ricoh
model.

Contact the network administrator.

DNS server registered when
6 Gatekeeper host name specified on ƒ The sender machine displays this error
sender’s side? code when the sender fax is a Ricoh
model.

Request the sender to check the settings.

User Parameter SW 34 Bit 0
7 Enable H.323 SW is set to on?
ƒ Only if the remote sender fax is a
Ricoh fax.

B267 38 SM
 8 Local fax IP address registered? Register the IP address.

9 Local fax Alias number registered? Register the Alias number.

Request the system administrator to

FaxOption
B267
increase the bandwidth.
10 Network bandwidth too narrow?
Lower the start modem reception baud rate
on the receiving side.
IPFAX SW06

Check whether the remote fax cancelled

11 Remote fax cancelled transmission?
the transmission.

Contact the network administrator.

12 Local fax registered in Gatekeeper? ƒ The sender machine displays this error
code when the sender fax is a Ricoh
model.

SM 39 B267
4. SERVICE TABLES

4.1 BEFOREHAND

ƒ Never turn off the main power switch when the power LED is lit or flashing. To avoid
damaging the hard disk or memory, press the operation power switch to switch the
power off, wait for the power LED to go off, and then switch the main power switch
off.

ƒ The main power LED ( ) lights or flashes while the platen cover or ARDF is open,
while the main machine is communicating with a facsimile or the network server, or
while the machine is accessing the hard disk or memory for reading or writing data.

B267 40 SM
4.2 SERVICE TABLES

4.2.1 SP1-XXX (BIT SWITCHES)

Fax Option
Bit Switches

B267
1 Mode No. Function

System Switch

101 Change the bit switches for system settings for the
001 – 032 00 – 1F fax option
( Bit Switches)

Ifax Switch

102 Change the bit switches for internet fax settings for
001 – 016 00 – 0F the fax option
( Bit Switches)

Printer Switch
103
Change the bit switches for printer settings for the fax
001 – 016 00 – 0F
option ( "Bit Switches")

Communication Switch

104 Change the bit switches for communication settings

001 – 032 00 – 1F for the fax option
"Bit Switches"

G3-1 Switch

105 Change the bit switches for the protocol settings of

001 – 016 00 – 0F the standard G3 board
"Bit Switches"

G3-2 Switch

106 Change the bit switches for the protocol settings of

001 – 016 00 – 0F the optional G3 board
"Bit Switches"

SM 41 B267
 G3-3 Switch

107 Change the bit switches for the protocol settings of

001 – 016 00 – 0F the optional G3 board
"Bit Switches"

G4 Internal Switch
108
001 – 032 00 – 1F Not used (Do not change the bit switches)

G4 Parameter Switch
109
001 – 016 00 – 0F Not used (Do not change the bit switches)

IP fax Switch

111 Change the bit switches for optional IP fax

001 – 016 00 – 0F parameters
"Bit Switches"

4.2.2 SP2-XXX (RAM DATA)

2 Mode No. Function

RAM Read/Write
101
Change RAM data for the fax board directly.
001
"Service RAM Addresses"

Memory Dump

G3-1 Memory Print out RAM data for the fax board.
001
Dump "Service RAM Addresses"

G3-2 Memory Print out RAM data for the optional SG3
102 002
Dump board.

G3-3 Memory Print out RAM data for the optional SG3
003
Dump board.

004 G4 Memory Dump Print out RAM data for the SiG4 board.

B267 42 SM
 G3-1 NCU Parameters
103
NCU parameter settings for the standard G3
001 – 023 CC, 01 – 22
board. "NCU Parameters"

Fax Option
B267
G3-2 NCU Parameters
104
NCU parameter settings for the optional G3
001 – 023 CC, 01 – 22
board. "NCU Parameters"

G3-3 NCU Parameters

105
NCU parameter settings for the optional G3
001 – 023 CC, 01 – 22
board. "NCU Parameters"

4.2.3 SP3-XXX (TEL LINE SETTINGS)

3 Mode No. Function

Service Station

101 001 Fax Number Enter the fax number of the service station.

002 Select Line Select the line type.

Serial Number
102
000 Enter the fax unit’s serial number.

PSTN-1 Port Settings

Select the line type setting for the G3-1 line. If

001 Select Line the machine is installed on a PABX line, select
“PABX”, “PABX(GND)” or “PABX(FLASH)”.
103
PSTN Access Enter the PSTN access number for the
002
Number G3-1 line.

If the customer does not want to receive

Memory Lock
003 transmissions using Memory Lock on this line,
Disabled
turn this SP on.

SM 43 B267
 PSTN-2 Port Settings

Select the line setting for the G3-2 line. If the

001 Select Line machine is installed on a PABX line, select
“PABX”, “PABX(GND)” or “PABX(FLASH)”.

PSTN Access Enter the PSTN access number for the G3-2
002
104 Number line.

If the customer does not want to receive

Memory Lock
003 transmissions using Memory Lock on this line,
Disabled
change this SP to on.

Transmission If you turn this SP on, the machine does not

004
Disabled send any fax messages on the G3-2 line.

PSTN-3 Port Settings

Select the line setting for the G3-3 line. If the

001 Select Line machine is installed on a PABX line, select
“PABX”, “PABX(GND)” or “PABX(FLASH)”.

PSTN Access Enter the PSTN access number for the G3-3
002
105 Number line.

If the customer does not want to receive

Memory Lock
003 transmissions using Memory Lock on this line,
Disabled
change this SP to on.

Transmission If you turn this SP on, the machine does not

004
Disabled send any fax messages on the G3-3 line.

ISDN Port Settings

001 Select Line Not used (Do not change the bit switches)

106 PSTN Access

002
Number

Memory Lock
003
Disabled

B267 44 SM
 Transmission
106 004
Disabled

IPFAX Port Settings

Fax Option
B267
001 H323 Port

002 SIP Port

003 RAS Port

107
004 Gatekeeper port

005 T.38 Port

006 SIP Server Port

IPFAX Protocol
007 Select "H323" or "SIP".
Priority

FAX SW
201
001 – 032 00 – 1F

4.2.4 SP4-XXX (ROM VERSIONS)

4 Mode No. Function

101 001 FCU ROM Version Displays the FCU ROM version.

102 001 Error Codes Displays the latest 64 fax error codes.

103 001 G3-1 ROM Version Displays the G3-1 modem version.

104 001 G3-2 ROM Version Displays the G3-2 modem version.

105 001 G3-3 ROM Version Displays the G3-3 modem version.

106 001 G4 ROM Version Not used (Do not change the bit switches)

107 001 Charge ROM Version Not used (Do not change the bit switches)

SM 45 B267
4.2.5 SP5-XXX (INITIALIZING)

5 Mode No. Function

Initialize SRAM
101
Initializes the bit switches and user parameters, user data in
000
the SRAM, files in the SAF memory, and clock.

Erase All Files

102
000 Erases all files stored in the SAF memory.

Reset Bit Switches

103
000 Resets the bit switches and user parameters.

Factory setting
104
Resets the bit switches and user parameters, user data in the
000
SRAM and files in the SAF memory.

Initialize All Bit Switches

105
000 Initializes all the current bit switch settings.

Initialize Security Bit Switches

106 Initializes only the security bit switches. If you select

000 automatic output/display for the user parameter switches, the
security settings are initialized.

4.2.6 SP6-XXX (REPORTS)

6 Mode No. Function

System Parameter List

101
Touch the “ON” button to print the system
000 -
parameter list.

B267 46 SM
 Service Monitor Report
102
Touch the “ON” button to print the service
000 -
monitor report.

Fax Option
B267
G3 Protocol Dump List

G3 All Prints the protocol dump list of all

001
Communications communications for all G3 lines.

G3-1 (All Prints the protocol dump list of all

002
Communications) communications for the G3-1 line.

G3-1 Prints the protocol dump list of the last

003
(1 Communication) communication for the G3-1 line.
103
G3-2 Prints the protocol dump list of all
004
(All Communications) communications for the G3-2 line.

G3-2 Prints the protocol dump list of the last

005
(1 Communication) communication for the G3-2 line.

G3-3 Prints the protocol dump list of all

006
(All Communications) communications for the G3-3 line.

G3-3 Prints the protocol dump list of the last

007
(1 Communication) communication for the G3-3 line.

G4 Protocol Dump List

001 Dch + Bch 1

002 Dch

104 003 Bch 1 Link Layer

Not used (Do not change the bit switches)
004 Dch Link Layer

005 Dch +Bch 2

006 Bch 2 Link Layer

SM 47 B267
 All Files print out

Prints out all the user files in the SAF memory,

including confidential messages.
105
000 - ƒ Do not use this function, unless the
customer is having trouble printing
confidential messages or recovering files
stored using the memory lock feature.

Journal Print out

The machine prints all the communication

001 All Journals
106 records on the report.

The machine prints all communication records

002 Specified Date
after the specified date.

107 Log List Print out

001 All log files These log print out functions are for designer
use only.
002 Printer

003 SC/TRAP Stored

004 Decompression

005 Scanner

006 JOB/SAF

007 Reconstruction

008 JBIG

009 Fax Driver

010 G3CCU

011 Fax Job

012 CCU

B267 48 SM
 013 Scanner Condition

IP Protocol Dump List

Prints the protocol dump list of all

Fax Option
001 All Communications
108

B267
communications for the IP fax line.

Prints the protocol dump list of the last

002 1 Communication
communication for the IP fax line.

4.2.7 SP7-XXX (TEST MODES)

These are the test modes for PTT approval.

7 Function

101 G3-1 Modem Tests

102 G3-1 DTMF Tests

103 Ringer Test

104 G3-1 V34 (S2400baud)

105 G3-1 V34 (S2800baud)

106 G3-1 V34 (S3000baud)

107 G3-1 V34 (S3200baud)

108 G3-1 V34 (S3429baud)

109 Recorded Message Test

110 G3-2 Modem Tests

111 G3-2 DTMF Tests

112 G3-2 V34 (S2400baud)

113 G3-2 V34 (S2800baud)

114 G3-2 V34 (S3000baud)

115 G3-2 V34 (S3200baud)

SM 49 B267
 116 G3-2 V34 (S3429baud)

117 G3-3 Modem Tests

118 G3-3 DTMF Tests

119 G3-3 V34 (S2400baud)

120 G3-3 V34 (S2800baud)

121 G3-3 V34 (S3000baud)

122 G3-3 V34 (S3200baud)

123 G3-3 V34 (S3429baud)

124 IG3-1 Modem Tests - Not used

125 IG3-1 DTMF Tests - Not used

126 IG3-1 V34 (S2400baud) - Not used

127 IG3-1 V34 (S2800baud) - Not used

128 IG3-1 V34 (S3000baud) - Not used

129 IG3-1 V34 (S3200baud) - Not used

130 IG3-1 V34 (S3429baud) - Not used

131 IG3-2 Modem Tests - Not used

132 IG3-2 DTMF Tests - Not used

133 IG3-2 V34 (S2400baud) - Not used

134 IG3-2 V34 (S2800baud) - Not used

135 IG3-2 V34 (S3000baud) - Not used

136 IG3-2 V34 (S3200baud) - Not used

137 IG3-2 V34 (S3429baud) - Not used

B267 50 SM
4.2.8 SP9-XXX (DESIGN SWITCH MODE)

9 Mode No. Function

Fax Option
B267
702 Design Switch DFU

SM 51 B267
4.3 BIT SWITCHES

ƒ Do not adjust a bit switch or use a setting that is described as “Not used”, as this
may cause the machine to malfunction or to operate in a manner that is not
accepted by local regulations. Such bits are for use only in other areas, such as
Japan.

ƒ Default settings for bit switches are not listed in this manual. Refer to the System
Parameter List printed by the machine.
4.3.1 SYSTEM SWITCHES

System Switch 00 [SP No. 1-101-001]

No FUNCTION COMMENTS

Set this bit to 1 before changing any dedicated

Dedicated transmission
transmission parameters.
0 parameter programming
Reset this bit to 0 after programming dedicated
0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
transmission parameters.

1 Not used Do not change

Technical data printout on the

1: Instead of the personal name, the following data
Journal
2 are listed on the Journal for each G3
0: Disabled
communication.
1: Enabled

e.g. 0000 (1) // 32 (2) V34 (3) // 288 (4) // 264 (5) // L0100 (6) 03 (7) 04 (8)
(1): EQM value (Line quality data). A larger number means more errors.
(2): Symbol rate (V.34 only)
(3): Final modem type used
(4): Starting data rate (for example, 288 means 28.8 kbps)
(5): Final data rate
(6): Rx revel (refer to the note after this table for how to read the rx level)
(7): Total number of error lines that occurred during non-ECM reception.
(8): Total number of burst error lines that occurred during non-ECM reception.

B267 52 SM
 ƒ EQM and rx level are fixed at “FFFF” in tx mode.
ƒ The seventh and eighth numbers are fixed at “00” for transmission records
and ECM reception records.

Fax Option
B267
Rx level calculation
Example: 0000 // 32 V34 // 288/264 // L 01 00 03 04
The four-digit hexadecimal value (N) after “L” indicates the rx level.
The high byte is given first, followed by the low byte. Divide the decimal value of N
by -16 to get the rx level.
In the above example, the decimal value of N (= 0100 [H]) is 256.
So, the actual rx level is 256/-16 = -16 dB

3 Not used Do not change this setting.

When "1" is selected, a line error mark is printed

Line error mark print
4 on the printout if a line error occurs during
0: OFF, 1: ON (print)
reception.

G3/G4 communication This is a fault-finding aid. The LCD shows the key
parameter display parameters (see below). This is normally disabled
5
0: Disabled because it cancels the CSI display for the user.
1: Enabled Be sure to reset this bit to 0 after testing.

This is only used for communication

troubleshooting. It shows the content of the
Protocol dump list output after
transmitted facsimile protocol signals. Always
each communication
6 reset this bit to 0 after finishing testing.
0: Off
If system switch 09 bit 6 is at “1”, the list is only
1: On
printed if there was an error during the
communication.

7 Not used Do not change the setting.

System Switch 01 - Not used (Do not change the factory settings.)

SM 53 B267
System Switch 02 [SP No. 1-101-003]

No FUNCTION COMMENTS

0-1 Not used Do not change these settings.

Force after transmission stall With this setting on, the machine resets itself
2 0: Off automatically if a transmission stalls and fails to
1: On complete the job.

3-4 Not used Do not change these settings.

5 Not used Do not change this setting.

(0,0): All RDS systems are always locked out.

Memory read/write by RDS
(0,1), (1,0): Normally, RDS systems are locked
Bit 7: 0, Bit 6: 0
out, but the user can temporarily switch RDS on to
Always disabled
allow RDS operations to take place. RDS will
Bit 7: 0, Bit 6: 1
automatically be locked out again after a certain
6-7 User selectable
time, which is stored in System Switch 03. Note
Bit 7: 1, Bit 6: 0
that if an RDS operation takes place, RDS will not
User selectable
switch off until this time limit has expired.
Bit 7: 1, Bit 6: 1
(1,1): At any time, an RDS system can access the
Always enabled
machine.

System Switch 03 [SP No. 1-101-004]

No FUNCTION COMMENTS

Length of time that RDS is 00 - 99 hours (BCD).

temporarily switched on when This setting is only valid if bits 6 and 7 of System
0-7
bits 6 and 7 of System Switch Switch 02 are set to “User selectable”.
02 are set to “User selectable” The default setting is 24 hours.

System Switch 04 [SP No. 1-101-005]

No FUNCTION COMMENTS

0-2 Not used Do not change these settings.

B267 54 SM
 1: Each Quick/Speed dial number on the list is
Printing dedicated tx printed with the dedicated tx parameters (10 bytes
parameters on Quick/Speed each).
3 Dial Lists The first 10 bytes of data are the programmed

Fax Option
B267
0: Disabled dedicated tx parameters; 34 bytes of data are
1: Enabled printed (the other 24 bytes have no use for service
technicians).

4-7 Not used Do not change these settings.

System Switch 05 - Not used (Do not change the factory settings.)

System Switch 06 - Not used (Do not change the factory settings.)

System Switch 07 - Not used (Do not change the factory settings.)

System Switch 08 - Not used (Do not change the factory settings.)

System Switch 09 [SP No. 1-101-010]

No FUNCTION COMMENTS

0 Not used Do not change these settings.

0: Communications that reached phase C

Inclusion of communications (message tx/rx) of the T.30 protocol are listed on
on the Journal when no image the Journal.
1
data was exchanged. 1: Communications that reached phase A (call
0: Disabled 1: Enabled setup) of T.30 protocol are listed on the Journal.
This will include telephone calls.

0: Error reports will not be printed.

Automatic error report printout
2 1: Error reports will be printed automatically after
0: Disabled 1: Enabled
failed communications.

Printing of the error code on

3 the error report 1: Error codes are printed on the error reports.
0: No 1: Yes

SM 55 B267
 4 Not used Do not change this setting.

1: A power failure report will be automatically

Power failure report printed after the power is switched on if a fax
5
0: Disabled 1: Enabled message disappeared from the memory when the
power was turned off last.

Conditions for printing the

This switch becomes effective only when system
protocol dump list
switch 00 bit 6 is set to 1.
6 0: Print for all communications
1: Set this bit to 1 when you wish to print a protocol
1: Print only when there is a
dump list only for communications with errors.
communication error

Priority given to various types

of remote terminal ID when This bit determines which set of priorities the
printing reports machine uses when listing remote terminal names
7 0: RTI > CSI > Dial label > Tel. on reports.
Number Dial Label: The name stored, by the user, for the
1: Dial label > Tel. number > Quick/Speed Dial number.
RTI > CSI

System Switch 0A [SP No. 1-101-011]

No FUNCTION COMMENTS

0-3 Not used Do not change these settings.

0: Prevents dialing from the ten-key pad while the

external telephone is off-hook. Use this setting
Dialing on the ten-key pad
when the external telephone is not by the
when the external telephone is
4 machine, or if a wireless telephone is connected
off-hook
as an external telephone.
0: Disabled 1: Enabled
1: The user can dial on the machine’s ten-key pad
when the handset is off-hook.

On hook dial
5 0: On hook dial is disabled.
0: Disabled 1: Enabled

6-7 Not used Do not change the factory settings

B267 56 SM
System Switch 0B - Not used (Do not change the factory settings.)

System Switch 0C - Not used (Do not change the factory settings.)

Fax Option
B267
System Switch 0D - Not used (Do not change the factory settings.)

System Switch 0E [SP No. 1-101-015]

No FUNCTION COMMENTS

0-1 Not used Do not change the settings.

2 Not used This machine does not have the capture function.

0: Manual tx and rx are possible while the external

Action when the external handset is off-hook. However, memory tx is not
handset goes off-hook possible.
0: Manual tx and rx operation 1: The display stays in standby mode even when
3
1: Memory tx and rx operation the external handset is used, so that other people
(the display remains the can use the machine for memory tx operation.
same) Note that manual tx and rx are not possible with
this setting.

4-7 Not used Do not change these settings.

System Switch 0F [SP No. 1-101-016]

No FUNCTION COMMENTS

Country/area code for functional This country/area code determines the factory
0-7
settings (Hex) settings of bit switches and RAM addresses.
However, it has no effect on the NCU
00: France 11: USA
parameter settings and communication
01: Germany 12: Asia parameter RAM addresses.
Cross reference:
02: UK 13: Japan
NCU country code:
03: Italy 14: Hong Kong SP No. 2-103-001 for G3-1

SM 57 B267
 04: Austria 15: South Africa

05: Belgium 16: Australia

06: Denmark 17: New Zealand

07: Finland 18: Singapore

08: Ireland 19: Malaysia

09: Norway 1A: China

0A: Sweden 1B: Taiwan

0B: Switz. 1C: Korea

0C: Portugal 20: Turkey

0D: Holland 21: Greece

0E: Spain 22: Hungary

0F: Israel 23: Czech

10: --- 24: Poland

System Switch 10 [SP No. 1-101-017]

No FUNCTION COMMENTS

Threshold = N x 128 KB + 256 KB

Threshold memory level for
0-7 N can be between 00 - FF(H)
parallel memory transmission
Default setting: 02(H) = 512 KB

System Switch 11 [SP No. 1-101-018]

No FUNCTION COMMENTS

TTI printing position

Change this bit to 1 if the TTI overprints
0: Superimposed on the page
0 information that the customer considers to be
data
important (G3 transmissions).
1: Printed before the data

B267 58 SM
 leading edge

1 Not used Japan Only

2-7 Not used Do not change the factory settings.

Fax Option
B267
System Switch 12 [SP No. 1-101-019]

No FUNCTION COMMENTS

TTI: 08 to 92 (BCD) mm
Input even numbers only.
This setting determines the print start position for
TTI printing position in the the TTI from the left edge of the paper. If the TTI is
0-7
main scan direction moved too far to the right, it may overwrite the file
number which is on the top right of the page. On
an A4 page, if the TTI is moved over by more than
50 mm, it may overwrite the page number.

System Switch 13 - Not used (do not change these settings)

System Switch 14 - Not used (do not change these settings)

System Switch 15 [SP No. 1-101-022]

No FUNCTION COMMENTS

0 Not used Do not change the settings.

Going into the Energy Saver

1: The machine will restart from the Energy Saver
mode automatically
1 mode quickly, because the +5V power supply is
0: Enabled
active even in the Energy Saver mode.
1: Disabled

2-3 Not used Do not change these settings.

Interval for preventing the If there is a file waiting for transmission, the
4-5
machine from entering Energy machine does not go to Energy Saver mode

SM 59 B267
 Saver mode if there is a during the selected period.
pending transmission file. After transmitting the file, if there is no file waiting
Bit 5: 0, Bit 4: 0 for transmission, the machine goes to the Energy
1 min Saver mode.
Bit 5: 0, Bit 4: 1
30 min1
Bit 5: 1, Bit 4: 0
1 hour
Bit 5: 1, Bit 4: 1
24 hours

6-7 Not used Do not change

System Switch 16 [SP No. 1-101-023]

No FUNCTION COMMENTS

Parallel Broadcasting
1: The machine sends messages simultaneously
0 0: Disabled
using all available ports during broadcasting.
1: Enabled

1-7 Not used Do not change these settings.

System Switch 17 - Not used (do not change these settings)

System Switch 18 - Not used (do not change these settings)

System Switch 19 [SP No. 1-101-026]

No FUNCTION COMMENTS

0-6 Not used Do not change the settings.

1: If the customer frequently wishes to transmit a

Special Original mode
form or letterhead which has a colored or printed
7 0: Disabled
background, change this bit to “1”. “Original 1” and
1: Enabled
“Original 2” can be selected in addition to the “Text”,

B267 60 SM
 “Text/Photo” and “Photo” modes.

System Switch 1A [SP No. 1-101-027]

Fax Option
B267
No. FUNCTION COMMENTS

0-7 Not used Do not change the settings.

System Switch 1B [SP No. 1-101-028]

In this switch setting, there is a limitation. Do not select the same image quality in two
modes.
e.g) these setting combination is not allowed:
[Bit1: 0, Bit 0: 0 = Text] [Bit3: 0, Bit 2:0 = Text/ Photo] [Bit 6: 0, Bit 5: 0, Bit 4: 0 = Text]

No. FUNCTION COMMENTS

Image Quality in Text mode

This setting determines the desirable scanning
Bit 1: 0, Bit 0: 0 = Text
0-1 image quality when the text mode is selected with
Bit 1: 0, Bit 0: 1 = Text/
the operation panel.
Picture

Image Quality in Photo mode This setting determines the desirable scanning
2-3 Bit 3: 0, Bit 2: 0 = Text/ Photo image quality when the photo mode is selected with
Bit 3: 0, Bit 2: 1 = Text the operation panel.

This setting determines the desirable scanning

Image Quality in Special
4-6 image quality when the special original mode is
Original mode
selected with the operation panel.

Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Mode

0 0 0 Text

0 0 1 Text/ Picture

0 1 0 Text/ Photo

0 1 1 Photo

SM 61 B267
 1 0 0 Special 1

1 0 1 Special 2

7 Not used Do not change these settings.

System Switch 1C - Not used (do not change these settings)

System Switch 1D [SP No. 1-101-030]

No FUNCTION COMMENTS

RTI/CSI/CPS code display 0: RTI, CSI, CPS codes are displayed on the top
0 0: Enable line of the LCD panel during communication.
1: Disable 1: Codes are switched off (no display)

1 Not used Do not change this setting.

Destination telephone
When "1" is selected, the destination telephone
2 number display limitation
number display is limited and redial is disabled.
0: OFF, 1: ON

Operation selection without

PIN code registered 0: When "0" is selected without PIN code
3 0: Transmission interrupted registration, transmission is interrupted and an alert
1: No interrupted message shows on the LCD.
transmission

4-7 Not used Do not change these settings.

System Switch 1E [SP No. 1-101-031]

No FUNCTION COMMENTS

Communication after the 0: When this switch is on and the journal history
Journal data storage area has becomes full, the next report prints. If the journal
0
become full history is not deleted, the next transmission cannot
0: Impossible be received. This prevents overwriting

B267 62 SM
 1: Possible communication records before the machine can
print them.
1: If the buffer memory of the communication
records for the Journal is full, fax communications

Fax Option
B267
are still possible. But the machine will overwrite
the oldest communication records.
Note: This setting is effective only when Automatic
Journal printout is enabled but the machine cannot
print the report (e.g., no paper).

0: If the SAF memory becomes full during

scanning, the successfully scanned pages are
Action when the SAF memory
transmitted.
has become full during
1: If the SAF memory becomes full during
1 scanning
scanning, the file is erased and no pages are
0: The current page is erased.
transmitted.
1: The entire file is erased.
This bit switch is ignored for parallel memory
transmission.

This bit determines which identifier, RTI or CSI, is

RTI/CSI display priority
2 displayed on the LCD while the machine is
0: RTI 1: CSI
communicating in G3 non-standard mode.

File No. printing

3 0: Enabled 1: File numbers are not printed on any reports.
1: Disabled

If authorized reception is enabled but the user has

stored no acceptable sender RTIs or CSIs, the
Action when authorized
machine will not be able to receive any fax
reception is enabled but
messages.
authorized RTIs/CSIs are not
If the customer wishes to receive messages from
4 yet programmed
any sender that includes an RTI or CSI, and to
0: All fax reception is disabled
block messages from senders that do not include
1: Faxes can be received if the
an RTI or CSI, change this bit to “1”, then enable
sender has an RTI or CSI
Authorized Reception.
Otherwise, keep this bit at “0 (default setting)”.

SM 63 B267
 5-7 Not used Do not change the settings

System Switch 1F [SP No. 1-101-032]

No FUNCTION COMMENTS

0 Not used Do not change the settings.

Report printout after an 0: When an original jams, or the SAF memory

original jam during SAF overflows during scanning, a report will be printed.
storage or if the SAF memory Change this bit to “1” if the customer does not
1
fills up want to have a report in these cases.
0: Enabled Memory tx – Memory storage report
1: Disabled Parallel memory tx – Transmission result report

2 Not used Do not change the settings.

Received fax print start timing 0: The machine prints each page immediately after
(G3 reception) the machine receives it.
3
0: After receiving each page 1: The machine prints the complete message after
1: After receiving all pages the machine receives all the pages in the memory.

4-6 Not used Do not change the factory settings.

0: When the fax unit detects a fax SC code other

than SC1201 and SC1207, the fax unit
Action when a fax SC has
automatically resets itself.
occurred
7 1: When the fax unit detects any fax SC code, the
0: Automatic reset
fax unit stops.
1: Fax unit stops
Cross reference:
Fax SC codes - See “Troubleshooting”

4.3.2 I-FAX SWITCHES

I-fax Switch 00 [SP No. 1-102-001]

FUNCTION COMMENTS
No
Original Width of TX This setting sets the maximum size of the original

B267 64 SM
 Attachment File that the destination can receive. (Bits 3~7 are
reserved for future use or not used.)

0 A4 0: Off (not selected), 1: On (selected)

Fax Option
If more than one of these three bits is set to “1”,

B267
1 B4
the larger size has priority. For example, if both Bit
2 A3 2 and Bit 1 are set to “1” then the maximum size is
“A3” (Bit 2).
3-6 Reserved
When mail is sent, there is no negotiation with the
receiving machine at the destination, so the
sending machine cannot make a selection for the
receiving capabilities (original width setting) of the
receiving machine. The original width selected
with this switch is used as the RX machine’s
7 Not used
original width setting, and the original is reduced to
this size before sending. The default is A4.
If the width selected with this switch is higher than
the receiving machine can accept, the machine
detects this and this causes an error.

I-fax Switch 01 [SP No. 1-102-002]

FUNCTION COMMENTS
No
Original Line Resolution of TX These settings set the maximum resolution of the
Attachment File original that the destination can receive.

0 200x100 Standard

1 200x200 Detail
0: Not selected
2 200x400 Fine 1: Selected
If more than one of these three bits is set to “1”,
3 300 x 300 Reserve
the higher resolution has priority. For example, if

4 400 x 400 Super Fine both Bit 0 and Bit 2 are set to “1” then the
resolution is set for "Bit 2 200 x 400.
5 600 x 600 Reserve

6 Reserve

SM 65 B267
 mm/inch

This setting selects mm/inch conversion for mail transmission.

0: Off (No conversion), 1: On (Conversion)
When on (set to “1”), the machine converts millimeters to inches for sending mail.
There is no switch for converting inches to millimeters.
Unlike G3 fax transmissions which can negotiate between sender and receiver to
determine the setting, mail cannot negotiate between terminals; the mm/inch
selection is determined by the sender fax.
7 When this switch is Off (0):
Images scanned in inches are sent in inches.
Images scanned in mm are sent in mm.
Images received in inches are transmitted in inches.
Images received in mm are transmitted in mm.
When this switch is On (1):
Images scanned in inches are sent in inches.
Images scanned in mm are converted to inches.
Images received in inches are transmitted in inches.
Images received in mm are converted to inches.

I-fax Switch 02 [SP No. 1-102-003]

No FUNCTION COMMENTS

RX Text Mail Header Processing

This setting determines whether the header information is printed with text e-mails
when they are received.
0: Prints only text mail.
0
1: Prints mail header information attached to text mail.
When a text mail is received with this switch On (1), the “From” address and
“Subject” address are printed as header information.
When a mail with only binary data is received (a TIFF-F file, for example), this
setting is ignored and no header is printed.

Output from Attached Document at E-mail TX Error

1
This setting determines whether only the first page or all pages of an e-mail

B267 66 SM
 attachment are printed at the sending station when a transmission error occurs.
This allows the customer to see which documents have not reached their intended
destinations if sent to the wrong e-mail addresses, for example.
0: Prints 1st page only.

Fax Option
B267
1: Prints all pages.

Text String for Return Receipt

This setting determines the text string output for the Return Receipt that confirms
the transmission was received normally at the destination.

00: “Dispatched”
Sends from PC mail a request for a Return Receipt. Receives the Return Receipt
with “dispatched” in the 2nd part:
Disposition: Automatic-action/MDN-send automatically; dispatched
The “dispatched” string is included in the Subject string.
01: “Displayed”
2-3
Sends from PC mail a request for a Return Receipt. Receives the Return Receipt
with “displayed” in the 2nd part:
Disposition: Automatic-action/MDN-send automatically; displayed
The “displayed” string is included in the Subject string.
10: Reserved
11: Reserved
A mail requesting a Return Receipt sent from an IFAX with this switch set to “00”
(for “dispatched”) received by Microsoft Outlook 2000 may cause an error. If any
setting other than “displayed” (01) causes a problem, change the setting to “01” to
enable normal sending of the Return Receipt.

Media accept feature

This setting adds or does not add the media accept feature to the answer mail to
confirm a reception.
4
0: Does not add the media accept feature to the answer mail
1: Adds the media accept feature to the answer mail.
Use this bit switch if a problem occurs when the machine receives an answer mail,
which contains the media accept feature field.

5-6 Not Used

SM 67 B267
 Image Resolution of RX Text Mail

This setting determines the image resolution of the received mail.

0: 200 x 200
7
1: 400 x 400
The “1” setting requires installation of the Function Upgrade Card in order to have
enough SAF (Store and Forward) memory to receive images at 400 x 400
resolution.

I-fax Switch 03 - Not used (do not change the settings) [ SP No. 1-102-004]

I-fax Switch 04 [SP No. 1-102-005]

No FUNCTION COMMENTS

Subject for Delivery TX/Memory Transfer

This setting determines whether the RTI/CSI registered on this machine or the
RTI/CSI of the originator is used in the subject lines of transferred documents.
0: Puts the RTI/CSI of the originator in the Subject line. If this is used, either the RTI
0
or CSI is used. Only one of these can be received for use in the subject line.
1: Puts the RTI/CSI registered on this machine in the Subject line.
When this switch is used to transfer and deliver mail to a PC, the information in the
Subject line that indicates where the transmission originated can be used to
determine automatically the destination folder for each e-mail.

Subject corresponding to mail post database

0: Standard subject
1: Mail post database subject
The standard subject is replaced by the mail post database subject in the following
three cases:
1 1) When the service technician sets the service (software) switch.
2) When memory sending, delivery specified by F code or SMTP reception is done.
3) With relay broadcasting (1st stage without the Schmidt 4 function).

ƒ This switch does not apply for condition 3) when the RX system is set up for
memory sending, delivery by F-code, sending with SMTP RX and when

B267 68 SM
 operators are using FOL (to prevent problems when receiving transmissions).

2-7 Not Used

Fax Option
B267
I-fax Switch 05 [SP No. 1-102-006]

No FUNCTION COMMENTS

Mail Addresses of SMTP Broadcast Recipients

Determines whether the e-mail addresses of the destinations that receive

transmissions broadcasted using SMTP protocol are recorded in the Journal.
0 For example:
"1st destination + Total number of destinations: 9" in the Journal indicates a
broadcast to 9 destinations.
0: Not recorded
1: Recorded

I-Fax Automatic Re-dial

Setting Determines whether the I-fax automatically redials
1
0: OFF when an error occurs.
1: ON

2-7 Not Used

I-fax Switch 06 - Not used (do not change the settings) [SP No. 1-102-007]

I-fax Switch 07 - Not used (do not change the settings) [SP No. 1-102-008]

I-fax Switch 08 [SP No. 1-102-009]

No FUNCTION COMMENTS

Memory Threshold for POP Mail Reception

0-7 This setting determines the amount of SAF (Store and Forward) memory. (SAF
stores fax messages to send later for transmission to more than one location, and
also holds incoming messages if they cannot be printed.) When the amount of SAF

SM 69 B267
 memory available falls below this setting, mail can no longer be received; received
mail is then stored on the mail server.
00-FF (0 to 1024 KB: HEX)

ƒ The hexadecimal number you enter is multiplied by 4 KB to determine the

amount of memory.

I-fax Switch 09 [SP No. 1-102-010]

No FUNCTION COMMENTS

0-3 Not used Do not change the settings

This setting determines the number of retries

when connection and transmission fails due to
4-7 Restrict TX Retries
errors.
01-F (1-15 Hex)

I-fax Switch 0A - Not used (do not change the settings) [SP No. 1-102-011]

I-fax Switch 0B - Not used (do not change the settings) [SP No. 1-102-012]

I-fax Switch 0C - Not used (do not change the settings) [SP No. 1-102-013]

I-fax Switch 0D - Not used (do not change the settings) [SP No. 1-102-014]

I-fax Switch 0E - Not used (do not change the settings) [SP No. 1-102-015]

I-fax Switch 0F [SP No. 1-102-016]

No FUNCTION COMMENTS

Delivery Method for SMTP RX Files

This setting determines whether files received with SMTP protocol are delivered or
0
output immediately.
0: Off. Files received via SMTP are output immediately without delivery.
1: On. Files received via SMTP are delivered immediately to their destinations.

B267 70 SM
1-7 Not used

4.3.3 PRINTER SWITCHES

Fax Option
B267
Printer Switch 00 [SP No. 1-103-001]

No FUNCTION COMMENTS

0: If a 2 page RX transmission is split, [*] is printed

in the bottom right corner of the 1st page and only
a [2] is printed in the upper right corner of the 2nd
page.
1: If a 2 page RX transmission is split into two
pages, for example, [*] [2] is printed in the bottom
Select page separation marks
right corner of the 1st page and only a [2] is printed
0 0: Off
in the upper right corner of the 2nd page.
1: On

ƒ This helps the user to identify pages that have

been split because the size of the paper is
smaller than the size of the document
received. (When A5 is used to print an A4 size
document, for example.)

Repetition of data when the 1: Default. 10 mm of the trailing edge of the

received page is longer than previous page are repeated at the top of the next
1 the printer paper page.
0: Off 0: The next page continues from where the
1: On previous page stopped without any repeated text.

This switch is only effective when user parameter

Prints the date and time on 02 - bit 2 (printing the received date and time on
received fax messages received fax messages) is enabled.
2
0: Disabled 1: The machine prints the received and printed
1: Enabled date and time at the bottom of each received
page.

3-7 Not used Do not change the settings.

SM 71 B267
Printer Switch 01 [SP No. 1-103-002]

No FUNCTION COMMENTS

0-2 Not used Do not change the settings.

Maximum print width used in

the setup protocol
Bit 4: 0, Bit 3: 0 = Not used These bits are only effective when bit 7 of printer
3-4
Bit 4: 0, Bit 3: 1 = A3 switch 01 is “1”.
Bit 4: 1, Bit 3: 0 = B4
Bit 4: 1, Bit 3: 1 = A4

5-6 Not used Do not change the settings.

0: The machine informs the transmitting machine

of the print width depending on the paper size
Received message width available from the paper feed stations.
restriction in the protocol Refer to the table on the next page for how the
7 signal to the sender machine chooses the paper width used in the
0: Disabled setup protocol (NSF/DIS).
1: Enabled 1: The machine informs the transmitting machine
of the fixed paper width which is specified by bits 3
and 4 above.

Printer Switch 02 [SP No. 1-103-003]

No FUNCTION COMMENTS

1st paper feed station usage 0: The paper feed station can be used to print fax
for fax printing messages and reports.
0
0: Enabled 1: The specified paper feed station will not be used
1: Disabled for printing fax messages and reports.

2nd paper feed station usage

ƒ Do not disable usage for a paper feed station
for fax printing
1 which has been specified by User Parameter
0: Enabled
Switch 0F (15), or which is used for the
1: Disabled

B267 72 SM
 3rd paper feed station usage Specified Cassette Selection feature.
for fax printing
2
0: Enabled
1: Disabled

Fax Option
B267
4th paper feed station usage
for fax printing
3
0: Enabled
1: Disabled

4-7 Not used Do not change the settings.

Printer Switch 03 [SP No. 1-103-004]

No FUNCTION COMMENTS

0: Incoming pages are printed without length

reduction.
Length reduction of received
(Page separation threshold: Printer Switch 03, bits
data
0 4 to 7)
0: Disabled
1: Incoming page length is reduced when printing.
1: Enabled
(Maximum reducible length: Printer Switches 04,
bits 0 to 4)

1-3 Not used Do not change the settings

Page separation threshold (with reduction

disabled with switch 03-0 above).
Page separation setting when For example, if this setting is set to "10", and A4 is
sub scan compression is the selected paper size:
4-7 forbidden If the received document is 10 mm or less longer
00-0F (0-15 mm: Hex) than A4, then the 10 mm are cut and only 1 page
Default: 6 mm prints.
If the received document is 10 mm longer than A4,
then the document is split into 2 pages.

Printer Switch 04 [SP No. 1-103-005]

SM 73 B267
 No FUNCTION COMMENTS

Maximum reducible length when length reduction is enabled with switch 03-0
above.
<Maximum reducible length> = <Paper length> + (N x 5mm)
“N” is the decimal value of the binary setting of bits 0 to 4.

Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Setting

0 0 0 0 0 0 mm
0-4
0 0 0 0 1 5 mm

0 0 1 0 0 20 mm

1 1 1 1 1 155 mm

For A5 sideways and B5 sideways paper

<Maximum reducible length> = <Paper length> + 0.75 x (N x 5mm)

Length of the duplicated image on the next page, when page separation has taken
place.
5 Bit 6: 0, Bit 5: 0 = 4 mm
6 Bit 6: 1, Bit 5: 0 = 10 mm
Bit 6: 0, Bit 5: 1 = 15 mm
Bit 6: 1, Bit 5: 1 = Not used

7 Not used. Do not change the setting.

Printer Switch 05 - Not used (do not change the settings)

Printer Switch 06 [SP No. 1-103-007]

No FUNCTION COMMENTS

Printing while a paper cassette

is pulled out, when the Just Cross reference:
0
Size Printing feature is Just size printing on/off – User switch 05, bit 5
enabled.

B267 74 SM
 0: Printing will not start
1: Printing will start if another
cassette has a suitable size of
paper, based on the paper

Fax Option
B267
size selection priority tables.

1-7 Not used. Do not change the settings.

Printer Switch 07 [SP No. 1-103-008]

No FUNCTION COMMENTS

0-3 Not used. Do not change the settings.

List of destinations in the

Communication Failure Report
for broadcasting 1: Only destinations where communication failure
4 0: All destinations occurred are printed on the Communication
1: Only destinations where Failure Report.
communication failure
occurred

5-7 Not used. Do not change the settings.

Printer Switch 08 - Not used (do not change the settings)

Printer Switch 09 - Not used (do not change the settings)

Printer Switch 0A - Not used (do not change the settings)

Printer Switch 0B [SP No. 1-103-012]

Erase margin at the trailing Adjusts the erase margin at the trailing edge for
0-2
edge for the fax printout the fax printout.

Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Setting

0 0 0 0 mm

SM 75 B267
 0 0 1 1 mm

0 1 0 2 mm

0 1 1 3 mm

1 0 0 4 mm

3-7 Not used. Do not change the settings.

Printer Switch 0C - Not used (do not change the settings)

Printer Switch 0D - Not used (do not change the settings)

Printer Switch 0E [SP No. 1-103-015]

No FUNCTION COMMENTS

0: A paper size that has the same width as the

Paper size selection priority
received data is selected first.
0 0: Width
1: A paper size which has enough length to print all
1: Length
the received lines without reduction is selected first.

Paper size selected for

This switch determines which paper size is selected
printing A4 width fax data
1 for printing A4 width fax data, when the machine
0: 8.5" x 11" size
has both A4 and 8.5" x 11" size paper.
1: A4 size

1: If all paper sizes in the machine require page

separation to print a received fax message, the
Page separation
machine does not print the message (Substitute
2 0: Enabled
Reception is used).
1: Disabled
After a larger size of paper is set in a cassette, the
machine automatically prints the fax message.

Printing the sample image on “Same size” means the sample image is printed at
reports 100%, even if page separation occurs.
3-4
Bit 4: 0, Bit 3: 0 = The upper User Parameter Switch 19 (13H) bit 4 must be set
half only to “0” to enable this switch.

B267 76 SM
 Bit 4: 0, Bit 3: 1 = 50% Refer to Detailed Section Descriptions for more on
reduction in sub-scan only this feature.
Bit 4: 1, Bit 3: 0 = Same size
Bit 4: 1, Bit 3: 1 = Not used

Fax Option
B267
5-6 Not used Do not change the settings.

Equalizing the reduction ratio 0: When page separation has taken place, all the
among separated pages pages are reduced with the same reduction ratio.
7 (Page Separation) 1: Only the last page is reduced to fit the selected
0: Enabled paper size when page separation has taken place.
1: Disabled Other pages are printed without reduction.

Printer Switch 0F [SP No. 1-103-016]

No FUNCTION COMMENTS

Smoothing feature
Bit 1: 0 Bit 0: 0 = Disabled (0, 0) (0, 1): Disable smoothing if the machine
0-1 Bit 1: 0 Bit 0: 1 = Disabled receives halftone images from other
Bit 1: 1 Bit 0: 0 = Enabled manufacturers fax machines frequently.
Bit 1: 1 Bit 0: 1 = Not used

2-7 Not used Do not change the settings.

4.3.4 COMMUNICATION SWITCHES

Communication Switch 00 [SP No. 1-104-001]

No FUNCTION COMMENTS

Compression modes available

in receive mode
These bits determine the compression capabilities
Bit 1: 0 Bit 0: 0 = MH only
0-1 to be declared in phase B (handshaking) of the
Bit 1: 0 Bit 0: 1 = MH/MR
T.30 protocol.
Bit 1: 1 Bit 0: 0 = MH/MR/MMR
Bit 1: 1 Bit 0: 1 = MH/MR/

SM 77 B267
 MMR/JBIG

Compression modes available

in transmit mode
Bit 3: 0 Bit 2: 0 = MH only These bits determine the compression capabilities
2-3 Bit 3: 0 Bit 2: 1 = MH/MR to be used in the transmission and to be declared
Bit 3: 1 Bit 2: 0 = MH/MR/MMR in phase B (handshaking) of the T.30 protocol.
Bit 3: 1 Bit 2: 1 = MH/MR/
MMR/JBIG

4 Not used Do not change the settings.

JBIG compression method:

Reception
Change the setting when communication
5 0: Only basic supported
problems occur using JBIG compression.
1: Basic and optional both
supported

JBIG compression method:

Transmission Change the setting when communication
6
0: Basic mode priority problems occur using JBIG compression.
1: Optional mode priority

7 Not used Do not change the settings.

Communication Switch 01 [SP No. 1-104-002]

No FUNCTION COMMENTS

If this bit is set to 0, ECM is switched off for all

ECM communications.
0
0: Off 1: On In addition, V.8 protocol and JBIG compression
are switched off automatically.

1-5 Not used Do not change the setting.

Maximum printable page The setting determined by these bits is informed to

6-7 length available the transmitting terminal in the pre-message
Bit 7: 0 Bit 6: 0 = No limit protocol exchange (in the DIS/NSF frames).

B267 78 SM
 Bit 7: 0 Bit 6: 1 = B4 (364 mm)
Bit 7: 1 Bit 6: 0 = A4 (297 mm)
Bit 7: 1 Bit 6: 1 = Not used

Fax Option
B267
Communication Switch 02 [SP No. 1-104-003]

No FUNCTION COMMENTS

If there are more consecutive error lines in the

received page than the threshold, the machine will
send a negative response. The Low and High
threshold values depend on the sub-scan
resolution, and are as follows.
G3 Burst error threshold
0
0: Low 1: High 100 dpi 6(L) 12(H)

200 dpi 12(L) 24(H)

300 dpi 18(L) 36(H)

400 dpi 24(L) 48(H)

Acceptable total error line ratio If the error line ratio for a page exceeds the
1
0: 5% 1: 10% acceptable ratio, RTN will be sent to the other end.

Treatment of pages received

with errors during G3
reception
2 0: Pages received with errors are not printed.
0: Deleted from memory
without printing
1: Printed

0: The next page will be sent even if RTN or PIN is

Hang-up decision when a
received.
negative code (RTN or PIN) is
1: The machine will send DCN and hang up if it
3 received during G3 immediate
receives RTN or PIN.
transmission
This bit is ignored for memory transmissions or if
0: No hang-up, 1: Hang-up
ECM is being used.

4-7 Not used Do not change the settings.

SM 79 B267
Communication Switch 03 [SP No. 1-104-004]

No FUNCTION COMMENTS

Maximum number of page 00 - FF (Hex) times.

0-7 retransmissions in a G3 This setting is not used if ECM is switched on.
memory transmission Default setting - 03(H)

Communication Switch 04 - Not used (do not change the settings)

Communication Switch 05 - Not used (do not change the settings)

Communication Switch 06 - Not used (do not change the settings)

Communication Switch 07 - Not used (do not change the settings)

Communication Switch 08 - Not used (do not change the settings)

Communication Switch 09 [SP No. 1-104-010]

No FUNCTION COMMENTS

Adjusts the interval of the I-fax dialing.

The interval of I-fax dialing is calculated by
0-7 I-Fax dial interval setting following formula.
[Interval time = specified value with this switch x
0.2 msec]

Communication Switch 0A [SP No. 1-104-011]

No FUNCTION COMMENTS

Point of resumption of memory 0: The transmission begins from the page where
transmission upon redialing transmission failed the previous time.
0
0: From the error page 1: Transmission begins from the first page, using
1: From page 1 normal memory transmission.

1-7 Not used Do not change the settings.

B267 80 SM
Communication Switch 0B – Not used (do not change the settings)

Communication Switch 0C – Not used (do not change the settings)

Fax Option
B267
Communication Switch 0D [SP No. 1-104-014]

No FUNCTION COMMENTS

00 to FF (Hex), unit = 4 kbytes

(e.g., 06(H) = 24 kbytes)
One page is about 24 kbytes.
The available memory The machine refers to this setting before each fax
threshold, below which ringing reception. If the amount of remaining memory is
0-7 detection (and therefore below this threshold, the machine cannot receive
reception into memory) is any fax messages.
disabled If this setting is kept at 0, the machine will detect
ringing signals and go into receive mode even if
there is no memory available. This will result in
communication failure.

Communication Switch 0E [SP No. 1-104-015]

No FUNCTION COMMENTS

06 to FF (Hex), unit = 2 s
Minimum interval between (e.g., 06(H) = 12 s)
0-7
automatic dialing attempts This value is the minimum time that the machine
waits before it dials the next destination.

Communication Switch 0F – Not used (do not change the settings.)

Communication Switch 10 [SP No. 1-104-017]

No FUNCTION COMMENTS

SM 81 B267
 Memory transmission:
Maximum number of dialing
0-7 01 – FE (Hex) times
attempts to the same
destination

Communication Switch 11 – Not used (do not change the settings.)

Communication Switch 12 [SP No. 1-104-019]

No FUNCTION COMMENTS

Memory transmission: Interval

0-7 between dialing attempts to 01 – FF (Hex) minutes
the same destination

Communication Switch 13 – Not used (do not change the settings.)

Communication Switch 14 [SP No. 1-104-021]

No FUNCTION COMMENTS

0: In immediate transmission, data scanned in inch

format are transmitted without conversion.
In memory transmission, data stored in the SAF
memory in mm format are transmitted without
conversion.
Inch-to-mm conversion during
Note: When storing the scanned data into SAF
0 transmission
memory, the fax unit always converts the data into
0: Disabled 1: Enabled
mm format.
1: The machine converts the scanned data or
stored data in the SAF memory to the format
which was specified in the set-up protocol
(DIS/NSF) before transmission.

1-5 Not used Do not change the factory settings.

B267 82 SM
 Available unit of resolution in
which fax messages are
For the best performance, do not change the
received
factory settings.
Bit 7: 0, Bit 6: 0 = mm

Fax Option
6-7 The setting determined by these bits is informed to

B267
Bit 7: 0, Bit 6: 1 = inch
the transmitting terminal in the pre-message
Bit 7: 1, Bit 6: 0 = mm and inch
protocol exchange (in the DIS/NSF frames).
(default)
Bit 7: 1, Bit 6: 1 = Not used

Communication Switch 15 – Not used (do not change the settings)

Communication Switch 16 – Not used (do not change the settings)

Communication Switch 17 – Not used (do not change the settings)

Communication Switch 18 - Not used (do not change the settings)

Communication Switch 19 - Not used (do not change the settings)

Communication Switch 1A - Not used (do not change the settings)

Communication Switch 1B [SP No. 1-104-028]

No FUNCTION COMMENTS

If the PABX does not support V.8/V.34 protocol

Extension access code (0 to 7) procedure, set this bit to “1” to disable V.8.
to turn V.8 protocol On/Off Example: If “0” is the PSTN access code, set bit 0
0-7 0: On to 1. When the machine detects “0” as the first
1: Off dialed number, it automatically disables V.8
protocol. (Alternatively, if “3” is the PSTN access
code, set bit 3 to 1.)

Communication Switch 1C [SP No. 1-104-029]

No FUNCTION COMMENTS

0-1 Extension access code (8 and Refer to communication switch 1B.

SM 83 B267
 9) to turn V.8 protocol On/Off Example: If “8” is the PSTN access code, set bit 0
0: On to 1. When the machine detects “8” as the first
1: Off dialed number, it automatically disables V.8
protocol. (If “9” is the PSTN access code, use bit
1.)

2-7 Not used Do not change the settings.

Communication Switch 1D - Not used (do not change the settings)

Communication Switch 1E - Not used (do not change the settings)

Communication Switch 1F - Not used (do not change the settings)

4.3.5 G3 SWITCHES

G3 Switch 00 [SP No. 1-105-001]

No FUNCTION COMMENTS

Monitor speaker during (0, 0): The monitor speaker is disabled all through
communication (tx and rx) the communication.
Bit 1: 0, Bit 0: 0 = Disabled (0, 1): The monitor speaker is on up to phase B in
0
Bit 1: 0, Bit 0: 1 = Up to Phase the T.30 protocol.
1
B (1, 0): Used for testing. The monitor speaker is on
Bit 1: 1, Bit 0: 0 = All the time all through the communication. Make sure that you
Bit 1: 1, Bit 0: 1 = Not used reset these bits after testing.

Monitor speaker during

1: The monitor speaker is enabled during memory
2 memory transmission
transmission.
0: Disabled 1: Enabled

3-7 Not used Do not change the settings.

G3 Switch 01 [SP No. 1-105-002]

No FUNCTION COMMENTS

B267 84 SM
0-1 Not used Do not change the settings.

2-3 Not used Do not change the settings.

1: The bytes in the DIS frame after the 4th byte will

Fax Option
B267
DIS frame length not be transmitted (set to 1 if there are
4
0: 10 bytes 1: 4 bytes communication problems with PC-based faxes
which cannot receive the extended DIS frames).

5 Not used Do not change the setting.

Forbid CED/AMsam output Do not change this setting (Default: 0: Off), unless
6 0: Off communication problem is caused by a CED or
1: On (Forbid output) ANSam transmission.

7 Not used Do not change the setting.

G3 Switch 02 [SP No. 1-105-003]

No FUNCTION COMMENTS

Change this bit to 1 only when the other end can

G3 protocol mode used only communicate with machines that send
0 0: Standard and non-standard T.30-standard frames only.
1: Standard only 1: Disables NSF/NSS signals (these are used in
non-standard mode communication)

1-6 Not used Do not change the settings.

Short preamble Refer to Appendix B in the Group 3 Facsimile

7
0: Disabled 1: Enabled Manual for details about Short Preamble.

G3 Switch 03 [SP No. 1-105-004]

No FUNCTION COMMENTS

DIS detection number 0: The machine will hang up if it receives the same
0 (Echo countermeasure) DIS frame twice.
0: 1 1: Before sending DCS, the machine will wait for

SM 85 B267
 1: 2 the second DIS which is caused by echo on the
line.

1 Not Used Do not change the settings.

0: V.8/V.34 communications will not be possible.

V.8 protocol Note:
2 0: Disabled Do not set to 0 unless the line condition is always
1: Enabled bad enough to slow down the data rate to 14.4
kbps or lower.

ECM frame size

3 0: 256 bytes Keep this bit at “0” in most cases.
1: 64 bytes

0: When using ECM in non-standard (NSF/NSS)

mode, the machine sends a CTC to drop back the
modem rate after receiving a PPR, if the following
condition is met in communications at 14.4, 12.0,
9.6, and 7.2 kbps.
CTC transmission conditions
0: After one PPR signal
4 received
NTransmit- Number of transmitted frames
1: After four PPR signals
NResend- Number of frames to be retransmitted
received (ITU-T standard)
1: When using ECM, the machine sends a CTC to
drop back the modem rate after receiving four
PPRs.
PPR, CTC: These are ECM protocol signals.
This bit is not effective in V.34 communications.

Modem rate used for the next

1: The machine’s tx modem rate will fall back
page after receiving a negative
5 before sending the next page if a negative code is
code (RTN or PIN)
received. This bit is ignored if ECM is being used.
0: No change 1: Fallback

6 Not Used Do not change the settings

Select detection of reverse This switch is used to prevent reverse polarity in

7
polarity in ringing ringing on the phone line (applied to PSTN-G3

B267 86 SM
 0: Off ringing). Do not change this setting
1: On 0: No detection Outside Japan
1: Detection Inside Japan only

Fax Option
B267
G3 Switch 04 [SP No. 1-105-005]

No FUNCTION COMMENTS

0 - F (Hex); 0 - 15 bits
Training error detection If the number of error bits in the received TCF is
0-3
threshold below this threshold, the machine informs the
sender that training has succeeded.

4-7 Not used Do not change the settings.

G3 Switch 05 [SP No. 1-105-006]

No FUNCTION COMMENTS

0-3 Initial Tx modem rate These bits set the initial starting modem rate for
transmission.
Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 bps
Use the dedicated transmission parameters if
0 0 0 1 2.4k you need to change this for specific receivers.
If a modem rate 14.4 kbps or slower is selected,
0 0 1 0 4.8k
V.8 protocol should be disabled manually.
0 0 1 1 7.2k Cross reference:
V.8 protocol on/off - G3 switch 03, bit2
0 1 0 0 9.6k

0 1 0 1 12.0k

0 1 1 0 14.4k

0 1 1 1 16.8k

1 0 0 0 19.2k

1 0 0 1 21.6k

1 0 1 0 24.0k

SM 87 B267
 1 0 1 1 26.4k

1 1 0 0 28.8k

1 1 0 1 31.2k

1 1 1 0 33.6k

Other settings - Not used

Initial modem type for 9.6 k or

7.2 kbps.
These bits set the initial modem type for 9.6 and
Bit 5: 0, Bit 4: 0 = V.29
4-5 7.2 kbps, if the initial modem rate is set at these
Bit 5: 0, Bit 4: 1 = V.17
speeds.
Bit 5: 1, Bit 4: 0 = V.34
Bit 5: 1, Bit 4: 1 = Not used

6-7 Not used Do not change the settings.

G3 Switch 06 [SP No. 1-105-007]

No FUNCTION COMMENTS

0-3 Initial Tx modem rate ƒ These bits set the initial starting modem
rate for reception.
Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Bps
ƒ Use a lower setting if high speeds pose
0 0 0 1 2.4k problems during reception.
ƒ If a modem rate 14.4 kbps or slower is
0 0 1 0 4.8k
selected, V.8 protocol should be
0 0 1 1 7.2k disabled manually.
Cross reference:
0 1 0 0 9.6k
V.8 protocol on/off - G3 switch 03, bit2
0 1 0 1 12.0k

0 1 1 0 14.4k

0 1 1 1 16.8k

1 0 0 0 19.2k

B267 88 SM
 1 0 0 1 21.6k

1 0 1 0 24.0k

1 0 1 1 26.4k

Fax Option
B267
1 1 0 0 28.8k

1 1 0 1 31.2k

1 1 1 0 33.6k

Other settings - Not used

Modem types available for reception ƒ The setting of these bits is used to
inform the transmitting terminal of the
Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Setting
available modem type for the machine
0 0 0 1 V.27ter in receive mode.
ƒ If V.34 is not selected, V.8 protocol must
0 0 1 0 V.27ter,V.29
be disabled manually.
V.27ter, Cross reference:
0 0 1 1
V.29, V.33 V.8 protocol on/off - G3 switch 03, bit2

4-7
V.27ter,
0 1 0 0 V.29,
V.17/V.33

V.27ter,
V.29,
0 1 0 1
V.17/V33,
V.34

Other settings - Not used

G3 Switch 07 [SP No. 1-105-008]

No FUNCTION COMMENTS

PSTN cable equalizer Use a higher setting if there is signal loss at higher
0-1
(tx mode: Internal) frequencies because of the length of wire between

SM 89 B267
 Bit 1: 0, Bit 0: 0 = None the modem and the telephone exchange.
Bit 1: 0, Bit 0: 1 = Low Use the dedicated transmission parameters for
Bit 1: 1, Bit 0: 0 = Medium specific receivers.
Bit 1: 1, Bit 0: 1 = High Also, try using the cable equalizer if one or more of
the following symptoms occurs.
Communication error
Modem rate fallback occurs frequently.

ƒ This setting is not effective in V.34

communications.

Use a higher setting if there is signal loss at higher

frequencies because of the length of wire between
the modem and the telephone exchange.
PSTN cable equalizer
Also, try using the cable equalizer if one or more of
(rx mode: Internal)
the following symptoms occurs.
Bit 3: 0, Bit 2: 0 = None
2-3 Communication error with error codes such as
Bit 3: 0, Bit 2: 1 = Low
0-20, 0-23, etc.
Bit 3: 1, Bit 2: 0 = Medium
Modem rate fallback occurs frequently.
Bit 3: 1, Bit 2: 1 = High

ƒ This setting is not effective in V.34

communications.

PSTN cable equalizer

(V.8/V.17 rx mode: External)
4 Keep this bit at “1”.
0: Disabled
1: Enabled

5 Not used Do not change the settings.

0: This uses the fixed table in the ROM for dial tone
Parameter selection for dial detection.
tone detection 1: This uses the specific parameter adjusted with
6
0: Normal parameter SRAM (69ECBEH - 69ECDEH). Select this if the
1: Specific parameter dial tone cannot be detected when the "Normal
parameter: 0" is selected.

7 Not used Do not change the settings.

B267 90 SM
G3 Switch 08 - Not used (do not change the settings)

G3 Switch 09 - Not used (do not change the settings)

Fax Option
B267
G3 Switch 0A [SP No. 1-105-011]

No FUNCTION COMMENTS

Maximum allowable carrier

drop during image data
These bits set the acceptable modem carrier drop
reception
time.
0-1 Bit 1: 0, Bit 0: 0 = 200
Try using a longer setting if error code 0-22 is
Bit 1: 0, Bit 0: 1 = 400
frequent.
Bit 1: 1, Bit 0: 0 = 800
Bit 1: 1, Bit 0: 1 = Not used

Select cancellation of
high-speed RX if carrier This switch setting determines if high-speed
2 signal lost while receiving receiving ends if the carrier signal is lost when
0: Off receiving during non-ECM mode
1: On

3 Not used Do not change the settings

This bit set the maximum interval between EOL

Maximum allowable frame
(end-of-line) signals and the maximum interval
interval during image data
4 between ECM frames from the other end.
reception.
Try using a longer setting if error code 0-21 is
0: 5 s 1: 13 s
frequent.

5 Not used Do not change the settings.

When the sending terminal is controlled by a

computer, there may be a delay in receiving page
Reconstruction time for the
data after the local machine accepts set-up data
6 first line in receive mode
and sends CFR. This is outside the T.30
0: 6 s 1: 12 s
recommendation. But, if this delay occurs, set this
bit to 1 to give the sending machine more time to

SM 91 B267
 send data.
Refer to error code 0-20.
ITU-T T.30 recommendation: The first line should
come within 5 s of CFR.

7 Not used Do not change the settings.

G3 Switch 0B Not used (do not change the settings).

G3 Switch 0C Not used (do not change the settings).

G3 Switch 0D Not used (do not change the settings).

G3 Switch 0E [SP No 1-105-015]

Set CNG send time interval

Some machines on the receiving side may not be able to automatically switch the
3-second CNG interval.

0-7 3000-2250ms: 3000-50xNms

High order bit
3000 – 50 x Nms 0F (3000 ms) ≤ N ≤ FF (2250 ms)

00-0E(3000-3700ms: 3000+50xNms
Low order bit
3000 – 50 x Nms 0F (3000 ms) ≤ N ≤ 0F (3700 ms)

G3 Switch 0F [SP No. 1-105-016]

No FUNCTION COMMENTS

Alarm when an error occurred

in Phase C or later If the customer wants to hear an alarm after each
0
0: Disabled error communication, change this bit to “1”.
1: Enabled

Alarm when the handset is

If the customer wants to hear an alarm if the
off-hook at the end of
1 handset is off-hook at the end of fax
communication
communication, change this bit to “1”.
0: Disabled

B267 92 SM
 1: Enabled

2-7 Not used Do not change the settings.

Fax Option
4.3.6 IP FAX SWITCHES

B267
IP Fax Switch 00 [SP No. 1-111-001]

No. FUNCTION COMMENTS

0 Not used Do not change this setting.

IP Fax Transport
1 Selects TCP or UDP protocol for IP-Fax
0: TCP, 1: UDP

IP Fax single port selection

2 Selects single data port.
0: OFF, 1: ON (enable)

IP Fax double ports (single data

3 port) selection Selects whether IP-Fax uses a double port.
0: OFF, 1: ON (enable)

IP Fax Gatekeeper Enables/disables the communication via the

4
0: OFF, 1: ON (enable) gatekeeper for IP-Fax.

IP Fax T30 bit signal reverse

5 Reverses the T30 bit signal.
0: LSB first, 1: MSB first

When "0" is selected, the max bit rate does

IP Fax max bit rate setting not affect the value of the DIS/DCS.
6
0: Not affected, 1: Affected When "1" is selected, the max bit rate affects
the value of the DIS/DCS.

When "0" is selected, fax data is received

without checking the telephone number.
IP Fax received telephone number
When "1" is selected, fax data is received
confirmation
7 only when confirming that the telephone
0: No confirmation, 1:
number from the sender matches the
Confirmation
registered telephone number in this
machine. If this confirmation fails, the line is

SM 93 B267
 disconnected.

IP-Fax Switch 01

No. FUNCTION COMMENTS

Select IP FAX Delay Level Raise the level by selecting a higher setting
if too many transmission errors are occurring
Bit3 Bit2 Bit1 Bit0 Setting
on the network.
0 0 0 0 Level 0 If TCP/UDP is enabled on the network, raise
this setting on the T.30 machine. Increasing
0-3 0 0 0 1 Level 1
the delay time allows the recovery of more
0 0 1 0 Level 2 lost packets.
If only UDP is enabled, increase the number
0 0 1 1 Level 3
of redundant packets.
Level 1~2: 3 Redundant packets
Level 3: 4 Redundant packets

Selects the preamble wait time.

[00 to 0f]
There are 16 values in this 4-bit binary
4-7 IP Fax preamble wait time setting switch combination.
Waiting time: set value level x 100 ms
Max: 0f (1500 ms) Min: 00 (No wait time)
The default is "0000" (00H).

IP Fax Switch 02 [SP No. 1-111-003]

No. FUNCTION COMMENTS

When "0" is selected, the bit signal reverse

method is decided by the maker code.
IP Fax bit signal reverse setting
When "1" is selected, the bit signal reverse
0 0: Maker code setting
method is decided by the internal bit switch.
1: Internal bit switch setting
When communicating between IP Fax
devices, LSB first is selected.)

B267 94 SM
 IP Fax transmission speed setting
Selects the transmit speed for IP Fax
1 0: Modem speed
communication.
1: No limitation

Fax Option
This bit switch sets the transport that has

B267
SIP transport setting
priority for receiving IP Fax data.
2 0: TCP
This function is activated only when the
1: UDP
sender has both TCP and UDP.

CCM connection When "1" is selected, only the connection

3 0: No CCM connection call message with H.323 or no tunneled
1: CCM connection H.245 is transmitted via CCM.

0: This answers the INVITE message from

Message reception selection from the SIP server not registered for the
non-registered SIP server machine.
4
0: Answer 1: This does not receive the INVITE
1: Not answer message from the SIP server not registered
for the machine and send a refusal message.

0: This does not limit the type of the image

compression with ECM communication.
ECM communication setting
1: When the other end machine is Ciscco,
5 0: No limit for image compression
this permits the image compression other
1: Limit for image compression
than JBIG or MMR with ECM
communication.

6-7 Not used Do not change these settings.

IP Fax Switch 03 [SP No. 1-111-004]

No. FUNCTION COMMENTS

Effective field limitation for G3

Limits the effective field for standard G3
0 standard function information
function information.
0: OFF, 1: 4byte (DIS)

Switching between G3 standard Enables/disables switching between G3

1
and G3 non standard standard and G3 non-standard.

SM 95 B267
 0: Enable switching
1: G3 standard only

2 Not used. Do not change this setting.

ECM frame size selection at

3 transmitting Selects the ECM frame size for sending.
0: 256byte, 1: 64byte

DIS detection times for echo

Sets the number of times for DIS to detect
4 prevention
echoes.
0: 1 time, 1: 2 times

When "0" is selected, the transmission

CTC transmission selection
condition is decided by error frame numbers.
5 0: PPRx1
When "1" is selected, the transmission
1: PPRx4
condition is based on the ITU-T method.

Shift down setting at receiving

Selects whether to shift down when negative
6 negative code
codes are received.
0: OFF, 1: ON

7 Not used Do not change this setting.

IP Fax Switch 04 [SP No. 1-111-005]

No. FUNCTION COMMENTS

0
Sets the TCF error threshold level.
1
TCF error threshold [00 to 0f]
2 The default is "1111" (0fH).

4-7 Not used Do not change these settings.

IP Fax Switch 05 [SP No. 1-111-006]

B267 96 SM
 No. FUNCTION COMMENTS

Modem bit rate setting for transmission

Sets the modem bit rate for transmission. The default is "0110" (14.4K bps).

Fax Option
B267
Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1

0 0 0 1 2400 bps

0 0 1 1 4800 bps

0 0 1 1 7200 bps

0 1 0 0 9600 bps

0 1 0 1 12.0 Kbps

0-3 0 1 1 0 14.4 Kbps

0 1 1 1 16.8 Kbps

1 0 0 0 19.2 Kbps

1 0 0 1 21.6 Kbps

1 0 1 0 24.0 Kbps

1 0 1 1 26.4 Kbps

1 1 0 0 28.8 Kbps

1 1 0 1 31.2 Kbps

1 1 1 0 33.6 Kbps

Modem setting for transmission

Sets the modem for transmission.
The default is "00" (V29).
Bit 5: 0, Bit 4: 0 = V29
4-5
Bit 5: 0, Bit 4: 1 = V17
Bit 5: 1, Bit 4: 0 = V34*
Bit 5: 1, Bit 4: 1 = Not used
*V34 is not supported for IP-Fax communication.

SM 97 B267
6-7 Not used Do not change these settings.

IP Fax Switch 06 [SP No. 1-111-007]

No. FUNCTION COMMENTS

Modem bit rate setting for reception

Sets the modem bit rate for reception. The default is "0110" (14.4K bps).

Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

0 0 0 1 2400 bps

0 0 1 0 4800 bps

0 0 1 1 7200 bps

0 1 0 0 9600 bps

0 1 0 1 12.0 Kbps

0 1 1 0 14.4 Kbps
0-3
0 1 1 1 16.8 Kbps

1 0 0 0 19.2 Kbps

1 0 0 1 21.6 Kbps

1 0 1 0 24.0 Kbps

1 0 1 1 26.4 Kbps

1 1 0 0 28.8 Kbps

1 1 0 1 31.2 Kbps

1 1 1 0 33.6 Kbps

Modem setting for reception

4-7
Sets the modem type for reception. The default is "0100" (V27ter, V29, V17).

B267 98 SM
 Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4

0 0 0 1 V27ter

0 0 1 0 V27ter, V29

Fax Option
B267
V27ter, V29, V33
0 0 1 1
(invalid)

0 1 0 0 V27ter, V29, V17

V27ter, V29, V17,

0 1 0 1
V34*

*V34 is not supported for IP-Fax communication.

IP Fax Switch 07 [SP No. 1-111-008]

No. FUNCTION COMMENTS

TSI information Adds or does not add TSI information to

0
0: Not added, 1: Added NSS(S).

DCN transmission setting at T1

Transmits or does not transmit DCN at T1
1 timeout
timeout.
0: Not transmitted, 1: Transmitted

2 Not used Do not change this setting.

Hang up setting at DIS reception

disabled Sets whether the machine disconnects after
3
0: No hang up DIS reception.
1: Hang up after transmitting DCN

Number of times for training Selects the number of times training is done
4
0: 1 time, 1: 2 times at the same bit rate.

Space CSI transmission setting at When "0" is selected, frame data is enabled.
5 no CSI registration When "1" is selected, the transmitted data is
0: Not transmitted, 1: Transmitted all spaces.

SM 99 B267
 6-7 Not used Do not change these settings.

IP Fax Switch 08 [SP No. 1-111-009]

No. FUNCTION COMMENTS

T1 timer adjustment
Adjusts the T1 timer.
The default is "00" (35 seconds).
0-1 Bit 1: 0, Bit 0: 0 = 35 sec -
Bit 1: 0, Bit 0: 1 = 40 sec
Bit 1: 1, Bit 0: 0 = 50 sec
Bit 1: 1, Bit 0: 1 = 60 sec

T4 timer adjustment
Adjust the T4 timer.
The default is "00" (3 seconds).
2-3 Bit 3: 0, Bit 2: 0 = 3 sec -
Bit 3: 0, Bit 2: 1 = 3.5 sec
Bit 3: 1, Bit 2: 0 = 4 sec
Bit 3: 1, Bit 2: 1 = 5 sec

Adjusts the fail safe timer. This timer sets the

T0 timer adjustment
interval between "setup" data transmission
Bit 5: 0, Bit 4: 0 = 75 sec
and T.38 phase decision. If your destination
4-5 Bit 5: 0, Bit 4: 1 = 120 sec
return is late on the network or G3 fax return
Bit 5: 1, Bit 4: 0 = 180 sec
is late, adjust the longer interval timer.
Bit 5: 1, Bit 4: 1 = 240 sec
The default is "00" (75 seconds).

6-7 Not used Do not change these settings.

B267 100 SM
4.4 NCU PARAMETERS

The following tables give the RAM addresses and the parameter calculation units that the
machine uses for ringing signal detection and automatic dialing. The factory settings for

Fax Option
B267
each country are also given. Most of these must be changed by RAM read/write (SP2-102),
but some can be changed using NCU Parameter programming (SP2-103, 104 and 105); if
SP2-103, 104 and 105 can be used, this will be indicated in the Remarks column. The RAM
is programmed in hex code unless (BCD) is included in the Unit column.

ƒ The following addresses describe settings for the standard NCU.

ƒ Change the fourth digit from “5” to “6” (e.g. 680500 to 680600) for the settings for
the first optional G3 interface unit and from “5” to “7” (e.g. 680700) for the settings
for the second optional G3 interface unit.

Address Function

680500 Country/Area code for NCU parameters

Use the Hex value to program the country/area code directly into this
address, or use the decimal value to program it using SP2-103-001

Country Country
Decimal Hex Decimal Hex
/Area /Area

France 00 00 USA 17 11

Germany 01 01 Asia 18 12

UK 02 02 Hong Kong 20 14

Italy 03 03 South Africa 21 15

Austria 04 04 Australia 22 16

Belgium 05 05 New Zealand 26 17

Denmark 06 06 Singapore 24 18

Finland 07 07 Malaysia 25 19

Ireland 08 08 China 26 1A

SM 101 B267
 Address Function

Norway 09 09 Taiwan 27 1B

Sweden 10 0A Korea 28 1C

Switzerland 11 0B Turkey 32 20

Portugal 12 0C Greece 33 21

Holland 13 0D Hungary 34 22

Spain 14 0E Czech 35 23

Israel 15 0F Poland 36 24

Address Function Unit Remarks

680501 Line current detection time Line current detection is

disabled.
680502 Line current wait time
20 ms Line current is not
detected if 680501
680503 Line current drop detect time
contains FF.

PSTN dial tone frequency upper

680504 If both addresses
limit (high byte)
Hz (BCD) contain FF(H), tone
PSTN dial tone frequency upper detection is disabled.
680505
limit (low byte)

PSTN dial tone frequency lower

680506 If both addresses
limit (high byte)
Hz (BCD) contain FF(H), tone
PSTN dial tone frequency lower detection is disabled.
680507
limit (low byte)

680508 PSTN dial tone detection time 20 ms If 680508 contains

FF(H), the machine
680509 PSTN dial tone reset time (LOW)
pauses for the pause
68050A PSTN dial tone reset time (HIGH) time (address 68050D /

B267 102 SM
Address Function Unit Remarks

PSTN dial tone continuous tone 68050E).

68050B
time Italy: See Note 2.

Fax Option
B267
PSTN dial tone permissible drop
68050C
time

68050D PSTN wait interval (LOW)

-
68050E PSTN wait interval (HIGH)

Detection is disabled if
68050F PSTN ring-back tone detection time 20 ms
this contains FF.

PSTN ring-back tone off detection

680510 20 ms -
time

PSTN detection time for silent

680511 period after ring-back tone detected 20 ms -
(LOW)

PSTN detection time for silent

680512 period after ring-back tone detected 20 ms -
(HIGH)

PSTN busy tone frequency upper

680513 If both addresses
limit (high byte)
Hz (BCD) contain FF(H), tone
PSTN busy tone frequency upper detection is disabled.
680514
limit (low byte)

PSTN busy tone frequency lower

680515 If both addresses
limit (high byte)
Hz (BCD) contain FF(H), tone
PSTN busy tone frequency lower detection is disabled.
680516
limit (low byte)

PABX dial tone frequency upper If both addresses

680517
limit (high byte) Hz (BCD) contain FF(H), tone
detection is disabled.
680518 PABX dial tone frequency upper

SM 103 B267
 Address Function Unit Remarks

limit (low byte)

PABX dial tone frequency lower

680519 If both addresses
limit (high byte)
Hz (BCD) contain FF(H), tone
PABX dial tone frequency lower detection is disabled.
68051A
limit (low byte)

68051B PABX dial tone detection time

68051C PABX dial tone reset time (LOW)

If 68051B contains FF,
68051D PABX dial tone reset time (HIGH)
the machine pauses for

PABX dial tone continuous tone the pause time (680520 /

68051E
time 20 ms 680521).

PABX dial tone permissible drop

68051F
time

680520 PABX wait interval (LOW)

-
680521 PABX wait interval (HIGH)

680522 PABX ringback tone detection time 20 ms If both addresses

contain FF(H), tone
PABX ringback tone off detection
680523 20 ms detection is disabled.
time

PABX detection time for silent

680524 period after ringback tone detected 20 ms
If both addresses
(LOW)
contain FF(H), tone
PABX detection time for silent detection is disabled.
680525 period after ringback tone detected 20 ms
(HIGH)

PABX busy tone frequency upper If both addresses

680526
limit (high byte) Hz (BCD) contain FF(H), tone
detection is disabled.
680527 PABX busy tone frequency upper

B267 104 SM
Address Function Unit Remarks

limit (low byte)

PABX busy tone frequency lower

Fax Option
680528 If both addresses

B267
limit (high byte)
Hz (BCD) contain FF(H), tone
PABX busy tone frequency lower detection is disabled.
680529
limit (low byte)

68052A Busy tone ON time: range 1

68052B Busy tone OFF time: range 1

68052C Busy tone ON time: range 2 20 ms

68052D Busy tone OFF time: range 2

68052E Busy tone ON time: range 3

-

68052F Busy tone OFF time: range 3

680530 Busy tone ON time: range 4

20 ms
680531 Busy tone OFF time: range 4

Busy tone continuous tone

680532
detection time

Busy tone signal state time tolerance for all ranges, and number of cycles
required for detection (a setting of 4 cycles means that ON-OFF-ON or
OFF-ON-OFF must be detected twice).
Tolerance (±)
680533 Bit 1: 0, Bit 0: 0 = 75% Bits 2 and 3 must always be kept at 0.
Bit 1: 0, Bit 0: 0 = 50% Bits 2 and 3 must always be kept at 0.
Bit 1: 0, Bit 0: 0 = 25%
Bit 1: 0, Bit 0: 0 = 12.5%
Bits 7, 6, 5, 4 - number of cycles required for cadence detection

International dial tone frequency If both addresses

680534
upper limit (high byte) Hz (BCD) contain FF(H), tone
detection is disabled.
680535 International dial tone frequency

SM 105 B267
 Address Function Unit Remarks

upper limit (low byte)

International dial tone frequency

680536 If both addresses
lower limit (high byte)
Hz (BCD) contain FF(H), tone
International dial tone frequency detection is disabled.
680537
lower limit (low byte)

International dial tone detection

680538
time

International dial tone reset time

680539
(LOW) If 680538 contains FF,
the machine pauses for
International dial tone reset time
68053A the pause time (68053D
(HIGH)
/ 68053E).

International dial tone continuous Belgium: See Note 2.

68053B 20 ms
tone time

International dial tone permissible

68053C
drop time

International dial wait interval

68053D
(LOW)
-
International dial wait interval
68053E
(HIGH)

Country dial tone upper frequency

68053F If both addresses
limit (HIGH)
contain FF(H), tone
Country dial tone upper frequency detection is disabled.
680540
limit (LOW)
Hz (BCD)
Country dial tone lower frequency
680541 If both addresses
limit (HIGH)
contain FF(H), tone
Country dial tone lower frequency detection is disabled.
680542
limit (LOW)

B267 106 SM
Address Function Unit Remarks

680543 Country dial tone detection time If 680543 contains FF,

the machine pauses for
680544 Country dial tone reset time (LOW) 20 ms

Fax Option
the pause time (680548 /

B267
680545 Country dial tone reset time (HIGH) 680549).

Country dial tone continuous tone

680546 - -
time

Country dial tone permissible drop

680547
time
20 ms -
680548 Country dial wait interval (LOW)

680549 Country dial wait interval (HIGH)

Time between opening or closing See Notes 3, 6 and 8.

68054A the DO relay and opening the OHDI 1 ms SP2-103-012
relay (parameter 11).

See Note 3.
68054B Break time for pulse dialing 1 ms SP2-103-013
(parameter 12).

See Note 3.
68054C Make time for pulse dialing 1 ms SP2-103-014
(parameter 13).

See Notes 3, 6 and 8.

Time between final OHDI relay SP2-103-015
68054D closure and DO relay opening or 1 ms (parameter 14).
closing This parameter is only
valid in Europe.

See Note 3 and 8.

Minimum pause between dialed
68054E SP2-103-016
digits (pulse dial mode)
20 ms (parameter 15).

Time waited when a pause is SP2-103-017

68054F
entered at the operation panel (parameter 16). See

SM 107 B267
 Address Function Unit Remarks

Note 3.

SP2-103-018
680550 DTMF tone on time
(parameter 17).
1 ms
SP2-103-019
680551 DTMF tone off time
(parameter 18).

SP2-103-020
Tone attenuation level of DTMF -N x 0.5
680552 (parameter 19).
signals while dialing –3.5 dBm
See Note 5.

SP2-103-021
(parameter 20).
Tone attenuation value difference The setting must be less
680553 between high frequency tone and -dBm x 0.5 than –5dBm, and should
low frequency tone in DTMF signals not exceed the setting at
680552h above.
See Note 5.

SP2-103-022
PSTN: DTMF tone attenuation level -N x 0.5
680554 (parameter 21). See
after dialling –3.5 dBm
Note 5.

ISDN: DTMF tone attenuation level

680555 -dBm x 0.5 See Note 5
after dialling

Do not change the

680556 Not used -
settings.

Time between 68054Dh (NCU This parameter takes

680557 parameter 14) and 68054Eh (NCU 1 ms effect when the country
parameter 15) code is set to France.

Do not change the

680558 Not used -
setting.

The Gs relay is closed

680559 Grounding time (ground start mode) 20 ms
for this interval.

B267 108 SM
Address Function Unit Remarks

The OHDI relay is open

68055A Break time (flash start mode) 1 ms
for this interval.

Fax Option
B267
International dial access code For a code of 100:
68055B
(High) BCD 68055B - F1
68055C - 00
68055C International dial access code (Low)

This time is waited for

each pause input after
the PSTN access code.
If this address contains
68055D PSTN access pause time 20 ms FF[H], the pause time
stored in address
68054F is used.
Do not set a number
more than 7 in the UK.

Bit 7: 0, Bit 6: 0, Bit 5: 0 = -25.0 dBm

Bit 7: 0, Bit 6: 0, Bit 5: 1 = -35.0 dBm
Progress tone detection level, and Bit 7: 0, Bit 6: 1, Bit 5: 0 = -30.0 dBm
68055E
cadence detection enable flags Bit 7: 1, Bit 6: 0, Bit 5: 0 = -40.0 dBm
Bit 7: 1, Bit 6: 1, Bit 5: 0 = -49.0 dBm
Bits 2, 0 - See Note 2.

68055F
Do not change the
To Not used -
settings.
680564

680565 Long distance call prefix (HIGH) BCD For a code of 0:

680565 – FF
680566 Long distance call prefix (LOW) BCD 680566 - FF

680567
Do not change the
to Not used -
settings.
680571

1000/ N
680572 Acceptable ringing signal SP2-103-003

SM 109 B267
 Address Function Unit Remarks

frequency: range 1, upper limit (parameter 02).

Acceptable ringing signal SP2-103-004

680573
frequency: range 1, lower limit (parameter 03).
(Hz).
Acceptable ringing signal SP2-103-005
680574
frequency: range 2, upper limit (parameter 04).

Acceptable ringing signal SP2-103-006

680575
frequency: range 2, lower limit (parameter 05).

SP2-103-007
Number of rings until a call is (parameter 06).
680576 1
detected The setting must not be
zero.

See Note 4.
Minimum required length of the first
680577 20 ms SP2-103-008
ring
(parameter 07).

Minimum required length of the SP2-103-009

680578 20 ms
second and subsequent rings (parameter 08).

Ringing signal detection reset time SP2-103-010

680579
(LOW) (parameter 09).
20 ms
Ringing signal detection reset time SP2-103-011 (parameter
68057A
(HIGH) 10).

68057B
Do not change the
to Not used -
settings.
680580

Interval between dialing the last

digit and switching the Oh relay
680581 over to the external telephone when 20 ms Factory setting: 500 ms
dialing from the operation panel in
handset mode.

B267 110 SM
Address Function Unit Remarks

Bits 0 and 1 - Handset off-hook detection time

Bit 1:0, Bit 0: 0 = 200 ms

Fax Option
Bit 1:0, Bit 0: 1 = 800 ms

B267
Other Not used
680582 Bits 2 and 3 - Handset on-hook detection time -
Bit 3: 0, Bit 2: 0 = 200 ms
Bit 3: 0, Bit 2: 1 = 800 ms
Other Not used
Bits 4 to 7 - Not used

680583
Do not change the
To Not used -
settings.
6805A0

Acceptable CED detection

6805A1 If both addresses
frequency upper limit (high byte)
BCD (Hz) contain FF(H), tone
Acceptable CED detection detection is disabled.
6805A2
frequency upper limit (low byte)

Acceptable CED detection

6805A3 If both addresses
frequency lower limit (high byte)
BCD (Hz) contain FF(H), tone
Acceptable CED detection detection is disabled.
6805A4
frequency lower limit (low byte)

20 ms ± 20
6805A5 CED detection time Factory setting: 200 ms
ms

Acceptable CNG detection

6805A6 If both addresses
frequency upper limit (high byte)
BCD (Hz) contain FF(H), tone
Acceptable CNG detection detection is disabled.
6805A7
frequency upper limit (low byte)

Acceptable CNG detection If both addresses

6805A8
frequency lower limit (high byte) BCD (Hz) contain FF(H), tone
detection is disabled.
6805A9 Acceptable CNG detection

SM 111 B267
 Address Function Unit Remarks

frequency lower limit (low byte)

Do not change the

6805AA Not used -
setting.

6805AB CNG on time 20 ms Factory setting: 500 ms

6805AC CNG off time 20 ms Factory setting: 3000 ms

The data is coded in the

Number of CNG cycles required for
6805AD - same way as address
detection
680533.

Do not change the

6805AE Not used -
settings.

Acceptable AI short protocol tone

6805AF (800Hz) detection frequency upper
If both addresses
limit (high byte)
Hz (BCD) contain FF(H), tone
Acceptable AI short protocol tone detection is disabled.
6805B0 (800Hz) detection frequency upper
limit (low byte)

Acceptable AI short protocol tone

6805B1 (800Hz) detection frequency lower
If both addresses
limit (high byte)
Hz(BCD) contain FF(H), tone
Acceptable AI short protocol tone detection is disabled.
6805B2 (800Hz) detection frequency lower
limit (low byte)

Detection time for 800 Hz AI short

6805B3 20 ms Factory setting: 360 ms
protocol tone

SP2-103-002
6805B4 PSTN: Tx level from the modem -N – 3 dBm
(parameter 01).

PSTN: 1100 Hz tone transmission - N 6805B4 - 0.5N 6805B5 –3.5 (dB)

6805B5
level See Note 7.

B267 112 SM
Address Function Unit Remarks

PSTN: 2100 Hz tone transmission - N6805B4 - 0.5N 6805B6 –3 (dB)

6805B6
level See Note 7.

Fax Option
B267
6805B7 PABX: Tx level from the modem - dBm -

PABX: 1100 Hz tone transmission

6805B8 - N 6805B7 - 0.5N 6805B8 (dB)
level

PABX: 2100 Hz tone transmission

6805B9 - N 6805B7 - 0.5N 6805B9 (dB)
level

Modem turn-on level (incoming -37-0.5N

6805BD -
signal detection level) (dBm)

6805BE
Do not change the
to Not used -
settings.
6805C6

Bits 0 to 3 – Not used

6805C7 Bit 4 = V.34 protocol dump 0: Simple, 1: Detailed (default)
Bits 5 to 7 – Not used.

6805C8
Do not change the
to Not used -
settings.
6805D9

6805DA T.30 T1 timer 1s

1: Maximum wait time

for post message
(EOP/EOM/MPS) can
6805E0 Maximum wait time for post 0: 12 s be changed to 30 s.
bit 3 message 1: 30 s Change this bit to “1” if
communication errors
occur frequently during
V.17 reception.

Do not change these

6805E3
Voltage setting to detect off-hook 0: Auto settings
for voltage/DP detection for an 1: Fixed V

SM 113 B267
 Address Function Unit Remarks

externally connected line.

Here is a summary of the fixed voltage settings (1:

Fixed) for an externally connected line.

Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 -

0 0 0 0 Not used

0 0 0 1 2.75 V

0 0 1 0 5.5 V

1 0 0 0 22 V

1 1 1 1 41.25 V

0 RT=0 (Low)
Bit 1
Bit 1 sets the level of
1 RT=1 (High)
the call signal, Bit 3
6805E4 0：，1：
sets the call signal 0 RZ=0 (High)
impedance Bit 3
RZ=1
1
(Composite)

6805E5 Bit 0 sets the ring 0 Auto If any setting is changed,

Bit 0
detection method, Bit select a setting that is
1 Fixed
1 sets the ring higher than the default
detection method 0 Use RDTP setting.
Bit 1
when fixed.
1 Use RDTN

Here is a summary of the voltages for the

detection of off-hook for DP detection.

Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 -

0 0 0 0 Not used

0 0 0 1 2.75 V

B267 114 SM
 Address Function Unit Remarks

0 0 1 0 5.5 V

1 0 0 0 22 V

Fax Option
B267
1 1 1 1 41.25 V

NOTES
1. If a setting is not required, store FF in the address.
2. Italy and Belgium only
RAM address 68055E: the lower four bits have the following meaning.
Bit 2 - 1: International dial tone cadence detection enabled (Belgium)
Bit 1 - Not used
Bit 0 - 1: PSTN dial tone cadence detection enabled (Italy)

If bit 0 or bit 2 is set to 1, the functions of the following RAM addresses are changed.
680508 (if bit 0 = 1) or 680538 (if bit 2 = 1): tolerance for on or off state
duration (%), and number of cycles required for detection, coded as in address 680533.
68050B (if bit 0 = 1) or 68053B (if bit 2 = 1): on time, hex code (unit = 20 ms)
68050C (if bit 0 = 1) or 68053C (if bit 2 = 1): off time, hex code (unit = 20 ms)
3. Pulse dial parameters (addresses 68054A to 68054F) are the values for 10 pps. If 20
pps is used, the machine automatically compensates.
4. The first ring may not be detected until 1 to 2.5 wavelengths after the time specified by
this parameter.
5. The calculated level must be between 0 and 10.
The attenuation levels calculated from RAM data are:
High frequency tone:
ƒ – 0.5 x N680552/680554–3.5 dBm
ƒ – 0.5 x N680555 dBm
Low frequency tone:
ƒ – 0.5 x (N680552/680554 + N680553) –3.5 dBm
ƒ – 0.5 x (N680555 + N680553) dBm

ƒ N680552, for example, means the value stored in address 680552(H)

6. 68054A: Europe - Between Ds opening and Di opening, France - Between Ds closing
and Di opening

SM 115 B267
 68054D: Europe - Between Ds closing and Di closing, France - Between Ds opening
and Di closing
7. Tone signals which frequency is lower than 1500Hz (e.g., 800Hz tone for AI short
protocol) refer to the setting at 6805B5h. Tones which frequency is higher than 1500Hz
refer to the setting at 6805B6h.
8. 68054A, 68054D, 68054E: The actual inter-digit pause (pulse dial mode) is the sum of
the period specified by the RAM addresses 68054A, 68054D, and 68054E.

B267 116 SM
4.5 DEDICATED TRANSMISSION PARAMETERS

There are two sets of transmission parameters: Fax and E-mail

Each Quick Dial Key and Speed Dial Code has eight bytes of programmable parameters

Fax Option
B267
allocated to it. If transmissions to a particular machine often experience problems, store that
terminal’s fax number as a Quick Dial or Speed Dial, and adjust the parameters allocated to
that number.
The programming procedure will be explained first. Then, the eight bytes will be described.
4.5.1 PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE
1. Set the bit 0 of System Bit Switch 00 to 1.
2. Enter Address Book Management mode ([User Tools]> System Settings> Key
Operator> Address Book Management).
3. Select the address book that you want to program.
4. For the fax parameter, select "Fax Dest.", for the E-mail parameter, select "E-mail", then
press “Start”. Make sure that the LED of the Start button lights green.
5. The settings for the switch 00 are now displayed. Press the bit number that you wish to
change.
6. To scroll through the parameter switches, either:
7. Select the next switch: press “Next” or Select the previous switch: “Prev.” until the
correct switch is displayed. Then go back to step 6.
8. After the setting is changed, press “OK”.
9. After finishing, reset bit 0 of System Bit Switch 00 to 0.
4.5.2 PARAMETERS
Fax Parameters
The initial settings of the following fax parameters are all FF(H) - all the parameters are
disabled.

Switch 00

FUNCTION AND COMMENTS

ITU-T T1 time (for PSTN G3 mode)

If the connection time to a particular terminal is longer than the NCU parameter setting,
adjust this byte. The T1 time is the value stored in this byte (in hex code), multiplied by 1
second.

SM 117 B267
Range:
0 to 120 s (00h to 78h)
FFh - The local NCU parameter factory setting is used.
Do not program a value between 79h and FEh.

Switch 01

No FUNCTION COMMENTS

Tx level

Bit4 Bit3 Bit2 Bit1 Bit0 If communication with a particular

remote terminal often contains
0 0 0 0 0 0
errors, the signal level may be
0 0 0 0 1 –1 inappropriate. Adjust the Tx level for
communications with that terminal
0 0 0 1 0 –2
0-4 until the results are better.
0 0 0 1 1 –3 If the setting is “Disabled”, the NCU
parameter 01 setting is used.
0 0 1 0 0 –4

ƒ Do not use settings other

than listed on the left.
0 1 1 1 1 –15

1 1 1 1 1 Disabled

Use a higher setting if there is signal

loss at higher frequencies because
of the length of wire between the
Cable equalizer modem and the telephone exchange
Bit 7: 0, Bit 6: 0, Bit 5: 0 = None when calling the number stored in
Bit 7: 0, Bit 6: 0, Bit 5: 1 = Low this Quick/Speed Dial.
5-7
Bit 7: 0, Bit 6: 1, Bit 5: 0 = Medium Also, try using the cable equalizer if
Bit 7: 0, Bit 6: 1, Bit 5: 1 = High one or more of the following
Bit 7: 1, Bit 6: 1, Bit 5: 1 = Disabled symptoms occurs.
Communication error with error
codes such as 0-20, 0-23, etc.
Modem rate fallback occurs

B267 118 SM
 frequently.

ƒ Do not use settings other

than listed on the left.

Fax Option
B267
If the setting is “Disabled”, the bit
switch setting is used.

Switch 02

No FUNCTION COMMENTS

0-3 Initial Tx modem rate If training with a particular remote terminal

always takes too long, the initial modem rate
Bit3 Bit2 Bit1 Bit0 bps
may be too high. Reduce the initial Tx
0 0 0 0 Not used modem rate using these bits.
For the settings 14.4 or kbps slower, Switch
0 0 0 1 2400
04 bit 4 must be changed to 0.
0 0 1 0 4800
ƒ Do not use settings other than listed
0 0 1 1 7200
on the left. If the setting is
0 1 0 0 9600 “Disabled”, the bit switch setting is
used.
0 1 0 1 12000

0 1 1 0 14400

0 1 1 1 16800

1 0 0 0 19200

1 0 0 1 21600

1 0 1 0 24000

1 0 1 1 26400

1 1 0 0 28800

1 1 0 1 31200

SM 119 B267
 1 1 1 0 33600

1 1 1 1 Disabled

Other settings: Not used

4-7 Not used Do not change the settings.

Switch 03

No FUNCTION COMMENTS

Inch-mm conversion before tx

The machine uses inch-based resolutions for
Bit 1: 0, Bit 0: 0
scanning. If “inch only” is selected, the printed
= Inch-mm conversion
copy may be slightly distorted at the other end if
0-1 available
that machine uses mm-based resolutions.
Bit 1: 0, Bit 0: 1 = Inch only
If the setting is “Disabled”, the bit switch setting is
Bit 1: 1, Bit 0: 0 = Not used
used.
Bit 1: 1, Bit 0: 1 = Disabled

DIS/NSF detection method

(0, 1): Use this setting if echoes on the line are
Bit 3: 0, Bit 2: 0
interfering with the set-up protocol at the start of
= First DIS or NSF
transmission. The machine will then wait for the
2-3 Bit 3: 0, Bit 2: 1
second DIS or NSF before sending DCS or NSS.
= Second DIS or NSF
If the setting is “Disabled”, the bit switch setting is
Bit 3: 1, Bit 2: 0 = Not used
used.
Bit 3: 1, Bit 2: 1 = Disabled

If transmissions to a specific destination always

end at a lower modem rate (14,400 bps or lower),
V.8 protocol
disable V.8 protocol so as not to use V.34 protocol.
4 0: Off
0: V.34 communication will not be possible.
1: Disabled
If the setting is “Disabled”, the bit switch setting is
used.

Compression modes available This bit determines the capabilities that are
in transmit mode informed to the other terminal during transmission.
5
0: MH only If the setting is “Disabled”, the bit switch setting is
1: Disabled used.

B267 120 SM
 For example, if ECM is switched on but is not
wanted when sending to a particular terminal, use
ECM during transmission
the (0, 0) setting.
Bit 7: 0, Bit 6: 0 = Off

Fax Option
6-7 Bit 7: 0, Bit 6: 1 = On

B267
ƒ V.8/V.34 protocol and JBIG compression are
Bit 7: 1, Bit 6: 0 = Not used
automatically disabled if ECM is disabled.
Bit 7: 1, Bit 6: 1 = Disabled
ƒ If the setting is “Disabled”, the bit switch
setting is used.

Switch 04 - Not used (do not change the settings)

Switch 05 - Not used (do not change the settings)

Switch 06 - Not used (do not change the settings)

Switch 07 - Not used (do not change the settings)

Switch 08 - Not used (do not change the settings)

Switch 09 - Not used (do not change the settings)

E-mail Parameters
The initial settings of the following e-mail parameters are all "0" (all parameters disabled).

Switch 00

No FUNCTION COMMENTS

MH Compression mode
for e-mail attachments Switches MH compression on and off for files
0
0: Off attached to e-mails for sending.
1: On

MR Compression mode
for e-mail attachments Switches MR compression on and off for files
1
0: Off attached to e-mails for sending.
1: On

2 MMR Compression mode Switches MMR compression on and off for files

SM 121 B267
 for e-mail attachments attached to e-mails for sending.
0: Off
1: On

3-6 Not used Do not change these settings.

Designates the bits to

reference for
The "0" selection (default) references the settings for
compression method of
7 Bits 00, 01, 02 above. The "1" selection ignores the
e-mail attachments
selections of Bits 00, 01, 02.
0: Registered (Bit 0 to 6)
1: No registration.

Switch 01

No FUNCTION COMMENTS

Original width of e-mail

attachment: A4 Sets the original width of the e-mail attachment as
0
0: Off A4.
1: On

Original width of e-mail

attachment: B4 Sets the original width of the e-mail attachment as
1
0: Off B4.
1: On

Original width of e-mail

attachment: A3 Sets the original width of the e-mail attachment as
2
0: Off A3.
1: On

3-6 Not used Do not change these settings.

Designates the bits to

reference for original size The "0" selection (default) references the settings for
7 of e-mail attachments Bits 00, 01, 02 above. The "1" selection ignores the
0: Registered (Bit 0 to 6) selections of Bits 00, 01, 02.
1: No registration.

B267 122 SM
Switch 02

No FUNCTION COMMENTS

Fax Option
B267
Line resolution of e-mail
attachment: 200 x 100 Sets the line resolution of the e-mail attachment as
0
0: Off 200 x100.
1: On

Line resolution of e-mail

attachment: 200 x 200 Sets the line resolution of the e-mail attachment as
1
0: Off 200 x 200.
1: On

Line resolution of e-mail

attachment: 200 x 400 Sets the line resolution of the e-mail attachment as
2
0: Off 200 x 400.
1: On

3 Not used Do not change these settings.

Line resolution of e-mail

attachment: 400 x 400 Sets the line resolution of the e-mail attachment as
4
0: Off 400 x 400.
1: On

5-6 Not used Do not change these settings.

Designates the bits to

reference for original size The "0" selection (default) references the settings for
7 of e-mail attachments Bits 00, 01, 02, 04 above. The "1" selection ignores
0: Registered (Bit 0 to 6) the selections of Bits 00, 01, 02, 04.
1: No registration.

Switch 03 - Not used (do not change the settings)

Switch 04

SM 123 B267
 No FUNCTION COMMENTS

If the other ends have the addresses, which have

Full mode address the full mode function flag ("0"), this machine
selection determines them as full mode standard machines.
0 0: Full mode address ƒ This machine attaches the "demand of reception
1: No full mode (simple confirmation" to a message when transmitting.
mode) ƒ This machine updates the reception capability to
the address book when receiving.

1-7 Not used Do not change these settings.

Switch 05

No FUNCTION COMMENTS

Directr transmission
selection to SMTP server Allows or does not allow the direct transmission to
0
0: ON SMTP server.
1: OFF

1-7 Not used Do not change these settings.

Switch 06 - Not used (do not change the settings)

Switch 07 - Not used (do not change the settings)

Switch 08 - Not used (do not change the settings)

Switch 09 - Not used (do not change the settings)

B267 124 SM
4.6 SERVICE RAM ADDRESSES

ƒ Do not change the settings which are marked as “Not used” or “Read only.”

Fax Option
B267
680001 to 680004(H) - ROM version (Read only)
680001(H) - Revision number (BCD)
680002(H) - Year (BCD)
680003(H) - Month (BCD)
680004(H) - Day (BCD)
680006 to 680015(H) - Machine’s serial number (16 digits - ASCII)
680018(H) - Total program checksum (low)
680019(H) - Total program checksum (high)
680020 to 68003F(H) - System bit switches
680050 to 68005F(H) - Printer bit switches
680060 to 68007F(H) - Communication bit switches
680080 to 68008F(H) - G3 bit switches
680090 to 68009F(H) - G3-2 bit switches: Not used
6800A0 to 6800AF(H) - G3-3 bit switches: Not used
6800D0(H) - User parameter switch 00 (SWUER_00) : Not used
6800D1(H) - User parameter switch 01 (SWUSR_01) : Not used
6800D2(H) - User parameter switch 02 (SWUSR_02)
Bit 0: Forwarding mark printing on forwarded messages 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
Bit 1: Center mark printing on received copies
(This switch is not printed on the user parameter list.)
0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
Bit 2: Reception time printing
(This switch is not printed on the user parameter list.)
0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
Bit 3: TSI print on received messages 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
Bit 4: Checkered mark printing
(This switch is not printed on the user parameter list.)
0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
Bit 5: Not used
Bit 6: Not used
Bit 7: Not used

SM 125 B267
6800D3(H) - User parameter switch 03 (SWUSR_03: Automatic report printout)
Bit 0: Transmission result report (memory transmissions) 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 1: Not used
Bit 2: Memory storage report 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 3: Polling reserve report (polling reception) 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 4: Polling result report (polling reception) 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 5: Transmission result report (immediate transmissions) 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 6: Not used
Bit 7: Journal 0: Off, 1: On
6800D4(H) - User parameter switch 04 (SWUSR_04: Automatic report printout)
Bit 0: Not used
Bit 1: Automatic communication failure report and transfer result report output 0:
Off, 1: On
Bits 2 to 3: Not used
Bit 4: Indicates the parties 0: Not indicated, 1: Indicated
Bit 5: Include sender’s name on reports 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 6: Not used
Bit 7: Inclusion of a sample image on reports 0: Off, 1: On
6800D5(H) - User parameter switch 05 (SWUSR_05)
Bit 0: Substitute reception when the base copier is in an SC condition
0: Enabled, 1: Disabled
Bits 1 and 2: Condition for substitute rx when the machine cannot print messages
(Paper end, toner end, jam, and during night mode)
Bit 2: 0, Bit 1: 0 = The machine receives all the fax messages.
Bit 2: 0, Bit 1: 1 = The machine receives the fax messages with RTI or CSI.
Bit 2: 1, Bit 1: 0 = The machine receives the fax messages with the same ID code.
Bit 2: 1, Bit 1: 1 = The machine does not receive anything.
Bit 3: Not used
Bit 4: Not used
Bit 5: Just size printing 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 6: Not used
Bit 7: Add paper display when a cassette is empty 0: Off, 1: On
6800D6(H) - User parameter switch 06 (SWUSR_06): Not used
6800D7(H) - User parameter switch 07 (SWUSR_07)
Bit 0 Ringing 0: Off, 1: On
Bit1: Automatic answering message 0: Off, 1: On

B267 126 SM
 Bit 2: Parallel memory transmission 0: Off, 1: On
Bits 3 and 4: Not used
Bit 5: Remote control 0: Off, 1: On
Bits 6 and 7: Not used

Fax Option
6800D8(H) - User parameter switch 08 (SWUSR_08)

B267
Bits 0 and 1: Not used.
Bit 2: Authorized reception
0: Only faxes from senders whose RTIs/CSIs are specified for this feature are
accepted.
1: Only faxes from senders whose RTIs/CSIs are not specified for this feature are
accepted.
Bits 3 to 7: Not used.
6800D9(H) - User parameter switch 09 (SWUSR_09): Not used
6800DA(H) - User parameter switch 10 (SWUSR_0A)
Bits 0 to 2: Not used
Bit 3: Page reduction 0: Off, 1: On
Bits 4 and 5: Not used
Bit 6: Use both e-mail notification and printed reports to confirm the transmission
results 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 7: Not used
6800DB(H) - User parameter switch 11 (SWUSR_0B)
Bits 0 and 1: Not used
Bit 2: White original detection 0: Off, 1: On (alarm and alert message on the LCD)
Bit 3: Receive rejection for 1300 Hz transmission 0: Off (receive), 1: On (not
receive)
Bit 5: Not used
Bit 6: Printout of messages received while acting as a forwarding station 0: Off, 1:
On
Bit 7: Not used
6800DC(H) - User parameter switch 12 (SWUSR_0C): Not used
6800DD(H) - User parameter switch 13 (SWUSR_0D): Not used
6800DE(H) - User parameter switch 14 (SWUSR_0E)
Bit 0: Message printout while the machine is in Night Printing mode 0: On, 1: Off
Bit 1: Maximum document length detection 0: Double letter, 1: Longer than
double-letter (well log) – up to 1,200 mm
Bit 2: Not used

SM 127 B267
 Bit 3: Fax mode settings, such as resolution, before a mode key
(Copy/Fax/Printer/Scanner) is pressed 0: Not cleared, 1: Cleared
Bits 4 to 6: Not used
Bit 7: Not used
6800DF(H) - User parameter switch 15 (SWUSR_0F)
(This switch is not printed on the user parameter list.)
Bits 0, 1 and 2: Cassette for fax printout
Bit 2: 0, Bit 1: 0, Bit 0: 1 = 1st paper feed station
Bit 2: 0, Bit 1: 1, Bit 0: 0 = 2nd paper feed station
Bit 2: 0, Bit 1: 1, Bit 0: 1 = 3rd paper feed station
Bit 2: 1, Bit 1: 0, Bit 0: 0 = 4th paper feed station
Bit 2: 1, Bit 1: 0, Bit 0: 1 = LCT
Other settings Not used
Bits 3 and 4: Not used
Bit 5: Using the cassette specified by bits 0, 1 and 2 above only 0: On, 1: Off
Bits 6 and 7: Not used
6800E0(H) – User parameter switch 16 (SWUSR_10)
(This switch is not printed on the user parameter list.)
Bits 0 and 1: Not used
Bit 2: Paper size selection priority for an A4 size fax message when A4/LT size
paper is not available. 0: A3 has priority, 1: B4 has priority
Bits 3 to 7: Not used
6800E1(H) – User parameter switch 17 (SWUSR_11)
Bit 0: Not used
Bit 1: Not used
Bit 2: Inclusion of the “Add” button when a sequence of Quick/Speed dials is
selected for broadcasting 0:Not needed, 1: Needed
Bits 3 to 6: Not used
Bit 7: Press “Start” key without an original when using the on hook dial or the
external telephone,
0: displays “Cannot detect original size”. 1: Receives fax messages.
6800E2(H) - User parameter switch 18 (SWUSR_12)
Bit 0: TTI date 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 1: TTI sender 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 2: TTI file number 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 3: TTI page number 0: Off, 1: On

B267 128 SM
 Bits 4 to 6: Not used
Bit 7: Japan only
6800E3(H) - User parameter switch 19 (SWUSR_13)
Bit 0: Not used

Fax Option
Bit 1: Journal format

B267
0: The Journal is separated into transmissions and receptions
1: The Journal is separated into G3-1, G3-2, and G3-3 communications
Bit 2: Not used
Bit 3: 90° image rotation during B5 portrait Tx (This switch is not printed on the user
parameter list.) 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 4: Reduction of sample images on reports to 50% in the main scan and
sub-scan directions. (This switch is not printed on the user parameter list.) 0:
Technician adjustment (printer switch 0E bits 3 and 4), 1: 50% reduction
Bit 5: Use of A5 size paper for reports (This switch is not printed on the user
parameter list.) 0: Off, 1: On
Bits 6 and 7: Not used
6800E4(H) - User parameter switch 20 (SWUSR_14)
Bit 0: Automatic printing of the LAN fax result report 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 1: Not used.
Bits 2 to 5: Store documents in memory which could not be printed from PC fax
(LAN fax) driver

Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Setting

0 0 0 0 0 min.

0 0 0 1 1 min.

1 1 1 0 14 min.

1 1 1 1 15 min.

Bits 6 and 7: Not used.

6800E5(H) - User parameter switch 21 (SWUSR_15)
Bit 0: Print results of sending reception notice request message 0: Disabled (print
only when error occurs), 1: Enabled
Bit 1: Respond to e-mail reception acknowledgment request 0: Disabled, 1:

SM 129 B267
 Enabled
Bit 2: Not used
Bit 3: File format for forwarded folders 0: TIFF, 1:PDF
Bit 4: Transmit Journal by E-mail 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
Bit 5: Not used
Bit 6: Network error display 0: Displayed, 1: Not displayed
Bit 7: Transmit error mail notification 0: Enabled, 1: Disabled
6800E6(H) - User parameter switch 22 (SWUSR_16)
(This switch is not printed on the user parameter list.)
Bit 0: Dial tone detection (PSTN 1) 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
Bits 1 to 7: Not used
6800E7(H) – User parameter switch 23 (SWUSR_17): Not used
6800E8(H) - User parameter switch 24 (SWUSR_18): Not used
6800E9(H) - User parameter switch 25 (SWUSR_19)
Bit 0: Not used
Bit 1: Reception mode switch timer 0: Off, 1: On (switching Fax or Fax/Tel)
Bit 2: Mode priority switch 0: Fax first, 1: Tel first
Bit 3: Dial in function (Japan Only)
Bit 4: RDS operation 0: Not acceptable, 1: Acceptable for the limit specified by
system switch 03

ƒ This bit is only effective when RDS operation can be selected by the user
(see system switch 02).
Bits 5 to 7: Not used
6800EA(H) and 6800EB(H) - User parameter switches 26 and 27 (SWUSR_1A
and 1B): Not used
6800EC(H) - User parameter switch 28(SWUSR_1C)
Xxxxx
6800ED(H) - User parameter switch 29(SWUSR_1D)
xxxxxx
6800EE(H) and 6800EF(H) - User parameter switches 30 and 31 (SWUSR_1E
and 1F): Not used
6800F0(H) - User parameter switch 32 (SWUSR_20)
Bit 0: Quotation priority for a destination when there is no destination of the
specified type
0: Paper output priority = Priority order: 1. IP-fax destination, 2. Fax Number, 3.

B267 130 SM
 E-mail address, 4. Folder
1: Electric putout order = Priority order: 1. E-mail address, 2. Folder, 3. IP-fax
destination, 4. Fax number
Bits 1 to 7: Not used

Fax Option
6800F1(H) - User parameter switch 33 (SWUSR_21): Not used

B267
6800F2(H) - User parameter switch 34 (SWUSR_22)
Bit 0: Gatekeeper server used with IP-Fax 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
Bit 1: SIP server used with IP-Fax 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
Bits 2 to 7: Not used
680100 to 68010F(H) - G4 Parameter Switches – Not used
680110 to 68012F(H) - G4 Internal Switches – Not used
680130 to 68016F(H) - Service Switches
680170 to 68017F(H) - IFAX Switches
680180 to 68018F(H) - IP-FAX Switches
680190 to 6801AF(H) - Service station’s fax number (SP3-101)
6801B0 to 6801B9(H) - Own fax PABX extension number
6801BA to 6801C3(H) - Own fax number (PSTN) – Not used
6801C4 to 6801D7(H) - Own fax number (ISDN G4) – Not used
6801D8 to 6801E3(H) - The first subscriber number (ISDN G3) – Not used
6801E4 to 6801EF(H) - The second subscriber number (ISDN G3) – Not used
6801F0 to 6801FB(H) - The first subscriber number (ISDN G4) – Not used
6801FC to 680207(H) - The second subscriber number (ISDN G4) – Not used
680208 to 68021B(H) - PSTN-1 RTI (Max. 20 characters - ASCII) - See the following note.
68021C to 68022F(H) - PSTN-2 RTI (Max. 20 characters - ASCII) - Not used
680230 to 680246(H) - PSTN-3 RTI (Max. 20 characters - ASCII) - Not used
680247 to 680286(H) - TTI 1 (Max. 64 characters - ASCII) - See the following note.
680287 to 6802C6(H) - TTI 2 (Max. 64 characters - ASCII) - Not used
6802C7 to 680306(H) - TTI 3 (Max. 64 characters - ASCII) - Not used
680307 to 68031A(H) - PSTN-1 CSI (Max. 20 characters - ASCII)
68031B to 68032E(H) - PSTN-2 CSI (Max.20 characters - ASCII) - Not used
68032F to 680342(H) - PSTN-3 CSI (Max.20 characters - ASCII) - Not used
680343(H) - Number of PSTN-1 CSI characters (Hex)
680344(H) - Number of PSTN-2 CSI characters (Hex) - Not used
680345(H) Number of PSTN-3 CSI characters (Hex) - Not used

ƒ If the number of characters is less than the maximum (20 for RTI, 64 for TTI), add a

SM 131 B267
 stop code (00[H]) after the last character.
680380 to 680387(H) - Last power off time (Read only)
680380(H) - 01(H) - 24-hour clock, 00(H) - 12-hour clock (AM), 02(H) - 12-hour
clock (PM)
680381(H) - Year (BCD)
680382(H) - Month (BCD)
680383(H) - Day (BCD)
680384(H) – Hour
680385(H) – Minute
680386(H) – Second
680387(H) - 00: Monday, 01: Tuesday, 02: Wednesday, /// , 06: Sunday
680394(H) - Optional equipment (Read only – Do not change the settings)
Bit 0: Page Memory 0: Not installed, 1: Installed
Bit 1: SAF Memory 0: Not installed, 1: Installed
Bits 2 to 7; Not used
680395(H) - Optional equipment (Read only – Do not change the settings)
Bits 0 to 3: Not used
Bit 4: G3-2 0: Not installed, 1: Installed
Bit 5: G3-3 0: Not installed, 1: Installed
Bit 6 and 7: Not used
680406 to 68040A – Option G3 board (G3-2) ROM information (Read only)
680406(H) - Suffix (BCD)
680407(H) - Version (BCD)
680408(H) - Year (BCD)
680409(H) - Month (BCD)
68040A(H) - Day (BCD)
68040B to 68040F – Option G3 board (G3-3) ROM information (Read only)
68040B(H) - Suffix (BCD)
68040C(H) - Version (BCD)
68040D(H) - Year (BCD)
68040E(H) - Month (BCD)
68040F(H) - Day (BCD)
680410(H) - G3-1 Modem ROM version (Read only)
680412(H) - G3-2 Modem ROM version (Read only)
680414(H) - G3-3 Modem ROM version (Read only)
680420(H) - Number of multiple sets print (Read only)

B267 132 SM
680476(H) - Time for economy transmission (hour in 24h clock format - BCD)
680477(H) - Time for economy transmission (minute - BCD)
680492(H) - Transmission monitor volume 00 - 07(H)
680493(H) - Reception monitor volume 00 - 07(H)

Fax Option
680494(H) - On-hook monitor volume 00 - 07(H)

B267
680495(H) - Dialing monitor volume 00 - 07(H)
680496(H) - Buzzer volume 00 - 07(H)
680497(H) - Beeper volume 00 - 07(H)
6804A8(H) - Machine code (Check ram 4)
688E8E to 68918D(H) - SIP server address (Read only)
688E8E(H) - Proxy server - Main (Max. 128 characters - ASCII)
688F0E(H) - Proxy server - Sub (Max. 128 characters - ASCII)
688F8E(H) - Redirect server - Main (Max. 128 characters - ASCII)
68900E(H) - Redirect server - Sub (Max. 128 characters - ASCII)
68908E(H) - Registrar server - Main (Max. 128 characters - ASCII)
68910E(H) - Registrar server - Sub (Max. 128 characters - ASCII)
68918E(H) - Gatekeeper server address - Main (Max. 128 characters - ASCII)
68920E(H) - Gatekeeper server address - Sub (Max. 128 characters - ASCII)
68928E(H) - Arias Number (Max. 128 characters - ASCII)
68930E(H) - SIP user name (Max. 128 characters - ASCII)
68938E(H) - SIP digest authentication password (Max. 128 characters - ASCII)
68940E(H) - Gateway address information (Max. 7100 characters - ASCII)
68AFCA(H) - Stand-by port number for H.232 connection
68AFCCH) - Stand-by port number for SIP connection
68AFCE(H) - RAS port number
68AFD0(H) - Gatekeeper port number
68AFD2(H) - Port number of data waiting for T.38
68AFD4(H) - Port number of SIP server
68AFD6(H) - Priority for SIP and H.323 0: H.323, 1: SIP
68AFD7(H) - SIP function 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
68AFD8(H) - H.323 function 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
68AFD9(H) - SIP digest authentication function 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
68AFDA(H) - IP-Fax backup data 00 - 600 (H)
69ECBE(H) - 69ECDE(H) - Dial tone detection parameter (Max. 11 x 3 lines)
This initializes following order. [0x04, 0x40, 0x03, 0x60, 0x64, 0xf4, 0x01,0x64,
0x04, 0xc8, 0x00]

SM 133 B267
6BEBFE(H) – Dial tone detection frequency – Upper limit (High)
Defaults: NA: 06, EU: 06, ASIA: 06
6BEBFF(H) – Dial tone detection frequency – Upper Limit (Low)
Defaults: NA: 50, EU: 50, ASIA: 50
6BEC00(H) – Dial tone detection frequency – Lower Limit (High)
Defaults: NA: 03, EU: 02, ASIA: 02
6BEC01(H) – Dial tone detection frequency – Lower Limit (Low)
Defaults: NA: 60, EU: 90, ASIA: 90
6BEC02(H) –Dial tone detection waiting time (20 ms)
Defaults: NA: 64, EU 64, ASIA: 64
6BEC03 to 6BEC04 – Dial tone detection monitoring time (20 ms)
Defaults

Area 6BEC03 6BEC04

NA F4 01

EU F4 01

ASIA F4 01

6BEC05(H) – Dial tone detect judge time (20 ms)

Defaults: NA: 64, EU: 1B, ASIA: 32
6BEC06(H) – Dial tone disconnect permission time (20 ms)
Defaults: NA: 11, EU: 0F, ASIA: 11

B267 134 SM
5. DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS

5.1 OVERVIEW

Fax Option
B267
The basic fax unit consists of two PCBs: an FCU and an MBU.
The FCU controls all the fax communications and fax features, in cooperation with the
controller board. The MBU contains the ROM and SRAM. Also, the FCU has an NCU circuit.

SM 135 B267
5.2 BOARDS

5.2.1 FCU

The FCU (Facsimile Control Unit) controls fax communications, the video interface to the
base copier’s engine, and all the fax options.

FACE3 (Fax Application Control Engine)

ƒ CPU
ƒ Data compression and reconstruction (DCR)
ƒ DMA control
ƒ Clock generation
ƒ DRAM backup control

Modem (FAME)
ƒ V.34, V33, V17, V.29, V.27ter, V.21, and V.8

DRAM
ƒ The 16 MB of DRAM is shared as follows.
SAF memory : 4MB
Working memory : 8MB
Page memory : 4MB
ƒ The SAF memory is backed up by a rechargeable battery.

B267 136 SM
Memory Back-up
ƒ A Rechargeable battery backs up the SAF memory (DRAM) for 1 hour.
5.2.2 MBU

Fax Option
On this board, the flash ROM contains the FCU firmware, and the SRAM contains the

B267
system data and user parameters. Even if the FCU is changed, the system data and user
parameters are kept on the MBU board.

ROM
ƒ 3MB flash ROMs for system software storage
2MB (16bit x 1MB) + 1MB (16bit x 512K)

SRAM
ƒ The 128 KB SRAM for system and user parameter storage is backed up by a lithium
battery.

Memory Back-up
ƒ A lithium battery backs up the system parameters and programmed items in the SRAM,
in case the base copier's main switch is turned off.

Switches

Item Description

SW1 Switches the SRAM backup battery on/off.

SM 137 B267
5.3 VIDEO DATA PATH

5.3.1 TRANSMISSION

B267 138 SM
Memory Transmission and Parallel Memory Transmission
The base copier's scanner scans the original at the selected resolution in inch format. The
SBCU processes the data and transfers it to the FCU.

Fax Option
ƒ When scanning a fax original, the SBCU uses the MTF, independent dot erase and

B267
thresholding parameter settings programmed in the fax unit’s scanner bit switches,
not the copier's SP modes.
Then, the FCU converts the data to mm format, and compresses the data in MMR or raw
format to store it in the SAF memory. If image rotation will be done, the image is rotated in
page memory before compression.
At the time of transmission, the FCU decompresses the stored data, then re-compresses
and/or reduces the data if necessary for transmission. The NCU transmits the data to the
line.

Immediate Transmission
The base copier's scanner scans the original at the resolution agreed with the receiving
terminal. The SBCU video processes the data and transfers it to the FCU.

ƒ When scanning a fax original, the SBCU uses the MTF, independent dot erase and
thresholding parameter settings programmed in the fax unit’s scanner bit switches,
not the copier's SP modes.
Then the FCU stores the data in page memory, and compresses the data for transmission.
The NCU transmits the data to the line.

JBIG Transmission
ƒ Memory transmission: If the receiver has JBIG compression, the data goes from the
DCR to the QM-Coder. Then the NCU transmits the data to the line.
ƒ Immediate transmission: If the receiver has JBIG compression, the data goes from the
page memory to the QM-Coder. Then the NCU transmits the data to the line.

Adjustments
ƒ Priority for the line used for G3 transmission (PSTN 1): System switch 16 bit 1

SM 139 B267
5.3.2 RECEPTION

First, the FCU stores the incoming data from either an analog line to the SAF memory. (The
data goes to the FACE3 at the same time, and is checked for error lines/frames.)
The FCU then decompresses the data and transfers it to page memory. If image rotation will
be done, the image is rotated in the page memory. The data is transferred to the SBCU.

JBIG Reception
When data compressed with JBIG comes in on PSTN-1 (the standard analog line), the data
is sent to the QM-CODER for decompression. Then the data is stored in the page memory,
and transferred to the SBCU.

B267 140 SM
5.4 FAX COMMUNICATION FEATURES

5.4.1 INTERNET MAIL COMMUNICATION

Fax Option
Mail Transmission

B267
This machine supports T.37 full mode. (ITU-, RFC232). The difference between T.37 simple
mode and full mode is as follows.

Function T.37 Simple Mode T.37 Full Mode

200 x100
200 x 100 200 x 200
Resolution
200 x 200 200 x 400
400 x 400 (if available)

RX Paper Width A4 A4, B4, A3

RX Data Compression Method MH MH (default), MR, MMR,

Image data transmission,

exchange of capability
Image data information between the two
Signals
transmission only terminals, and
acknowledgement of receipt of
fax messages

Data Formats
The scanned data is converted into a TIFF-F formatted file.
The fields of the e-mail and their contents are as follows:

Field Content

From Mail address of the sender

Reply To Destination requested for reply

To Mail address of the destination

Bcc Backup mail address

Subject From CSI or RTI (Fax Message No. xxxx)

SM 141 B267
 Multipart/mixed
Content Type
Attached files: image/tiff

Content Transfer Encoding Base 64, 7-bit, 8-bit, Quoted Printable

MIME-converted TIFF-F (MIME standards specify how

Message Body
files are attached to e-mail messages)

Direct SMTP Transmission

Internet Fax documents can be sent directly to their destinations without going through the
SMTP server. (Internet Faxes normally transmit via the SMTP server.)
For example:

e-mail address: [email protected]

SMTP server address: gts.abcd.com

In this case this feature destination e-mail address ([email protected]) is read as the SMTP
server address "gts.abcd.com" and the transmissions bypass the SMTP server.

Selectable Options
These options are available for selection:
ƒ With the default settings, the scan resolution can be either standard or detail. Inch-mm
conversion before TX depends on IFAX SW01 Bit 7. Detail resolution will be used if
Super Fine resolution is selected, unless Fine resolution is enabled with IFAX SW01.
ƒ The requirements for originals (document size, scan width, and memory capacity) are
the same as for G3 fax memory TX.
ƒ The default compression is TIFF-F format.
ƒ IFAX SW00: Acceptable paper widths for sending
ƒ IFAX SW09: Maximum number of attempts to the same destination

Secure Internet Transmission

ƒ SMTP Authentication: User Tools> System Settings> File Transfer> SMTP
Authentication
ƒ POP Before SMTP: User Tools> System Settings> File Transfer> POP Before SMTP

Mail Reception
This machine supports three types of e-mail reception:
ƒ POP3 (Post Office Protocol Ver. 3.)
ƒ IMAP4 (Internet Messaging Access Protocol)

B267 142 SM
ƒ SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol)
For details: Core Technology Manual – Facsimile Processes – Faxing from a PC –
Internet/LAN Fax Boards – Mail Reception

POP3/IMAP4 Mail Reception Procedure

Fax Option
B267
The machine automatically picks up e-mail from the server at an interval which is adjustable
in the range 2 to 1440 min. in 1-minute steps: User Tools> System Settings> File Transfer>
E-mail Reception Interval

SMTP Reception
ƒ The IFAX must be registered as an SMTP server in the MX record of the DNS server,
and the address of the received mail must specify the IFAX.
ƒ Enable SMTP reception: User Tools> System Settings> File Transfer> Reception
Protocol
Even if the MX record on the DNS server includes the IFAX, mail cannot be received
with SMTP until SMTP reception is enabled:
However, if SMTP reception is selected and the machine is not registered in the MX
record of the DNS server, then either IMAP4 or POP3 is used, depending on the setting:
User Tools> System Settings> File Transfer> Reception Protocol

Mail Delivery Conditions: Transferring Mail Received With SMTP

1. The machine must be set up for SMTP mail delivery: User Tools> Facsimile Features>
E-mail Settings> SMTP RX File Delivery Settings
2. If the user wishes to limit this feature so that the machine will only deliver mail from
designated senders, the machine’s “Auth. E-mail RX” feature must be set (User Tools>
Facsimile Features> E-mail Settings> SMTP RX File Delivery Settings).
3. If the “SMTP RX File Delivery Setting” is set to 0 to prohibit SMTP receiving, and if there
is mail designated for delivery, then the machine responds with an error. (User Tools>
Facsimile Features> E-mail Settings> SMTP RX File Delivery Settings)
4. If the quick dial, speed dial, or group dial entry is incorrect, the mail transmission is lost,
and the IFAX issues an error to the SMTP server and outputs an error report.

Auth. E-mail RX
In order to limit access to mail delivery with IFAX, the addresses of senders must be limited
using the Access Limit Entry. Only one entry can be registered.
1. Access Limit Entry
For example, to limit access to @IFAX.ricoh.co.jp:

[email protected] Matches and is delivered.

SM 143 B267
 [email protected] Does not match and is not delivered.

[email protected] Does not match and is not delivered.

2. Conditions
ƒ The length of the Access Limit Entry is limited to 127 characters.
ƒ If the Access Limit Entry address and the mail address of the incoming mail do not
match, the incoming mail is discarded and not delivered, and the SMTP server
responds with an error. However, in this case an error report is not output.
ƒ If the Access Limit Entry address is not registered, and if the incoming mail
specifies a delivery destination, then the mail is delivered unconditionally.

Handling Mail Reception Errors

Abnormal files
When an error of this type occurs, the machine stops receiving and commands the server to
erase the message. Then the machine prints an error report and sends information about
the error by e-mail to the sender address (specified in the “From” or “Reply-to” field of the
message). If there is an incomplete received message in the machine memory, it will be
erased.
The machine prints an error message when it fails to send the receive error notification after
a certain number of attempts.
The following types of files are judged to be abnormal if one or more of the following are
detected:
1. Unsupported MIME headers.
Supported types of MIME header

Header Supported Types

Content-Type Multipart/mixed, text/plain, message/rfc822 Image/tiff

US-ASCII, ISO 8859 X. Other types cannot be

Charset
handled, and some garbage may appear in the data.

Content-Transfer-Encoding Base 64, 7-bit, 8-bit, Quoted Printable

2. MIME decoding errors

3. File format not recognized as TIFF-F format
4. Resolution, document size, or compression type cannot be accepted

B267 144 SM
Remaining SAF capacity error
The machine calls the server but does not receive e-mail if the remaining SAF capacity is
less than a certain value (the value depends on IFAX Switch 08. The e-mail will be received
when the SAF capacity increases (for example, after substitute reception files have been

Fax Option
printed). The error handling method for this type of error is the same as for “Abnormal files”.

B267
If the capacity of the SAF memory drops to zero during reception, the machine operates in
the same way as when receiving an abnormal file (refer to “Abnormal files” above).

Secure Internet Reception

To enable password encryption and higher level security: User Tools> System Settings> File
Transfer> POP3/IMAP4 Settings> Encryption (set to “On”)

Transfer Request: Request By Mail

For details: Core Technology Manual – Facsimile Processes – Faxing from a PC –
Internet/LAN Fax Boards – Transfer Request
The fields of the e-mail and their contents are as follows:

Field Content

From E-mail address of the requesting terminal

To Destination address (Transfer Station address)

Bcc Blind carbon copy

Subject From TSI (Fax Message No. xxxx)

Multipart/mixed
Content-Type
Text/Plain (for a text part), image/tiff (for attached files)

Content-Transfer-Encoding Base 64, 7-Bit, 8-bit, Quoted Printable

RELAY-ID-: xxxx (xxxx: 4 digits for an ID code) RELAY:

Mail body (text part)
#01#*X#**01….

Message body MIME-converted TIFF-F.

E-Mail Options (Sub TX Mode)

The following features are available as options for mail sending: entering a subject,
designating the level of importance, confirming reception of the mail.

SM 145 B267
Subject and Level of Importance
You can enter a subject message with: Sub TX Mode> E-mail Options
The Subject entry for the mail being sent is limited to 64 characters. The subject can also be
prefixed with an “Urgent” or “High” notation.

How the Subject Differs According to Mail Type

Mail Type

Subject
--- Entry Condition
Entry

1. “CSI” (“RTI”)
Fax Message No.
2. “RTI” CSI not registered +
No Subject File No.
Entry 3. “CSI” RTI not registered

CSI, RTI not

4. None
registered

1. “CSI” (“RTI”) Normal:

Return Receipt
(dispatched).

2. “RTI” CSI not registered You can select

Confirmation
From “displayed” with IFAX
of Reception
SW02 Bits 2 and 3.

3. “CSI” RTI not registered Error:

Return Receipt
4. None CSI, RTI not registered (processed/error)

Mail delivery, RTI or CSI of

memory the station Fax Message No. +
From Mail delivery
transfer, designated File Number
SMTP for delivery
receiving
RTI or CSI of Mail sending from G3
and delivery
sender memory

Mail address
Memory sending
of sender

B267 146 SM
 SMTP receiving and
Mail address
delivery (Off Ramp
of sender
Gateway)

Fax Option
Mail error

B267
--- Error Message No. xxxx From CSI (RTI)
notification

Items of the table above are in the Subject.

Subjects Displayed on the PC

E-mail Messages
After entering the subject, you can enter a message with:
Sub TX Mode> E-mail Options
An e-mail message (up to 5 lines) can be pre-registered with: User Tools> System Settings>
File Transfer> Program/Change/Delete E-mail Message
Limitations on Entries

Item Maximum

Number of Lines 5 lines

Line Length 80 characters

Name Length 20 characters

Message Disposition Notification (MDN)

For details: Core Technology Manual – Facsimile Processes – Faxing from a PC –
Internet/LAN Fax Boards – E-mail Options
The network system administrator can confirm whether a sent mail has been received
correctly or not. This function is enabled only when "I-FAX switch 02 Bit 4" is set to "1"This
confirmation is done in four steps.
1. Send request for confirmation of mail reception. To enable or disable this request
(known as MDN):
2. Sub TX Mode> E-mail Options
3. Mail reception (receive confirmation request)

SM 147 B267
4. Send confirmation of mail reception
5. Receive confirmation of mail reception
The other party’s machine will not respond to the request unless the two conditions below
are met:
ƒ The other party’s machine must be set up to respond to the confirmation request.
ƒ The other party’s machine must support MDN (Message Disposition Notification).
- Setting up the Receiving Party -
The receiving party will respond to the confirmation request if:
1. The “Disposition Notification To” field is in the received mail header (automatically
inserted in the 4th line in the upper table on the previous page, if MDN is enabled), and
2. Sending the disposition notification must be enabled (User Parameter Setting SW21 (15
[H]) Bit 1 for this model). The content of the response is as follows:

Normal reception: “Return Receipt (dispatched)” in the Subject line

IFAX SW02 (Bit 2, 3) “Return Receipt (displayed)” in the Subject line

Error: “Return Receipt (processed/error)” in the Subject line

Handling Reports
1. Sending a Request for a Return Receipt by Mail
After the mail sender transmits a request for a return receipt, the mail sender’s journal is
annotated with two hyphens (--) in the Result column and a “Q” in the Mode column.
2. Mail Receipt (Request for Receipt Confirmation) and Sending Mail Receipt Response
After the mail receiver sends a response to the request for a return receipt, the mail
receiver’s journal is annotated with two hyphens (--) in the Result column and an “A” in
the Mode column.
3. Receiving the Return Receipt Mail
ƒ After the mail sender receives a return receipt, the information in the mail sender’s
journal about the receipt request is replaced, i.e. the journal is annotated with “OK”
in the Result column.
ƒ When the return receipt reports an error, the journal is annotated with an “E” in the
Result column.
ƒ The arrival of the return receipt is not recorded in the journal as a separate
communication. Its arrival is only reported by the presence of “OK” or “E” in the
Result column.
ƒ If the mail address used by the sender specifies a mailing list (i.e., a Group
destination; the machine sends the mail to more than one location. See “How to set

B267 148 SM
 up Mail Delivery”), the Result column of the Journal is updated every time a return
receipt is received. For example, if the mailing list was to 5 destinations, the Result
column indicates the result of the communication with the 5th destination only. The
results of the communications to the first 4 destinations are not shown.

Fax Option
Exceptions: If one of the communications had an error, the Result column will

B267
indicate E, even if subsequent communications were OK.
If two of the communications had an error, the Journal will indicate the destination
for the first error only.

Report Sample

SM 149 B267
5.5 IP-FAX

5.5.1 WHAT IS IP-FAX?

For details: Core Technology Manual – Facsimile Processes – Faxing from a PC –
Internet/LAN Fax Boards – IP-FAX
T.38 Packet Format
TCP is selected by default for this machine, but you can change this to UDP with IPFAX SW
00 Bit 1.
UDP Related Switches

IP-Fax Switch 01

No. FUNCTION COMMENTS

Select IP FAX Delay Level Raise the level by selecting a higher setting
if too many transmission errors are occurring
Bit3 Bit2 Bit1 Bit0 Setting
on the network.
0 0 0 0 Level 0 If TCP/UDP is enabled on the network, raise
this setting on the T.30 machine. Increasing
0-3 0 0 0 1 Level 1
the delay time allows the recovery of more
0 0 1 0 Level 2 lost packets.
If only UDP is enabled, increase the number
0 0 1 1 Level 3
of redundant packets.
Level 1~2: 3 Redundant packets
Level 3: 4 Redundant packets

Settings
User parameter switch 34 (22[H]), bit 0
IP-Fax Gate Keeper usage 0: No, 1: Yes
IP Fax Switches: Various IP-FAX settings (see the bit switch table)

B267 150 SM
6. SPECIFICATIONS

6.1 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS

Fax Option
B267
Type: Desktop type transceiver

PSTN
Circuit:
PABX

Connection: Direct couple

Book (Face down)

Maximum Length: 432 mm [17 ins]
Maximum Width: 297 mm [11.7 ins]
ARDF (Face up)
(Single-sided document)
Original Size:
Length: 128 - 1200 mm [5.0 - 47.2 ins]
Width: 105 - 297 mm [4.1 - 11.7 inch]
(Double-sided document)
Length: 128 - 432 mm [5.0 - 17 inch]
Width: 105 - 297 mm [4.1 - 11.7 inch]

Scanning Method: Flat bed, with CCD

G3
8 x 3.85 lines/mm (Standard)
8 x 7.7 lines/mm (Detail)
Resolution:
8 x 15.4 line/mm (Fine)
200 x 100 dpi (Standard)
200 x 200 dpi (Detail)

G3: 3 s at 28800 bps; Measured with G3 ECM using memory for

Transmission Time: an ITU-T #1 test document (Slerexe letter) at standard
resolution

Data Compression: MH, MR, MMR, JBIG

SM 151 B267
Protocol: Group 3 with ECM

V.34, V.33, V.17 (TCM), V.29 (QAM),

Modulation:
V.27ter (PHM), V.8, V.21 (FM)

G3: 33600/31200/28800/26400/24000/21600/
Data Rate: 19200/16800/14400/12000/9600/7200/4800/2400 bps
Automatic fallback

With ECM: 0 ms/line

I/O Rate:
Without ECM: 2.5, 5, 10, 20, or 40 ms/line

ECM: 128 KB
SAF
Memory Capacity: Standard: 4 MB
Page Memory:
Standard: 4 MB (Print: 2 MB + Scanner: 2 MB)

B267 152 SM
6.2 IFAX SPECIFICATIONS

Fax Option
Local area network

B267
Ethernet 100base-Tx/10base-T
Connectivity:
IEEE1394 (IP over 1394)
IEEE802.11b (wireless LAN)

Main scan: 400 dpi, 200 dpi

Resolution: Sub scan: 400 dpi, 200 dpi, 100 dpi
To use 400 dpi, IFAX SW01 Bit 4 must be set to “1”.

1 s (through a LAN to the server)

Condition: ITU-T #1 test document (Selerexe Letter)
MTF correction: OFF
Transmission TTI: None
Time: Resolution: 200 x 100 dpi
Communication speed: 10 Mbps
Correspondent device: E-mail server
Line conditions: No terminal access

Maximum message width is A4/LT.

Document Size:
ƒ To use B4 and A3 width, IFAX SW00 Bit 1 (B4) and/or Bit 2
(A3) must be set to “1”.

Single/multi-part
E-mail File
MIME conversion
Format:
Image: TIFF-F (MH, MR, MMR)

Transmission:
SMTP, TCP/IP
Protocol:
Reception:
POP3, SMTP, IMAP4, TCP/IP

100 Mbps(100base-Tx)
Data Rate:
10 Mbps (10base-T)

SM 153 B267
 SMTP-AUTH
Authentication
POP before SMTP
Method:
A-POP

Remark: The machine must be set up as an e-mail client before installation.

Any client PCs connected to the machine through a LAN must also
be e-mail clients, or some features will not work (e.g. Autorouting).

B267 154 SM
6.3 IP-FAX SPECIFICATIONS

Fax Option
Local Area Network

B267
Ethernet/10base-T, 100base-TX
Network:
IEEE1394 (IP over 1394)
IEEE802.11b (wireless LAN)

8 x 3.85 lines/mm, 200 x 100dpi (standard characters)

Scan line density:
8 x 7.7lines/mm, 200 x 200dpi (detailed characters)

Original size: Maximum A3 or 11"x 17" (DLT)

Maximum scanning Standard: A3, 297mm x 432mm

size: Irregular: 297mm x 1200mm

Transmission Recommended: T.38 Annex protocol, TCP, UDP/IP

protocol: communication

Compatible
IP-Fax compatible machines
machines:

Specify IP address and send fax to an IP-Fax compatible fax

IP-Fax transmission through a network.
function: Also capable of sending fax from a G3 fax connected to the
public telephone lines via a VoIP gateway.

Receive a fax sent from an IP-Fax compatible fax through a

IP-Fax reception network.
function: Also capable of receiving fax from a G3 fax connected the public
telephone lines via a VoIP gateway.

SM 155 B267
6.4 FAX UNIT CONFIGURATION

Component Code No. Remarks

FCU 1

MBU B267 2 Included with fax unit

Speaker 3

Handset Type 1018 B433 NA only. Common with J-C2

B267 156 SM
 B806
DUPLEX UNIT AD2000
 DUPLEX UNIT AD2000 B806
TABLE OF CONTENTS

1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT............................................ 1

1.1 REPLACEMENTS ......................................................................................... 1
1.1.1 REAR COVER...................................................................................... 1
1.1.2 DRIVE BOARD..................................................................................... 2
1.1.3 INVERTER CLUTCH............................................................................ 2
1.1.4 DUPLEX TRANSPORTER MOTOR..................................................... 3
1.1.5 INVERTER MOTOR ............................................................................. 4

2. DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS........................................... 6

2.1 COMPONENT LAYOUT ................................................................................ 6
2.1.1 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT ............................................................... 6
2.2 DRIVE LAYOUT ........................................................................................... 7
2.3 JUNCTION GATE MECHANISM................................................................... 8
2.4 PAPER PATH TIMINMG CHART .................................................................. 9
2.4.1. PAPER PATH ...................................................................................... 9
2.4.2 TIMING CHART ................................................................................. 10

SM i B806
 Replacements

1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT

1.1 REPLACEMENTS

ƒ Turn off the main power switch and unplug the machine before beginning any of
the procedures in this section.
This manual uses the following symbols.
: See or Refer to, : Screw, : Connector, : Clip ring, : E-ring
: Clamp
1.1.1 REAR COVER

Duplex Unit
AD2000
B806
(Color Photo)

SM 1 B806
Replacements

1. Rear cover [A] of the duplex unit ( x 2: [B] is stepped screw.)

1.1.2 DRIVE BOARD

(Color Photo)

1. Rear cover ( "Rear Cover")

2. Drive board with bracket [A] ( x 2, All s)

(Color Photo)
3. Drive board [B] ( x 2, snap x 2)
1.1.3 INVERTER CLUTCH
1. Rear cover ( "Rear Cover")

(Color Photo)
2. Inverter clutch [A] ( x 1, x 1)

B806 2 SM
 Replacements

1.1.4 DUPLEX TRANSPORT MOTOR

1. Rear cover ( "Rear Cover")
2. Pull the duplex tray on the way.

(Color Photo)
3. Remove the gear [A] to release the timing belt ( x 1).
4. Duplex transport motor unit [B] ( x 4, x 1)

Duplex Unit
AD2000
B806
(Color Photo)

5. Duplex transport motor [C] ( x 2)] When Reassembling the Duplex Transport
Motor

SM 3 B806
Replacements

(Color Photos)
Make sure that timing belts are correctly engaged with three gears before securing gears
and duplex transport motor unit.
1.1.5 INVERTER MOTOR
1. Rear cover ( "Rear Cover")
2. Pull the duplex tray on the way.

(Color Photo)
3. Inverter motor unit [A] ( x 4, x 2)

B806 4 SM
 Replacements

(Color Photo)

4. Inverter motor [B] ( x 2)

ƒ When reassembling the inverter motor unit, make sure that the timing belt is
correctly engaged with the gear [C].

Duplex Unit
AD2000
B806

SM 5 B806
Component Layout

2. DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS

2.1 COMPONENT LAYOUT

2.1.1 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS

1. Duplex Entrance Sensor 7. Inverter Motor

2. Duplex Left Cover Switch 8. Duplex Right Cover Switch
3. Duplex Transport Motor 9. Duplex Inverter Sensor
4. Tray Set Switch 10. Duplex Clutch
5. Drive Board 11. Duplex Exit Sensor
6. Paper Wait Sensor

B806 6 SM
 Drive Layout

2.2 DRIVE LAYOUT

The duplex entrance roller [A] and transport roller 1 [B] are driven by the duplex transport
motor [C] via timing belts and gears.
The Transport roller 2 [D] and duplex exit roller [E] are driven by the inverter motor [F] via
timing belts, clutch and gears.

Duplex Unit
AD2000
B806

SM 7 B806
Junction Gate Mechanism

2.3 JUNCTION GATE MECHANISM

When the paper reaches the engine exit sensor in duplex mode, the junction gate solenoid
[A] is turned on. The junction gate solenoid pushes up junction gate edge [B]. As a result,
the junction gate [C] opens the path[D] for the duplex unit.

B806 8 SM
 Paper Path and Timing Chart

2.4 PAPER PATH AND TIMING CHART

2.4.1 PAPER PATH

(Color Illustration)

Duplex Unit
AD2000
B806

SM 9 B806
Paper Path and Timing Chart

2.4.2 TIMING CHART

B806 10 SM
 B813
DOCUMENT FEEDER DF2000
 DOCUMENT FEEDER DF2000 B813
TABLE OF CONTENTS

1. OVERALL INFORMATION ..............................................................1

1.1 MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT........................................................ 1
1.2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT ......................................................... 2
1.3 DRIVE LAYOUT ............................................................................................ 3

2. DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS ...........................................4

2.1 ORIGINAL SIZE DETECTION....................................................................... 4
2.2 PICK-UP AND SEPARATION ....................................................................... 6
2.3 ORIGINAL TRANSPORT AND EXIT MECHANISM ...................................... 7
2.4 STAMP .......................................................................................................... 8
2.5 TIMING CHARTS .......................................................................................... 9
2.5.1 A3, STAMP MODE ............................................................................. 10
2.6 JAM DETECTION........................................................................................ 11
2.7 OVERALL ELECTRICAL CIRCUIT ............................................................. 12
2.8 FREE RUN .................................................................................................. 13

3. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ..........................................14

3.1 EXTERIOR COVERS .................................................................................. 14
3.1.1 REAR COVER.................................................................................... 14
3.1.2 ORIGINAL TABLE .............................................................................. 14
3.1.3 FRONT COVER ................................................................................. 14
3.1.4 ORIGINAL ENTRANCE GUIDE ......................................................... 14
3.1.5 DF FEED COVER .............................................................................. 15
3.2 FEED UNIT.................................................................................................. 15
3.3 SEPARATION ROLLER .............................................................................. 15
3.4 PICK-UP ROLLER....................................................................................... 16
3.5 FEED BELT ................................................................................................. 16
3.6 ORIGINAL SENSORS (WIDTH, LENGTH, TRAILING EDGE).................... 17
3.7 ORIGINAL SET SENSOR ........................................................................... 18
3.8 TRANSPORT MOTOR ................................................................................ 18
3.9 FEED COVER OPEN SENSOR/ FEED CLUTCH/ROM/DF DRIVE BOARD19
3.10 REGISTRATION SENSOR.................................................................... 20
3.11 PICK-UP SOLENOID............................................................................. 20
3.12 STAMP SOLENOID ............................................................................... 21

SM i B813
 MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT

1. OVERALL INFORMATION

Document

DF2000
Feeder

B813
1.1 MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT

2 3 4 5

9 8 7 6

B813I901.WMF

1. Separation roller 6. Original exit roller

2. Original feed belt 7. 2nd transport roller
3. Pick-up roller 8. Original exposure guide
4. Original entrance guide 9. 1st transport roller
5. Original table

SM 1 B813
ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT

1.2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT

1
2
14 3
4
13
5
12
6

11

10 7
9 8
B813I902.WMF

1. DF feed clutch 8. Original length sensor 1

2. Feed cover open sensor 9. Original trailing edge sensor
3. DF pick-up solenoid 10. Original width sensor 1
4. DF transport motor 11. Original width sensor 2
5. DF drive board 12. Original set sensor
6. DF position sensor 13. Stamp solenoid
7. Original length sensor 2 14. Registration sensor

B813 2 SM
 DRIVE LAYOUT

1.3 DRIVE LAYOUT

Document

DF2000
Feeder

B813
7 8

5
4
3 B813I903.WMF

1. DF feed clutch 5. Separation roller

2. DF transport motor 6. 1st transport roller
3. 2nd transport roller 7. Original feed belt
4. Exit roller 8. Pick-up roller

SM 3 B813
ORIGINAL SIZE DETECTION

2. DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS

2.1 ORIGINAL SIZE DETECTION

[B]

[C]

[A]

[E] [D]

B813D905.WMF

The DF uses two width sensors (width sensor 1 [A] and width sensor 2 [B]) to
detect the original width, and two length sensors (length sensor 1 [C] and length
sensor 2 [D]) to detect the original length. The DF detects the original size based
on the combination of inputs from these sensors, as indicated in the table on the
next page.
If using a non-standard original size, the user must input the original length at the
operation panel.
The original width sensors have four possible output states: P1 to P4. The output
depends on the position of the ridges on the toothed plate attached to the original
rear fence.
During one-to-one copying, copy paper is fed to the registration roller in advance to
increase the copy speed. The original exit trailing edge sensor [E] monitors the
stack of originals in the feeder, and detects when the trailing edge of the last page
has been fed in. This stops the ADF from causing the feed of an unwanted extra
sheet of copy paper.

B813 4 SM
 ORIGINAL SIZE DETECTION

Document

DF2000
Original Original

Feeder

B813
NA EU P1 P2 P3 P4
Length 1 Length 2
1 A3 (297 x 420) ON ON - - - ON
2 B4 (257 x 364) ON ON - - ON -
3 A4 SEF (210 x 297) ON - - ON - -
4 A4 LEF (297 x 210) - - - - - ON
5 B5 SEF (182 x 257) ON - ON - - -
6 B5 LEF (257 x 182) - - - - ON -
7 A5 SEF (148 x 210) - - ON - - -
8 A5 LEF (210 x 148) - - - ON - -
9 11" x 17" 1 ON ON - - - ON
10 11" x 15" 1 ON ON - - - ON
11 10" x 14" ON ON - - ON -
12 81/2" x 14" 2 ON ON - ON - -
13 81/2" x 13" 4 ON ON - ON - -
14 8" x 13" 2 4 ON ON - ON - -
15 81/2" x 11" SEF 3 ON - - ON - -
16 11" x 81/2" LEF - - - - - ON
17 8" x 10" SEF 3 ON - - ON - -
18 51/2" x 81/2" SEF - - ON - - -
19 81/2" x 51/2" LEF - - - ON - -
NA: America (North, Middle, South) EU: Europe, Asia, China, Taiwan
: No : Yes ON: Paper present

1, 1: In NA, original size 11" x 15" is detected as 11" x 17"

2, 2: In NA, original size 8" x 13" is detected as 81/2" x 14"
3, 3: In NA, original size 8" x 10" is detected as 81/2" x 11"
4, 4: In EU, original size 8" x 13" is detected as 81/2" x 13"

- Original Width Sensor States -

Width Sensor 1 High Low Low High

Width Sensor 2 High High Low Low
Detection State P1 P2 P3 P4
Low = Blocked High = Open

SM 5 B813
PICK-UP AND SEPARATION

2.2 PICK-UP AND SEPARATION

[D]
[E]

[F]
[C]

[A]
[B]
B813D907.WMF

[H]

[G]

[I]

B813D908.WMF

An FRR (feed and reverse roller) system is used.

Setting original(s) onto the feed table lifts the original set sensor feeler [A], causing
the original set sensor [B] to issue a signal informing the main CPU that the DF is
ready to start feeding.
When the Start key (C) is pressed, the DF pick-up solenoid [C] turns on, causing
the transport guide [D] and pick-up roller [E] to lower onto the original, while at the
same time causing the original stoppers [F] to drop down to clear the feed path for
the original. After 200 ms, the DF transport motor [G] turns on, feeding the top
original page to the paper feed belt [H], where it is separated by the separation
roller [I].

B813 6 SM
 ORIGINAL TRANSPORT AND EXIT MECHANISM

2.3 ORIGINAL TRANSPORT AND EXIT MECHANISM

Document

DF2000
Feeder

B813
[D]

[A]
[B] [C] B813D901.WMF

When the leading edge of the original reaches the registration sensor at [A], the DF
transport motor turns off. After a short time the DF transport motor turns on again.
The original is fed past the DF exposure glass [B], where it is scanned. It is then
fed through to the 2nd transport roller [C] and fed out by the exit roller [D].
The DF transport motor uses a constant speed to feed the original up to the
registration sensor. When the motor turns on again to feed the original to the DF
exposure glass, however, the speed depends on the selected reproduction ratio. At
100%, the speed is 100 mm/s (Color mode: 66.7mm/sec).

SM 7 B813
STAMP

2.4 STAMP

[C]

[A]

[B]
B813D902.WMF

This function is only for fax mode. The fax unit includes the stamp.
The stamp solenoid [A] is located between the 2nd transport roller [B] and the exit
roller [C]. The copier controls this solenoid directly.
When the original reaches the stamp position, the DF transport motor stops.
Provided that the page was sent successfully (immediate transmission) or stored
successfully (memory transmission), the stamp solenoid then comes on 300 ms
after the DF motor stops. After stamping, the DF transport motor resumes feeding,
at about 1.3 times the normal speed.
The positioning of the stamp on the original can be adjusted using SP6-010.

B813 8 SM
SM
Feed Feed, Scanning, Exit Feed, Scanning, Exit Feed, Scanning, Exit

RXD
B813D903.WMF

Orig. Size Original Next Original Original Next Original Original No Original No Next Original
Info Fed Preset Fed Preset Fed Preset Preset Exits
TXD

50ms
Transport MAX 50ms 50ms
CW
Motor READ
OFF
5mm 168.1mm
5mm 5mm
200ms
2.5 TIMING CHARTS

369.1mm (Paper length - ((Separation 50ms

JAM1 *1 to Regist. Sensor) + 15mm))
200ms 369.1mm 369.1mm

DF Feed ON
Clutch OFF

9
15mm 15mm 15mm
Pick-up ON
Solenoid OFF
JAM4 *1

Original Set ON
Sensor OFF JAM2, 3 *1
21.0mm(27.0-5-1mm)
Registration ON
Sensor OFF

ENABLE
FGATE
DISABLE
420mm *2

*1 For information about jam conditions, see Section 2.6.

*2 F Gate: This signal goes high when the laser start to wire a pate to the drum.
The distance depends on SP mode setting 6-006-2 and -3.
TIMING CHARTS

B813
Document
Feeder
DF2000
B813
B813
Feed Scanning, Stamp Position Stop Stamp Exit Scanning, Stamp Position Stop Stamp Exit

RXD

Orig.
Orig. Length Stamp No Length & Stamp
Orig. Size Original & Next Orig. Position Stamp Original Original No Next Position Stamp Original
Info Fed Present Stop Finish Fed Set Orig. Stop Finish Exits
TIMING CHARTS

TXD

Transport MAX
CW
Motor READ
OFF
2.5.1 A3, STAMP MODE

50ms 50ms 168.1mm

50ms 50ms
200ms

JAM1 *1 50ms
200ms 200mm

DF Feed ON
Clutch OFF

10
Pick-up ON
Solenoid OFF

Original Set ON
Sensor OFF JAM2, 3 *1 JAM4 *1
*2 *2
21.0mm(27.0-1mm) 71.2mm 71.2mm

ENABLE
FGATE
DISABLE
420mm *2

ON 200mm 200mm
Stamp
OFF

*1 For information about jam conditions, see Section 2.6.

*2 F Gate: This signal goes high when the laser start to wire a pate to the drum.

B813D904.WMF
The distance depends on SP mode setting 6-006-2 and -3.

SM
 JAM DETECTION

2.6 JAM DETECTION

Document

DF2000
Feeder

B813
JAM 1: If the registration sensor fails to turn on within x1 ms after the DF
transport motor comes on to feed the original from the original tray.
x1 = 2267 ms
JAM 2: If the registration sensor fails to turn off within x2 ms after the DF
transport motor comes on to feed the original from the original tray.
x2 = 1234 ms
JAM 3: If there is no original at the registration sensor when scanning is started,
even though the sensor had already turned on.
JAM 4: The current original is stopped after the registration sensor detects its
leading edge, but the previous original is still at the scanning position.
JAM 5: If the original stopped at the stamp position is removed.
JAM 6: If the cover is opened or the ADF is lifted up while the ADF is in
operation.
JAM 7: If the DF gate signal (indicating that the original is now in the correct
position for scanning) is not asserted when the original trailing edge
passes the DF exposure glass.
JAM 7 occurs when the original is pulled out while it is being scanned.

SM 11 B813
OVERALL ELECTRICAL CIRCUIT

2.7 OVERALL ELECTRICAL CIRCUIT

The DF CPU controls the DF transport motor, DF feed clutch, DF pick-up solenoid,
and stamp solenoid. The DF CPU also monitors all sensors and provides updated
status when prompted at regular intervals by the mainframe, which may then take
action based on this information. The DF/mainframe connection is checked
automatically immediately after the mainframe is powered on.

Main ADF Control

Interface
Frame CPU

Driver DF Feed Motor

Registration Sensor
Original Set Sensor
DF Position Sensor
Feed Cover Open Sensor DF Feed Clutch
Original Width Sensor 1
Original Width Sensor 2
Original Length Sensor 1
Original Length Sensor 2 DF Pick-up
Original Trailing Edge Sensor Driver
Solenoid

ADF Control Board Stamp Solenoid

B813D906.WMF

B813 12 SM
 FREE RUN

2.8 FREE RUN

Document

DF2000
Feeder

B813
You can use DIP switch 100 (on the DF control board) to carry out a one-sided free
run.

Mode\Bits Bit0 Bit1 Bit2 Bit3

Normal Off Off Off Off
FR with paper On Off Off Off
Feed/Transport Motor Test On On Off Off
Feed Solenoid Test Off Off On Off
Feed Clutch Test On Off On Off
Stamp Solenoid Test Off On On Off
Special I/F Test Off Off Off On
FR without paper On Off Off On
Transport Motor Test On On Off On
FR: Free run

Procedure
1. Set bit 1 and/or bit 2 on SW100 (on the DF control board) to ON.
2. Set originals on the original table.
3. The free run starts automatically after about 2 seconds.
4. To stop the run, set SW100 bits 1 and 2 back to OFF. To ensure that the
system correctly resets, turn power off and then back on.

Free Run Process

1. Set originals on the DF table.
2. The first original sheet feeds into the DF.
3. The sensor detects the original.
4. The DF outputs the original to the exit tray.
5. Steps 2 through 4 repeat for each subsequent original sheet. When all
originals have been fed, the DF stops and waits for more.

SM 13 B813
EXTERIOR COVERS

3. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT

3.1 EXTERIOR COVERS
3.1.1 REAR COVER

1. Lift the DF.

2. Unhook the three latches [A] in the
order marked on the DF body.
3. Close the DF. [A]
4. Open the DF feed cover [B].
5. Rear cover [C] ( x 1)

3.1.2 ORIGINAL TABLE

B813R901.WMF
1. Rear cover ( 3.1.1)
2. Original table [D] ( x 2, x 2) [F] [G]
[C]

[B]
3.1.3 FRONT COVER

1. Open the DF feed cover [B].

2. Original table. ( 3.1.2) [D]
3. Front cover [E] ( x 2)
[E]

B813R902.WMF
3.1.4 ORIGINAL ENTRANCE
GUIDE

1. Feed unit ( 3.2)

2. Original table ( 3.1.2)
3. Roller cover [F]
4. Original entrance guide [G] ( x 4)

B813 14 SM
 FEED UNIT

3.1.5 DF FEED COVER

Document

DF2000
Feeder
[A]

B813
1. Rear cover ( 3.1.1)
2. Original table ( 3.1.2) [B]
3. Front cover ( 3.1.3)
4. Clip [A]
5. Strap [B] ( x 1)
6. DF feed cover [C] ( x 2)
[C]
B813R903.WMF

3.2 FEED UNIT [E]

[F] [G]
1. Open the DF feed cover [D] and [I]
detach the strap [E] ( x 1).
2. Raise the front guide flap [F] to
about a 45-degree angle, and [J]
push the feed unit [G] into the [H]
spring so that it comes free.
NOTE: 1) The feed unit comes off
very easily if you first lift
flap [H] to about a 45-
degree angle. [D]
2) When reinstalling, be
sure that the lever [I] is
above the pin [J]. B813R904.WMF

3.3 SEPARATION ROLLER [L]

[K]
1. Feed unit ( 3.2)
2. Roller cover [K]
3. Separation roller [L] ( x 1).

B813R905.WMF

SM 15 B813
PICK-UP ROLLER

3.4 PICK-UP ROLLER

[B]

[A]

[C]
B813R906.WMF

1. Feed unit ( 3.2)

2. Remove 2 clip rings and 1 bushing [A]
3. Pull the shaft [B] part way out at the gear end, so that the pick-up roller [C] can
be taken off.

3.5 FEED BELT

[F]

[D]

[G]

[E] B813R907.WMF

B813R908.WMF

1. Feed unit ( 3.2)

2. Pick-up roller housing [D]
3. Push down on the lower wings [E] of the tensioning piece [F], so that the
tensioning piece comes free of the shaft.
4. Take the tensioning piece out, and then remove the belt [G].

B813 16 SM
 ORIGINAL SENSORS (WIDTH, LENGTH, TRAILING EDGE)

3.6 ORIGINAL SENSORS (WIDTH, LENGTH, TRAILING

Document
EDGE)

DF2000
Feeder

B813
[A]
B813R909.WMF
[E] [F]

[B]
[D]

[C]

B813R910.WMF

1. Original table ( 3.1.2)

2. Sensor platform [A] ( x 3).
3. Length sensors [B], [C] ( x 1 on each sensor)
NOTE: Replace both sensors at the same time, together with the wiring and
connectors.
4. Width sensors [D], [E], and trailing edge sensor [F] ( x 1 on each sensor)
NOTE: Replace all three sensors at the same time, together with the wiring
and connectors.

SM 17 B813
ORIGINAL SET SENSOR

3.7 ORIGINAL SET SENSOR

[B]

[A]

B813R911.WMF

1. Original entrance guide ( 3.1.4)

2. Sensor bracket [A] ( x 1)
3. Original set sensor [B] ( x 1)

3.8 TRANSPORT MOTOR

[D]

[E]

[C]
B813R912.WMF

1. Rear cover ( 3.1.1)

2. Open the wire clamp [C] at the top of the motor bracket [D].
3. Motor bracket [D] ( x 2 , 1 spring)
NOTE: Unhook the spring at the board side.
4. Transport motor [E] ( x 2, x 1)

B813 18 SM
 FEED COVER OPEN SENSOR/
FEED CLUTCH/ROM/DF DRIVE BOARD
3.9 FEED COVER OPEN SENSOR/

Document
FEED CLUTCH/ROM/DF DRIVE BOARD

DF2000
Feeder

B813
[D]
[B]
[A]
[C]

[E]

B813R913.WMF

Exterior
1. Rear cover ( 3.1.1)

Feed Cover Open Sensor

2. Sensor bracket [A] ( x 1)
3. Feed cover open sensor [B] ( x 1)

Feed Clutch
2. Feed unit ( 3.2)
3. Feed clutch [C] ( x 1, 1 bushing, x 1).
NOTE: Pull the shaft inward until the clutch can be removed.

ROM
2. Replace the ROM [D] on the DF drive board.

DF Drive Board
2. DF drive board [E] ( x 3, all connectors)

SM 19 B813
REGISTRATION SENSOR

3.10 REGISTRATION SENSOR

[C]

[B]

[A]

B813R914.WMF

1. DF feed cover ( 3.1.5)

2. Original entrance guide ( 3.1.4)
3. Outer turn guide [A] ( x 2)
4. Pop out the inner turn guide [B], and remove the registration sensor [C] ( x
1)

3.11 PICK-UP SOLENOID

[D]

B813R915.WMF

1. Rear cover ( 3.1.1)

2. Pick-up solenoid [D] ( x 2, x 1)

B813 20 SM
 STAMP SOLENOID

3.12 STAMP SOLENOID

Document

DF2000
Feeder

B813
[B]
B813R916.WMF

[A]

[D]

[C]

1. Rear cover ( 3.1.1)

2. Disconnect the stamp solenoid connector.
NOTE: Pull out the small connector piece from the large connector. (The large
connector itself cannot fit through the hole in the frame.)
3. Lift the ADF upright and pull open the exit guide [A]. Release the front and rear
hooks [B] and open the cover [C].
4. Remove the stamp solenoid [D] ( x 1), and pull it out together with the wire.

SM 21 B813
 B814
AUTO REVERSE DOCUMENT FEEDER
DF2010
AUTO REVERSE DOCUMENT FEEDER
DF2010 B814
TABLE OF CONTENTS

1. OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION............................................ 1

1.1 MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT........................................................ 1
1.2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT ......................................................... 2
1.3 DRIVE LAYOUT ............................................................................................ 3

2. DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS .......................................... 4

2.1 ORIGINAL SIZE DETECTION ....................................................................... 4
2.2 PICK-UP AND SEPARATION ....................................................................... 6
2.3 ORIGINAL TRANSPORT AND EXIT ............................................................. 7
2.3.1 SINGLE-SIDED ORIGINALS................................................................ 7
2.3.2 DOUBLE-SIDED ORIGINALS .............................................................. 8
2.3.3 ORIGINAL TRAILING EDGE SENSOR................................................ 9
2.4 STAMP ........................................................................................................ 10
2.5 TIMING CHARTS ........................................................................................ 11
2.5.1 SINGLE-SIDED ORIGINAL MODE (A3)............................................. 11
2.5.2 SINGLE-SIDED ORIGINAL MODE (A3, STAMP MODE)................... 12
2.5.3 DOUBLE-SIDED ORIGINAL MODE................................................... 13
2.5.4 DOUBLE-SIDED ORIGINAL MODE (STAMP MODE) ....................... 14
2.6 JAM DETECTION........................................................................................ 15
2.7 OVERALL ELECTRICAL CIRCUIT.............................................................. 16
2.8 FREE RUN .................................................................................................. 17

3. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ......................................... 18

3.1 DF EXIT TABLE AND COVER ....................................................................18
3.2 ORIGINAL FEED UNIT................................................................................ 19
3.3 LEFT COVER .............................................................................................. 20
3.4 PICK-UP ROLLER....................................................................................... 21
3.5 FEED BELT ................................................................................................. 22
3.6 SEPARATION ROLLER .............................................................................. 23
3.7 ORIGINAL SET/ORIGINAL REVERSE SENSORS ..................................... 24
3.8 ORIGINAL L/W SENSORS, TRAILING EDGE SENSOR ............................ 25
3.9 FEED CLUTCH, PICK-UP SOL, TRANSPORT MOTOR, FEED MOTOR... 26
3.10 REGISTRATION SENSOR .................................................................... 27
3.11 STAMP SOLENOID AND ORIGINAL EXIT SENSOR ........................... 28

SM i B814
 MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT

1. OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION

ARDF DF2010
B814
1.1 MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT

3 4 5 6 7 8 9

19

18
17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10
B814I901.WMF

1. Separation Roller 11. Reverse Roller

2. Paper Feed Belt 12. Junction Gate
3. Pick-up Roller 13. Exit Roller
4. Original Set Sensor 14. Original Exit Sensor
5. Original Trailing Edge Sensor 15. Stamp
6. Original Width Sensor Board 16. 2nd Transport Roller
7. Original Length Sensor 1 17. Original Exposure Guide
8. Original Length Sensor 2 18. Registration Sensor
9. Original Table 19. 1st Transport Roller
10. Reverse Table

SM 1 B814
ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT

1.2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT

2
1 3
17 4
5
16
6
15 7
8

14

13
9
12
10
11
B814I902.WMF

1. DF Feed Clutch 10. DF Feed Motor

2. Feed Cover Sensor 11. DF Transport Motor
3. Original Width Sensor Board 12. Original Exit Sensor
4. Original Length Sensor 1 13. Stamp Solenoid
5. DF Pick-up Solenoid 14. Original Trailing Edge Sensor
6. Original Length Sensor 2 15. Original Set Sensor
7. Junction Gate Solenoid 16. Original Reverse Sensor
8. DF Drive PCB 17. Registration Sensor
9. DF Position Sensor

B814 2 SM
 DRIVE LAYOUT

1.3 DRIVE LAYOUT

ARDF DF2010
B814
4
3
2 5
1 6

10

9
8
7
B814I903.WMF

1. Separation Roller 6. DF Feed Motor

2. Original Feed Belt 7. Reverse Table Roller
3. Pick-up Roller 8. 2nd Transport Roller
4. DF Feed Clutch 9. Exit Roller
5. DF Transport Motor 10. 1st Transport Roller

SM 3 B814
ORIGINAL SIZE DETECTION

2. DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS

2.1 ORIGINAL SIZE DETECTION

[A]
[B]

[C]

B814D901.WMF

The original size detection mechanism consists of the original width sensor board
[A] and two original length sensors-1 [B] and -2 [C]. Based on the combined output
of the length sensors and the width sensor board, the machine can detect the size
of the original. This integrated detection mechanism is detailed in the table on the
next page.
Note that the width sensor’s terminal plate is attached to the original guide, so the
widths of the originals must all be the same.

B814 4 SM
 ORIGINAL SIZE DETECTION

ARDF DF2010
Original Original

B814
NA EU P1 P2 P3 P4
Length 1 Length 2
1 A3 (297 x 420) ON ON - - - ON
2 B4 (257 x 364) ON ON - - ON -
3 A4 SEF (210 x 297) ON - - ON - -
4 A4 LEF (297 x 210) - - - - - ON
5 B5 SEF (182 x 257) ON - ON - - -
6 B5 LEF (257 x 182) - - - - ON -
7 A5 SEF (148 x 210) - - ON - - -
8 A5 LEF (210 x 148) - - - ON - -
9 11" x 17" 1 ON ON - - - ON
10 11" x 15" 1 ON ON - - - ON
11 10" x 14" ON ON - - ON -
12 81/2" x 14" 2 ON ON - ON - -
13 81/2" x 13" 4 ON ON - ON - -
14 8" x 13" 2 4 ON ON - ON - -
15 81/2" x 11" SEF 3 ON - - ON - -
16 11" x 81/2" LEF - - - - - ON
17 8" x 10" SEF 3 ON - - ON - -
18 51/2" x 81/2" SEF - - ON - - -
19 81/2" x 51/2" LEF - - - ON - -
NA: America (North, Middle, South) EU: Europe, Asia, China, Taiwan
: No : Yes ON: Paper present

1, 1: In NA, original size 11" x 15" is detected as 11" x 17"

2, 2: In NA, original size 8" x 13" is detected as 81/2" x 14"
3, 3: In NA, original size 8" x 10" is detected as 81/2" x 11"
4, 4: In EU, original size 8" x 13" is detected as 81/2" x 13"

Original Width Sensor Board

Original Width 1

Original Width 2

Original Side
Guide Position
P1 P2 P3 P4
B5SEF/ A4SEF/
B4/B5LEF A3/A4LEF
A5SEF A5LEF

B814D902.WMF

SM 5 B814
PICK-UP AND SEPARATION

2.2 PICK-UP AND SEPARATION

[B]
[A] [C]

[D]

[E]

[B]
B814D903.WMF

[F]

[G]

B814D904.WMF

The original is set with the image facing up. The original pushes actuator [A] and
the original set sensor [E] is activated.
After pressing the start button, the pick-up solenoid [D] is activated and the lift plate
[C] lifts the original up until it comes in contact with the pick-up roller [B]. The pick-
up roller then feeds the top sheet of paper.
After being fed from the pick-up roller, the topmost sheet is separated from the
stack by the separation roller and sent to the first transport roller.
The mechanism is an FRR system, consisting of the original feed belt [F] and
separation roller [G].

B814 6 SM
 ORIGINAL TRANSPORT AND EXIT

2.3 ORIGINAL TRANSPORT AND EXIT

ARDF DF2010
B814
2.3.1 SINGLE-SIDED ORIGINALS

[E]
[F]
[A]

[B]

[C] [D]

B814D905.WMF

The DF feed motor feeds the separated original to the first transport roller [A] at
maximum speed. When the registration sensor [B] detects the leading edge, the
motor stops for a short while. Then the feed and transport motors turn on again,
and feed the original through the scanning area at a lower speed (the scanning
area contains the original exposure guide [D] and DF exposure glass [C]). After
scanning, the original is fed out by the second transport roller [E] and exit roller [F].

SM 7 B814
ORIGINAL TRANSPORT AND EXIT

2.3.2 DOUBLE-SIDED ORIGINALS

[G] [F]
[H]

[A] [E]

[D]
[B]
B814D906.WMF [C]

[A] [E]

[D]

[F]
B814D907.WMF

When the registration sensor [B] detects the leading edge of the original, the DF
feed motor (which drives the feed roller) and transport motor (which drives the
transport roller) both switch off. After a brief interval, the transport motor alone
reactivates to drive the first transport roller [A] and second transport roller [G] and
the exit roller [F]. The front side of the original is then scanned.
When the original exit sensor [C] detects the leading edge of the original, the
junction gate solenoid is activated and the junction gate [D] opens. The original is
then transported towards the reverse table [H].
Soon after the trailing edge of the original passes the exit sensor [C], the junction
gate solenoid switches off and the junction gate [D] is closed. When the original
has been fed onto the reverse table, the DF feed motor switches on in reverse. The
original is then fed by the reverse roller [E] and then by the exit roller [F] and first
transport roller [A] to the scanning area (where the reverse side will be scanned).

B814 8 SM
 ORIGINAL TRANSPORT AND EXIT

ARDF DF2010
[H]

B814
[I]
B814D908.WMF

[J]

B814D909.WMF

The original is then sent to the reverse table [H] a second time to be turned over.
This is done so that the duplex copies will be properly stacked front side down in
the exit tray [J] in the correct order.

2.3.3 ORIGINAL TRAILING EDGE SENSOR

During one-to-one copying, copy paper is fed to the registration roller in advance
(while the original is still being scanned), to increase the copy speed. The trailing
edge sensor monitors the stack of originals in the feeder, and detects when the
trailing edge of the last page has been fed in. The main CPU then stops the copier
from feeding an unwanted extra sheet of copy paper.

SM 9 B814
STAMP

2.4 STAMP

[C]

[A]

[B]
B814D910.WMF

This function is only for fax mode.

There is a stamp [A] between the 2nd transport roller [B] and the exit roller [C], and
its solenoid is controlled by the copier directly.
When the original reaches the stamp position, the DF feed motor stops. At 300
milliseconds after stopping the DF feed motor, the stamp solenoid turns on if the
page was sent successfully (immediate transmission) or stored successfully
(memory transmission). After stamping, the DF feed motor starts again to feed out
the document, and its speed is about 1.3 times the normal speed.
The stamping position on the original can be changed by adjusting SP6-010.

B814 10 SM
SM
RXD

TXD
MAX
CW
READ
Feed Motor
2.5 TIMING CHARTS

Transport Motor OFF

168.1mm
50ms 50ms 50ms 50ms
5mm 5mm 5mm

JAM#1A
200ms

ON

11
DF Feed Clutch OFF 327.6mm 327.6mm 327.6mm

ON
DF Pick-up
Solenoid OFF

ON
Original Set
Sensor OFF JAM#4
2.5.1 SINGLE-SIDED ORIGINAL MODE (A3)

ON
Original Exit
Sensor OFF
JAM#6
JAM#2, 3, 5
26.2mm (32.2-5-1mm)
ON
Registration
Sensor OFF

ENABLE
FGATE DISABLE
420mm

B814D911.WMF
TIMING CHARTS

B814
ARDF DF2010
B814
B814
RXD
TIMING CHARTS

TXD

MAX
CW
READ
Feed Motor
Transport Motor OFF
168.4mm
50ms 50ms 50ms 50ms
50ms
JAM#8 JAM#8
JAM#1A
200ms 200ms

ON
DF Feed Clutch OFF

12
ON
DF Pick-up
Solenoid OFF

ON
Original Set
OFF JAM#4
Sensor 74.5mm
ON
Original Exit
Sensor OFF
JAM#2, 3, 5 JAM#6
31.2mm 74.5mm 31.2mm
ON
Registration
Sensor OFF

ENABLE
FGATE DISABLE
420mm

200ms 200ms
ON
2.5.2 SINGLE-SIDED ORIGINAL MODE (A3, STAMP MODE)

Stamp OFF

B814D912.WMF

SM
SM
RXD

TXD
MAX
CW
READ
Feed Motor 168.1mm
OFF 50ms
50ms 50ms
5mm 5mm 200ms
CCW MAX 200ms
JAM#1A 50ms 50ms 50ms 50ms
200ms 32.8mm 50ms 32.8mm 50ms
200ms
5mm JAM#7 5mm JAM#7
JAM#7 200ms
JAM#7
MAX
CW
READ
Transport Motor OFF

ON
DF Feed Clutch OFF

13
ON
DF Pick-up
Solenoid OFF

ON
Junction Gate
Solenoid OFF

ON
2.5.3 DOUBLE-SIDED ORIGINAL MODE

Original Set
Sensor OFF

ON
Original Exit
Sensor OFF
JAM#6 50.7mm JAM#6 JAM#6 JAM#6 JAM#6 JAM#6
50.7mm 50.7mm 50.7mm
ON
Original Reverse
Sensor OFF
JAM#2, 3, 5 JAM#1B JAM#2, 3, 5 JAM#1B 60mm JAM#2, 3, 5 JAM#1B JAM#2, 3, 5 JAM#1B
36.2mm (32.5-5-1mm) 26.2mm JAM#2, 5 26.2mm 26.2mm JAM#2, 5
ON
Registration
Sensor OFF

ENABLE
FGATE DISABLE

B814D913.WMF
TIMING CHARTS

B814
ARDF DF2010
B814
B814
RXD

TXD
MAX
CW
READ
TIMING CHARTS

Feed Motor OFF

50ms
50ms 200ms 50ms
JAM#1A
CCW MAX 200ms
JAM#8 JAM#8 50ms 50ms
200ms 32.8mm 50ms 50ms
JAM#7
JAM#7
MAX
CW
READ
Transport Motor OFF

ON
DF Feed Clutch OFF

ON
DF Pick-up
Solenoid OFF

14
ON
Junction Gate
Solenoid OFF

ON
Original Set
Sensor OFF

ON
Original Exit
Sensor OFF
50.7mm 50.7mm JAM#6

ON
Original Reverse
Sensor OFF
JAM#2, 3, 5 JAM#1B JAM#2, 3, 5 JAM#1B 60mm
31.2 mm 31.2mm JAM#2, 5
74.5mm 74.5mm
ON
Registration
Sensor OFF

ENABLE
2.5.4 DOUBLE-SIDED ORIGINAL MODE (STAMP MODE)

FGATE DISABLE

ON 200ms 200ms
Stamp OFF

B814D914.WMF

SM
 JAM DETECTION

2.6 JAM DETECTION

ARDF DF2010
B814
JAM 1A: If the registration sensor does not turn on within X1 ms after original
feed starts.
X1 = 1,000 ms
JAM 1B: If the registration sensor does not turn on within 953 ms after the
leading edge of the original reaches the original reverse sensor (duplex
mode only)
JAM 2: If the registration sensor does not turn off within X2 ms after receiving
the feeding signal from the Mainframe and after turning on.
X2 = (Original length/line speed) +2,000 ms
JAM 3: If there is no original at the registration sensor when scanning is started,
even though the sensor had already turned on.
The operator may then remove the original from the ADF.
JAM 4: The current original is stopped after the registration sensor detects its
leading edge, but the previous original is still at the scanning position.
JAM 5: If the original exit sensor does not turn on within X3 ms after receiving
relaying signal from the Mainframe and after the registration sensor
turns on.
X3 = 140 mm/line speed
JAM 6: If the original exit sensor does not turn off within X4 ms after the original
exit sensor turns on.
X4 = (Original length/line speed) +1,030 ms
JAM 7: If the original reverse sensor does not turn on within 2,329 ms after the
reversing process begins (Duplex mode only).
JAM 8: If the original stopped at the stamp position is removed.
JAM 9: If the cover is opened or the ADF is lifted up while the ADF is in
operation.
JAM 10: If the DF gate signal (indicating that the original is now in the correct
position for scanning) is not asserted when the original trailing edge
passes the DF exposure glass.
JAM 10 occurs when the original is pulled out while it is being scanned.

SM 15 B814
OVERALL ELECTRICAL CIRCUIT

2.7 OVERALL ELECTRICAL CIRCUIT

The DF CPU controls the transport motor, DF feed motor, DF feed clutch, junction
gate solenoid, stamp solenoid, and pick-up solenoid. The DF CPU also monitors all
DF sensors and provides updated status information when prompted at regular
intervals by the mainframe, which may then take action based on this information.
The DF–mainframe connection is checked automatically just after power is
supplied to the mainframe.

Main ADF Control

Interface
Frame CPU

DF Feed Motor

Driver
DF Transport
Registration Sensor Motor
Original Set Sensor
DF Position Sensor
Feed Cover Open Sensor DF Feed Clutch
Original Width Sensor Board
Original Length Sensor 1
Original Length Sensor 2
Junction Gate
Original Trailing Edge Sensor
Solenoid
Original Exit Sensor Driver
Original Reverse Sensor
DF Pick-up
Solenoid

ADF Control Board Stamp Solenoid

B814D915.WMF

B814 16 SM
 FREE RUN

2.8 FREE RUN

ARDF DF2010
B814
Two types of free runs can be performed by using Dip Switch DPS 100 on the DF
control board. The switch settings are as follows:
DPS 100
Mode\Bits Bit0 Bit1 Bit2 Bit3
Normal Off Off Off Off
One-sided FR with paper On Off Off Off
Two-sided FR with paper Off On Off Off
Feed/Transport Motor Test On On Off Off
Feed Solenoid Test Off Off On Off
Feed Clutch Test On Off On Off
Stamp Solenoid Test Off On On Off
Inverter Solenoid Test On On On Off
Special I/F Test Off Off Off On
One-sided FR without paper On Off Off On
Two-sided FR without paper Off On Off On
Transport Motor Test On On Off On
Feed Motor Test Off Off On On

Procedure
1. Turn on SW 1 or 2 (DPS 100 on DF control board).
2. Set the original on the original table.
3. After 2 seconds, the free run will automatically start.
4. To stop the free run, turn all DIP switches OFF, then turn the main power off
and on.

One-sided Free Run Process

1. The originals are set on the original table.
2. The first page of the original is fed into the DF.
3. The sensors detect the original.
4. The original is output to the exit tray.
5. Steps 2-4 above are repeated for any additional originals set on the original
table. If there are no additional originals, the DF will stop and wait.

Two-sided Free Run Process

The process is the same, except that the original reverse cycle is added.

SM 17 B814
DF EXIT TABLE AND COVER

3. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT

3.1 DF EXIT TABLE AND COVER

[B]

[C]

[D]

[A]
B814R901.WMF

1. Open the left cover.

2. [A] Front cover ( x 2)
3. [B] Rear cover ( x 2). Take care not to break the 3 hooks.
4. [C] Open the reverse table
5. [D] Original exit table ( x 3)

B814 18 SM
 ORIGINAL FEED UNIT

3.2 ORIGINAL FEED UNIT

ARDF DF2010
B814
[A]

B814R902.WMF

1. Open the left cover.

2. [A] Original feed unit

SM 19 B814
LEFT COVER

3.3 LEFT COVER

[B]

[A]

B814R903.WMF

1. Front and rear covers ( 3.1)

2. [A] Left cover ( x 2)
3. [B] Lower left stay unit ( x 2)

B814 20 SM
 PICK-UP ROLLER

3.4 PICK-UP ROLLER

ARDF DF2010
B814
[A]

B814R904.WMF

1. Original feed unit ( 3.2)

2. [A] Pick-up roller (1 snap ring)

SM 21 B814
FEED BELT

3.5 FEED BELT

[A]

B814R905.WMF

[C]

[B]

B814R906.WMF

1. Original feed unit ( 3.2)

2. [A] Paper feed guide
3. [B] Belt holders
4. [C] Feed belt

B814 22 SM
 SEPARATION ROLLER

3.6 SEPARATION ROLLER

ARDF DF2010
B814
[A]

[C]

[B]
B814R907.WMF

1. Lift the original feed guide [A].

2. [B] Separation roller cover
3. [C] Separation roller

SM 23 B814
ORIGINAL SET/ORIGINAL REVERSE SENSORS

3.7 ORIGINAL SET/ORIGINAL REVERSE SENSORS

[A]

[B]

[C]

[D]
B814R908.WMF

1. Open the left cover.

2. While pushing the left and right pawls [A], open the original feed guide plate [B].
3. [C] Original set sensor ( x 1)
4. [D] Original reverse sensor ( x 1)

B814 24 SM
 ORIGINAL L/W SENSORS, TRAILING EDGE SENSOR

3.8 ORIGINAL L/W SENSORS, TRAILING EDGE SENSOR

ARDF DF2010
B814
[A]

[B]
[C]
[E] [D]

B814R909.WMF

B814R910.WMF

1. Open the original table.

2. [A] Upper part of the table ( x 3)
3. [B] Width sensor board ( x 1)
4. [C] Length sensor-1 ( x 1)
5. [D] Length sensor-2 ( x 1)
6. [E] Trailing edge sensor ( x 1)
To ensure proper detection of paper size, after [G]
wiping off the sensor board and terminal
plate with a dry cloth (or cloth with
alcohol), apply silicone grease (KS-660)
to the terminal plate [G].

B814R912.WMF

SM 25 B814
FEED CLUTCH, PICK-UP SOL, TRANSPORT MOTOR, FEED MOTOR

3.9 FEED CLUTCH, PICK-UP SOL, TRANSPORT MOTOR,

FEED MOTOR

[B]

[A]

[C]

[D]

[E] B814R913.WMF

Exterior
1. Rear cover ( 3.1)

DF Feed Clutch
1. [A] DF feed clutch [A] ( x 1, x 1)

Pick-up Solenoid
1. [B] Pick-up solenoid ( x 3, 1 snap ring, x 1)

Transport Motor
1. [C] Bracket ( x 2)
2. [E] Transport motor ( x 2, x 1)

DF Feed Motor
1. [C] Bracket ( x 2)
2. [D] DF feed motor ( x 2, x 1)

B814 26 SM
 REGISTRATION SENSOR

3.10 REGISTRATION SENSOR

ARDF DF2010
B814
[B]

[A]
B814R914.WMF

1. Front and rear covers ( 3.1)

2. Left cover and lower left stay unit ( 3.3)
3. [A] Transport guide plate
4. [B] Registration sensor ( x 1)

SM 27 B814
STAMP SOLENOID AND ORIGINAL EXIT SENSOR

3.11 STAMP SOLENOID AND ORIGINAL EXIT SENSOR

[A] [B]

[C]

B814R915.WMF

[D]

B814R916.WMF

1. Front cover, Rear cover, Original exit table ( 3.1)

2. Open the exit guide plate [A]. Next, detach the unit by inserting a screwdriver or
other tool into one of the small openings [B] on either side of the guide plate
holder and pushing firmly.
3. [C] Stamp solenoid ( x 1, x 1)
4. [D] Original exit sensor ( x 1)

B814 28 SM
 B384
PAPER TRAY UNIT PS450
 PAPER TRAY UNIT PS450 B384
TABLE OF CONTENTS

1 OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION..............................................1

1.1 MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT ...................................................... 1
1.2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT........................................................ 2
1.3 DRIVE LAYOUT ........................................................................................... 3

2 DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS .............................................................4

2.1 PAPER FEED AND SEPARATION MECHANISM ....................................... 4
2.2 PAPER LIFT MECHANISM .......................................................................... 5
2.3 PAPER END DETECTION ........................................................................... 7
2.4 PAPER HEIGHT DETECTION ..................................................................... 8
PAPER SIZE DETECTION ...................................................................... 9
2.5 SIDE AND END FENCES .......................................................................... 10
Side Fences........................................................................................... 10
End Fence ............................................................................................. 10

3 REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ...........................................11

3.1 FEED ROLLER REPLACEMENT............................................................... 11
3.2 TRAY MAIN BOARD REPLACEMENT ...................................................... 12
3.3 TRAY MOTOR REPLACEMENT................................................................ 12
3.4 RELAY CLUTCH REPLACEMENT ............................................................ 13
3.5 UPPER PAPER FEED CLUTCH REPLACEMENT .................................... 14
3.6 LOWER PAPER FEED CLUTCH REPLACEMENT ................................... 15
3.7 LIFT MOTOR REPLACEMENT .................................................................. 16
3.8 PAPER END SENSOR REPLACEMENT ................................................... 17
3.9 VERTICAL TRANSPORT SENSOR REPLACEMENT ............................... 17
3.10 PAPER SIZE SWITCH REPLACEMENT ................................................. 18

SM i B384
 MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT

1. OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION

1.1 MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT

Unit PS450
Paper Tray
5
1

B384
2
3

7 6

B384V101.WMF

1. Upper Paper Feed Roller 5. Upper Bottom Plate

2. Lower Paper Feed Roller 6. Lower Bottom Plate
3. Upper Tray 7. Optional Tray Heater
4. Lower Tray

SM 1 B384
ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT

1.2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT

1
2
20
3
4

19 6

18 7

17 10
16 11
12
15 13
14
B384V102.WMF

1. Tray Main Board 11. Lower Paper Height 1 Sensor

2. Upper Lift Sensor 12. Vertical Transport Sensor
3. Upper Lift Motor 13. Upper Paper End Sensor
4. Upper Paper Height 2 Sensor 14. Lower Paper End Sensor
5. Upper Paper Height 1 Sensor 15. Lower Paper Size Switch
6. Upper Paper Feed Clutch 16. Upper Paper Size Switch
7. Relay Clutch 17. Optional Tray Heater
8. Tray Cover Switch 18. Lower Lift Motor
9. Lower Paper Feed Clutch 19. Lower Lift Sensor
10. Lower Paper Height 2 Sensor 20. Tray Motor

B384 2 SM
 DRIVE LAYOUT

1.3 DRIVE LAYOUT

Unit PS450
Paper Tray

B384
3
8

7
B384V103.WMF

1. Tray Motor 5. Lower Paper Feed Clutch

2. Drive Belt 6. Relay Roller
3. Upper Paper Feed Clutch 7. Lower Paper Feed Roller
4. Relay Clutch 8. Upper Paper Feed Roller

SM 3 B384
PAPER FEED AND SEPARATION MECHANISM

2. DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS
2.1 PAPER FEED AND SEPARATION MECHANISM

[A] [B]

[C]

B384D104.WMF

Each paper tray holds 500 sheets. The paper feed roller [A] drives the top sheet of
paper from the paper tray to the copier/printer. The friction pad [B] allows only one
sheet to feed at a time. The friction pad applies pressure to the feed roller with a
spring [C].

B384 4 SM
 PAPER LIFT MECHANISM

2.2 PAPER LIFT MECHANISM

[B]
[A]

[D]

Unit PS450
Paper Tray
[C]

B384
[F]
[K] [G]
[H]
[A]
B384D106.WMF [E] [B]

[I]
[J]
[C]

[D]
[E]

B384D107.WMF

The paper size switch detects when the tray is pushed in.
When the paper tray is pushed into the machine, the pin [A] for the lift motor
pressure shaft engages the lift motor coupling [B] and the pin [C] for the bottom
plate lift shaft in the tray engages the bottom plate pressure lever coupling [D]. The
pin [E] on the rear of the tray pushes the lock lever so that the lift motor can lift the
bottom plate pressure lever.
The lift motor turns on, and turns clockwise as viewed on the lower diagram. The
main pressure spring [K] pulls the bottom plate pressure lever, and this lifts the tray
bottom plate.
When the top of the stack touches the feed roller, the motor cannot pull up the
plate any more, so it pulls the actuator [G] into the lift sensor [F].
The pressure of the feed roller on the paper is now too high, so the lift motor
reverses to reduce this pressure. It reverses for 300 ms or 600 ms, depending on
the paper size. For smaller paper, it reverses the larger amount (600 ms) to reduce
the pressure more.

SM 5 B384
PAPER LIFT MECHANISM

For A4-SEF paper or wider, a projection [H] on the side fence engages the
secondary pressure spring [J] through a lever [I]. Then, the secondary pressure
spring [J] applies paper feed pressure in addition to the main pressure spring [K], to
ensure that extra pressure is applied to wider paper.
When the paper tray is pulled out, the pins [A, C] disengage from the couplings [B,
D], and the bottom plate drops. To make it easier to push the tray in, the lift motor
rotates backwards 1.7 seconds to return the bottom plate pressure lever coupling
[D] to the original position.
The lift motor on timing can be adjusted with SP mode, to change the pressure
from the main pressure spring.
• SP1-908-1 (1st tray), 1-908-2 (2nd tray)
• Default: 0
• Increase the pressure: +1, +2
• Decrease the pressure: –1, –2
If the pressure is too strong, the sheet of paper may not be fed smoothly, and if it is
too weak, more than one sheet of paper may be fed at a time.
The pressure depends on the paper size.

B384 6 SM
 PAPER END DETECTION

2.3 PAPER END DETECTION

[A]

Unit PS450
Paper Tray
[B]

B384
[C]

B384D105.WMF

If there is some paper in the paper tray, the paper stack raises the paper end feeler
[A] and the paper end sensor [B] is deactivated.
When the paper tray runs out of paper, the paper end feeler drops into the cutout
[C] in the tray bottom plate and the paper end sensor is activated.
When the paper tray is drawn out with no paper in the tray, the shape of the paper
end feeler causes it to lift up.

SM 7 B384
PAPER HEIGHT DETECTION

2.4 PAPER HEIGHT DETECTION

[B]
[A]

[C]

[C]

B384D107.WMF

The amount of paper in the tray is detected by the combination of on/off signals
from two paper height sensors [A] and [B].
When the amount of paper decreases, the bottom plate pressure lever [C] moves
the actuator up.
The following combination of sensor signals is sent to the copier/printer.

Amount of Paper Paper Height Sensor 1 Paper Height Sensor 2

Near End OFF ON
30% ON ON
70% ON OFF
100% OFF OFF

When the tray contains paper of a small width, the paper feed pressure may
become too low when the thickness of the remaining stack of paper has decreased.
The lift motor rotates forward 300 ms after the sensor detects a certain amount of
paper remaining in the tray to increase paper feed pressure, simulating the
pressure generated by a full tray.

B384 8 SM
 PAPER SIZE DETECTION

PAPER SIZE DETECTION

SW
1 2 3 4
[B]
Size
A3, F (81/2" x 13") P P P P
A4 short-edge O O P P

Unit PS450
Paper Tray
A4 long-edge O O P O

B384
A5 long-edge
P P O O
11" x 17"
B4, 81/2" x 14" O P O P [A]
B5 long-edge,
O P P P
81/2" x 11"
B5 short-edge,
P O O O
11" x 81/2"
* (Asterisk) P O P O

P: ON (Pushed)
O: OFF (Not pushed)

B384D108.WMF

There are four paper size microswitches [A] on the front right plate of the paper tray
unit. The switches are actuated by a paper size actuator [B] behind the paper size
indicator plate, which is on the front right of the tray.
Each paper size has its own actuator, with a unique combination of notches. To
determine which size has been installed, the CPU reads which microswitches the
actuator has switched off.
The CPU disables paper feed from a tray if the paper size cannot be detected. If
the paper size actuator is broken, or if there is no tray installed, the Add Paper
indicator will light.
When the paper size actuator is at the “*” mark, the paper tray can be set up to
accommodate one of a wider range of paper sizes by using user tools. If the paper
size for this position is changed without changing the user tool setting, a paper jam
will result.

SM 9 B384
SIDE AND END FENCES

2.5 SIDE AND END FENCES

[A]

[D]

[B]
B384D110.WMF

[C]

B384D109.WMF

Side Fences
If the tray is full of paper and it is pushed in strongly, the fences may deform or
bend. This may cause the paper to skew or the side-to-side registration to be
incorrect. To correct this, each side fence has a stopper [A] attached to it. Each
side fence can be secured with a screw [B], for customers who do not want to
change the paper size.

End Fence
As the amount of paper in the tray decreases, the bottom plate [C] lifts up gradually.
The end fence [D] is connected to the bottom plate. When the tray bottom plate
rises, the end fence moves forward and pushes the back of the paper stack to keep
it squared up.

B384 10 SM
 FEED ROLLER REPLACEMENT

3. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT

3.1 FEED ROLLER REPLACEMENT

[C]

Unit PS450
Paper Tray

B384
[B]

[A]

B384R723.WMF

1. [A] Paper tray

2. Move the release lever [B] to the front.
3. Pull the feed roller [C] to the operation side and remove it.

SM 11 B384
TRAY MAIN BOARD REPLACEMENT

[A]

B384R101.WMF

[B]

[C]

B384R103.WMF

3.2 TRAY MAIN BOARD REPLACEMENT

1. [A] Rear cover ( x 5)
2. [B] Tray main board ( x 4, x 8)

3.3 TRAY MOTOR REPLACEMENT

1. Rear cover ( x 5)
2. Disconnect 8 connectors from the tray main board [B].
3. Tray main board with the bracket ( x 2)
4. [C] Tray motor ( x 6, x 1)

B384 12 SM
 RELAY CLUTCH REPLACEMENT

3.4 RELAY CLUTCH REPLACEMENT

Unit PS450
Paper Tray

B384
[A]
[B]

B384R101.WMF

[D]

[C]

[E]
B384R102.WMF

1. [A] Rear cover ( x 5)

2. [B] Right cover ( x 2)
3. [C] Stopper bracket ( x 1)
4. [D] Bushing
5. [E] Relay clutch ( x 1)

SM 13 B384
UPPER PAPER FEED CLUTCH REPLACEMENT

3.5 UPPER PAPER FEED CLUTCH REPLACEMENT

[A]

B384R101.WMF
[B]

[D]

[C]

[E]
B384R102.WMF

1. [A] Rear cover ( x 5)

2. [B] Bracket ( x 2)
3. [C] Stopper bracket ( x 2)
4. [D] Bushing
5. [E] Upper paper feed clutch ( x 1)

B384 14 SM
 LOWER PAPER FEED CLUTCH REPLACEMENT

3.6 LOWER PAPER FEED CLUTCH REPLACEMENT

Unit PS450
Paper Tray

B384
[A]

B384R101.WMF

[C]
[B]
B384R102.WMF

1. [A] Rear cover ( x 5)

2. [B] Snap ring
3. [C] Lower paper feed clutch

SM 15 B384
LIFT MOTOR REPLACEMENT

3.7 LIFT MOTOR REPLACEMENT

[A]

B384R101.WMF

[C]

[D]

[B]

[E]
B384R104.WMF

1. Pull out the paper tray.

2. [A] Rear cover ( x 5)
3. [B] 2P connector
4. [C] Spring
5. [D] Lift motor unit ( x 3)
6. [E] Lift motor ( x 3)

B384 16 SM
 PAPER END SENSOR REPLACEMENT

3.8 PAPER END SENSOR REPLACEMENT

[C]

[B]

Unit PS450
Paper Tray

B384
[A]

B384R106.WMF

1. Paper tray
2. [A] Paper end sensor bracket ( x 1, x 1)
3. [B] Paper end sensor
NOTE: After replacing the sensor, pull the sensor cable towards the right side of
the frame [C] so that it does not touch the paper in the tray.

3.9 VERTICAL TRANSPORT SENSOR REPLACEMENT

[C]

[D]
[B]

[A]

B384R105.WMF

1. Open the right door [A].

2. [B] Right guide plate ( x 2)
3. [C] Vertical transport sensor bracket ( x 1, x 1)
4. [D] Vertical transport sensor

SM 17 B384
PAPER SIZE SWITCH REPLACEMENT

3.10 PAPER SIZE SWITCH REPLACEMENT

[B]

[A]

B384R108.WMF

1. Upper and lower paper trays

2. [A] Inner cover ( x 2)
3. [B] Paper size switch ( x 1)

B384 18 SM
 B385
PAPER TRAY UNIT PS460
 PAPER TRAY UNIT PS460 B385
TABLE OF CONTENTS

1 OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION..............................................1

1.1 MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT ...................................................... 1
1.2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT........................................................ 2
1.3 DRIVE LAYOUT ........................................................................................... 3

2 DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS .............................................................4

2.1 PAPER FEED AND SEPARATION .............................................................. 4
2.2 PAPER LIFT MECHANISM .......................................................................... 5
2.3 PAPER END DETECTION ........................................................................... 7
2.4 PAPER HEIGHT DETECTION ..................................................................... 8
2.5 PAPER SIZE DETECTION........................................................................... 9
2.6 SIDE AND END FENCES .......................................................................... 10
Side Fences........................................................................................... 10
End Fence ............................................................................................. 10

3 REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ...........................................11

3.1 FEED ROLLER REPLACEMENT............................................................... 11
3.2 TRAY MAIN BOARD REPLACEMENT ...................................................... 12
3.3 TRAY MOTOR REPLACEMENT................................................................ 13
3.4 LIFT MOTOR REPLACEMENT .................................................................. 14
3.5 PAPER END SENSOR REPLACEMENT ................................................... 15
3.6 PAPER SIZE SWITCH REPLACEMENT ................................................... 15

SM i B385
 MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT

1. OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION

1.1 MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT

Unit PS460
Paper Tray

B385
3 1

4 B385V101.WMF

1. Paper Feed Roller 3. Bottom Plate

2. Tray 4. Optional Tray Heater

SM 1 B385
ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT

1.2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT

1
2
3
4

10
8
9
B385V102.WMF

1. Tray Main Board 6. Paper Feed Motor

2. Lift Sensor 7. Tray Cover Switch
3. Lift Motor 8. Paper End Sensor
4. Paper Height 2 Sensor 9. Paper Size Switch
5. Paper Height 1 Sensor 10. Optional Tray Heater

B385 2 SM
 DRIVE LAYOUT

1.3 DRIVE LAYOUT

Unit PS460
Paper Tray
1

B385
2

B385V103.WMF

1. Paper Feed Motor 2. Paper Feed Roller

SM 3 B385
PAPER FEED AND SEPARATION

2. DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS
2.1 PAPER FEED AND SEPARATION

[A]
[B]

[C]

B385D103.WMF

The paper tray holds 500 sheets. The paper feed roller [A] drives the top sheet of
paper from the paper tray to the copier/printer. The friction pad [B] allows only one
sheet to feed at a time. The friction pad applies pressure to the feed roller with a
spring [C].

B385 4 SM
 PAPER LIFT MECHANISM

2.2 PAPER LIFT MECHANISM

[B]
[A]

[D]

Unit PS460
Paper Tray
[C]

B385
[F]
[K] [G]
[H]
[A]
B385D106.WMF [E] [B]

[I]
[J]
[C]

[D]
[E]

B385D107.WMF

The paper size switch detects when the tray is pushed in.
When the paper tray is pushed into the machine, the pin [A] for the lift motor
pressure shaft engages the lift motor coupling [B] and the pin [C] for the bottom
plate lift shaft in the tray engages the bottom plate pressure lever coupling [D]. The
pin [E] on the rear of the tray pushes the lock lever so that the lift motor can lift the
bottom plate pressure lever.
The lift motor turns on, and turns clockwise as viewed on the lower diagram. The
main pressure spring [K] pulls the bottom plate pressure lever, and this lifts the tray
bottom plate.
When the top of the stack touches the feed roller, the motor cannot pull up the
plate any more, so it pulls the actuator [G] into the lift sensor [F].
The pressure of the feed roller on the paper is now too high, so the lift motor
reverses to reduce this pressure. It reverses for 300 ms or 600 ms, depending on
the paper size. For smaller paper, it reverses the larger amount (600 ms) to reduce
the pressure more.

SM 5 B385
PAPER LIFT MECHANISM

For A4-SEF paper or wider, a projection [H] on the side fence engages the
secondary pressure spring [J] through a lever [I]. Then, the secondary pressure
spring [J] applies paper feed pressure in addition to the main pressure spring [K], to
ensure that extra pressure is applied to wider paper.
When the paper tray is pulled out, the pins [A, C] disengage from the couplings [B,
D], and the bottom plate drops. To make it easier to push the tray in, the lift motor
rotates backwards 1.7 seconds to return the bottom plate pressure lever coupling
[D] to the original position.
The lift motor on timing can be adjusted with an SP mode, to change the pressure
from the main pressure spring.
• SP1-908-1
• Default: 0
• Increase the pressure: +1, +2
• Decrease the pressure: –1, –2
If the pressure is too strong, the sheet of paper may not be fed smoothly, and if it is
too weak, more than one sheet of paper may be fed at a time.
The pressure depends on the paper size.

B385 6 SM
 PAPER END DETECTION

2.3 PAPER END DETECTION

[A]

Unit PS460
Paper Tray
[B]

B385
[C]

B385D105.WMF

If there is some paper in the paper tray, the paper stack raises the paper end feeler
[A] and the paper end sensor [B] is deactivated.
When the paper tray runs out of paper, the paper end feeler drops into the cutout
[C] in the tray bottom plate and the paper end sensor is activated.
When the paper tray is drawn out with no paper in the tray, the shape of the paper
end feeler causes it to lift up.

SM 7 B385
PAPER HEIGHT DETECTION

2.4 PAPER HEIGHT DETECTION

[B]
[A]

[C]

[C]

B385D107.WMF

The amount of paper in the tray is detected by the combination of on/off signals
from two paper height sensors [A] and [B].
When the amount of paper decreases, the bottom plate pressure lever [C] moves
the actuator up.
The following combination of sensor signals is sent to the copier/printer.

Amount of Paper Paper Height Sensor 1 Paper Height Sensor 2

Near End OFF ON
30% ON ON
70% ON OFF
100% OFF OFF

When the tray contains paper of a small width, the paper feed pressure may
become too low when the thickness of the stack of remaining paper has decreased.
The lift motor rotates forward 300 ms after the sensor detects a certain amount of
paper remaining in the tray to increase paper feed pressure, simulating the
pressure generated by a full tray.

B385 8 SM
 PAPER SIZE DETECTION

2.5 PAPER SIZE DETECTION

[B]

SW
1 2 3 4
Size

Unit PS460
Paper Tray
A3, F (81/2" x 13") P P P P

B385
A4 short-edge O O P P
A4 long-edge O O P O
A5 long-edge
P P O O
[A]
11" x 17"
B4, 81/2" x 14" O P O P
B5 long-edge,
O P P P
81/2" x 11"
B5 short-edge,
P O O O
11" x 81/2"
* (Asterisk) P O P O

P: ON (Pushed)
O: OFF (Not pushed)

B385D108.WMF

There are four paper size microswitches [A] on the front right plate of the paper tray
unit. The switches are actuated by a paper size actuator [B] behind the paper size
indicator plate, which is on the front right of the tray.
Each paper size has its own actuator, with a unique combination of notches. To
determine which size tray has been installed, the CPU reads which microswitches
the actuator has switched off.
The CPU disables paper feed from a tray if the paper size cannot be detected. If
the paper size actuator is broken, or if there is no tray installed, the Add Paper
indicator will light.
When the paper size actuator is at the "*" mark, the paper tray can be set up to
accommodate one of a wider range of paper sizes by using user tools. If the paper
size for this position is changed without changing the user tool setting, a paper jam
will result.

SM 9 B385
SIDE AND END FENCES

2.6 SIDE AND END FENCES

[A]

[D]

[B]
B385D110.WMF

[C]

B385D109.WMF

Side Fences
If the tray is full of paper and it is pushed in strongly, the fences may deform or
bend. This may cause the paper to skew or the side-to-side registration to be
incorrect. To correct this, each side fence has a stopper [A] attached to it. Each
side fence can be secured with a screw [B], for customers who do not want to
change the paper size.

End Fence
As the amount of paper in the tray decreases, the bottom plate [C] lifts up gradually.
The end fence [D] is connected to the bottom plate. When the tray bottom plate
rises, the end fence moves forward and pushes the back of the paper stack to keep
it squared up.

B385 10 SM
 FEED ROLLER REPLACEMENT

3. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT

3.1 FEED ROLLER REPLACEMENT

[C]

Unit PS460
Paper Tray

B385
[B]

[A]

B385R723.WMF

1. [A] Paper tray

2. Move the release lever [B] to the front.
3. Pull the feed roller [C] to the operation side and remove it.

SM 11 B385
TRAY MAIN BOARD REPLACEMENT

3.2 TRAY MAIN BOARD REPLACEMENT

[A]

B385R002.WMF

[B]

B385R939.WMF

1. [A] Rear cover ( x 4)

2. [B] Tray main board [B] ( x 3, x 5)

B385 12 SM
 TRAY MOTOR REPLACEMENT

3.3 TRAY MOTOR REPLACEMENT

[B]

Unit PS460
Paper Tray

B385
[A]

B385R102.WMF

1. [A] Rear cover ( x 4)

2. [B] Tray motor ( x 2, x 1)

SM 13 B385
LIFT MOTOR REPLACEMENT

3.4 LIFT MOTOR REPLACEMENT

[A]

B385R152.WMF

[C]

[D]

[B]

[E]
B385R104.WMF

1. Pull out the paper tray.

2. [A] Rear cover ( x 4)
3. [B] 2P connector
4. [C] Spring
5. [D] Lift motor unit ( x 3)
6. [E] Lift motor ( x 3)

B385 14 SM
 PAPER END SENSOR REPLACEMENT

3.5 PAPER END SENSOR REPLACEMENT

[C]

[B]

Unit PS460
Paper Tray

B385
[A]

B385R106.WMF

1. Paper tray
2. [A] Paper end sensor bracket ( x 1, x 1)
3. [B] Paper end sensor
NOTE: After replacing the sensor, pull the sensor cable to the right side of the
frame [C] so that the cable does not touch the paper in the tray.

3.6 PAPER SIZE SWITCH REPLACEMENT

[D]

[E]

[B]

[C]

[A]
B385R101.WMF

1. [A] Lower tray cover ( x 2)

2. [B] Paper tray
3. [C] Right front cover ( x 1)
4. [D] Paper size switch bracket ( x 1)
5. [E] Paper size switch ( x 1)

SM 15 B385